JP2024019581A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a player's interest.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a movable body movable between a first position and a second position; a holding part for regulating movement of the movable body at the second position; energizing means for absorbing an impact that the holding part receives when the movable body moves from the first position to the second position, and energizing the movable body in a direction of the first position when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position; and an operation part for enabling the movable body to move between the first position and the second position. The movable body includes a surface part provided opposed to a player, and can execute a first operation and a second operation. An interval between the holding part and the surface part is larger than an interval between the surface part and the operation part. The second operation can execute the movement in which the posture of the movable body is continuously changed. The energizing means can impart an impact to the first operation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 296

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are well known. For example, as described in Patent Document 1.

Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine including a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance by performing a rotational motion.

JP 2016-59498 Publication

In such gaming machines, it is desired to further improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

The problem to be solved by the present invention is as described above, and next, means for solving this problem will be explained.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable body movable between a first position and a second position, a holding portion that restricts movement of the movable body at the second position, and a holding unit that restricts movement of the movable body at the first position. absorbs the impact that the holding part receives when moving from the second position to the second position, and moves the movable body in the direction of the first position when moving from the second position to the first position. a biasing means capable of biasing the movable body to move the movable body between the first position and the second position, the movable body facing the player; a surface portion provided therein, capable of performing a first action and a second action, a distance between the holding portion and the surface portion being greater than a distance between the surface portion and the operating portion; The movable body is characterized in that a movement in which the posture of the movable body is continuously changed can be executed, and the biasing means can influence the first operation.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a game flow of a pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. This is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximately) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. (A) An example of a special symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko game machine, and (B) an example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a winning type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 13. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol type determination table of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of power cutoff processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of counter update processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time-saving counter update process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ceiling counter update process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of counter determination processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition determination process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of time saving setting processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a big prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a starting opening winning detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a sub variable performance pattern determination table in the normal gaming state of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a pre-read per type production pattern determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (at the time of winning) in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a flowchart showing a pre-read performance pattern determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the jackpot type look-ahead performance form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the time-saving winning type look-ahead effect form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common win-based look-ahead performance form to a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a reserved image changes from a dedicated common winning look-ahead performance form to a jackpot-based look ahead performance form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a dedicated common winning look-ahead play form to a time-saving win look-ahead play form. It is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a timing chart of a signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. It is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. In the first pachinko game machine, it is a table showing an example of the output conditions of the signal output to the outside of the machine according to the game state. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the second pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the second pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a third pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the third pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, (A) Opening mode of the specific area (B) when the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode; and (C) when the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an expanded example. This is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, FIG. 3B is a diagram showing a case where the opening mode is the first opening mode and (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. It is a front view showing a game board of a game machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. (a) It is a perspective view showing the general winning a prize mouth unit of the gaming machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. (b) It is a front view showing the general winning a prize unit of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. (a) It is a top view showing the general winning a prize mouth unit of the game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. (b) is a sectional view taken along line XP1-XP1 in FIG. 110(a). FIG. 7 is a front sectional view showing an upper attacker section of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a lower attacker section of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a front sectional view showing a lower attacker section of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the base plate of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the base plate of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a base plate to which the opening/closing unit of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention is fixed. FIG. 7 is a rear view showing a base plate to which the opening/closing unit of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention is fixed. It is a perspective view showing the cover of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a rear view showing the cover of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the rear guide part of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. (a) It is a front view showing the rear guide part of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. (b) It is a top view showing the rear guide part of the lower attacker part of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. (c) It is a sectional view taken along line XP2-XP2 in FIG. 121(a). FIG. 7 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the rear guide portion of the lower attacker portion of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention is attached. It is a front enlarged schematic diagram showing the lower side of the game board of the game machine based on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view showing the flow of game balls on the game board of the game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a front sectional view showing the flow of game balls in the upper attacker section of the game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a front sectional view showing the flow of game balls in the lower attacker part of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear perspective view showing the flow of game balls in the lower attacker part of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the flow of game balls on the lower side of the game board of the game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a front view of an upper movable performance accessory and an upper accessory lifting mechanism of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of an upper movable performance accessory of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded view of the first effect part of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a bottom view of the upper movable performance accessory of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded view of the second effect part of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded view of the pupil movable unit of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded view of the upper movable performance accessory of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a front enlarged view of the left end part of the lifted and lowered part of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the right end part of the upper movable performance accessory of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the right end part of the lifted and lowered part of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of an upper movable performance accessory of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded view of the left end part (part) of the upper movable performance accessory of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a left side view of the eyebrow rotation drive part of the gaming machine based on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the eyebrow rotation drive part of the gaming machine based on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the pupil rotation drive part of the gaming machine based on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a left guide member and a left drive mechanism of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is an enlarged perspective view of the upper part of the left side guide member and left side drive mechanism of the gaming machine based on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged perspective view of the left side guide member and the lower part of the left drive mechanism of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a right guide member and a right drive mechanism of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an enlarged perspective view of the lower part of the right guide member and right drive mechanism of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view showing a state in which an effect according to the first aspect is being performed. FIG. 7 is a front view showing a state in which a performance according to a second aspect is being performed. FIG. 7 is a plan view showing a state in which an effect according to a second aspect is being performed. FIG. 7 is a front view showing a state in which a performance according to a second aspect is being performed. FIG. 7 is a front view showing a state in which a performance according to a third aspect is being performed. It is a front view of the rotating accessory of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of a rotating accessory of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear perspective view of the rotating accessory of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing a rotating accessory with illustration of a rotating body omitted. It is a rear view showing a rotating accessory with illustration of a rotating body omitted. 158 is a sectional view taken along line XP5-XP5 in FIG. 158. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing a rotating body of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a front view showing the inside of a rotating body of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a side view showing a driving means of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing a shielding means of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. (a) It is a front view showing the light emitting means side shielding member of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. (b) It is a sectional view taken along line XP6-XP6 in FIG. 164(a). (a) It is a front view showing a rotating body side shielding member of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. (b) It is a sectional view taken along line XP7-XP7 in FIG. 165(a). It is a front perspective view showing the rotating accessory in a state where the movement of the first performance surface is controlled to the performance position. It is a front view showing the state of light emission of the rotating accessory in a state where the movement of the first performance surface is controlled to the performance position. It is a side sectional view showing the rotating accessory in a state where the movement of the second performance surface is controlled to the performance position. It is a front perspective view showing the rotating accessory in a state where the movement of the second performance surface is controlled to the performance position. It is a front view showing the state of light emission of the rotating accessory in a state where the movement of the second performance surface is controlled to the performance position. It is a front view showing an effect device of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view showing the performance device in a standby state. It is a perspective view showing a left-right movement control mechanism and a movable body. It is a rear view showing a left-right movement control mechanism and a movable body. It is an exploded perspective view showing a left-right movement control mechanism and a movable body. FIG. 3 is an enlarged rear view showing the left side portion of the left-right movement control mechanism. FIG. 3 is an enlarged rear view showing the central portion of the left-right movement control mechanism. FIG. 3 is an enlarged rear view showing the right side portion of the left-right movement control mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view showing a movable body. It is a perspective view showing an engaging part. It is a perspective view showing a belt and an engagement part. (a) is a sectional view taken along line XP3-XP3 in FIG. 177; (b) is a sectional view taken along line XP4-XP4 in FIG. 177; FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a reinforcing cover. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing the reinforcing cover. It is a front view showing the gaming machine in which the movable body is located at the center in the left-right direction in the performance position. It is a front view showing the gaming machine with the movable body positioned on the right side of the production position. It is a front view showing the gaming machine in which the movable body is positioned on the left side of the presentation position. It is a front view showing a gaming machine that moves a movable body from a performance position to a standby position. (a) It is a schematic diagram which shows the movable body and regulation means located in the standby position. (b) It is a schematic diagram which shows the movable body and regulation means located in the left-right center in a production position. (a) It is a schematic diagram showing the movable body and the regulating means located on the right side in the production position. (b) It is a schematic diagram showing the movable body and the regulating means located on the left side in the production position. It is a schematic diagram which shows the movable body and regulation means which are moved from a production position to a standby position. It is a front view showing a game board of a game machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the lower part accessory device of the gaming machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front perspective view of the lower part accessory device of the gaming machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front perspective view of the lower part accessory device of the gaming machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of the lower part accessory device of the gaming machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of the lower part accessory device of the gaming machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of a lower accessory device of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear perspective view of a lower accessory and a link arm. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a lower accessory. 197 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 197. The rear view showing a state in which the lower accessory is in a standby position. The rear view showing a state in which the lower accessory is located between the standby position and the production position. The rear view showing the state in which the lower accessory is in the production position. FIG. 7 is a sectional view taken along line AA according to a first alternative example. FIG. 7 is a sectional view taken along line AA according to a second alternative example. FIG. 7 is a sectional view taken along line AA according to a third alternative example. It is a perspective view showing an effect device of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention, with an opening/closing accessory in a closed position. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an effect device in which the opening/closing accessory of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention is in a closed position. It is a rear perspective view which shows the production|presentation device with the opening and closing accessory of the gaming machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention set to the closed position. It is a rear perspective view with a part omitted of the performance device of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention, with the opening/closing accessory in the closed position. It is a back view showing the production device of the gaming machine in the closed state according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a plan view showing an effect device in which the opening/closing accessory of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention is in an open position. It is a sectional side view showing the presentation device of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention, with the opening/closing accessory in the open position. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing an effect device in which the opening/closing accessory of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention is in an open position. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an effect device in which an opening/closing accessory of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention is in an open position. It is a back view showing the performance device in the open/locked state of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view showing the performance device of the gaming machine in the open/unlocked state according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a plan view showing a performance device in which a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention are set as performance positions. It is a sectional side view showing a performance device in which a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention are set as performance positions. It is a perspective view showing a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory at a standby position. It is a partially omitted perspective view showing a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory at a standby position. It is a perspective view showing a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory at a performance position. It is a partially omitted perspective view showing a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory at a production position. It is an exploded perspective view showing a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory. (a) is a sectional view taken along line X1-X1 in FIG. 214; (b) is a sectional view taken along line X2-X2 in FIG. 214; (a) It is a front view showing a guide gear. (b) It is a front view showing a bullet accessory. (c) It is a front view which shows a 1st decoration base part. (d) It is a front view showing a second decoration base part. It is an exploded perspective view showing a bullet accessory. It is an exploded perspective view showing an outer spiral member and an inner spiral member. (a) It is a schematic diagram showing a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory in a standby position. (b) It is a schematic diagram showing a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory moving from a standby position to a performance position. (a) It is a schematic diagram showing a bullet ornament and a decorative ornament moving from a standby position to a production position. (b) It is a schematic diagram showing a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory at the production position. It is a schematic diagram which shows the movement distance in the front-back direction of a bullet accessory, a 1st decorative accessory, and a 2nd decorative accessory. (a) It is a schematic diagram showing a bullet ornament and a decorative ornament moving from a production position to a standby position. (b) It is a schematic diagram showing a bullet accessory and a decorative accessory in a standby position. It is a front view showing a game board of a game machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing an effect device. It is an exploded perspective view showing an effect device. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing a tower accessory and a specific area unit. It is a perspective view showing a tower accessory. It is an exploded perspective view showing a tower accessory. It is an exploded perspective view showing a tower accessory seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view showing a drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing the upper part of the drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing the lower part of the drive unit. It is a top view showing a discharge guide part, a drive part, and a distribution part. It is a top view which shows a drive gear and a disk part. It is a side sectional perspective view showing an effect device. It is a side sectional view showing an effect device. It is a perspective view showing a tower accessory and a specific area unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a tower accessory and a specific area unit, with some parts omitted, as seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a side cross-sectional perspective view showing the drive unit. It is a side sectional view showing a drive unit. It is a side cross-sectional perspective view which shows a 1st stage part and a 2nd stage part. FIG. 3 is a side sectional view showing the first stage section and the second stage section. It is a perspective view showing a 1st stage part. It is a top view which shows a 1st stage part. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the rear part of the first stage part. (a) It is a front view showing a rocking transmission part. (b) It is a rear view which shows a rocking|swiveling transmission part. It is a perspective view showing a 2nd stage part. It is a top view which shows a 2nd stage part. It is an enlarged perspective view showing a tower accessory with a part omitted. It is an enlarged perspective view showing the rear part of the tower part with a part omitted. (a) It is a front view which shows the rolling inhibition part located in the front part of a 2nd stage rotation part. (b) It is a side sectional view showing a rolling inhibition part of a 2nd stage rotation part. FIG. 7 is a side cross-sectional perspective view showing a third stage section and a specific area unit. FIG. 7 is a side sectional view showing the third stage section and the specific area unit. It is an exploded side sectional view showing a 3rd stage part and a specific area unit. It is a perspective view which shows a 3rd stage part and a specific area unit. It is a top view which shows a 3rd stage part and a specific area unit. FIG. 3 is a front view schematically showing the operation of the tower accessory. FIG. 2 is a plan view schematically showing a state in which the tower accessory is tilted to the left. FIG. 3 is a plan view schematically showing a state in which the tower accessory is tilted backward. FIG. 3 is a plan view schematically showing a state in which the tower accessory is tilted to the right. (a) is a rear view schematically showing a state in which the first stage main body and the support section are swung so as to be tilted to the right; (b) is a rear view schematically showing a state in which the first stage main body and the support section are swung so as to be tilted to the left; It is a front view showing a game board of a game machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front perspective view showing a game board. It is a front perspective view showing a performance device. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view showing the presentation device (excluding the logo accessory). It is a rear perspective view showing a production device. It is an exploded perspective view showing an effect device. It is an exploded perspective view showing a movable performance accessory. It is a back view showing the production device. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the left side elevating mechanism. FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view showing the upper part of the left-side lifting mechanism. FIG. 6 is an enlarged front view showing the lower part of the left-hand lifting mechanism. FIG. 3 is a front sectional view showing the lower part of the left-hand lifting mechanism. FIG. 3 is a left side view showing the lower left holding section, the left shock absorbing means, and the inclined guide section. It is a front view showing a lower left holding part and a left side impact absorbing means. (a) It is a left side view showing a lower left holding part. (b) It is the AA sectional view. FIG. 3 is a front sectional view showing the shock absorbing means. It is a front view showing the game board in a state where the movable performance accessory is in a standby position. FIG. 3 is a left side view showing the holding mechanism with the solenoid energized. It is a front view showing the game board in a state where the movable performance accessory is in an intermediate position. It is a front perspective view showing the performance device in a state where the movable performance accessory is in an intermediate position. It is a rear perspective view showing the performance device in a state where the movable performance accessory is in an intermediate position. It is a left side view showing a movable performance accessory and an inclined guide part in a state where the movable performance accessory is in a protruding position. It is a front view showing a game board in a state where a movable performance accessory is in a protruding position. It is a front perspective view showing the performance device in a state where the movable performance accessory is in the protruding position. It is a rear perspective view showing the performance device in a state where the movable performance accessory is in the protruding position. It is a left side view showing the positional relationship of the accessory illumination board and the second decorative lens in a state where the harpoon accessory is in a vertical posture. It is a left side view showing the positional relationship of the accessory illumination board and the second decorative lens in a state where the harpoon accessory is in an inclined posture. It is a left side view showing a modification of the positional relationship between the accessory illumination board, the first decorative lens, and the second decorative lens in a state where the harpoon accessory is in a vertical posture. It is a left side view showing a modification of the positional relationship between the accessory illumination board, the first decorative lens, and the second decorative lens in a state where the harpoon accessory is in an inclined posture. It is a front view showing a game board of a game machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing an upper accessory. It is a front view showing an upper accessory. It is a rear view showing an upper accessory. It is a partially exploded perspective view showing a first accessory and a second accessory. It is an exploded perspective view showing a first accessory and a second accessory. It is a partially exploded perspective view showing the first accessory and the second accessory seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view showing a 1st accessory. It is an enlarged front view showing the upper part of the upper accessory with the second decorative member omitted. It is an enlarged front sectional view showing the upper part of the upper accessory. FIG. 3 is an enlarged side sectional view schematically showing the first accessory. It is a back view showing a first accessory, a second accessory, and a drive mechanism. It is an enlarged perspective view showing a receiving member and an arm. It is a front view showing the game board in a first sliding state. It is a front view showing the upper part accessory in a 1st sliding state. It is a back view showing the 1st accessory, the 2nd accessory, and a drive mechanism in a 1st sliding state. It is a front view showing the game board in a second sliding state. It is a front view which shows the upper accessory in a 2nd sliding state. It is a back view which shows the 1st accessory, the 2nd accessory, and a drive mechanism in a 2nd sliding state.

As an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described as examples.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is the front direction, the back side of the pachinko game machine is the rear direction, and the left side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is the left direction. The right side when looking at the machine from the front is the right direction, the top of the pachinko machine is up, the bottom of the pachinko machine is down, and the clockwise direction when looking at the pachinko machine from the front is the clockwise direction. , conversely, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the counterclockwise direction.

Both the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine are so-called type 1 pachinko game machines called digipachi. Among these, the first pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. On the other hand, the second pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

In addition, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, which is a mixture of a so-called 1 type game machine called DigiPachi and a 2 type game machine called Feather Mono. It is a gaming machine. The third pachinko game machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example will be explained in which only one of the two is variably displayed. However, this does not mean to exclude pachinko gaming machines that are 1 type and 2 type mixed machines in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

In addition, in this specification, when it is simply referred to as a "special symbol", it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, the term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that includes both "fluctuating display" in which the symbols are displayed while fluctuating, and "stopping display" in which the symbols are displayed while being stopped. The operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display." When the fluctuating symbols are stopped and displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the results of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special symbol lottery"), which will be described later, and the hit determination of normal symbols are displayed. The result of the process (hereinafter also referred to as "normal symbol lottery") is determined. Although the symbol appears to be stopped, the symbol may be displayed in a manner in which the results of the hit determination process for special symbols and the hit determination process for normal symbols are not determined (for example, in a temporarily stopped manner). However, such aspects are included in the above-mentioned variable display. Note that even if the symbols are, for example, temporarily stopped, the results of the special symbol hit determination process and the normal symbol hit determination process are not determined at this point, so the symbols can be variably displayed again.

In addition, in this specification, when describing the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, all of them have two special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, This will be explained using the case of (design) as an example. However, for the first pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. First pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained.

As a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol is variablely displayed and the second special symbol is variable. A pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine") in which, for example, the starting condition for a second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol when the display is on hold; There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "sequential variable machine") in which a starting condition is established in the order of winnings, including a starting opening and a second starting opening.

In the priority variable machine, the starting conditions for the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that the machine is not in a jackpot game state, and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. This is established when all certain requirements are satisfied, such as not being displayed, and variable display of the first special symbol being suspended. In addition, in the priority variable machine, the starting conditions for the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the second special symbol is variable. This is true if all certain requirements are met, such as display being withheld.

In addition, in the sequential variable machine, the starting conditions for the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the first special symbol is This holds true when at least all of the following conditions are satisfied: that the game is on hold, and that the first hold is a hold on the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, in the sequential variable machine, the starting conditions for the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the second special symbol is This holds true when at least all of the following conditions are satisfied: that the item is on hold, and that the first hold is the hold on the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the following, the priority variable machine will be explained as an example.

[1-1. Exterior configuration]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko game machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a tray unit 5, a firing device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2), and the like. Furthermore, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the lower right portion of the game board unit 10. Here, the outer frame 2, base door 3, glass door 4, tray unit 5, firing device 6, display device 7, payout unit 8, and board unit 9 will be briefly explained, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be explained briefly. Details will be described later. Note that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations not shown in FIG. 1.

(outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a generally rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island equipment of the game hall. A hinge (no reference numeral) is provided on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2, for example, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported on this hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

Note that the outer frame 2 supports a number of members such as a payout unit 8, a board unit 9, a display device 7, a game board unit 10, a glass door 4, and a tray unit 5, which will be described later, through the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the presentation effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be made larger. Therefore, by constructing the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a dispensing unit 8, a board unit 9, etc. attached to the back side thereof, and supports them.

A game board unit 10 is fitted into the front side of the base door 3. In addition, on the front side of the left end of the base door 3, for example, hinges (no reference numerals) are provided at the upper end, at the midway point below the approximately central part in the vertical direction, and at the lower end. A glass door 4 is pivotally supported on the hinges at the middle part and the lower end part, and a pan unit 5 is pivotally supported on the hinges at the middle part and the lower end part. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the glass door 4 and the pan unit 5 forward relative to the base door 3, either together or individually, about the hinge.

Further, a firing device 6 is fixedly attached to the surface side of the base door 3, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached, for example, to each of the left and right sides of the upper side. There is. The speaker 32 outputs, for example, audio effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, audio announcements, error notifications, and other effects.

Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the opposite side of the base door 3 from the hinge (ie, the right end portion). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3.

(glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member in which an opening 41 is formed. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, a game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later) formed in the game board unit 10 faces the protective glass 43. In this way, the game area 105 can be viewed from the front with the glass door 4 closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game balls flowing down the game area 105 are prevented from jumping out forward. be able to.

Note that the protective glass 43 may be one in which a plurality of glasses (for example, two glasses) are attached with a gap between them, or a unit made of a plurality of glasses with a gap between them. It's okay. Furthermore, in the case of a unitized structure, a light guide plate may be provided between the glasses. The above-mentioned protective glass 43 is not limited to glass, and may be made of transparent resin, for example.

Further, at the bottom of the glass door 4, there is provided an operation section 66 that can be operated by, for example, a player in order to receive a game information providing service (for example, "UniMemo (registered trademark)"). This operation section 66 can also function as an operation section that can be operated by a game hall manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

Furthermore, a speaker cover 45 is provided at the top of the glass door 4 to be placed in front of the speaker 32 described above. Further, a large number of LED groups 46 used for lighting effects etc. are arranged around the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light-emitting means for making announcements with light and producing various variations of light-emitting effects, but is not limited to LEDs as long as it can perform such light-emitting effects, for example, liquid crystals, lamps, etc. It may be.

(Plate unit)
The plate unit 5 is a unit made up of an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52. The pan unit 5 is disposed at the front lower part of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4. The tray unit 5 is configured so that it can be rotated relative to the base door 3 to open and close, as described above, so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, an employee at the game parlor or the like can clear the ball jam. Note that the plate unit 5 does not necessarily need to be provided with an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52, and may be configured as an integrated plate.

The upper tray 51 is provided to be able to store game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are fired from the firing device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). The upper tray 51 is provided with a payout opening 53, a presentation button 54, and the like. Game balls to be lent out and game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout opening 53 onto the upper tray 51. The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The performance button 54 may have a predetermined performance function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined performance function includes, for example, a function that vibrates or protrudes upward based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Further, the function of the operation section 66 may also be used.

The lower tray 52 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51. The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout port 55 communicating with the upper tray 51, and game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 are paid out from the payout port 55 to the lower tray 52.

An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the bottom of the lower tray 52, which can be opened and closed by the player's operation. When the opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower tray 52. In addition, if each machine is equipped with a so-called individual counting system, not only is there no need for a ball box, but the game balls counted by each machine counting system can be stored and the stored game balls can be recycled again. It can also be used for games.

(launching device)
The firing device 6 is for firing the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). The firing device 6 is disposed at the front lower right of the base door 3 and at the lower right of the dish unit 5. The firing device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive device (not shown), and a firing handle 62.

The panel body 61 is provided so that the pan unit 5 and the firing device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the pan unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3.

The firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the front side of the panel body 61. The above drive device is arranged on the back side of the panel body 61, and is constituted by, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the firing handle 62, the game ball is fired by the operation of the drive device. Note that when operating the firing handle 62, the greater the amount of clockwise rotation (operation amount), the stronger the firing strength of the game ball becomes.

A game ball fired from a firing device 6 placed at the lower right side of the dish unit 5 passes through a firing rail (not shown) and rolls in an arc along a guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) to play the game. It is launched into area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). Note that the placement position of the firing device 6 is not limited to the lower right side of the dish unit 5, but may be at the lower left side of the dish unit 5. In this case, the above-mentioned launch rail becomes unnecessary, the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively utilized, and versatility can be increased.

(display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various performance images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device configured with electroluminescence, or one that projects images using a projection device such as a projector. It may be. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, presentation identification patterns (for example, decorative patterns) may be variably displayed to display the result of the special pattern hit determination process, or the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be displayed. A performance image, a performance image during a jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a performance image showing a pending status of variable display of special symbols, etc. are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 can be attached to the base door 3. It may also be possible to attach it.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above-mentioned various effect images, but a plurality of (for example, two) display devices are provided and the effects can be performed using these plurality of display devices. An image may also be displayed.

(Payout unit)
The dispensing unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a dispensing device 82, and the like. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Note that game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When the payout condition is satisfied, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from among the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81, onto the upper tray 51, for example. Furthermore, a power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8, as shown in FIG.

(board unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3. The board unit 9 is provided with various control boards and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub-control board 91 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. A board 92, a payout/launch control board 93 on which a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described below) for controlling the payout/launch of game balls is mounted, and a power supply circuit 450 for supplying power (see FIG. 6 described later). The board unit 9 is provided with a power supply board, etc., on which a power supply board (see 6) is mounted.

In addition, in FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/launch control board 93, and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but these boards are all housed in the board case. ing.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (one board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all or part of a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, and an accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later), etc., which will be described later, may be mounted on a separate board. In this way, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 included in the first pachinko game machine. A game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 10, in which the fired game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 110, and approximately the center of the game area 105. A center accessory 115 arranged in the section, a first starting opening 120, a general prize opening 122, a passing gate unit 125, a special electric accessory unit 130, a second starting opening 140, and a normal electric accessory unit. 145, an LED unit 160, an outlet 178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged at the rear of the game board unit 10. Note that, as described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. Further, on the front side of the game panel 100, a guide rail 110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the launcher 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes its traveling direction while heading downwards in the game area 105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Further, the game panel 100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent part, and a transparent member may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be viewed from the front, but the game panel 100 may be entirely transparent or only a portion thereof may be transparent. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arcuate outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are given). The game area 105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the game area 105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 above. The game balls launched towards the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko game machine, in the game area 105, an area to the left of the center accessory 115 is referred to as a left area 106, and an area to the right of the center accessory 115 is referred to as a right area 107. The definitions of the left area and the right area are the same for a second pachinko game machine and a third pachinko game machine, which will be described later.

The game ball fired toward the game area 105 by the firing device 6 flows down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 flow downward while changing the direction of travel due to collisions with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 107.

In addition, in this specification, as an operation mode (hitting method) of the firing handle 62, a hitting method in which the game ball is fired so as to flow down the left side area 106 is referred to as "left hitting", and a hitting method in which the game ball is fired so as to flow down the right side area 107 is referred to as "left hitting". The hitting method that causes the game ball to launch is called "right-handed hitting." In this way, the game ball can be selectively hit toward the left area 106 or the right area 107 depending on the player.

In addition, the center accessory 115 has a warp entrance 117 formed at its left outer peripheral edge into which a game ball flowing down the left area 106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 is configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed on the center accessory 115. The stage 118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 7 so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. Note that the stage 118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 118 at the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability of starting the first start compared to a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 117 but did not enter the chance entrance 119. It is designed to win (pass) at 120 points.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 120 described above, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When the winning (passing) of a game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for the first special symbol, random numbers for reach determination for the first special symbol, random values for performance selection for the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of four) of the various types of data are stored. The stored various data are subjected to the first special symbol hit determination process when the first special symbol starting condition (also referred to as "first special symbol variation start condition" in this specification) is established. When game balls enter the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random number value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the Various random values such as the random number value of the first special symbol, the random number value for reach determination of the first special symbol, the random number value for performance selection of the first special symbol, etc.) are referred to as starting information of the first special symbol. Further, storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is called suspension. The same applies to the second special symbol.

(General prize opening)
A plurality of general winning holes 122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball enters any of the plurality of general winning holes 122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 123 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the general winning hole switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects that a game ball enters (passes) the general winning hole 122, for example, four prize balls are paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but this is not necessarily the case, and instead of the general winning hole 122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 125 is arranged in the right side area 107 and includes a passage gate 126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, various data related to the normal symbol (for example, random numbers for determining the hit of the ordinary symbol, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored in a predetermined manner. Up to a number (for example, up to 4) can be stored. The stored various data are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left region 106 instead of or in addition to the right region 107.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is referred to as starting passage, and various data related to the normal symbols extracted by the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 (for example, the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbols) etc.) is called normal symbol starting information. Further, storing the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is called suspension.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 integrates a grand prize opening 131, a count switch 132 that detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the grand prize opening 131 (see FIG. 6 described later), and a special electric accessory 133. It is a unified unit body. The special electric accessory unit 130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 125 in the right side area 107.

The big prize opening 131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned grand prize opening 131, a grand prize opening in which a game ball hit to the left can win may be arranged, or a game ball can be placed above the center accessory 115. A grand prize opening in which a ball can be won may be arranged.

Moreover, the big winning opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It is a prize opening. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) detects that a game ball has entered the big prize opening 131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the grand prize opening 131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 that operates the special electric shutter 134 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). The special electric accessory 133, that is, the special electric shutter 134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass) the grand prize opening 131, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter (pass) the grand prize opening 131. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot gaming state is a gaming state in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the jackpot 131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. It is.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 140 is arranged in the left region 106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting port 120). However, the second starting port 140 is designed such that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to win a prize, and a game ball hit to the right can win a prize. It is configured to be guided to the vicinity of. However, it is not essential that the second starting port 140 has such a configuration, and it may be provided in the right side region 107, for example. Further, the second starting port 140 may be configured so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize.

When the second starting port switch 141 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) detects winning (passage) of a game ball to the second starting port 140, various data related to the second special symbol (for example, Various random values, such as a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for the second special symbol, a random value for reach determination for the second special symbol, and a random value for performance selection for the second special symbol, are extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of four) of the various types of data are stored. The stored various data are subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process when the second special symbol start condition (also referred to as "second special symbol variation start condition" in this specification) is established. When game balls enter the second starting port 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is arranged in the left side area 106 (more specifically, on the lower left side of the first starting port 120), and when a game ball wins (passes), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. It is a unit body that integrates a winning hole, a switch for detecting winning of a game ball into the winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 141.

The ordinary electric accessory 146 includes a general electric movable member 147 made of a blade member, for example, called an electric chew, and a general electric solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the ordinary electric movable member 147. . The normal electric accessory 146, that is, the movable member 147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 140, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 140. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state that is possible or difficult. In addition, the movable member 147 for general electric power includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Out port)
The out port 178 is used to enter any of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 120, the second starting port 140, the large winning port 131, the general winning port 122, etc.) that are fired toward the gaming area 105. This is to eject missing game balls from the machine. This out port 178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between the plurality of general winning ports 122, and the game balls flowing down the game area 105 are discharged to the outside of the machine. You can also do this.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 10 and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100. This back unit includes a performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 6, described later) such as a movable accessory controlled by a sub-control circuit 300. The performance accessory group 58 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 7. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 58 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is arranged at the lower right part of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (for example, see FIG. 4). The LED unit 160 is a unit body that integrates various display sections.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display section 161, a normal symbol reserve display section 162, a first special symbol display section 163, a second special symbol display section 164, and a first special symbol reserve display section. section 165, a second special symbol reservation display section 166, a probability change notification display section 167, and a time saving notification display section 168.

(Normal symbol display section)
The normal symbol display section 161 displays the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the conditions for starting the variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for normal symbols") are met, the variable display of normal symbols starts, in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b alternately turn on and off. Ru. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped, and the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a lights up and the normal symbol display LED 161b goes out. On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a goes out and the normal symbol display LED 161b lights up. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is decided to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric movable member 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140 It becomes easier for the game ball to enter (pass) the prize.

(Regular symbol reservation display section)
The normal symbol pending display section 162 displays the number of pending variable displays of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "pending number of normal symbols") when normal symbol start information, that is, variable display is pending. It is equipped with hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of normal symbols is on hold" means that passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected and various data related to the normal symbols (for example, random numbers for determining hits of the normal symbols, etc.) are It refers to the state from the time it is extracted until the starting conditions for the normal symbol are met. Note that the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied when at least all of the following conditions are satisfied: the normal symbol is not being displayed variably, and the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended.

The normal symbol holding display section 162 displays the number of holdings of the variable display of normal symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of normal symbols being held is one, the normal symbol holding display LED 162a lights up and the normal symbol holding display LED 162b goes out. Further, when the number of normal symbols on hold is two, both the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b are lit. Further, when the number of normal symbols on hold is 3, the normal symbol holding display LED 162a blinks and the normal symbol holding display LED 162b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of normal symbols on hold is four, both the normal symbol holding display LEDs 162a and 162b flash. However, the display mode of the normal symbol reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b indicating the number of normal symbols reserved is not limited to this.

(Special pattern display section)
The special symbol display section displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and includes a first special symbol display section 163 and a second special symbol display section 164. The first special symbol display section 163 includes, for example, a first special symbol display LED group consisting of eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display section 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the conditions for starting variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for the first special symbol") are satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display section 163 Alternatively, a variable display of the first special symbol, some of which alternately or mutually repeat lighting and extinguishment, is started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h that constitute the first special symbol display section 163 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

When the conditions for starting variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for the second special symbol") are satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display section 164 Alternatively, a variable display of the second special symbol, some of which alternately or mutually repeat lighting and extinguishing, is started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h that constitute the second special symbol display section 164 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

(Special design reservation display section)
The special symbol pending display section displays the number of variable displays of special symbols that are pending (hereinafter referred to as the "number of pending special symbols") when special symbol start information, that is, variable displays are pending. It includes a first special symbol reservation display section 165 and a second special symbol reservation display section 166.

The first special symbol reservation display section 165 displays the number of reservations for the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and the first special symbol reservation display LED 165a, 165b Equipped with "The variable display of the first special symbol is suspended" means that the first special symbol is displayed after the winning (passage) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected and the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted. This refers to the state until the special symbol starting conditions are met.

The first special symbol reservation display section 165 displays the number of reservations of the variable display of the first special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the number of reservations for the first special symbol is one, the reservation display LED 165a for the first special symbol lights up and the reservation display LED 165b for the first special symbol goes out. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is two, both of the reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol are lit. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is three, the reservation display LED 165a for the first special symbol blinks and the reservation display LED 165b for the first special symbol lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is four, both of the reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b indicating the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not limited to this.

The second special symbol reservation display section 166 displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and the second special symbol reservation display LED 166a, 166b Equipped with "The variable display of the second special symbol is on hold" means that the second special symbol is displayed after the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected and the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted. This refers to the state until the special symbol starting conditions are met.

The second special symbol reservation display section 166 displays the number of reservations of the variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reservations for the second special symbol is one, the reservation display LED 166a for the second special symbol lights up and the reservation display LED 166b for the second special symbol goes out. Further, when the number of second special symbols reserved is two, both of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. Further, when the number of second special symbols on hold is three, the second special symbol hold display LED 166a blinks and the second special symbol hold display LED 166b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of second special symbols on hold is four, both of the second special symbol hold display LEDs 166a and 166b blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of second special symbols reserved is not limited to this.

(Probability change notification display section)
The probability change notification display section 167 can be turned on during execution of probability change control, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probability variation notification display unit 167 may be turned on while the probability variation control is being executed, but, for example, the display unit 167 may be turned on so that it cannot be visually recognized that the probability variation control is being executed. The fact that this is being executed may be kept secret.

However, when the power is cut off while variable probability control is being executed, data indicating that variable probability control is being executed will not be lost due to the function of the backup capacitor 207, which will be described later. Therefore, when the power is cut off while the probability change control is being executed and then the power is turned on again, the probability change notification display section 167 lights up in such a manner that it can be visually recognized that the probability change control is being performed.

Note that even if it is hidden before the power is turned off whether or not the probability change control is being executed, the probability change notification display section 167 is turned on when the power is turned on. The system is configured so that it can be recognized that variable probability control is being executed.

(Display section for time saving notification)
The time saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on during execution of time saving control, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In this embodiment, the time-saving notification display section 168 includes, for example, a first time-saving notification display section 168a and a second time-saving notification display section 168b, but the number of time-saving notification display sections 168 is limited to this. Not limited.

Although details will be described later, the time-saving gaming state includes an A time-saving gaming state, a B time-saving gaming state, and a C time-saving gaming state. For example, it is configured such that it is possible to grasp which time-saving game state the game is in by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first time-saving notification display section 168a and the second time-saving notification display section 168b.

The time saving notification display unit 168 may light up the first time saving notification display unit 168a and/or the second time saving notification display unit 168b depending on the time saving control being executed. By lighting or extinguishing the lights in a manner that makes it impossible to visually determine whether or not they are being executed or the type of time-saving control being executed (for example, all lights off, all lights on, or in a manner unrelated to the time-saving control being executed), It may be hidden so that the fact that time saving control is being executed and the type of time saving control that is being executed cannot be recognized from the outside. In particular, although it may be possible to determine from the appearance whether or not the time-saving control is being executed, it may be difficult to determine from the appearance which time-saving control is being executed. By keeping the type of time-saving control hidden, it is possible to increase interest.

However, when the power is cut off while time saving control is being executed, the function of the backup capacitor 207, which will be described later, will prevent data indicating that time saving control is being executed, as well as data indicating the type of time saving control being executed. does not disappear. Therefore, when the power is cut off while the time saving control is being executed and then the power is turned on again, the time saving notification display section 168 is displayed in such a manner that it is possible to visually understand that the time saving control is in progress and the type of time saving control that is being executed. turns on or off.

Note that even if the time-saving control is being executed before the power is turned off, or the type of time-saving control being executed is hidden so that it cannot be seen from the outside, the power is turned on. In such a case, the time saving notification display unit 168 is configured to turn on and/or turn off in such a manner that the time saving control is being executed and the type of time saving control being executed can be visually recognized.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processing executed when the power is turned on, processing related to gaming operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, etc. are connected to the main CPU 201. The main CPU 201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for playing the game. The main RAM 203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 includes an I/O port 205 that is communicably connected to various devices, and a command output port 206 that is connected so that various commands can be output to the sub-control circuit 300. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the above-mentioned normal symbol display section 161, normal symbol reservation display section 162, first special symbol display section 163, second special symbol display section 164, and first special symbol reservation display section 165. , a second special symbol reservation display section 166, a probability change notification display section 167, a time saving notification display section 168, a normal electricity solenoid 148, a special electricity solenoid 135, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 170, an error notification monitor 172, and the like. Main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc., which will be described later, under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

The error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. It is also possible to display a setting confirmation code, etc. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Also connected to the main control circuit 200 are a first starting port switch 121, a second starting port switch 141, a passage gate switch 127, a count switch 132, and a general winning port switch 123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 200 via I/O port 205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a calling device (not shown) used to send data to a hall computer 186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 184, a setting key 174 that is operated to change or confirm setting values if the pachinko game machine has a setting function (described later), and backup data stored in the main RAM 203 are transmitted to the gaming hall administrator. A backup clear switch 176, etc., which can be cleared in response to an operation, is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing setting values may be provided.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 be housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall cannot easily touch them. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that are configured to have only the corresponding locations of the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 in the case. When the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this, and may be connected to the payout/emission control circuit 400 or the power supply circuit 450, for example. It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the game parlor administrator from easily accessing the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the first pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub CPU 301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and an image data processor. It is equipped with a D/A converter etc. that converts the image signal into an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various types of image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, performance image data, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 32. The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command from the sub CPU 301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP is for amplifying signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 58). The accessory control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Further, the accessory control circuit 307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory operation command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

[1-2-3. Payout/fire control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/launch control circuit 400 includes a payout device 82 that can pay out game balls, and a payout device 82 that can shoot game balls. A firing device 6 capable of controlling the player, a card unit 180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 400 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180. The ball rental operation panel 182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. Note that although the operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

Further, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 is rotated clockwise, the dispensing/firing control circuit 400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Controls the supply and firing of game balls.

[1-2-4. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created in order to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout/shooting control circuit 400, etc.

A power switch 95 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 450. The power switch 95 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of a game flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 7 is an example of a game flow. FIG. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. Note that the game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be understood from the appearance.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is fired by a user operation such as a player, and when the game ball enters various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 120 etc.), the game ball is released. Payout control processing is performed. Pachinko games include special symbol games using special symbols and normal symbol games using normal symbols. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a special symbol hit determination process is executed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting hole 120, 140, and it is determined whether or not to shift to a jackpot game state. In addition, the normal symbol game means, for example, that the normal symbol hit determination process is executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, and the normal electric accessory 146 is activated to win the prize opening (in this embodiment, the second This is a game in which it is decided whether or not to open the starting port 140). In addition, in this specification, "special symbol games" are sometimes referred to as "games," but "games" is a term used with a broad concept. For example, games that use games (see FIG. 1) are also included in "games."

In addition, in this specification, from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the end of the variable display and the final display (derivation) of the result of the special symbol hit determination process (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed (until the time elapses) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, if the jackpot game state is controlled after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived, the period up to the end of the jackpot game state is treated as one special symbol game. In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in a pachinko gaming machine in which a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination is After the result of the processing is derived, when the small winning game state is controlled, the period until the end of the small winning gaming state is one special symbol game.

When the stop display mode indicating a jackpot in the special symbol game is led out to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164, a jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the special electric accessory 133 is operated to keep the jackpot 131 open for a predetermined period of time (for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec), and the possibility of winning a prize in the jackpot 131 is relatively high. It will be done.

In addition, when the stop display mode indicating a normal symbol win in the normal symbol game is derived to the normal symbol display section 161, the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 in this embodiment) is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146. It becomes an open state, and for example, the possibility of winning a prize in the second starting port 140 is relatively increased.

Note that the games that can be executed in the pachinko game are not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game other than these may be executable.

Hereinafter, an overview of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be explained.

[1-3-1. Special design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes a special symbol starting winning process that is carried out when there is a winning (passing) to the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140, and the special symbol winning process. This includes special symbol control processing that is performed based on the establishment of the starting conditions.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140, a special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (for example, random value for jackpot determination, random symbol value, reach determination) are transferred from various counters for special symbols (for example, jackpot determination counter, symbol determination counter, etc.). random values, various random values such as random values for performance selection, etc.) are extracted (obtained). Each extracted random value is retained as starting information. This special symbol starting winning process is performed even during execution of the special symbol control process.

In addition, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the starting conditions for the special symbol are satisfied. When the special symbol starting condition is established, special symbol hit determination processing is performed to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot" by referring to the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the special symbol jackpot determination counter. After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed to determine a stop symbol. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the random number value for symbol determination extracted from the special symbol symbol determination counter and the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In this embodiment, if the probability variation flag is on, probability variation control is executed. In the above special symbol hit determination process, if the variable probability flag is off, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the variable probability flag is on, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability. It is determined that Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" will be referred to as "jackpot probability."

Note that the probability variation flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not probability variation control is executed. When the probability change flag is on, the game progresses in a gaming state in which probability change control is executed (for example, in the present embodiment, a high probability time-saving gaming state). On the other hand, when the probability change flag is off, the game progresses in a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed (for example, a normal gaming state or a low probability time-saving gaming state).

Next, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the counter for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value, the result of the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination processing, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is (variable display pattern) is determined. Then, a special symbol variable display control process is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

Once the special symbol variation pattern is determined, a performance pattern determination process is then performed to determine the performance pattern. Based on the result of the performance pattern determination process, display effects such as decorative patterns and character effects are displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and sound effects such as voices and sound effects are output from the speaker 32. The production control process is performed. Note that the production control process is performed by the sub CPU 301.

Then, the special symbol variable display control process and performance control process are completed, and if it is a jackpot, a jackpot game control process is performed. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the jackpot gaming state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a gaming state transition control process to a non-jackpot gaming state where there is no jackpot is performed. In this case, the gaming state changes depending on the type of jackpot. For example, in the case of a jackpot type in which both the probability change flag and the time-saving flag are set to ON, after the jackpot game state ends, the state shifts to the high-probability time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot, that is, if it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in a pachinko gaming machine where a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, if a small win is won. Small hit game control processing is performed. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 7, if there is a time-saving win, which will be described later, the game shifts to a time-saving game state.

Then, each time the special symbol starting condition is satisfied, various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

If a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol starting award process is executed. In addition, the starting information of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 (for example, the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol design, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for performance selection) Various data such as various random values such as numerical values, etc.) are held until the starting conditions of the special symbol are satisfied.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to hold up to a total of eight pieces of special symbol starting information, including four pieces of starting information of the first special symbol and four pieces of starting information of the second special symbol. , The number of starting information of special symbols that can be held is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to hold more starting information for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol, or it may be possible to hold more starting information for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. You can also do this.

Although not shown in FIG. 7, the game ball is extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the starting hole 120, 140 between when the special symbol starts winning and until the special symbol's starting conditions are met. A pre-read judgment (for example, see S396 in FIG. 52 described later) is performed to determine the winning/losing (presence or absence of a "jackpot" win) and fluctuation pattern based on the start information obtained prior to the special symbol winning judgment process. It may be provided with a pre-read performance function that performs a predetermined performance based on the result. In addition, the above-mentioned pre-reading determination may be performed before the starting information extracted by winning a game ball to the starting opening 120, 140 is held, or may be performed after being held.

[1-3-2. Normal symbol game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal symbol game mainly includes a normal symbol start passing process that is performed when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, and a normal symbol start passing process that is performed when the normal symbol starting condition is satisfied. This includes normal symbol control processing that is performed based on this.

When a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, a normal symbol start passage process is executed. In this normal symbol starting passing process, the starting information of the normal symbol (for example, the random number value for determining the winning of the normal symbol, etc.) is extracted (obtained) from the counter for determining the winning of the normal symbol, and the extracted starting information is held.

In addition, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of normal symbols, the main CPU 201 refers to the random number value for normal symbol hit determination extracted from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and determines whether or not it is a "normal symbol hit". A symbol hit determination process is executed, and then a variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the normal symbol hit determination process and the determined normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and performs a variable display control process that controls the variable display of the normal symbol, and performs a predetermined effect. Execute production control processing. Note that the performance control process may not be executed.

Then, when the normal symbol variable display control processing and production control processing are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal winning symbol indicating "normal symbol winning" has been derived to the normal symbol display section 161 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). Determine whether When determining that the stop display mode indicating a normal win has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes a normal symbol win game control process. In this normal symbol per game control process, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) operates, and the game ball enters the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)). Becomes an open state where (passage) is possible or easy. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display mode indicating a normal win has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol win game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in a gaming state in which time saving control is not executed (for example, a normal gaming state), the probability that a stop display mode indicating a normal win is derived may be set to 0. The time saving control includes a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol compared to when the time saving control is not executed, and a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol, and a winning opening (in this embodiment, for example, This corresponds to control that performs at least one of the electric support control that increases the frequency of opening the starting port 140 (see FIG. 4). This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, or may be control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric support control.

The electric support control improves the time-saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "per normal symbol", the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146. This is a control that allows The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4)), and is a performance that changes the winning probability of "normal symbol". , the variable display time of the normal symbol, or/and the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric accessory 146, etc. In addition, improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier to enter the game ball into the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)). In other words, when the electric support control is executed, compared to the case where the electric support control is not executed, the probability of winning "per normal symbol" increases, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and/or the ordinary electric accessory 146 makes winning easier (increasing the number of openings, extending opening time, shortening wait time, etc.).

Then, each time the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In addition, starting information of the normal symbol (for example, a random number value for determining a hit of the normal symbol, etc.) extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 is held until the starting condition of the normal symbol is satisfied.

In addition, the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is performed in the order in which they are put on hold, and when the starting conditions for the normal symbols are met, the variable display of the starting information that was held first among the starting information of the normal symbols that are on hold will be started. Execute.

In addition, various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, random numbers for the first special symbol, random values for reach determination of the first special symbol, random values for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, The extraction method of the second special symbol random number, the second special symbol random number for reach determination, the normal symbol random number for hit determination, etc.) is performed by executing a program by the main CPU 201 to extract a predetermined range ( A soft random number method may be used that generates a random number within a certain range (range), or a hard random number method may be used that extracts a random number from a counter in a random number generator in which the random number is updated at a predetermined period.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the gaming state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot gaming state and a jackpot gaming state. In the non-jackpot gaming state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when a jackpot is derived as a result of the special symbol winning determination process, the non-jackpot gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of special symbols is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols can be executed even in the jackpot game state. It should be noted that a description of the small winning game state will be omitted.

The non-jackpot gaming state is divided into a low probability state where the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively low, and a high probability gaming state where the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively high. It can be broadly classified.

The high-probability gaming state includes a high-probability time-saving gaming state (high-probability high base) in which time-saving control is executed. Although it is not included in the high-accuracy gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine, as shown in FIG. It may also be included in the state.

The low probability state includes a normal gaming state (low probability low base) in which time saving control is not executed and a time saving gaming state (low probability high base) in which time saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time-saving gaming state includes an A-time-saving gaming state, a B-time-saving gaming state, and a C-time-saving gaming state.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to after a specific jackpot gaming state ends, and when a specified number of special symbol games are executed or transitioning to the jackpot gaming state, the A time-saving gaming state is switched to. finish. When the A time-saving game state ends by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, the game mode shifts to the normal game state in principle.

The B time-saving gaming state is, for example, when the jackpot gaming state has ended and the variable display of special symbols has started in a non-high probability gaming state (i.e., a gaming state where the probability change flag is off), or when the RAM has been cleared, which will be described later. When the variable display number of special symbols (e.g., ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (e.g., 1000 times), the time-saving game state can be entered, and a specified number of special symbol games are executed. , When the state is shifted to the jackpot game state, the B time-saving game state ends. When the B time-saving game state ends by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, in principle, the game state shifts to the normal game state.

C time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing performed in the low probability state is "time-saving winning" and the display mode of "time-saving winning" is derived. When the special symbol game is executed a predetermined number of times determined by winning the "Time-saving win" or when the state shifts to the jackpot game state, the time-saving game state C ends. When the C time-saving game state ends by executing the above specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the game shifts to the normal game state. For example, if a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, even if the special symbol game is executed the specified number of times, the time-saving game state C continues instead of shifting to the normal game state.

In this specification, regardless of whether multiple time-saving gaming states are executed overlappingly or not, the conditions for transition to the time-saving gaming state are satisfied in the time-saving gaming state, or the conditions for transitioning to multiple time-saving gaming states are satisfied simultaneously. This is called "overlapping" of time-saving gaming states. When a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap, the main CPU 201 controls to internally activate any of the overlapping time-saving gaming states, that is, internally operating the plurality of overlapping time-saving gaming states. Operating in parallel is called "executing in parallel." However, even if the main CPU 201 internally executes a plurality of time-saving game states in a stacked manner, the time-saving control that is actually executed is only the time-saving control corresponding to one of the time-saving game states. That is, even if a plurality of time-saving gaming states are being executed overlappingly, the player understands that the game is being controlled to any one of the plurality of time-saving gaming states.

Next, the transition of the gaming state will be explained.

Even when controlled in the normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state (A working-time saving gaming state, B working-time saving gaming state, C working-time saving gaming state), and high-accuracy gaming state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the special symbol If the result of the hit determination process is a jackpot, the game shifts to a jackpot game state.

When the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the game specifications, it is possible to shift to any of the normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, and high-precision gaming state (for example, high-precision time-saving gaming state). However, the time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to when the jackpot gaming state ends is limited to the A-time-saving gaming state.

When controlled to be in a high-precision gaming state, except for some pachinko gaming machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines, there is no transition from the high-precision gaming state to a time-saving gaming state or a normal gaming state. Similarly, from the time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state, there is no transition to the high-precision gaming state unless the game goes through the jackpot gaming state.

When controlled in the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, but it cannot shift to the A time saving gaming state unless it goes through the jackpot gaming state. However, when the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times in the A time-saving game state, the state shifts to the normal game state, so it is possible to shift from the A time-saving game state to the normal game state. In addition, even if the control is in either the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, once the special symbol game is executed the specified number of times, the normal gaming state will be entered. It is also possible to shift from the gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Next, the transition between time-saving game states will be explained.

When the A time saving gaming state is controlled, the number of times that can be executed in the A time saving gaming state is set to be less than the ceiling value which is the condition for transitioning to the B time saving gaming state. There is no transition to the time-saving gaming state. Further, since the A time saving gaming state is controlled via the jackpot gaming state, there is no transition from the B working time saving gaming state to the A time saving gaming state. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the A time-saving gaming state is "time-saving hit", the conditions for transition to the C-time-saving gaming state are met, so the A-time-saving gaming state and the C-time-saving gaming state may overlap. . However, as mentioned above, since the A time saving gaming state is controlled via the jackpot gaming state, there is no transition from the C time saving gaming state to the A time saving gaming state.

When controlled in the B time saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the condition for transition to the C time saving gaming state is established, and the B time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state are Can overlap. Also, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state may overlap.

When controlled in the C time-saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the condition for transition to the C-time-saving gaming state is established, and the C-time-saving gaming state and the C-time saving gaming state are Can overlap.

In addition, details regarding the duplication of time-saving game states will be described later.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19.

The first pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state in which neither probability variable control nor time-saving control is executed, a high-precision time-saving gaming state in which both probability variable control and time-saving control are executed, and a high-precision time-saving gaming state in which probability variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed. Low-probability time-saving game states to be executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is able to proceed with the game in any one of these game states. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed playing is the normal game mode in the high-accuracy time-saving game state and the low-accuracy time-saving game state. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display, for example, the display area of the display device 7 in a manner of playing that is considered to be a normal game mode. Note that the "regular game mode" corresponds to a game mode that is least disadvantageous to the player (advantageous to the player) among a plurality of game modes (eg, firing mode).

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each setting value]
FIG. 9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximately) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko game machine, a plurality of setting values such as settings 1 to 6 can be changed using the above-mentioned setting key 174, backup clear switch 176 (both shown in FIG. 6), etc. It can be set to one of these settings. In the case of such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes special symbol hit determination processing based on the set value.

Specifically, the jackpot probability in a gaming state where the probability variation flag is off (in this example, the normal gaming state and the low probability time-saving gaming state) in which probability variation control is not executed is determined by the first special symbol hit determination process and the second special Regardless of which symbol hit determination process is executed, for example, setting 1 is approximately 1/319, setting 2 is approximately 1/314, setting 3 is approximately 1/309, and setting 4 is approximately 1/319. The value is 1/304, approximately 1/299 with setting 5, and approximately 1/294 with setting 6. In addition, the jackpot probability in a gaming state where the probability variable flag is on (in this example, a high probability time-saving gaming state) in which probability variable control is executed is approximately 1/77 at setting 1, approximately 1/76 at setting 2, Setting 3 is about 1/75, setting 4 is about 1/74, setting 5 is about 1/73, and setting 6 is about 1/72.

Note that, unlike the jackpot probability, the short-time winning probability is a common probability for all setting values. For example, when the first special symbol hit determination process is executed, the time-saving hit probability is 1/160, and when the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, the time-saving hit probability is 1/240. There is. The time-saving hit probability may be different depending on whether the first special symbol hit determination process is executed or the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, or may be the same.

However, even if the time saving probability is a common probability for all setting values, the time saving continuation rate (for example, the number of set time saving times) may be varied depending on the setting value. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", for example, in the case of setting 1, 50 times will be set as the number of time saving times, and in the case of setting 6, 100 times will be set as the number of time saving times. You can also do this.

Note that in the first pachinko game machine, small wins are not included in the lottery targets, but small wins may be included in the lottery targets. When a small win is included in the lottery target, the small win probability may be set to be a common probability for all set values. In addition, if a small hit is included in the lottery, the small hit will only be won if the hit determination process for one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is performed. You can also make it wet. In this case, in the hit determination process for the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), in addition to not determining whether or not a small hit has been won, the probability of a small win is set to 0, and whether or not a small win has been won is determined. It may be an aspect in which the determination is made.

The short-time winning probability and the small winning probability when the lottery includes the above-mentioned short winning probability are the same probabilities for all setting values as described above, but they are not limited to this, and may vary depending on the setting value. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probabilities are different for all setting values, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot probability is common between setting 1 and setting 2, and the jackpot probability is common between setting 3 and setting 4. The jackpot probability may be the same for a plurality of setting values, such as a jackpot probability or a common jackpot probability between settings 5 and 6.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player varies depending on the set value, the target that differs depending on the set value is not necessarily limited to the jackpot probability. For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state when a game ball enters a specific winning opening, the probability of winning a prize in a specific winning opening may be varied depending on a set value. Note that it is not essential that the pachinko game machine be a pachinko game machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 10 is shown for example in the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 9.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, the "time-saving hit" is based on the random numerical value for jackpot determination extracted when a game ball enters the starting opening 120, 140. , is a table that is referred to when determining a "jackpot" or "loss" by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets are "time saving win", "big hit", and "loss", and other lottery targets (for example, small win) are not included, but the first starting opening 120 or/and When a game ball enters the second starting hole 140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

The random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process, as described above. In this embodiment, the random number value for jackpot determination is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. The hit determination table of the first special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value for each value of the probability variable flag (0 or 1). Relationship with data, relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and range of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "loss" (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this specification, when the value of the probability variation flag is "0", the probability variation flag is off, and when the value of the probability variation flag is "1", the probability variation flag is on.

In addition, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether it is a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination, similar to the hit determination process for the first special symbol. ” is decided. The hit determination table of the second special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1). Relationship with data, relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and range of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "loss" (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 executes the "time-saving hit". ”, and the winning/losing judgment value data is determined as “time-saving winning judging value data”. In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and that it is a win. The judgment value data is determined as "jackpot judgment value data." Further, if the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that the game is a "lose" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

Further, for example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined to be "time saving judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Further, if the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "lose" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". The judgment value data is determined as "time saving judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 478 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines The value data is determined as "loss determination value data."

For example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined to be "time saving judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 1124 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines The value data is determined as "loss determination value data."

As described above, in this embodiment, among the random numbers for jackpot determination that occur in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 408 in the case of the first special symbol hit determination process), It is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data) other than the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data. In addition, the end of the predetermined value (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing this, for example, when the probability change flag changes from off to on (or from on to off), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced ( It becomes possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data) by simply increasing the width of the judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data).

In addition, in this example, the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, and the "time-saving win" winning probability when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. By making the probabilities different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, the probability of winning a "time-saving win" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed is compared to the "time-saving win" chance when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed. By making the winning probability higher than the winning probability of ``, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become a monotonous game.

However, the probability of winning a "time-saving win" when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving win" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed. You can. In this case, for example, if you win a "time-saving win" in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is executed repeatedly, so that if you win the "time-saving win" just before the end of the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state This will effectively extend the period, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, the "time saving win" can be won regardless of whether the variable probability flag is on or off. However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the main CPU 201 controls to the time-saving gaming state if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving winning", but the probability variation flag is on. In this case, even if the result of the winning determination process is a "time saving win", the control is not made to the time saving gaming state.

[1-4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a "symbol designation command". The "select symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the variable display stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201, for example, sends the selection symbol command and symbol designation command as follows. Select as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses the selected symbol command as Select "z6" and select "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z10" as the selection symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses the selected symbol command as Select "z11" and select "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the win/loss judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random value for jackpot judgment with reference to the special symbol hit judgment table (see Fig. 10), and then the special symbol judgment table (see Fig. 10) is determined. 11), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the winning or losing of the special symbol, the selection symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12(A) is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is led out to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 5) when the variable display of the special symbol stops. It is referred to when making a decision according to the symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12(A), the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of, for example, an area of 0 to 7. It consists of a 1-byte control signal. Each of the areas 0 to 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to one of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) constituting the first special symbol display section 163 on a one-to-one basis. For example, area 0 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163a, area 1 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163b, area 2 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163c, and area 3 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163d. , area 4 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163e, area 5 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163f, area 6 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163g, and area 7 of the first special symbol. corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each of the areas 0 to 7 of the second special symbol corresponds one-to-one to any of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) constituting the second special symbol display section 164. For example, area 0 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164a, area 1 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164b, area 2 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164c, and area 3 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164d. , area 4 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164e, area 5 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164f, area 6 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164g, area 7 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the display mode of the LEDs (display mode of time-saving win) led to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 is determined as follows. be done. For example, when the selection symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163a corresponding to area 0 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163, and the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is to be displayed in a stopped state in such a manner that the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selection symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163b corresponding to 1 and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163c corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164a corresponding to area 0 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164, and the LED 164a corresponding to area 0 of the second special symbol. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164b corresponding to the region 1 of the second special symbol and the LED 164h corresponding to the region 7 of the second special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164a corresponding to area 0 of the second special symbol and the area of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the second special symbol display section 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 should be stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164c corresponding to the second special symbol 2 and the LED 164h corresponding to the second special symbol region 7 are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the display mode of the LEDs (jackpot display mode) derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163, and the first special symbol It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 should be stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163e corresponding to the region 4 of the first special symbol and the LED 163g corresponding to the region 6 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163f corresponding to 5 and the LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selection symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. The first special symbol is displayed in such a manner that the LED 163e corresponding to the area 5 of the first special symbol, the LED 163f corresponding to the area 5 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. It is determined that the section 163 is to be displayed in a stopped state. When the selected symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area among the eight LEDs configuring the second special symbol display section 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164e corresponding to the area 6 of the second special symbol and the LED 164g corresponding to the area 6 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selection symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area from among the eight LEDs configuring the second special symbol display section 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is to be displayed in a stopped state in such a manner that the LED 164f corresponding to 5 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose", the display manner of the LEDs (the display manner of loss) derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163, and lights up the other LEDs. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED is turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z11", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol out of the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164, and lights up the other LEDs. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the light is turned off.

When the main CPU 201 determines the stopping mode of the special symbol based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 sends a control signal corresponding to the determined mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. It outputs to each LED constituting and controls the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164.

In addition, in FIG. 12(A), the display mode of the LED led to the first special symbol display section 163 and the display mode of the LED guided to the second special symbol display section 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. ing. However, it is preferable that the control signals are transmitted separately to the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164.

FIG. 12(B) is an example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko game machine. The decorative pattern stop mode determination table is referred to when determining the stop mode (symbol combination) of decorative patterns that is derived when the variable display of decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 stops, in response to a pattern designation command. be done. Note that the "Remarks" column shown in FIG. 12(B) is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

In addition, since the first pachinko gaming machine can variably display only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 variably displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The display device 7 is controlled to display the special symbol being displayed. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 performs the display performance in such a manner that it is possible to grasp whether the special symbol being variably displayed is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 include a left pattern consisting of 9 symbols 1 to 9, and a middle pattern consisting of 10 symbols 1 to 9 and a time-saving pattern. , the right symbol is composed of nine symbols 1 to 9, for example. The time-saving symbol is a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, for example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a time-saving win. By stopping and displaying the medium symbol as a time-saving symbol, the player can understand that he has won the time-saving prize. Further, in this embodiment, odd numbered symbols are defined as symbols having a higher degree of advantage for the player than even numbered symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the special symbol lottery does not include a small win, but if the result of the special symbol lottery includes a small win, for example, a small win symbol is added to the symbols constituting the middle symbol. (a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit) may be included. In this case, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win, the sub CPU 301 stops displaying the medium symbol as a small win symbol, so that the player can understand that he or she has won a small win.

As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 determines the stop mode of the decorative symbol. For example, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at an even number symbol, and the middle symbol is stopped at a time saving symbol.

When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 sets the left symbol and the right symbol to an odd number as the stop mode of the decorative symbol, for example. It is stopped at a symbol, and the middle symbol is stopped at a time-saving symbol. In addition, when the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), as you can see from FIG. 13 described later, the symbol designation command is " Compared to the case where the symbol command is ``zA1'' or ``zA6'' (when the selected symbol command is ``z0'', ``z1'' or ``z7''), the number of time savings set is greater, and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

When the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub CPU 301 selects, for example, the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol as the stop mode of the decorative symbol. to stop at an even number of odd-numbered symbols.

When the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub CPU 301 selects, for example, the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol as the stop mode of the decorative symbol. Stops at an even number of even symbols. In addition, as can be seen with reference to FIG. 13 described later, the symbol designation command "zA4" is used when the probability change flag is set to on after the end of the jackpot game state (when the selected symbol command is "z4"), There are cases where the probability change flag is not set on (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the selected symbol command is "z4" or "z5", the sub-CPU 301 controls the decorative symbols to stop at the even-numbered symbols (matched), In the jackpot game state, it is preferable to perform a promotion effect indicating that it is a probability variable win (a win in which the probability variable flag is set to ON).

Furthermore, as can be seen from FIG. 13 described later, when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", as can be seen from FIG. 13 described later, when the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" '', the expected value of the probability change flag being set on after the end of the jackpot game state is smaller. In this respect, when the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8", it is more advantageous for the player than when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9".

In addition, when the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "lose"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbol at a random spot. The loose pattern corresponds to, for example, a stopping mode in which at least one of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol is different from the other symbols.

In FIG. 12(B), the stop mode of the decorative symbols according to the symbol designation command (for example, when the symbol designation command is "zA1", the left symbol "2", the middle symbol "Time-saving", and the right symbol "4") is Although shown as an example, the stop mode shown in the column of the stop mode of the decorative pattern in FIG. 12(B) is just an example, and is not limited thereto.

[1-4-5. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the aspect of the jackpot gaming state (more specifically, the number of rounds, for example) and/or the aspect of the subsequent gaming state, according to the selection symbol command determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the special symbol. Referenced when making decisions. The mode of the gaming state after that indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C-time-saving gaming state is controlled without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, so the subsequent gaming state will be the C-time-saving gaming state. Indicates the mode.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the aspect of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" and "z7", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 50. Determine. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 100. Determine. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned time-saving win display mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164, and then Without controlling to the jackpot game state, the time saving flag is set on and the determined number of time saving times is set, thereby making it possible to control to the C time saving gaming state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the jackpot gaming state is not controlled, so the mode of the jackpot gaming state is not determined. In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saving win", the set time saving number is the same regardless of the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. It is said that However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set time saving number may be varied depending on the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times to be set is determined according to the selection symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. are different. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", it is possible to have variations in the subsequent progress of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 201 performs a "time-saving winning" lottery as shown in FIG. 10, and the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". In this case, the display mode of the time-saving win indicating that the "time-saving win" has been won is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, but the high-precision gaming state is continued without being controlled to the C-time-saving gaming state. You can also do this.

In addition, the main CPU 201 performs a "time-saving win" lottery when the probability change flag is on, and forcibly changes the display mode of a loss to the special symbol display section even if the result of the win determination process is "time-saving win". 163 and 164.

Furthermore, when the probability change flag is on, time-saving hit judgment value data is not assigned to the random value for jackpot judgment, that is, "time-saving winning" is not included in the lottery result (result of special symbol winning judgment processing). A determination process may be performed. In this case, time-saving hit determination value data is assigned to the random number value for jackpot determination when the probability change flag is off, and time-saving hit determination value data is not assigned when the probability change flag is on. Therefore, when the variable probability flag is off, the width of the random number assigned to the time-saving hit judgment value data is changed to the loss judgment value data, jackpot judgment value data, or loss judgment value instead of the time-saving hit judgment value data. It is assigned to both data and jackpot judgment value data.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state where the time-saving flag is off even if the probability change flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving win", It may be possible to shift to a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the form of the winning game state and the form of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z9", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and it is decided to set both the probability variation number and the time saving number to 10,000. In these cases, the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot game state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164, and after the jackpot game state ends, control the machine to a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state. becomes.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and it is decided to set both the probability variation number and the time saving number to 10,000. In this case, the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 163, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it is possible to control the jackpot gaming state to a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state. Become.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Moreover, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON. Also, it is decided to set the number of time saving times to, for example, 200 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 163, and then controls the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control to the time-saving game state. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is the A-time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Moreover, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON. Also, it is decided to set the number of time saving times to, for example, 300 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display section 164, and then controls the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control to the time-saving game state. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is also the A-time-saving gaming state.

The time-saving performance in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state is preferably the same as the time-saving performance in the A-time-saving gaming state, but it may be different from the time-saving performance in A-time saving.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the main CPU 201 determines the state of the jackpot game state and None of the subsequent gaming state aspects are set. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 201 continues to control the previous gaming state without changing the gaming state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z11"), the state of the jackpot game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state aspects are set, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. 13. However, in this embodiment, in order to clearly indicate that neither the jackpot gaming state nor the subsequent gaming state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 13.

As described above, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table in FIG. The winning/losing judgment value data is determined based on the random number value (the winning/losing judgment is performed), and the winning/losing (“time saving win”, “big hit” or “loss”) is determined. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. The selection symbol command is determined based on the value data, and the type of display mode (time saving type or jackpot type) to be derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164 is determined. Note that the above-mentioned winning/losing determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that it is performed from the time the variable display of the special symbol begins until the final display. That's not the purpose.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5"), or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the number of time saving times in the C time saving game state that is controlled is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times. times (when the selected symbol commands are "z1" and "z7"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol commands are "z2" and "z8"). That is, the expected value of the number of time savings in the A time saving gaming state is higher than the expected value of the number of time saving times in the C time saving gaming state. In this way, by making the time-saving gaming state A more advantageous to the player than the time-saving gaming state C, it is possible to increase the position of the "jackpot". For example, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur due to winning a "jackpot" but being at a disadvantage compared to not winning a "jackpot" (winning a "time saving"). becomes.

In addition, instead of setting the expected value of the number of time savings in the A time saving game state to be higher than the expected value of the number of time savings in the C time saving game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the expected value of the number of time savings in the C time saving game state may be set higher than the expected value of the number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state. FIG. 14 is a modification of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 13. In this FIG. 14, the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time savings in the C time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7"), or 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7"). When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). In this way, by making the time-saving game state C more advantageous for the player than the time-saving game state A, it is possible to increase the positioning of the "time-saving win". For example, even if the state continues for a long period of time without winning a "jackpot", if a "time-saving win" is won, the game is controlled to the relatively advantageous C-time-saving gaming state, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, in this specification, similarly to the case of the variable probability flag, when the value of the time saving flag is "0", the time saving flag is off, and when the value of the time saving flag is "1", the time saving flag is on.

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203 like the probability variable flag, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute time saving control.

Moreover, the number of times of time saving is a variable number of display times of special symbols that can be continuously executed for time saving control. That is, for example, if the number of time-saving games is determined to be "50," and the special symbol is variablely displayed 50 times without winning a jackpot in this time-saving game state, this time-saving game state ends and the non-time-saving game ends. state (for example, normal gaming state).

In addition, the number of probability variations and the number of time reductions of "10000" shown in FIG. 13 etc. are intended to allow the probability variation control to be executed continuously after the end of the jackpot gaming state until it is determined that it is a jackpot (that is, the next jackpot). .

[1-4-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 15 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. The "Remarks" column in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The time-saving hits A, B, and C shown in the "Notes" column in Figure 15 are reaches that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). It's a performance. Similarly, jackpot-related reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate that there is a possibility of a jackpot as a result of the special symbol hit determination process (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be either a short-time hit or a jackpot. Note that FIG. 15 is a special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is off, and illustration of the special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 140. Determine the fluctuation pattern. The special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 15 is a table that is referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process in S96 in FIG. 28, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination, or / And, although it is determined based on a random value for performance selection, etc., it is not limited to this, and it may be determined based on other values, etc. instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number value for reach determination is extracted, for example, from 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a prefetch flag when the random number value for performance selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 301 which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 performs a pre-read effect if the pre-read flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the prefetch flag when the time saving flag is off, and does not set the prefetch flag when the time saving flag is on or the probability change flag is on.

Further, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may also make the determination.

Note that the main CPU 201 may also set the prefetch flag (so that the prefetch effect is performed) when the time saving flag is on or when the probability change flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a prefetch flag may be set (so that a prefetch effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of changes per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 308 of the sub CPU 301 via the command output port 206. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 15, for example, the range of the random number value for performance selection may be changed for each set value, so that the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbols to be determined may be different.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for example, if the result of the hit determination process is a loss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined depending on whether or not the time saving flag is on, regardless of the type of time saving. , but not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed per unit time may vary depending on the type of time saving. For example, the expected value of the variable display frequency of the special symbol per unit time may be made to be different in the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state.

[1-4-7. Time-saving gaming state]
As described above, in this embodiment, the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, and the C working time saving gaming state are prepared as the time saving gaming states. These time-saving gaming states will be explained below.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". It is. That is, in this embodiment, the condition for transition to the A time-saving gaming state is to win a jackpot (a jackpot where the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the conditions for transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state are met, the transition to the A-time saving gaming state does not always occur, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the A-time saving gaming state is satisfied (for example, if the backup is cleared) etc.), the A time-saving game state is not entered.

In addition, the conditions for ending the A time-saving gaming state are determined in accordance with the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and in response to the selection symbol command. When the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times saved (hereinafter referred to as "A prescribed number of times saved") is executed (see the "Number of hours saved" column in Figure 13) This is the case when any of the following conditions are met.

The B time-saving gaming state starts, for example, when the jackpot gaming state ends and the variable display of special symbols in the non-high-probability gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state in this embodiment) starts. This is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled when the ceiling counter is updated (increased by 1) and the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, the condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. B The transition to the time-saving gaming state may be performed when the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling final variation") starts when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, or when the ceiling final variation ends. Alternatively, it may be set when the variable display of the special symbol next to the final ceiling change starts. That is, the transition timing to the B time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the final ceiling fluctuation and the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling variation is "lose", the display mode of "lose" is derived on the special symbol display sections 163, 164, but the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is made. Become. In this case, the sub CPU 301 displays a display effect (for example, changing the decorative pattern to a special symbol) to show the player that the condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state has been met (for example, in this embodiment, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value). Control may be performed to display on the display device 7 a special effect by a character, or an effect in which both of these are performed. Note that even if the conditions for transition to the B time-saving gaming state are met, the transition to the B time-saving gaming state does not always occur, but when conditions that prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state are met (for example, a special situation in the final ceiling fluctuation) If the result of the symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, etc.), the transition to the B time-saving game state is not made.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability variation flag is on, and is always counted when the probability variation flag is off, regardless of whether the time saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the B time-saving game state is controlled unless the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot". In a pachinko game machine where the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small win, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small win", the small win display mode The B time-saving game state may be started when the is drawn on the special symbol display sections 163, 164, or the B time-saving game state may be started after the small winning game state ends. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small hit", only the display mode of the small win is displayed on the special symbol display sections 163 and 164. , the above-mentioned display effect indicating to the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value is not displayed. Note that in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may vary depending on the setting value. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "jackpot", the game is controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the B time-saving game state.

In addition, the ceiling counter is activated by the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on, when the jackpot game state is controlled, and when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process). If a switch other than that (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, or if the high probability of winning a normal symbol ends in a gaming machine that can change the probability of winning a normal symbol, a predetermined It is reset when the following conditions are met. Then, if updating of the ceiling counter is permitted, the ceiling counter is updated every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. For example, when the probability change flag is on, updating of the ceiling counter is not allowed.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the variable display of the next special symbol. Note that the ceiling value may be set by the main CPU 201 each time the ceiling counter is cleared, or may be predetermined unique to the pachinko gaming machine instead of being set each time.

When the ceiling counter is cleared by being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, if the variable probability flag is not turned on after the jackpot gaming state ends, the main CPU 201 Update the ceiling counter (+1). In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state, if the variable probability flag is on, the ceiling counter will not be updated even if a special symbol is displayed variablely, but for example, if it is a ST machine or a specification that performs a variable fall lottery, the variable probability flag will not be updated. The ceiling counter is updated at the start or end of the first variable display of special symbols after turning off. In addition, in the case of a specification that performs a variable fall lottery, the variable probability flag is changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, so if the ceiling counter is updated at the end of the variable display of the special symbol, If the variable probability flag is off at the end of the variable display, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In addition, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a specification in which the main CPU 201 performs a high probability rolling lottery, when the sub CPU 301 receives the command sent from the main CPU 201, the sub CPU 301 produces an effect that suggests winning the high probability rolling lottery or a high probability game. It is preferable not to perform a performance that suggests a transition from a state to a low-probability gaming state. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the starting point of counting by the ceiling counter, that is, the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state based on the display effect displayed on the display device 7, and it becomes more interesting. It becomes possible to provide a certain level of gameplay. If it is difficult to grasp the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state, for example, by displaying a countdown effect or a fake countdown effect that suggests the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state on the display device 7 under the control of the sub CPU 301. , it becomes possible to further increase interest.

Additionally, when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process), the main CPU 201 starts the first variable display of special symbols after the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared. The ceiling counter is updated (+1) at the time or end of the process.

Furthermore, when a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 controls the variable display of the special symbol for the first time after the other switch is operated. The ceiling counter is updated (+1) at the start or end of the process.

In addition, the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state are the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and the case where a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot") is started based on the "jackpot". This is a case where either condition is satisfied among a case where variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) for a number of times (referred to as "B time saving specified number of times") is executed. One of the conditions for ending the B time saving game state, ``When the variable display of the special symbol for the prescribed number of B time saving is executed'', the variable display of the special symbol for the prescribed number of B time saving (hereinafter referred to as ``B time saving final variation'') '') is started, or when the B time saving final variation ends. That is, the end timing of the B time saving game state may be any time between the start of the B time saving final variation and the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this B time saving final variation.

C time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving winning". In other words, the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state are that a time-saving win is won (a time-saving win where the selected symbol command is "z0" to "z2", "z7", or "z8"), and the display mode of the time-saving win is a special symbol. It is to be derived (determined and displayed) on the display sections 163 and 164. Furthermore, even if the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state are met, the transition to the C-time saving gaming state does not always occur, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied (for example, the B time-saving gaming state and In the case where the C time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state are not executed at the same time (details will be described later), and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is "time-saving hit"), the C time-saving game do not move to the state. In addition, if the condition that prevents the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied even though the transition condition to the C-time saving gaming state is satisfied, the main CPU 201 will not make the transition to the C time-saving gaming state. Control is executed to derive the display mode of to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164.

In addition, the conditions for ending the C time-saving gaming state are determined in response to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and in response to the selection symbol command. When the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times saved (hereinafter referred to as "C specified number of times saved") is executed (see the "Number of hours saved" column in Figure 13) This is the case when any of the following conditions are met. The prescribed number of C time savings, which is one of the conditions for ending the C time saving gaming state, starts variable display of the special symbol for the number of time saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as "C time saving final variation"). It may be set when the C time saving final variation is completed, or when the C time saving final variation is completed. That is, the end timing of the C time saving game state may be any time between the start of the C time saving final variation and the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this C time saving final variation.

Note that the time saving performance may be different between the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state. In addition, the time-saving performance of two time-saving gaming states is the same among the A-time saving gaming state, B-time-saving gaming state, and C-time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving performance of these two time-saving gaming states and the other one time-saving gaming state are The time saving performance may be different. Furthermore, the time saving performance of the A time saving gaming state, the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state, and the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state may be made to be the same.

In addition to the above, the conditions for ending the A time saving gaming state, the ending condition for the B time saving gaming state, and the ending condition for the C time saving gaming state include, for example, the fact that the number of variable display times of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times. Alternatively, the information may include that the normal electric accessory 146 has been opened a predetermined number of times, that a specific opening mode has been selected as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146, etc. In addition, in a pachinko game machine in which a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the above-mentioned termination condition may include the fact that the number of small wins has reached a specified number of times. Furthermore, the above-mentioned termination condition may include the fact that a time-saving fall lottery has been conducted and that the time-saving fall lottery has been won.

[1-4-8. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the game state and the normal symbol hit determination extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). This is a table that is referred to when determining a "normal symbol win" or "loss" by lottery based on the random number value (that is, when executing the normal symbol game determination process in S295 of FIG. 43, which will be described later). .

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for determining a hit of a normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines a "normal symbol win" or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hit determination table includes the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination determined for "normal symbol hit" and the corresponding normal symbol hit determination value data for each time saving type. The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol determined to be a "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, in a non-time-saving gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state), the main CPU 201 determines that a "normal symbol hit" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 0 and 79. Then, the winning/losing judgment value data is determined as "normal symbol winning judging value data". In addition, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has won a normal symbol if the random number value for hit determination is between 0 and 98, and changes the winning/losing determination value data to "normal". "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning determination random number value of the extracted normal symbol is 99, and determines it as a "loss", and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol is one of 0 to 79 as a “normal symbol hit”, and changes the win/loss determination value data to “normal symbol hit”. "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol is one of 0 to 79 as a “normal symbol hit”, and changes the win/loss determination value data to “normal symbol hit”. "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

As described above, in this example, among the non-time saving gaming state, A working time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, and C working time saving gaming state, the winning probability per normal symbol in A working time saving gaming state (shown in FIG. 16) Selectivity (approximate)) is the highest.

Further, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving gaming state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving gaming state (selection rate (approximate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the gaming state shifts between the non-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will not change.

Note that the winning probability per normal symbol may be the same in the non-time-saving gaming state, the A-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to vary the proportion of types of normal symbols, which will be described later, for each state without changing the probability of winning per normal symbol.

[1-4-9. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is based on the type of time saving, the aforementioned winning/losing determination value data, and the symbol random number value of the regular symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol. "Select symbol command when normal symbol hits" is a command to specify the winning symbol of the normal symbol determined according to the type of normal symbol when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be. The symbol random number value of the normal symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit select symbol command is selected as follows. Ru.

For example, in a non-time-saving gaming state, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 will , "fz0" is selected as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits normally.

In addition, in the A time-saving gaming state, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz1" as the selection symbol command when a symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz2" as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits, and select the symbol random number of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is between 70 and 99, "fz3" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, when normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz4" as the selection symbol command when a symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz5" as the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits, and select the symbol randomness of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is between 70 and 99, "fz6" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, when normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz7" as the selected symbol command when a symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz8" as the selected symbol command when the normal symbol hits, and select the symbol random number of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is between 70 and 99, "fz9" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16) and determines the win/loss determination value data based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol. Thereafter, the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) is referred to, and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol, but this is not restrictive. For example, based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, the win/loss of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol win may be determined together.

[1-4-10. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 18 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol per type determination table determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to the normal symbol per selection symbol command that is determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 executed in the variable display start process of normal symbols in S293 of FIG. 43, which will be described later).

In this embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz0", the main CPU 201 selects the opening pattern that is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, It has been decided that there will be no second opening. That is, an opening pattern is determined in which the normal electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz1", the main CPU 201 selects the opening pattern which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 2000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, The second opening time is determined to be 2500 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz3", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern that is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 3000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a waiting time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 3000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz4" and "fz7", the main CPU 201 changes the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. It is decided to be 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz5" and "fz8", the main CPU 201 changes the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2000 msec, wait time 600 msec, and second release time 2000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz6" and "fz9", the main CPU 201 changes the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2500 msec, wait time 600 msec, and second release time 2500 msec.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is Among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessories 146 in the time-saving game state, A-time-saving game state, B-time-saving game state, and C-time-saving game state, the most advantageous mode is the most disadvantageous mode.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball into the second starting opening 140 when the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened.

If the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the A time-saving gaming state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is non-time-saving gaming state, A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving This mode has the most advantageous degree among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the game state and the time-saving game state C.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the B time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit" is the normal symbol hit determination process in the C time-saving game state. Although the degree of advantage is the same as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the processing result is "normal symbol hit", it is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 19 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table is used when determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (that is, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process that is executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 43, which will be described later). referenced in the following). The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and selects the normal symbol effect based on the gaming state and the random value for selecting the normal symbol effect extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol. The random number value for normal symbol production selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the variable display time of the normal symbols is determined to be, for example, 300,000 msec, regardless of the random number value for normal symbol performance selection from 0 to 99. The variable display time of the normal symbols in the non-time-saving gaming state is the longest among the non-time-saving gaming state, the A-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the A time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 89, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 90 to 99. In either case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

In addition, in the B time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 500 msec, for example, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 40 to 79. If either of these is the case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. Ru.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 40 to 79. If either of these is the case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. Ru.

In this way, the variable display time of the normal symbol per variable display is the variable display time of the normal symbol in the non-time saving gaming state, the A time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state. The expected value of the variable display time of normal symbols in the time-saving game state is the shortest. Therefore, in the A time-saving game state, the time required for the normal electric accessory 146 to be released is the shortest among the non-time-saving game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state.

Further, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the B time-saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the C time-saving game state, but is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to time-saving gaming state]
[1-5-1. Number of time reductions set when time reduction is applied]
In the above explanation, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saving win", the set time saving number is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of time reductions set when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saver win" is determined according to the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. You can do it like this.

Further, even in a high probability gaming state where the probability change flag is set to ON, "time saving win" may be included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process. In this case, the main CPU derives the display mode of the time-saving game on the special symbol display section, but does not execute the control to shift to the time-saving gaming state, and continues to control the high-precision gaming state. By the way, there is known a game machine, such as a pachinko game machine called a so-called ST machine, which turns a probability change flag from on to off when a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times. In such an ST machine, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process performed in the final game as a high-probability gaming state is "time-saving hit", the time-saving win is displayed rather than the process of turning off the probability change flag. When the process of deriving the mode is carried out later, the main CPU may control the time saving game state C after deriving the display mode per time saving.

[1-5-2. Duplication of time-saving gaming states]
When a plurality of time-saving gaming states are provided, the time-saving gaming states may overlap. For example, in the A time saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving winning", the A time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state will overlap. Further, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state overlap. When the time-saving game states overlap in this way, the time-saving game states may be executed overlappingly, or the time-saving game states may not overlap (that is, the "time-saving hit" is ignored). In addition, so that the A time saving gaming state and the B working time saving gaming state do not overlap, the prescribed number of A time saving gaming states, which is the end condition for the A working time saving gaming state, is set to be smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time saving gaming state. stipulated.

When the time-saving game states overlap, a mode in which the time-saving game states are executed in duplicate and a mode in which the time-saving game states are not overlapped will be explained below.

[1-5-2-1. A mode of repeatedly executing time-saving gaming states]
When the time-saving game states overlap, the time-saving game states are executed in duplicate.If the time-saving game state is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C. Possible modes include a mode in which the C time-saving game state is executed overlappingly, and a mode in which the B-time saving game state is executed in a layered manner when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-1. A mode in which time-saving game state C is superimposed on first time-saving game state]
If you win a "time-saving win" in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the main CPU 201 displays the time-saving win on the special symbol display sections 163 and 164. Derive the display mode. In this case, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state and adopts as the time-saving number the number of variable displays of special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied.

For example, if you win a "time saving win" in the A time saving game state, and the remaining number of time savings in the A time saving game state is greater than the number of time savings that can be executed based on this "time saving win", the main CPU 201 executes the A time saving win. While maintaining the time-saving performance of the game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived, the time-saving game state is controlled until the remaining number of time-savings in the time-saving game state A is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time savers in the A time saver game state is 200, the "time saver win" is won, and the number of time savers that can be executed based on this "time saver win" is 50. In the case of the number of times, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived on the special symbol display sections 163, 164, but while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, the number of time-savings from here on is as long as a "jackpot" is not derived. 200 times. Therefore, even if you win a "time-saving win" in any one of the time-saving gaming states A, B, and C, the appearance of the number of working hours and the time-saving performance is This is the same as the case where the A time-saving gaming state is continued without winning.

On the other hand, for example, if a "time saving win" is won in the A time saving gaming state and the number of times that can be executed based on this "time saving winning" is greater than the remaining number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 executes the A While maintaining the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is controlled until the number of time-savings set based on the "time-saving win" is exhausted unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time savers in the A time saver game state is 20, the "time saver win" is won, and the number of times that can be executed based on this "time saver win" is 50. In the case that the time saving performance of the time saving game state A is maintained, the number of time saving times from this point on is 50 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special symbol is performed for 20 times, which is the remaining number of times in the A time-saving gaming state, after that, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving gaming state, the special symbol is displayed 30 times, which is the difference between the two. A variable display of is further executed.

[1-5-2-1-2. A mode of executing B time saving gaming state overlapping C time saving gaming state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 controls the display mode according to the display mode (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process) derived to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Execute control.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in the following, the case where a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process will be explained. .

First, a case will be described in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit" or a "loss" in the final ceiling fluctuation.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving gaming state, if the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving gaming state is greater than the prescribed number of B time saving gaming states, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state. , unless a "jackpot" is derived, the time-saving game state is controlled until the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state C is exhausted. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time-saving games in C-time saving game state is 300, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and if the prescribed number of B-time-saving games is 200, then C-time saving game state While maintaining the time-saving performance of , the number of time-savings from this point on is 300 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving gaming state, the appearance of the number of time saving times and the time saving performance is the same as when the C time saving gaming state continues without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value. .

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, if the prescribed number of B time-savings is greater than the remaining number of time-savings in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state. However, unless a "jackpot" is derived, the time-saving game state is controlled until the B time-saving specified number of times is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time savings in C time saving gaming state is 20, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time saving times that can be executed as B time saving gaming state is 300. In this case, while maintaining the time saving performance of the time saving game state C, the number of time saving times from this point on is 300 unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, which is the remaining number of times in the C time-saving gaming state, the special symbol will be displayed 280 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time-saving performance in the C time-saving gaming state. A variable display of is further executed.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed in the final ceiling fluctuation, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", a small win display mode is derived, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", a loss display format is derived. . When the small win display mode is derived, the small win game state is controlled, but the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving flag on even during the small win game state.

Next, in the ceiling final variation, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", that is, in the ceiling final variation, the transition condition to the B time saving gaming state and the transition condition to the C time saving gaming state are different. A case where this holds true will be explained. In this case, the main CPU 201 starts controlling the B time-saving gaming state before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, and when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is Different control can be executed depending on the case where control of the B time saving gaming state is started after being drawn to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164.

First, if control of the B time-saving game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164. At the time when this is done, the control is already in the B time saving gaming state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state, and as long as a "jackpot" is not derived, the greater of the prescribed number of time saving times of B and the number of time saving times of the C time saving gaming state is used up. Control to a time-saving gaming state.

Next, when control of the B time-saving gaming state is started after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164. At the time when the B time-saving game state is not yet controlled. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state while satisfying the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state (for example, deriving the display mode of a jackpot, deriving a display mode of a small win or a specific small win, etc.). Unless otherwise specified, the time saving game state is controlled until the larger of the prescribed number of time saving times B and the number of time saving times in the time saving game state C is exhausted. In this case, when the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving performance is maintained or executed are satisfied, the time-saving gaming state may be ended.

In addition, in the final ceiling fluctuation, when the conditions for transition to the B time-saving gaming state and the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state are satisfied, the sub CPU 301 executes the B time-saving game that is performed when only the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state is satisfied. A special display performance that is different from the transition display performance and the C time-saving shift display performance that is performed when only the conditions for transition to the C time-saving gaming state are satisfied may be performed. In addition, instead of this, for example, if the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state is maintained, a B time saving transition display effect is performed, and if the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state is maintained, a C time saving transition display effect is performed. Either one of the B time saving transition display performance and the C time saving transition display performance may be performed with priority.

In addition, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the ceiling final fluctuation is "jackpot", the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and starts the B time-saving game. To control a jackpot game state without controlling the state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time-saving performance when executing multiple time-saving gaming states at the same time]
Above, the mode in which the C time-saving game state is executed in a superimposed manner on the first time-saving gaming state, and the mode in which the B time-saving gaming state is executed in a superimposed manner on the C time-saving gaming state have been explained.

If the specification is such that a plurality of time-saving gaming states can be executed in parallel, the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving gaming state is maintained. In a pachinko game machine with such specifications, the time-saving performance of multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in a stack may be different, but it is not possible to make the time-saving performance of a plurality of time-saving game states that can be executed in a stack to be the same. preferable.

For example, if the specification is such that the C time saving game state can be executed overlapping the first time saving game state, it is preferable that the time saving performance of the first time saving game state and the time saving performance of the C time saving game state be the same. In addition, if the specification is such that the B time saving game state can be executed overlapping the C time saving gaming state, it is preferable that the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state and the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state be the same.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine with specifications that allow multiple time-saving gaming states to be executed in succession, the time-saving gaming state that can be executed later on top of the time-saving gaming state that has been executed first is, for example, It may be provided with one time-saving performance that is the same as the current time-saving gaming state and another time-saving performance that is different from this one time-saving performance. Then, when executing a time-saving game state over the time-saving game state that has been executed first, the first time-saving performance is activated, and the time-saving game state is activated as in the case of activating the time-saving game state in the normal game state. If you do not want to repeat this, you may activate other time-saving abilities.

For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with specifications that allow the B time saving gaming state to be executed in the C time saving gaming state, the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state can be set to the same time saving performance as the C time saving gaming state, and this one time saving performance. For example, two time-saving performances are provided with other time-saving performances different from the performance. Then, in the C time-saving game state, for example, if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, one time-saving performance is activated, and in the normal game state, which is not any time-saving game state, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, another time-saving performance is activated. may be activated.

[1-5-3. Mode in which time-saving gaming states are not executed repeatedly]
As a mode in which the time-saving game state is not executed repeatedly, there is a mode in which the winning determination process is performed so that the "time-saving win" is not included in the lottery target in the time-saving game state, and a mode in which the "time-saving win" is included in the lottery target in the time-saving game state. A possible mode (hereinafter referred to as the "latter mode") is possible in which a hit determination process is performed and the time-saving gaming states are not executed overlappingly even if the time-saving gaming states overlap. In the latter mode, even if you win a time-saving win in any one of the time-saving gaming states A, B, and C, you can ignore this and repeat the C-time-saving gaming states. There are two possible modes: a mode in which it is not executed, and a mode in which even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, this is ignored and the B-time saver game state is not executed again. Below, the above two modes considered as the latter mode will be explained.

[1-5-3-1. A mode in which the time-saving game state C is not executed in combination with the time-saving game state 1]
If you win a "time saving win" in any one of the A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state and C working time saving gaming state, as described above, the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol display parts 163 and 164. , derive the display mode per time saving. However, the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time saving gaming state based on the "time saving winning" unless the last special symbol in the first time saving gaming state is variablely displayed (hereinafter referred to as "time saving final variation"). Control is performed to one time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state is exhausted. In this case, being controlled to one time-saving gaming state (excluding the final time-saving variation) is a condition that prevents the transition to the C-time saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if a "time saving win" is won in the time saving final variation in the first time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the first time saving gaming state is Different controls can be executed depending on the case where one time-saving game state ends and the case where one time-saving game state ends when the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164.

First, if one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, the main CPU 201, after deriving the display mode of the time-saving hit, changes the time-saving game state C. Start control.

Next, when one time-saving gaming state ends when the display mode per time-saving is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, that is, when the display mode per time-saving is derived and the one time-saving gaming state ends. When performed within the same interrupt process, the main CPU 201 may or may not start controlling the C time-saving gaming state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the process of deriving the display mode per time saving (determined display) is performed before the end processing of the first time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 executes the first time saving gaming state without controlling to the C time saving gaming state. End the time-saving gaming state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode per time saver before the end process of one time saver game state becomes a condition that prevents the transition to the C time saver game state.

On the other hand, if the process of deriving the display mode per time saving (determined display) is performed after the end processing of the first time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 ends the first time saving gaming state and controls the time saving gaming state C. do. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time-saving performance of the first time-saving game state, but maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state. That is, the main CPU 201 ends the first time-saving game state without controlling to the C-time-saving game state, if the end processing of the first time-saving game state has not been processed at the time when the display mode per time-saving game is derived, If the end processing of the first time-saving game state has already been performed, control is performed to the time-saving game state C.

[1-5-3-2. A mode in which B time-saving game state is not executed in combination with C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 controls the display mode according to the display mode (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process) derived to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Execute control.

First, a case will be described in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", "small hit", or "loss" in the final ceiling fluctuation.

In the C time-saving gaming state, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is "time-saving hit", "small hit", or "loss", the main CPU 201 determines that the remaining number of time-saving games in the C-time saving gaming state is exhausted. The time saving game state C is controlled until the game is completed.

However, when the remaining time saving number of the C time saving gaming state is 0 in the final ceiling fluctuation, the main CPU 201 may or may not start controlling the B time saving gaming state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time-saving game state is performed before the start processing of the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and controls to the B time-saving game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time saving gaming state is performed after the start processing of the B working time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 ends the C working time saving gaming state without controlling to the B time saving gaming state. That is, at the time when the main CPU 201 is about to start the B time saving gaming state, if the end processing of the C working time saving gaming state has not been processed, the main CPU 201 ends the C working time saving gaming state without controlling to the B working time saving gaming state, and ends the C working time saving gaming state. If the game state termination process has already been performed, control is made to the B time-saving game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time saving gaming state after the start processing of the B working time saving gaming state becomes a condition that prevents the transition to the B working time saving gaming state.

In addition, in the ceiling final variation, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving gaming state and starts controlling the jackpot gaming state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be explained.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, the main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23. 20 to 23 are flowcharts showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the power interruption signal is at High level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at the High level (NO determination in S11), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process in S11.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at High level (YES in S11), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this process, the on/off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the on/off state of the setting key 174 are saved. That is, the on/off states of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. Also, in this process, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing the process in S12, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the sub control circuit 300 side waits for startup. The activation waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process in S13, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S14.

Note that while the sub-control circuit 300 side is waiting for startup, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, processing for checking the interrupt request signal, processing for outputting the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and initializing various sensors at predetermined timings. It is also possible to perform processing for outputting the converted signal.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power outage before startup (previous time) was a normal power outage. In this process, it is determined whether the power outage is a normal power outage or an abnormal power outage based on the value stored in the power outage detection flag area in the main RAM 203 .

If it is determined in S14 that the power outage was not normal (NO determination in S14), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that there was a normal power outage (YES in S14), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then Verification processing of the checksum value of the area is performed (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the verification result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the verification result is not abnormal, that is, normal (NO determination in S17), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22. Note that the processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S17 that the verification result is abnormal, that is, not normal (YES in S17), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the determination is NO; if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, and if either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is If either one is off, the determination is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO in S18), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S21. Note that the process of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (YES in S18), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 turns on the security signal of the external terminal. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs error display processing on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets error display data to the output port of the I/O port 205, which outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170. As a result, a predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up, and an error is displayed. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters into an eternal loop.

In this way, if the previous power outage was not a normal power outage or if the verification result of the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the first pachinko game machine cannot play the game.

Next, the process of S21 will be explained. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed at the time of abnormal startup, and a value indicating a setting change is stored again. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs activation state determination processing. In this process, the current startup state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the startup control flag stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, the work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like is cleared (for example, work area construction, address setting, etc.). Note that this process is performed both at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs startup initialization processing. In this processing, initial setting processing is performed according to the current startup state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Note that details of the startup initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs power cutoff processing. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S28. Note that details of the power cutoff process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an initial value random number update process. In this process, initial value random numbers of various random number counters (for example, special symbol jackpot determination random number counters, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S29), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S30.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S29 that the game is allowed (YES in S29), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor aggregation calculation processing. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Further, this processing is performed using an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S37.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the main control main process, before executing various processes related to game control (for example, processes in S37 to S44) to be described later, an interrupt prohibition period of, for example, 6 msec (processing period in S26 to S35) is set. will be provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed, for example, every 6 msec (every system cycle). In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt prohibition period is three times the interrupt period has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 performs a system timer update process. The system timer is a timer that manages the system cycle (for example, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this process, command transmission/reception processing for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. Details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. Details of this normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs game operation display unit control processing. In this process, setting processing of display data to be output to each display section of the LED unit 160 (for example, the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164, etc.) is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, external terminal plate pulse signal control processing, output data setting processing, sight firing test signal generation processing, etc. are performed. Note that the process of generating the sight test signal is performed using an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs status monitoring processing. In this process, firing position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, etc. are performed. In the firing position determination process, if there is a change in the firing position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), a firing position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection and determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

[1-6-2. Initial setting processing at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading an activation control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating recovery from power failure (NO determination in S52), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S54.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure (YES in S52), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing. Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is not a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation, that is, a value indicating RAM clearing (NO in S54), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation (YES in S54), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the setting operation command. The setting operation command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is in a game permission state. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

[1-6-3. Power outage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the power cutoff process performed in S27 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of power cutoff processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (if NO in S61), the main CPU 201 ends the power outage process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is on (YES in S61), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs checksum value calculation processing. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the value of the power failure detection flag in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203. In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the XINT detection flag. After executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset wait process until the power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S72.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process when both the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held are "0" for a certain period of time or more. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45, which will be described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S71 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S72), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S75.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S72), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not held (NO determination in S73), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not held (NO determination in S74), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process. , the process returns to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is pending (YES in S74), the main CPU 201 executes the process in S75. Move to.

Returning to S73, if it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of the variable display, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is withheld (YES in S73), the main CPU 201 executes the process as follows. Move to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. After executing the process of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S71 to S75) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, as the first pachinko gaming machine, if the start information of the second special symbol is pending, the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is pending, it may be a priority changing machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winnings to the second starting port 140.

[1-6-5. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 at S75 in the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is "0" (when S72 is a YES determination), the special symbol management process is, when S73 is a YES determination, the second special symbol is the processing target, and when S74 is a YES determination, the special symbol management process is The first special symbol is the processing target. Further, if the control state number is not "0" (NO determination in S72), the special symbol management process targets the special symbol being executed.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "5") written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S81).

If it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S81), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S81), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S83. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S83 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S83 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S84 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S85.

In S85, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S85 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S86.

In S86, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S86 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S87.

In S87, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S87 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot termination processing. This process of S88 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

After completing the processes of S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S83 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S91), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. (see 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S91), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, and sets the jackpot flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. do. In the first pachinko game machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but if it is a pachinko game machine in which a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, a special symbol win is included. If the result of the determination process is a small win, a small win flag is set on. After executing the process of S93, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S94. It should be noted that the time saving winning flag is turned off at the time of transition to the C time saving gaming state, and the jackpot flag is turned off at the start of the jackpot gaming state. If the pachinko game machine includes a small win in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the small win flag is turned off at the start of the small win game state.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S93), first, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in this process, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a time-saving hit. If it is determined in this process that it is not a time saving win, it is determined that the game is a loss.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process to judge or determine the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93) (for example, time-saving hit, jackpot, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) and using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S94) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 13). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but there may be only one type of jackpot, and there may be one type of time-saving winning. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of wins, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small hit, and multiple types of such small hits may be provided. good. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination, etc. Or/and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value for effect selection, etc. Note that the variation pattern table referred to when performing the special symbol variation pattern determination process may be different depending on the gaming state or the like. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S96) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 27) (see S84) will be performed. After executing the process of S98, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S99.

In S99, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 (for example, probability variation remaining count, time saving count remaining, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S100, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management process (S100), special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S101)) within the interrupt-prohibited section. It is preferable to do so.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

If it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO in S111), the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. (see 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S111), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display end process, the special symbol game determination process (S85 in FIG. 27) ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. The confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of guaranteed variations or the remaining number of time savings. You can also manage the numbers. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S121), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 27). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S121), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S122, if it is determined that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S122), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S123, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S124. Note that signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 and the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In addition, in the jackpot game control start setting process of S123, the main CPU 201 also performs processing to clear various flags and various counters such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening 131 (S125), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". (S127), a gaming state designation parameter setting process (S128), and a transmission reservation process for a jackpot start display command (S129). In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S127) and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see FIG. 27) is performed. (see S86) will be performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

Returning to S122, if it is determined in S122 that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (if NO in S122), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S130.

In S130, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. In addition, when the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S130 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving management processing (S131). Details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S131, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S134). Note that the special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S134, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30).

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the losing display mode is derived, the gaming state will not change.

[1-6-10. Time-saving management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S131 during the special symbol game ending process (see FIG. 31) in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs counter update processing (S141). Details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After executing the process of S141, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs counter determination processing. Details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. After executing the process of S142, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol game ending process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the counter updating process executed by the main CPU 201 in S141 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time saving counter update process (S151). Details of this time-saving counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. After executing the process of S151, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing. Details of this ceiling counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. After executing the process of S152, the main CPU 201 ends the counter update process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-12. Time-saving counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151 during the counter update process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the time-saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the process when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed in a stacked manner when a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, a YES determination is made when both the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0, and a NO determination is made when either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to ON when transitioning to the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C working time saving gaming state. Incidentally, when shifting to the high probability gaming state, the probability change flag is set to ON.

The time saving counter indicates the number of time saving times executed in each of the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state.

When the transition conditions to the A time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and/or the C-time-saving gaming state are satisfied, a time-saving counter is set for the time-saving gaming state in which the transition condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time-saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time-saving gaming state is ended when the time-saving counter reaches 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, an addition method may be adopted in which a time-saving counter is incremented when the variable display of special symbols is finished, and the time-saving game state is ended when the time-saving counter reaches a set number of time-savings. Also, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving counter when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the time-saving counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and when the time-saving counter reaches 0 ( The time-saving game state may be completed when the time-saving counter reaches the set number of time-savings (in the case of the subtraction method) or when the time-saving counter reaches the set number of time-savings (in the case of the addition method).

In S161, if it is determined that both the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is larger than 0 (NO in S161), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter updating process and executes the process as follows. Return to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S161 that the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (YES in S161), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S162). After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S163 is YES, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S164.

Note that the C time saving counter is a counter that is set when a transition condition to the C time saving gaming state is established during the time saving gaming state. Although not shown in the flowchart, this C time saving counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when a B time saving counter, which will be described later, is set.

The time-saving mode is a flag that is set when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed overlappingly. In this embodiment, the time-saving mode is configured with 2 bits, for example, and when the C-time-saving gaming state is executed overlappingly with the time-saving gaming state that is being executed first, it is set to "time-saving mode = 3". Furthermore, when the B time saving game state is executed over the time saving game state which is being executed first, "time saving mode=2" is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S163 that both the time saving mode = 3 and the C time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO determination in S163), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S164, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving mode=2 and the B time saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time saving mode=2 and the B time saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S165 is YES, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S166.

The B time saving counter is a counter that is set when a transition condition to the B time saving gaming state is established during the time saving gaming state (in this embodiment, the C working time saving gaming state). Although not shown in the flowchart, this B time saving counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time saving counter is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S165 that both the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S165), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter updating process. , the process returns to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S166, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

Although not shown, if the C time saving counter = 0 as a result of performing the process in S164, or if the B time saving counter = 0 as a result of performing the process in S166, the main CPU 201 executes the time saving counter. Set the mode to off (=0).

By the way, when executing a plurality of time-saving gaming states in a stacked manner, it is not limited to just stacking two time-saving gaming states, but may execute three or more time-saving gaming states in a stacking manner. In this case, as mentioned above, the A time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state do not overlap, so the case where three or more time saving gaming states overlap means that the A working time saving gaming state or the B working time saving gaming state and two This corresponds to the case where three or more C time-saving gaming states overlap, and the case where three or more C time-saving gaming states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the ceiling counter updating process executed by the main CPU 201 in S152 during the counter updating process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the probability change flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, when the probability variation flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The value of the ceiling counter is stored in the main RAM 203.

Note that the ceiling value is predetermined as a value unique to the pachinko gaming machine as a condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling value when the jackpot gaming state ends, when the backup clear process is performed, when a special operating means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, etc. Processing may also be performed.

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO determination in S171), that is, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and changes the process to the counter update process ( (see Figure 33).

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (YES in S171), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S142 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving transition determination processing (S181). Details of this time-saving transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. After executing the process in S181, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs time saving transition processing. Details of this time-saving transition processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving counter is smaller than 1.

In S183, if it is determined that the time saving counter is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S183), that is, if the time saving counter is greater than or equal to 1, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S185.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S183 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (YES determination in S183), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving flag. After executing the process in S184, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S185.

Note that if it is determined in S183 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S183), both the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter should be smaller than 1 (that is, they should be 0). However, in view of the possibility that some kind of problem may occur when executing the processing by the main CPU 201, for example, if the B time saving counter or the time saving counter is 1 or more even though S183 is YES, , abnormality processing such as outputting an abnormality warning may be executed. In addition, instead of or in addition to this abnormality processing, when S183 is determined to be YES, not only the time saving flag is turned off (see S184), but also the time saving counter and the C time saving counter are reset. The counter, the B time saving counter, and the C time saving counter may be made consistent.

In S185, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing (S186) for the time saving shift command. In addition, the time saving transition command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time-saving transition determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a determination process is performed to shift to the B time saving gaming state. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the probability change flag is off (S191).

In S191, if it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (NO in S191), that is, if the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process and replaces the process with the counter determination process ( (see Figure 36). That is, when the probability change flag is on, it is possible to prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S191 that the probability variation flag is off (YES in S191), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value.

If it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is not at the ceiling value (NO in S192), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value (YES in S192), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S193, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag on. The ceiling flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving shift determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time-saving migration process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the time saving migration process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 in S182 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the probability change flag is off (S202).

In S202, if it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (NO in S202), that is, if the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition processing and converts the processing to the counter determination processing (Fig. 36). By doing so, when the probability change flag is on, it is possible to prevent either the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state from being started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S202 that the probability variation flag is off (YES determination in S202), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is not on (NO in S203), that is, if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is on (YES in S203), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes a B time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of times of time saving to be set in the B time saving counter, setting of the time saving mode to 2, time saving performance, etc. are determined. After executing the process of S205, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S208.

Note that the number of time saving times set in the B time saving counter is a predetermined number of times. In addition, among the time-saving performance, the winning probability of "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). In addition, among the time-saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see Figure 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see Figure 18). It is as it appears. Furthermore, among the time-saving performance, the variable display time of the normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving flag is on.

In S206, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (if NO in S206), that is, if the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and transfers the process to the counter determination process. (See Figure 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S206 that the time saving flag is on (YES in S206), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the C time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of time saving times to be set in the C time saving counter, setting of the time saving mode to 3, time saving performance, etc. are determined. After executing the process of S207, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S208.

In addition, the number of time saving times set in the C time saving counter is determined according to the selected symbol command with reference to the hit type determination table (for example, see FIG. 13). In addition, among the time-saving performance, the winning probability of "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). In addition, among the time-saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see Figure 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see Figure 18). It is as it appears. Furthermore, among the time-saving performance, the variable display time of the normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs time saving setting processing. Details of this time saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time-saving setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S208 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on (S211).

In S211, if it is determined that the time saving flag is on (YES in S211), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S212.

When S211 is YES, the probability change flag is off and, for example, when the time-saving game state B is executed in a state in which the time-saving game state C is executed first (the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value) ), or when executing the C time saving gaming state in a state where the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state has been executed first (if you win the "time saving winning"). do.

Although not shown, when executing the B time saving gaming state in a state where the C time saving gaming state has been executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 2" and also sets the time saving gaming state determined in S205. B Set the time saving counter. In addition, when executing the C time saving gaming state in a state in which the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C working time saving gaming state is executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 3". At the same time, the C time saving counter determined in S207 is set.

If it is determined in S211 that the time saving flag is not on (NO determination in S211), that is, if the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time-saving counter (the remaining number of time-savings in the previously executed time-saving game state) with the new time-saving number (the number of time-savings determined in S205 or S207), and It is determined whether the time saving counter is smaller than the new number of time saving times.

In S212, if it is determined that the current time-saving counter is not smaller than the new number of time-savings (NO in S212), that is, if the current time-saving counter is larger than the new number of time-savings, the main CPU 201 The setting process is ended and the process returns to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S212 that the current time saving counter is larger than the new number of time saving times (YES in S212), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving counter resetting process. In this process, the B time saving gaming state may be executed in a state where the C time saving gaming state is executed first, or the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state is executed first. If the C time saving game state is executed repeatedly in the current state, the current time saving counter value (i.e. remaining time saving number) and the new time saving number, whichever is greater, will be reset as the new time saving counter. . However, even if the time saving counter resetting process (S213) is performed, the main CPU 201 does not reset the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In addition, when the B time saving gaming state is executed in a state where the C time saving gaming state is executed first, or when the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state is being executed first. When executing the C time-saving gaming state over and over again, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving gaming state. In other words, changing the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state to the time-saving performance of a new time-saving game state, or performing a time-saving game corresponding to the greater number of time-savings between the current time-saving counter and the new number of time-savings. The time-saving performance of the state will not be changed.

As mentioned above, the time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease with which a game ball enters the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)), " winning probability, variable display time of normal symbols, and/or opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the ordinary electric accessory 146, etc.

By the way, in this embodiment, by providing the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter, it is possible to manage that two time saving game states are being executed internally in a superimposed manner. Then, in the above-mentioned time-saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger number of time-savings between the current time-saving counter value and the new number of time-savings is reset as a new time-saving counter. However, even if the two time-saving gaming states are being executed internally, the time-saving performance that appears on the surface (that the player can grasp) is the same as the above two time-saving gaming states that are being executed internally. Of these, only the time-saving performance for any one of the time-saving gaming states is included. Therefore, when multiple time-saving game states are executed simultaneously without internally managing the fact that two time-saving game states are being executed simultaneously (i.e., without providing a B-time-saving counter and a C-time-saving counter), The current time saving counter value and the new time saving number, whichever is larger, may be reset as the new time saving counter.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs time saving mode setting processing. This process is executed when S211 is NO, that is, when the non-time-saving gaming state is transferred to the B-time-saving gaming state (ceiling counter = ceiling value), or from the non-time-saving gaming state to the C-time-saving gaming state. This is the process that is performed when the game is moved to and executed (when the "time saving win" is won). In this process, the number of time saving times and the time saving performance determined in the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) or the C time saving control mode determining process (S207) are set. After executing the process of S214, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to ON. After executing the process of S215, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In this way, in the above-mentioned time-saving management processing explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 executes the transition processing to the B-time-saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed. I'm going to In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine where the result of the hit determination process includes a small hit, the first special symbol in the final fluctuation of the ceiling does not include a small hit. A case may occur in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 executes the process of transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state based on the completion of the small winning gaming state. It's good to do.

In addition, in the above-mentioned time-saving management processing explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the transition processing to the B-time-saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transition process to the B time-saving game state may be performed based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final fluctuation of the ceiling. In particular, in the first pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, B time-saving game It is preferable to perform transition processing to the state. This is because when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation ends, the transition to the B time saving gaming state is made, and while the variable display of one of the special symbols as the final ceiling variation, the other special symbol is variable. This is because when the display is started, the variable display of the other special symbol will no longer be able to benefit from the B time-saving game state, and there is a risk that interest will decrease. In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the variable display of special symbols is not performed in a long variation such as 600000 msec. However, in pachinko gaming machines where special symbols can be variably displayed with such long fluctuations, the transition process to the B time-saving gaming state is performed based on the start of the variable display of special symbols as the final ceiling fluctuation. As a result, even if the variable display of the special symbol, which is the final ceiling variation, is performed in a long variation, a delay in the start of the B time-saving game state can be avoided.

In addition, in the above-mentioned time-saving management process explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the B-time-saving control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B-time-saving gaming state is replaced with the process related to the transition to the C-time-saving gaming state. Although the process is performed with priority over the C time saving control mode determination process (S207) as the process related to this (see S203 to S207 in FIG. 38), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the C time saving control mode determination process (S207), which is a process related to the transition to the C time saving gaming state, is given priority over the B time saving control mode determining process (S205), which is a process related to the transition to the B time saving gaming state. It may also be done by

Furthermore, in the ceiling counter update process described above with reference to FIG. 35, the ceiling counter is not updated if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO determination in S171 of FIG. 35). I can't do it. For example, in an ST machine or a pachinko game machine that performs a variable probability falling lottery, even if the variable probability flag is on, the ceiling counter may be updated when a special symbol is variably displayed. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time saving game state may not be made, but the transition to the B time saving gaming state may be made when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability change counter reaches the ceiling value. . In this case, the main CPU 201 does not shift to the B time saving gaming state just when the "ceiling counter = ceiling value", but shifts to the B time saving gaming state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variable counter reaches the ceiling value. Processing will be carried out.

Further, it is preferable that the ceiling value, which is a transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state, be within a predetermined range (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (in the case of setting value 1), so the ceiling value is preferably within the range of 319×2.5 to 319×3.0 (times).

Further, it is preferable that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B time saving, which is a condition for ending the B time saving gaming state, be up to a specified multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability change flag is off. Similarly, the upper limit of the prescribed number of C time-savings, which is the condition for ending the C-time-saving gaming state, is up to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off by the specified number (for example, 3. (up to 8 times) is preferred. In this example, since the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (in the case of setting value 1), the prescribed number of times B and C are both approximately 1212 (319× It is preferable to set the upper limit to 3.8). Note that it is not essential that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B-time reduction and the upper limit of the specified number of times of C-time reduction be the same value.

By the way, in the case of a pachinko game machine such as the first pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities, such as setting 1 to setting 6, as described above, , the time saving probability is a common probability for all setting values. In such a case, the ceiling value, which is the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state, is set to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability variable flag is off) by a specified number (for example, 3.0), regardless of the setting value. In this case, the ceiling value will differ depending on the set value, and there is a risk that the set value may be overlooked by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, no matter what setting value is set, the ceiling value is not determined by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the variable probability flag is off) by a specified number, but by It is preferable to use the same value regardless of the setting value.

[1-6-18. Variations related to time-saving management processing]
In addition, in the above-mentioned time saving management process explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 (hereinafter referred to as "time saving management process of this embodiment"), the ceiling counter update process (see FIG. 35) is replaced with the special symbol game end process. (See FIG. 31). Further, the process related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is given priority over the process related to the transition to the C time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, a transition flag to the B time-saving gaming state (ceiling flag) and a transition flag to the C time-saving gaming state (time-saving hit flag) are provided separately, and when the ceiling flag is on, the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is made; When the time saving winning flag is on, the game is made to shift to the C time saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time-saving management process including the ceiling counter update process, the priority order of transition to the B-time-saving gaming state and the transition to the C-time-saving gaming state, the transition flag to the B-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state C The time-saving management process can be performed in various variations without being limited to the above-mentioned decision as to whether the transition flag is separate or common.

For example, the execution timing of the time-saving management process that includes the ceiling counter update process is set to the time when fluctuation is stopped, the processing at the time of transition is set to give priority to the B-time-saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B-time-saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C-time-saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B working time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B working time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the time of fluctuation stop, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, even if the execution timing of the time saving management process that includes the ceiling counter update process is set to the time when the fluctuation stops, and when the ceiling is reached, it is confirmed that the "time saving hit" is not won, and then the transition to the B time saving gaming state is made. good.

Furthermore, if multiple time-saving game states are not executed in parallel, the main CPU 201 performs processing to subtract 1 from the time-saving counter when the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is larger than 0, and in other cases, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the time-saving counter. It is best not to subtract .

[1-7. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the big winning opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S86 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the grand prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S251), the main CPU 201 ends the grand prize opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. (see 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S251), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S252.

In S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of openings of the big winning hole is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value (YES in S253), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S254. On the other hand, if it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S253), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S257.

In S254, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S254) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 27) is performed. (see S88) will be performed. After executing the process of S254, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S256). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the grand prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S257, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S258.

In S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the grand prize opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 131, the maximum number of prizes to be won to the major prize opening 131, the number of prize balls at the time of winning to the grand prize opening 131, etc. are set. . The number of openings of the big prize opening 131 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this does not mean to exclude cases where the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S259.

In S259, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big prize opening 131 is performed. After executing the process of S259, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S260.

In S260, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S260) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S87 in FIG. 27) will be performed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S261.

In S261, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S87 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

If it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S271), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. (see 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S271), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have won in the big winning hole 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6) that counts the number of winning game balls into the big winning opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the big winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S272, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won in the big winning hole 131 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S272), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S273.

On the other hand, in S272, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 131 is the maximum number of winnings (YES in S272), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S274.

In S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S258 in FIG. 40) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 131 has not elapsed (if the determination is NO in S273), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and replaces the process with the special symbol management process. (See Figure 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 131 has elapsed (YES in S273), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S274.

In S274, the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing for the big prize opening 131. After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S275) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, preparations for opening the big winning hole are made again. Processing (see S86 in FIG. 27) will be performed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S281), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

When it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S281), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g. probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set, and values of various counters (e.g. probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or a reset process is performed. After executing the process of S282, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S283.

In S283, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the process of S283, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting conditions for the normal symbol are satisfied, similarly to the special symbol control process.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 43 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that each process shown in FIG. 43 is not shown as a subroutine for convenience.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S291).

If it is determined in S291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S291), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (YES in S291), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S293. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S293 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S292.

In S293, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for normal symbols. This process of S293 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start processing, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing, normal symbol variation pattern determination processing, and normal symbol hit determination processing when the result of the normal symbol hit determination processing is a normal symbol hit. 146 opening patterns (number of openings, opening time, wait time) setting processing is performed. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S294 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when ending the variable display of normal symbols. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S295 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol game determination process, a determination process is performed on the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a loss). Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S296 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric accessory 146 is opened in a predetermined manner. In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This process of S297 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol per end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this embodiment, as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), random numbers for determining the hit of the normal symbol are generated in the range (width) of 0 to 99, for example, 0 to 79. Normal symbol per judgment value data (in case of non-time saving gaming state). The probability of winning a normal symbol is determined by the number of judgment value data for a normal symbol relative to the total random number of random numbers for determining a winning of the normal symbol, so for example, the probability of winning a normal symbol is 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the normal symbol winning probability is different between the case where the time saving control is executed and the case where the time saving control is not executed, but it may be the same or almost the same. In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600,000 msec in a non-time-saving gaming state where time-saving control is not executed, whereas in a gaming state where time-saving control is executed, it is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 1,000 msec. It only runs for a short time. In this way, when the time saving control is executed, the frequency of execution of the normal electric accessory opening process, that is, the frequency of winning of game balls to the second starting port 140 is increased.

[1-7-4. External maskable interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the external maskable interrupt processing executed under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described. This process is an interrupt process that is performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, during a power outage. Note that FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs protection register saving processing (S301). After executing the process in S301, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 reads the status of a predetermined input port of the I/O port 205. The above predetermined input ports set the status of, for example, the power failure detection line, backup clear switch line, sensor abnormality detection line, radio wave sensor line, open detection line, magnetic sensor line, vibration sensor line, solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. This is the input port. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 determines whether a power outage has been detected.

If it is determined in S303 that a power outage is not detected (NO determination in S303), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined in S303 that a power outage has been detected (YES in S303), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S304, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the protection register saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the external maskable interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs protection register saving processing (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off (S312). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, a power outage is detected) (NO determination in S312), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, no power interruption is detected) (YES in S312), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S314), and moves the process to S315.

In S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted, based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The startup control flag is a flag for determining which state the startup state is when the power is turned on, such as recovery from power failure, setting change, setting confirmation, and RAM clearing. For example, in the case of power failure recovery, it is determined that the game is allowed, and in the case of setting changes, setting confirmation, RAM clearing, etc., it is determined that the game is not allowed.

Note that the startup control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, the power is restored; if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the settings can be changed; and when the backup clear switch 176 is off and If the setting key 174 is on, it is determined that the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared.

If it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S315), the main CPU 201 performs a setting control process (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within the system timer interrupt process, which is performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326. Note that details of the setting control process in S316 will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

Note that if the game is not permitted (NO determination in S315), the main CPU 201 prohibits the firing of game balls from the firing device 6 (see FIG. 6), and controls specific switches (for example, the setting key 174, the backup clear switch 176). It is preferable to disable various switches other than those (such as the above) and to prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S315 that the game is allowed (YES in S315), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt-disabled section during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is based on the number of interrupts in the work area of the main RAM 203. Stored in the counter area. After executing the process in S317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 performs update processing of the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S319. Note that the interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing interrupt cycles (for example, 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, random number counters for determining jackpots for special symbols, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important elements related to ball output. After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. After executing the process of S320, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing the process of S321, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S322.

In S322, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. After executing the process of S323, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is in an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area where data necessary for playing the game is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up, and for example, when the RAM is cleared. data is also stored in an area that is never cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 performs a process to restore the protection register saved in S311, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the setting control process performed in S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S331).

If it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change (YES in S331), the main CPU 201 performs a setting change process (S332). Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. After executing the setting change process (S332), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag is not a value indicating a setting change (NO determination in S331), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S333.

In S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating confirmation of setting.

If it is determined in S333 that the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (YES in S333), the main CPU 201 performs a setting confirmation process (S334). Details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After executing the setting confirmation process (S334), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, if it is determined that the RAM is cleared (NO determination in S333), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S337. .

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs setting operation display processing. In this process, currently set setting values are displayed. After executing the process of S335, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S336.

In S336, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, commands (initialization commands, power failure recovery commands, or setting operation commands) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), the setting confirmation process (S334), or the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 25) are used. is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process in S336, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs output processing of a WDT (watchdog timer). In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. After the process of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the setting change process performed at S332 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341). This process is performed by reading out information set in the input port of the I/O port 205.

If it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 is not pressed (NO determination in S341), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (YES in S341), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S342.

In S342, the main CPU 201 performs a setting value within-range update process. After executing the process of S342, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S343.

In this embodiment, in the setting change process, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch may be provided, and this setting switch can be changed. It may also be possible to change the set value by operating it.

In S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether the setting key 174 is turned off (S343).

If it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S343), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, if it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is turned off (YES in S343), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. As described above, when the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the first normal game pre-process (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Settings confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the setting confirmation process performed in S334 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the setting key 174 is turned off (S351). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the setting change process (see FIG. 47) described above.

If it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S351), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is turned off (YES in S351), the main CPU 201 performs the second normal game pre-processing (S352). Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. As described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the second normal game pre-process (S352), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. 1st normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the first normal game pre-processing performed in S344 during the setting change process (see FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. In addition, this first normal game pre-processing is also performed in the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 24) when none of the power failure recovery, setting change, and setting confirmation is performed, that is, the initial setting process when clearing the RAM. .

The main CPU 201 first performs RAM setting processing during initialization (S361). In this process, an area in the main RAM 203 where backup data is stored in the event of a power outage (hereinafter referred to as a "backup area") is cleared (eg, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.). Note that the area where data is stored is not cleared in the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45). Further, in this process, initial data is generated, and each of the generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203. That is, data backed up at the time of power outage is erased, and the gaming state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown in the drawings, in this process, the gaming state is returned to the initialized state so that the game can be started, the gaming permission flag is set on, and the gaming permission state is entered. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 performs an initialization command transmission reservation process. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the process of S362, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-process. When this first normal game pre-processing is completed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play.

[1-7-10. 2nd normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S352 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of power failure recovery in the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 24).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process upon power recovery (S371). In this process, for example, data stored in a backup area within the main RAM 203 is read out, and each of the read data is stored in a constructed work area within the main RAM 203. The above-mentioned data is, for example, various information necessary to proceed with the game, such as game status information, on/off status of winning flags of special symbols and normal symbols, and information on the number of reservations. That is, by restoring the data backed up at the time of power outage to the work area in the main RAM 203, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power outage. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning to the same gaming state as before the power outage, and the game permission flag is set to ON, resulting in a game permission state. The main CPU 201 moves the process to S372 after executing the RAM setting process at the time of power failure recovery (S371).

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether the probability change flag is on. This processing is performed by reading data stored in a work area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S372 that the probability change flag is not on (NO determination in S372), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S374.

on the other hand. If it is determined in S372 that the probability variation flag is on (YES in S372), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the probability change notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the probability change flag at the time of recovery from power failure. When the probability change notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a probability change notification LED (not shown) to be lit. This makes it possible to visually determine whether the probability change flag is on or not when the power is restored from a power failure. After executing the process in S373, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for a power failure recovery command. The power failure recovery command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the process of S374, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU 201. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 201 executes the starting opening winning detection process (S381). After executing the process of S381, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S382. The starting opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (S382). In the general winning hole passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the general winning hole 122 is set. After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (S383). In the grand prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the grand prize opening 131 is set. After executing the process in S383, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs ball passage detection processing (S384). In the ball passage detection process, various random values for normal symbols (random values for determining hit of normal symbols, etc.) are extracted based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 being detected by the passing gate switch 127. . In addition, the main RAM 203 stores various random numbers (random numbers for hit determination of normal symbols, etc.) extracted based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 for normal symbols that are held until the starting conditions for the normal symbols are satisfied. It has a starting storage area (1) to a normal symbol starting storage area (4). In the ball passage detection process, whether or not there is a free space in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to normal symbol start storage area (4), that is, whether or not the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 is extracted. It is also determined whether the number of reserved normal symbols is, for example, less than four. After completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Starting opening winning detection processing]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the starting opening winning detection process by the main CPU 201. The starting opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the switch input detection process described above.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (S391).

If it is determined that no game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (NO determination in S391), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (YES in S391), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, a random number for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, a symbol random number for the first special symbol, a random number for reach determination of the first special symbol, and a random number for determining the reach of the first special symbol). Various random numerical values, such as random numerical values for performance selection, etc.) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the first starting slot winning. After executing the process of S392, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on winnings in the first starting hole 120 is less than four, for example. The main RAM 203 includes a first special symbol starting storage area (1) to a first special symbol starting memory that holds various random numbers extracted based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port 120 until a starting condition is satisfied. In this process, it is determined whether there is a free space in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). In addition, the main RAM 203 also has a first special symbol starting storage area (0) in addition to the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit of 4 (if NO in S393), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special symbols is less than four (YES in S393), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S394.

In S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first special symbols. After executing the process in S394, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S395.

In S395, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 120 in the main RAM 203 until the first special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol regarding the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs a prefetch determination process. This process is a process in which, prior to the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28), the random number value extracted in S392 is used to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, perform the hit determination process, etc. It is also determined whether the prefetch flag is set.

Note that the prefetch determination process may be performed at any timing after the random number value is extracted in S392 until the special symbol hit determination process is executed, but the prefetch determination process may be performed at any timing after the special symbol hit determination process is started. In view of the fact that the sub-control circuit 300 performs the look-ahead effect, it is preferable to perform it, for example, around the time before and after the process of S395. After executing the process of S396, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S397.

In S397, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command for the first special symbol. The winning command for the first special symbol is a command that includes information for increasing the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol by 1, variation pattern information for the first special symbol (i.e., variation pattern command for the special symbol), etc. The winning command for the first special symbol that has been reserved for transmission is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S397, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

In S398, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second starting port switch 141 detects a game ball.

If it is determined that a game ball is not detected by the second starting port switch 141 (if NO in S398), the main CPU 201 ends the starting port winning detection process and replaces the process with the switch input detection process (Fig. 51).

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (YES in S398), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, a random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, a symbol random number for the second special symbol, a random number for reach determination of the second special symbol, and a random number for determining the reach of the second special symbol). Various random numbers, such as a random number for performance selection, etc.) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the second starting slot winning. After executing the process of S399, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on winnings in the second starting port 140 is less than four, for example.

The main RAM 203 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of a game ball into the second starting port 140 in a second special symbol starting storage area (1) to a second special memory area (1) for holding various random numbers extracted based on winning of a game ball to the second starting opening 140 until starting conditions are met. It has a symbol starting storage area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether there is a free space in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4). . In addition, the main RAM 203 also has a second special symbol starting storage area (0) in addition to the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit of 4 (NO in S400), the main CPU 201 ends the starting opening winning detection process, and replaces the process with the switch input detection process. (See Figure 51).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is less than four (YES in S400), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the pending number of second special symbols. After executing the process in S401, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random numerical values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 140 in the main RAM 203 until the second special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol regarding the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S403.

In S403, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command for the second special symbol (S403). The winning command for the second special symbol is a command that includes information for increasing the pending number of the second special symbol by 1, fluctuation pattern information for the second special symbol, etc. The winning command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 ends the starting opening winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S501). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S502.

Note that the above-mentioned initialization process (S501) is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when a backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S502 to S508, which will be described later, are repeatedly executed.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs reading processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set to the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) and the appearance of the display effect that is output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6) are determined. The mode of sound production, etc. is determined.

In the production mode determination process (S504), the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request that includes specification information of production content, and based on the generated animation request, various requests (for example, drawing requests) for operating various production devices. , sound requests, lamp requests, accessory requests, etc.). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S505.

In S505, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6). The accessory control circuit 307 controls performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the accessory objects forming the performance accessory group 58 based on the message (accessory request) sent from the sub CPU 301. Performs drive control for operation. When this process is finished, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

[1-9. Specific example of production mode determination processing by sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub-CPU 301) performs production mode determination processing (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The sub CPU 301, as one of the various processes performed in the performance mode determination process, for example, creates a production pattern (hereinafter referred to as "sub variation") of a sub variation production corresponding to the current special symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as "the variation"). A sub-variable performance pattern determination process for determining a performance pattern (hereinafter referred to as a "performance pattern"), a pre-read performance pattern determination process for determining a performance pattern for a pre-read performance (hereinafter referred to as a "pre-read performance pattern"), etc. In addition, in the performance mode determination process, for example, the performance mode of a countdown performance that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, and the performance mode of the B time-saving game state transition performance that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value is determined. Processing and the like are also performed to determine various performance aspects related to the progress of the game.

The sub-variation effect pattern determination process is performed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. The sub-variation performance pattern is a performance pattern (for example, a variation pattern of a decorative pattern or a character performance patterns, etc.).

In the sub-variation performance, expectations for the result of the special symbol hit determination process change as the time elapses from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the special symbol stops, depending on the sub-variation performance pattern to be executed. It is possible to show that the degree is maintained or increased.

For example, as shown in FIG. 54, which will be described later, the sub-variable performance patterns include short-time winning reaches A, B, C, jackpot reaching reaches A, B, C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, E, etc. is included. As mentioned above, time-saving hits A, B, and C are reaches where the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in Figure 28) indicates that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). It's a performance. Jackpot-type reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be both a short-time hit and a jackpot.

Note that, for example, if the execution timing of the countdown effect that suggests the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state and the execution timing of the reach effect overlap, the sub CPU 301 will prioritize execution of one of the effects. good.

The pre-read performance pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, a special symbol variation pattern determined as a result of the pre-read determination process. The look-ahead performance is a performance that indicates the level of expectation for the result of the look-ahead determination process, and is performed when in a pending state (i.e., after winning a prize at the first start opening 120, starting information such as various random numbers extracted based on the winning result). This is an effect pattern performed in the display area of the display device 7 by the sub CPU 301 before the special symbol is subjected to the hit determination process (until the variable display of the special symbol is started).

In the look-ahead performance, when in the hold state, the look-ahead judgment is performed as time passes (more specifically, the progress of the variable display of the start information that was held in advance), depending on the look-ahead performance pattern that is executed. It is possible to indicate that the level of expectation regarding the outcome of the treatment is maintained or increased.

The prefetch effect is performed using, for example, a pending image displayed on the display device 7. The pending image is an image showing the current pending status.

The look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead hit type performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result type (whether it is a time-saving hit or a jackpot) of the look-ahead judgment process, that is, the special symbol hit judgment process, and a look-ahead hit type performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result type (whether it is a time-saving hit or a jackpot) of the special symbol hit judgment process. A look-ahead expected value performance pattern that can suggest an expected value for the result of the hit determination process being a hit (big hit or time-saving hit) is included. That is, in the look-ahead presentation, it is possible to suggest both or one of the expected value for the type of result of the special symbol hit determination process and the expected value for the result of the special symbol hit determination process to be a hit. It is. In addition, in the look-ahead performance pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described later), the look-ahead performance pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described later) and the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination process (S3008 and S3009 in FIG. 59 described later) (Reference) is carried out. Specific examples of the per-reading type performance pattern, the pre-reading expected value performance pattern, the per-reading type performance pattern determination process, and the pre-reading expected value performance pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-variation performance pattern determination process]
First, the sub-variation effect pattern determination process will be explained. FIG. 54 is an example of a sub variable performance pattern determination table (detailed explanation is omitted) in a gaming state (normal gaming state) where the time saving flag is off (normal gaming state). This sub-variable effect pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko game machine. Note that the program ROM 302 also stores a sub-fluctuation performance pattern determination table in a gaming state where the time-saving flag is on (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), but the explanation will be omitted here.

The sub CPU 301 refers to the sub variation effect pattern determination table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. A sub-variation effect pattern (indicated as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) to be displayed on the device 7 is determined. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub-variable performance pattern includes short-time winning reaches A, B, C, jackpot reaching reaches A, B, C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, and E. There is.

The time-saving wins A, B, and C are reach performances that indicate that there is a possibility of a time-saving win as described above, and are also reach performances that can be understood from the appearance that there is a possibility of a time-saving win. Time-saving hit system reach A is a time-saving hit guaranteed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss or a jackpot, but is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (Figure 15 reference). Although this time-saving hit type reach A is not a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading, it is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading mode. The time-saving winning type reach B and the time-saving winning type reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. However, while the time-saving hit type reach B is not a sub-variation performance pattern targeted for pre-reading, the time-saving hit-type reach C is a sub-variation performance pattern targeted for pre-reading (see the "pre-reading flag" column in Figure 15, Figure 54, and (See FIG. 55 below).

The jackpot-type reaches A, B, and C are reach performances that indicate that there is a possibility of a jackpot as described above, and are reach performances that can be understood from the appearance that there is a possibility of a jackpot. Jackpot type reach A is a jackpot confirmed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss or a "time-saving hit", but is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (Fig. 15). Although this jackpot type reach A is not a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead, it is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variation performance pattern in a look-ahead manner. The jackpot type reach B and the jackpot type reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. However, while the jackpot type reach B is not a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead, the jackpot type reach C is a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead (see the column of “preread flag” in FIG. 15).

Common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that there is a possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving hit as described above, and from the appearance, there is a possibility of a time-saving hit or a jackpot. This is a form of reach production that makes it difficult to grasp whether there is a Common reach A is a hit (jackpot, time-saving hit) guaranteed reach effect that is not displayed if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, but is displayed only if it is a jackpot or "time-saving hit". (See Figure 15). The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. Moreover, the common reach D is a performance that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit type reach C. Furthermore, the common reach E is a performance that develops from the common reach C to the jackpot type reach C. Note that common reach A and common reach B are not sub-variation performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading, whereas common reach C, common reach D, and common reach E are sub-variation performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading (see Figure 15). (see section ``Flags'').

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the sub variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 54) and determines the sub variation effect pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. Then, the sub CPU 301 controls the determined sub variation effect pattern to be displayed on the display device 7.

[1-9-2. Ahead production pattern determination process]
Next, a description will be given of a prefetch per-type performance pattern determination process and a prefetch expected value performance pattern determination process, which are performed as the prefetch performance pattern determination process.

In addition, the work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6) includes the first special symbol start storage area (0), the first special symbol start storage area (1), and the first special symbol start storage area (2) provided in the main RAM 203. , the first special symbol start storage area (3), and the first special symbol start storage area (4), the first sub-reservation area (0), the first sub-reservation area (1), and the A first sub-reservation area (2), a first sub-reservation area (3), and a first sub-reservation area (4) are provided. The first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4) contain various information related to the extracted random number value. Hold information is stored. Further, information corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the first sub-reservation area (0). When the sub CPU 301 receives the winning command for the first starting opening winning, it stores the received information in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the current first special symbol starting storage area.

In addition, the work RAM 303 includes a second special symbol starting storage area (0), a second special symbol starting storage area (1), a second special symbol starting storage area (2), and a second special symbol starting memory area (2) provided in the main RAM 203. The areas corresponding to the starting storage area (3) and the second special symbol starting storage area (4) are a second sub-reservation area (0), a second sub-reservation area (1), and a second sub-reservation area ( 2), a second sub-reservation area (3), and a second sub-reservation area (4).

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the look-ahead effect for the first special symbol is performed in the normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in other game states (for example, high-accuracy time-saving game state, low-accuracy time-saving game state). It may be made to be carried out, or it may be made to be carried out for the second special symbol.

The prefetch effect is performed using, for example, a pending image displayed in the display area of the display device 7. The display area of the display device 7 includes a 0th area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (0), a first holding area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (1), and a first holding area as areas for displaying held images. A second reservation area corresponding to the sub-reservation area (2), a third reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (3), and a fourth reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (4) are provided. There is.

[1-9-2-1. [Table referenced in pre-reading type performance pattern determination processing]
First, a table referred to in the pre-reading type effect pattern determination process will be explained.

By the way, the format of the pending image in which the look-ahead effect is executed with the determined look-ahead effect type effect pattern includes a time-saving look-ahead effect indicating the possibility of a time-saving hit, and a look-ahead effect indicating the possibility of a jackpot. This includes a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form that shows the possibility of a short-time hit and a jackpot.

The look-ahead hit type performance pattern changes the form of the pending image, for example, from a common win look-ahead look to a time-saving win look-ahead look, or from a common win look-ahead look to a jackpot look ahead look. This is a performance pattern that can suggest a change in the expected value for the result type of the special symbol hit determination process.

FIG. 55 is an example of a prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination table. FIG. 55 shows only the prefetch target variation patterns among the variation patterns shown in FIG. 54. Further, FIG. 56 is an example of a pre-reading type performance pattern determination table. Note that these tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in the per-reading type effect pattern determination table number determination table of FIG. , based on the fluctuation pattern and the number of reservations. The number of reservations here includes start information of the prefetch target. That is, when the starting information extracted based on the winning to the first starting opening 120 is held, the number of holdings after holding corresponds to the number of holdings shown in FIG. 55.

For example, when the variation pattern is "03H" and the number of reservations is "3", the pre-read per type performance pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Further, for example, when the variation pattern is "0EH" and the number of reservations is "2", the pre-read per type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "22".

When the pre-reading type effect pattern determination table number is determined, the sub CPU 301 refers to the pre-reading type effect pattern determination table in FIG. 56 and determines the pre-reading type effect pattern. To be more specific, as shown in the pre-read per-type performance pattern determination table of FIG. It is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 56, for convenience, the "pre-reading type effect pattern determination table number" is shown as "SASPT number", and the "pre-reading per type effect pattern" is shown as "SAS effect pattern". The random number value 1 for sub performance selection is a random number extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when a special symbol variation pattern command is received.

For example, when the pre-reading type performance pattern determination table number is "3" and the extracted sub-performance selection random number value 1 is "55", the pre-reading type performance pattern is determined to be "07H". Further, for example, when the pre-reading type performance pattern determination table number is "7" and the extracted sub-performance selection random number value 1 is "77", the pre-reading type performance pattern is determined to be "16H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (holding correspondence) in FIG. 56 indicate the first holding area to the fourth holding area, respectively.

In addition, in each column of “1” to “4” in the notes (holding support) in FIG. 56, “A” is , indicates that the pending image is displayed in a time-saving win type look-ahead presentation form indicating that there is a possibility that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving win. When a pending image is displayed in the time-saving look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the appearance that there is a possibility of a time-saving win.

In addition, in each column of “1” to “4” in the notes (holding support) in FIG. 56, “B” is , indicates that the pending image is displayed in a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a jackpot. When a pending image is displayed in a jackpot-type look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the appearance that there is a possibility of a jackpot.

In addition, in each column of “1” to “4” in the notes (holding support) in FIG. 56, “C” is , Indicates that the pending image is displayed in a common win type look-ahead presentation form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a possibility of both a time-saving hit and a jackpot. When a pending image is displayed in a common winning look-ahead presentation format, it is difficult to grasp from the appearance whether there is a possibility of a time-saving win or a jackpot.

For example, if the look-ahead performance pattern is determined to be "07H", the common win system look-ahead performance form is displayed in the third holding area, and the common win system is also displayed in the second hold area after shifting from the third holding area. A look-ahead presentation format is displayed. Then, when shifting from the second holding area to the first holding area, the common winning look-ahead presentation form changes to the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form, and in the first holding area, the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form of "A" is displayed. be done.

Furthermore, when the pre-reading per-type performance pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common winning-type pre-reading performance form of "C" is displayed in the third holding area. When shifting from the third holding area to the second holding area, the common winning look-ahead performance form changes to the jackpot looking look-ahead performance form, the second holding area, and the first hold after being shifted from the second holding area. In the area, the jackpot type look-ahead presentation form of “B” is displayed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 56, the pre-read per type performance pattern includes the following patterns A) to E). In addition, in this example, for the pattern that changes from the jackpot type look-ahead performance form to the time-saving hit type look-ahead performance form, and the pattern that changes from the time-saving hit type look-ahead performance form to the long-short hit look-ahead performance form, the look-ahead hit type performance pattern However, these patterns may be included in the per-prefetch type performance pattern.
B) A look-ahead performance pattern for time-saving winnings (for example, a look-ahead performance pattern for a time-saving win) in which a time-saving winning look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time it is suspended, and the time-saving winning look-ahead performance form is displayed without changing the performance form thereafter. "09H").
B) A look-ahead jackpot performance pattern in which a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the performance form does not change after that, and the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form is displayed (for example, look-ahead winning type performance pattern “17H”) ).
c) At the time of suspension, a common win type look-ahead performance pattern is displayed, and then it changes to a time-saving win type look-ahead performance pattern A (for example, a look-ahead win type performance pattern "24H").
d) A look-ahead common win performance pattern B (for example, a look-ahead win type performance pattern "12H") that is displayed in a common win type look-ahead performance form when it is suspended, and then changes to a jackpot type look-ahead performance form.
E) At the time of suspension, the common winning type look-ahead effect is displayed, and the effect type does not change after that, and the common win type look-ahead effect is displayed. (For example, look-ahead common winning performance pattern C pattern "06H").

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the per-reading type performance pattern determination table number determination table (for example, see FIG. ) to determine. Then, the sub CPU 301 refers to the per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 56), and based on the determined per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the random value 1 for sub-performance selection, A pre-read per type performance pattern (SAS performance pattern) is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 56, the time-saving win type look-ahead performance form of "A" is displayed at the time of suspension, and the look-ahead win type performance pattern that changes to the jackpot type look-ahead performance form of "B" thereafter is not shown. However, in this way, the sub-CPU 301 may determine the pre-read winning type presentation pattern that changes from the time-saving winning pre-read presentation form of "A" to the jackpot-based pre-read presentation form of "B". By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest that can be given to the player by the look-ahead effect.

In addition, in FIG. 56, the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form of "B" is, as described above, a jackpot-based look-ahead that indicates that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (that is, it may be a loss). In addition to this, a jackpot confirmation pre-reading presentation form may be displayed that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot confirmation. In this case, the pre-reading type effect pattern determined by the sub CPU 301 may include any or all of the following pre-reading type effect patterns f) to h).
F) Pre-reading jackpot confirmed performance pattern A in which the jackpot confirmed pre-reading performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the jackpot confirmed pre-reading performance form is displayed without changing the performance form thereafter.
g) At the time of suspension, other look-ahead presentation forms (for example, "A" time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form, "B" jackpot-based look-ahead presentation form, "C" common winning look-ahead presentation form, etc.) are displayed. Then, the look-ahead jackpot confirmed performance pattern B changes to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form.
H) At the time of suspension, other look-ahead presentation forms (for example, "A" time-saving winning look-ahead showing form, "C" common winning look-ahead showing form, etc.) are displayed, and then "B" jackpot winning look-ahead showing form, etc. A pre-reading jackpot confirmation presentation pattern C in which a pre-reading presentation form is displayed and then further changed to a jackpot confirmation pre-reading presentation form.

In addition, in FIG. 56, among the time-saving look-ahead presentation form of “A”, the jackpot-based look-ahead presentation form of “B”, and the common win-based look-ahead presentation form of “C”, at the time of suspension, “C” Although the common winning look-ahead presentation form is displayed most often, it is not limited to this. For example, at the time it is put on hold, the display frequency of "A"'s time-saving look-ahead presentation form may be the highest, and at the time it is put on hold, the display frequency of "B"'s jackpot-like look-ahead presentation form may be the highest. It may be made higher. Furthermore, at the time of suspension, the display frequency of the common win type look-ahead presentation form of "C" may be the lowest.

In addition, in FIG. 56, a random value 1 for sub-effect selection with a predetermined width is assigned to all “pre-fetch performance type performance pattern determination table numbers (SASPT numbers)”, but this is not limited to this, and a specific SASPT number It may also be possible not to allocate a random number value for sub-performance selection only to (that is, to set the distribution rate of a specific SASPT number to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-2-2. [Table referenced in the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination process]
Next, a table referred to in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be explained.

FIG. 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value production pattern determination table (at the time of a win) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit." Further, FIG. 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss.

By the way, the form of the pending image in which the look-ahead effect is executed according to the determined look-ahead expected value effect pattern differs depending on the expected value for a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot).

When a pending image is displayed as a time-saving look-ahead effect, for example, the shape of the pending image, which is normally represented by a triangle, may be changed to "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star." The change in expected value can be expressed by . In this case, the expected value is the lowest when the retained image is a square, and the highest when the retained image is a star.

In addition, when a pending image is displayed as a jackpot-type look-ahead effect, for example, the pending image, which is normally displayed in white, may be changed to a color such as "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow." The change in expected value can be expressed by . In this case, when the pending image is blue, the expected value is the lowest, and when the pending image is a rainbow, the expected value is the highest.

Although the details will be described later, in the case where a pending image is displayed as a common winning look-ahead effect that indicates that there is a possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit, the pending image can be used as an expected value for a jackpot, for example. It may be expressed by both the color indicating the level and the shape indicating the expected value level for the time saving win, or it may be expressed by a dedicated common win system look-ahead presentation form.

A pending image in which look-ahead presentation is performed can change from a presentation form with a relatively low expected value to a presentation form with a relatively high expected value, but the expected value may change from a presentation form with a relatively high expected value to a presentation form with a relatively high expected value. It is preferable not to change to a low performance form. Also, when changing the presentation form of the held image, it is not necessarily necessary to change it one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star" or "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow." , for example, it may be changed to "pentagon → circle" or "yellow → rainbow". Further, the shape of the pending image does not necessarily have to start from the square or blue, which has the lowest expected value, but may start from a circle or red, for example.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (reservation correspondence) in FIG. 57 indicate the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area, respectively, similarly to FIG. 56.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the notes (reservation support) in FIG. ~ "5" indicates a high expected value for a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot). For example, the above-mentioned "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above-mentioned "square" and "blue" correspond to "1", and the above-mentioned "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2". The above "hexagon" and "green" correspond to "3", the above "circle" and "red" correspond to "4", and the above "star" and "rainbow" correspond to "5". ”.

Hereinafter, in each column of "1" to "4" in the notes (suspension support) in FIG. 57, "0" is shown corresponding to the prefetch per type performance pattern determination table number and the random number value 2 for sub performance selection. to "5" are referred to as expected value levels "0" to "5".

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit" or "big hit", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is, for example, as shown in the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination table (at the time of win) in FIG. It is determined based on the number of reservations and the random number value 2 for sub performance selection. Similarly, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the pre-read expected value performance pattern is, for example, the number of reservations, as shown in the pre-read expected value performance pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in FIG. It is determined based on the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection. The random number value 2 for sub performance selection is a random number extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when receiving a special symbol variation pattern command, for example. Note that in FIGS. 57 and 58, only the cases where the number of reservations is "1" to "3" are illustrated, and the illustration of the case where the number of reservations is "4" is omitted for convenience.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the number of reservations is "3", and the random value 2 for sub performance selection is "750", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H". . For example, if the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H", the expected value level is "2" in the third holding area, and the expected value level is "2" when shifting from the third holding area to the second holding area. The expected value level changes from "3" to "5" when shifting from the second reservation area to the first reservation area.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the number of reservations is "3", and the random value 2 for sub performance selection is "680", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "3FH". be done. For example, if the look-ahead expected value production pattern is determined to be "3FH", the expected value level is "2" in the third holding area, the expected value level is "2" in the second holding area, and the expected value level is changed from the second holding area to the first holding area. When shifting to the area, the expected value level changes from "2" to "4".

In this way, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the sub CPU 301 selects the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of winning) (see FIG. 57) or the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) (see FIG. 58). ), a look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined based on the number of reservations and the random number value 2 for sub effect selection.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit" or "big hit", the distribution rate of each look-ahead expected value performance pattern is not limited to the distribution rate shown in FIG. 57, and can be changed as appropriate. It is.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "lose", the selection rate of look-ahead expected value production patterns with relatively low expected value levels (for example, "01H", "0BH", etc.) will be increased, etc. Although the distribution is biased, the distribution is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, for example, by distributing the distribution evenly.

In addition, in FIGS. 57 and 58, a random value 2 for sub-performance selection with a predetermined width is assigned to all "ahead expected value performance patterns", but this is not limited to a specific "ahead expected value performance pattern". It is also possible to not allocate the random value 2 for sub-effect selection only to `` (that is, to set the distribution rate of a specific ``look-ahead expected value effect pattern'' to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-3. Ahead production pattern determination process]
Next, the prefetch effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to the tables of FIGS. 54 to 58 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is an example of a flowchart showing the prefetch effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301. Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance pattern determination process only in the normal gaming state in which left-handed hitting is the normal gaming mode, but the invention is not limited to this.

First, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not it has received the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201 (S3001).

If the winning command has not been received (NO in S3001), the sub CPU 301 ends the pre-read effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (YES in S3001), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pending target for pre-reading is not present, that is, whether or not a pre-reading effect is being executed for the current pending. If there are a plurality of pending images, the pre-reading effect may be performed on a plurality of pending images, but in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed only on one pending image.

If the pre-read effect is being executed for the current hold (NO in S3002), the sub CPU 301 ends the pre-read effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the prefetch effect is not executed for the current hold (YES in S3002), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the variation pattern information received in the winning command is subject to pre-reading (see FIG. 55).

If the variation pattern information received in the winning command is not a prefetch target (NO determination in S3003), the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetch performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern information received in the winning command is to be prefetched (YES in S3003), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than, for example, the upper limit number that can be reserved (for example, 4 or 8). This process is to avoid shifting to the B time-saving game state before the variable display of special symbols is executed for the reservation for which the pre-read effect has been performed, even though the pre-read effect has been performed. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3005.

In addition, in this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is larger than the upper limit number that can be reserved. If it is a prefetch target (YES in S3003), it may be determined whether the number of reservations including the prefetch target is larger than the pending number. Further, the ceiling value and the ceiling counter may receive information from the main CPU 201 as a command, or may be managed by the sub CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201.

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination processing. In this process, the per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table number is determined by referring to the per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch type performance pattern determination processing. In this process, the pre-reading type effect pattern is determined by referring to the pre-reading type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit." In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined based on the fluctuation pattern information received in the winning command sent from the main CPU 201, and a YES determination is made if the result is a "time-saving hit" or "jackpot". be done. However, the invention is not limited to this, and a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit" may be determined by transmitting winning/losing information of special symbols from the main CPU 201 to the sub CPU 301.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit" (YES determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3008.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is neither a "time-saving hit" nor a "big hit" (NO determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead expected value effect pattern (at the time of winning) determination process. In this process, a look-ahead effect pattern (at the time of a win) is determined by referring to the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of a win) in FIG. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 completes the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

Further, in S3009, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead performance pattern determination process in case of loss. In this process, a look-ahead expected value performance pattern (when a loss occurs) is determined with reference to the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination table (when a loss occurs) in FIG. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 completes the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Effects of pre-reading effects, examples of expansion of pre-reading effects]
In the above-mentioned look-ahead presentation, it is not only interesting to see whether the form of the pending image changes to a jackpot-type look-ahead effect or a time-saving look-ahead effect, but also the expected value of a hit (jackpot, time-saving hit). It is possible to change the level, and it is possible to increase the interest by performing new performances that have never been seen before. Note that the timing of changing the form of the pending image is not limited to when the pending is shifted, but may be, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In addition, regarding the form of the held image performed as a pre-reading effect (for example, the form of the held image displayed within the range of the first sub-holding area (4) to the first sub-holding area (1)), the first starting port 120 The form of the pending image in the variable display of the special symbol may be determined at the time of starting the variable display of the special symbol.

By the way, the probability of being determined to a variation pattern in which a look-ahead effect is executed in a look-ahead time-saving winning effect pattern (see, for example, "03H" and "0EH" in FIG. 54), and the variation in which a look-ahead effect is executed in a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern. When compared with the probabilities determined for the patterns (see, for example, "06H" and "11H" in FIG. 54), the former probability is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15). That is, the execution rate of the look-ahead performance is higher in the look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern than the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko machines in which the look-ahead performance is performed only when there is a possibility of a jackpot, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the look-ahead performance while suppressing a drop in the expected value of a hit, increasing the interest. It is possible to increase it.

Note that the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern may be higher than the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the expected value for a jackpot is higher than the expected value for a time-saving hit, so it is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a gaming state where the probability change flag is off (in this embodiment, normal gaming state, low probability time-saving gaming state), it is possible to win a "time-saving hit" in the special symbol winning determination process (Fig. 10 reference). However, in this embodiment, although the look-ahead performance is performed in the normal game state, the look-ahead performance is not performed in the low-accuracy time-saving game state. Even if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state is "time-saving hit", when executing the C-time-saving gaming state over the A-time-saving gaming state, and for the A-time-saving gaming state. In any case where the C time saving game state is not executed repeatedly, the possibility that the number of time saving times will increase is low. Therefore, by making sure that the player does not know that he or she may have won a "time-saving win" in the A-time-saving gaming state, the disappointment caused to the player by winning the "time-saving win" is reduced. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the look-ahead effect from being performed in the low-accuracy time-saving game state, and it is necessary to ensure that the look-ahead effect is not performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-accuracy time-saving game state and the high-accuracy low time-saving game state. It's okay. Further, in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading effect may be performed for the second special symbol as well.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, a time-saving hit type reach, a jackpot type reach, or a common reach can be executed as the sub-variable performance pattern. In this embodiment, as can be seen from FIGS. 15 and 54 to 56, when the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect with the look-ahead time-saving hit effect pattern, the sub-CPU 301 executes the time-saving hit type reach as the sub-variable effect pattern. And do not execute jackpot type reach. Further, when the sub CPU 301 executes the pre-reading performance using the pre-reading jackpot performance pattern, the sub CPU 301 executes the jackpot-based reach as the sub-variable performance pattern, and does not execute the time-saving winning-based reach.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance with the look-ahead time-saving winning performance pattern or the look-ahead common winning performance pattern, it is possible to execute the time-saving winning type reach as the sub variable performance pattern. However, when the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern, it does not execute the time-saving hit type reach as the sub-variable performance pattern.

In addition, the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type performance pattern (SAS performance pattern) “37H” shown in FIG. 56) and the look-ahead time short hit performance pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type performance pattern “29H” shown in FIG. 56) '') and the pre-read common winning effect pattern (for example, the pre-read effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) "27H" shown in FIG. 56), the sub CPU 301 executes the sub variable effect pattern. A common reach (for example, sub variation effect patterns "0AH" and "0BH" shown in FIG. 55) may be executed as a common reach.

Further, a production pattern may be provided in which a short-time winning type reach is executed, and after a loss is clearly indicated in the time-saving winning type reaching, a jackpot type reaching is executed. In this case, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation until the end as to whether or not a jackpot-type reach with a high profit rate will be executed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, when common reach E is executed in the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "target variation") performed for the starting information for which the look-ahead effect has been executed, common reach C and After the common performance is displayed, it is possible to shift to the performance common to the jackpot type reach C. On the other hand, if no performance common to the common reach C is performed, there is no transition to the jackpot type reach C. Similarly, when the common reach E is executed in the target variation, after the presentation common to the common reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the presentation common to the short time winning reach C. On the other hand, if no performance common to the common reach C is executed, the shift to the time-saving hit type reach C does not occur.

By the way, in this embodiment, the prefetch effect is performed only for one pending image (see S3002). Therefore, even if a look-ahead presentation mode (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot look-ahead effect") indicating that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be a jackpot has already been executed, the sub CPU 301 will Do not perform look-ahead effects. Note that even if the machine is a pachinko game machine in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a plurality of pending images, if a jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed, it is preferable not to perform a new look-ahead effect.

For example, an arbitrary hold (hereinafter referred to as "first hold") and another hold whose variable display of special symbols starts after this first hold (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") ), and if a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern (for example, look-ahead hit type effect pattern "17H" in Fig. 56) is executed in the first hold, the look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. Even if it is executed, there is a possibility that the look-ahead effect in this second suspension will be meaningless. In particular, when a jackpot is derived for the first hold and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and after this jackpot gaming state ends, it is controlled to the A time-saving gaming state, for example, a "time-saving hit" is derived for the second hold. Even so, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to benefit from this "time saving", and in this case, the player's interest will be significantly reduced. Therefore, when the jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect for a hold that will be expired later than the hold for which the jackpot look-ahead effect is being executed.

Furthermore, even if the first hold is a jackpot hold (a hold from which a jackpot is derived), if the look-ahead effect has not been executed for the first hold, the look-ahead effect will not be executed for the second hold. You may or may not need to do so.

Further, even when a fake jackpot look-ahead performance (for example, look-ahead hit type performance pattern "53H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to perform the look-ahead effect in the second hold.

However, if a time-saving look-ahead performance (for example, the look-ahead performance pattern "05H" in Figure 56) is being executed in the first hold, the jackpot look-ahead effect or the time-saving look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. It's okay. This is because even if a time-saving win is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot with a higher degree of profit than that.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in a pachinko gaming machine that includes a small win in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the first pachinko game machine does not include a small hit in the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Even when the winning look-ahead performance is being executed, the jackpot look-ahead performance or the time-saving win look-ahead performance may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot that is more profitable than that.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small hit, there is a look-ahead performance mode (hereinafter referred to as "small hit look-ahead performance") that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit. ) is being executed in the first hold, a jackpot look-ahead effect or a time-saving hit look-ahead effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to make the player expect a small win with a higher degree of profit than that.

Further, when a prize is won in the first starting opening 120 and the starting information is suspended during execution of a jackpot type reach as a sub variable performance pattern, the sub CPU 301 does not perform a pre-reading performance regarding this suspension.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the prefetch effect only in the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the starting information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the pre-read determination performed by the main CPU 201 is pending (this In this paragraph, this suspension is referred to as "specific suspension"), and regardless of whether a pre-reading effect is executed or a pre-reading effect is not executed for this specific pending, the sub CPU 301 will execute the system after the end of the jackpot gaming state. , If the game is not in the normal gaming state, the prefetch effect is not executed for the specific hold. However, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to perform the pre-read performance for the specific hold even if the game is in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, even if the pachinko gaming machine executes a look-ahead effect in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), when the jackpot display mode is derived, If there is a hold, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute a pre-reading performance for the specific hold after the jackpot gaming state ends.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the starting information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the pre-read determination performed by the main CPU 201 is pending (this In this paragraph, this hold is referred to as a "specific hold"), and even if this specific hold is a hold for a "time-saving hit", after the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 201 executes the C time-saving game based on the "time-saving hit". It may not be controlled by the state. For example, if the specification is such that multiple time-saving gaming states are not executed in duplicate when the time-saving gaming states overlap, and if the control is made to the A-time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the specific hold is set to "time-saving winning". ”, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time-saving game state based on the “time-saving win”.

[1-10. Specific example of look-ahead production]
Specific examples of the look-ahead effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 is capable of executing a prefetch effect using a pending image based on a command sent from the main CPU 201.

[1-10-1. Specific example when a look-ahead performance is performed in a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead performance pattern and a look-ahead expected value performance pattern. Here, first, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 60, in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern as the above-mentioned look-ahead hit type effect pattern.

FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are examples of look-ahead effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, in which the jackpot-type look-ahead effect pattern that indicates that there is a possibility of a jackpot changes. It is a diagram showing a process. Note that the pre-read per type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) correspond to "1CH", "3CH", "58H", or "78H" in FIG. 56. Further, the look-ahead expected value performance patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value performance patterns shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are omitted from illustration in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f), a first reservation area 411 to a fourth reservation area 414 are displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7. As described above, the first reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 414 are areas that indicate whether or not reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), respectively. be. Further, the 0th area 410 is an area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (0) in which information corresponding to the change is stored.

In this embodiment, when the reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area, the sub CPU 301 stores the reservation areas 411 to 414 corresponding to the first sub-reservation area where the reservation information is stored, as indicated by triangles. A pending image (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pending image") is displayed. Moreover, when no reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area, the sub CPU 301 does not display the reservation image, but displays only the frame of the reservation area.

In FIG. 60(a), the first holding area 411 to the third holding area 413 display normal holding images in which no prefetch effect is executed, and the fourth holding area 414 displays a holding image. Only the frame is displayed. This indicates that reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation areas (1) to (3) and that no reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (4).

In FIG. 60(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the fourth pending area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 60(a). This indicates that reservation information has been newly stored in the first sub-reservation area (4) from the state shown in FIG. 60(a).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the formats (for example, colors) of the pending images shown in the first pending area 411 to the fourth pending area 414 differently depending on the expected value for the jackpot. In this embodiment, except for rainbows, differences in colors are illustrated by shading of colors.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60(b), the color of the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level "0"), and the color shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is white (expected value level "0"). The color of the held image that is displayed is blue (expected value level "1").

FIG. 60(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60(b), and the color of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in FIG. 60(b) is changed. This is an image showing that the color changes from blue to yellow (expected value level "2") when shifted to the third reservation area 413.

FIG. 60(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60(c), and the color of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in FIG. 60(c) is , is an image showing that the color changes from yellow to green (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reservation area 412.

FIG. 60(e) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60(d), and the color of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 60(d) is , is an image showing that the color changes from green to red (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411.

FIG. 60(f) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60(e), and the color of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in FIG. 60(e) is changed. , is an image showing that the color changes from red to rainbow (expected value level "5") when shifted to the 0th area 410.

Furthermore, the color of the pending image indicating the expected value for the jackpot (expected value level) does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending is shifted; for example, it may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change. .

In addition, in FIG. 60, the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the jackpot is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, the jackpot confirmation look-ahead performance form can be used to change the jackpot-based look-ahead performance form. The sub CPU 301 may execute a prefetch effect that changes the effect form. In this case, the expected value level may be changed at the same time before changing to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance mode.

[1-10-2. Specific example of a case where a look-ahead performance is performed using a look-ahead time-saving performance pattern]
Next, a specific example of a case where a look-ahead performance is performed in a look-ahead time-saving performance pattern as the above-mentioned look-ahead performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, in which a time-saving win type look-ahead performance pattern indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving win is shown. It is a figure showing the process of change. It should be noted that the look-ahead time saving hit type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) correspond to "0EH", "2EH", "4AH", or "6AH" in FIG. 56. Furthermore, the look-ahead expected value performance patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value performance patterns shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) are omitted from illustration in FIG.

In FIG. 61(a), the first holding area 411 to the third holding area 413 display normal holding images in which no prefetch effect is executed, and the fourth holding area 414 displays a holding image. Only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 61(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the fourth pending area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61(a). As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the formats (for example, shapes) of the pending images shown in the first pending area 411 to the fourth pending area 414 differently depending on the expected value for time saving.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expected value for a jackpot is represented by the color of the reserved image, and the expected value for a time-saving hit is represented by the shape of the reserved image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61(b), the shapes of the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 are triangular (expected value level "0"), and the shapes shown in the fourth reserved area 414 are triangular (expected value level "0"). The shape of the retained image is a rectangle (expected value level "1").

FIG. 61(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(b), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in FIG. 61(b) is , is an image showing that the shape changes from a quadrangle to a pentagon (expected value level "2") when shifted to the third reservation area 413.

FIG. 61(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(c), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in FIG. 61(c) is , is an image showing that the shape changes from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reservation area 412.

FIG. 61(e) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(d), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 61(d) is , is an image showing that the shape changes from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411.

FIG. 61(f) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(e), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in FIG. 61(e) is , is an image showing that when shifted to the 0th area 410, the circle changes to a star (expected value level "5").

Note that the shape of the pending image indicating the expected value for time saving does not necessarily need to be changed one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star"; for example, it may be changed from "pentagon → circle". You may let them.

In addition, the shape of the pending image (expected value level) that indicates the expected value for the time-saving hit does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending is shifted; for example, it may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change. good.

In addition, in FIG. 61, the time-saving winning type look-ahead effect is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the time-saving win is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, the following look-ahead effect may be used. It may also be executed by the sub CPU 301. In this case, the expected value level may be changed at the same time before changing to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance mode.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a short-time winning look-ahead look to a jackpot look-ahead look.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a time-saving win-based look-ahead performance to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a time-saving win type look-ahead performance form to a jackpot type look-ahead performance form, and then changes to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form.

[1-10-3. Specific example when a look-ahead performance is performed using a look-ahead common winning performance pattern]
Next, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 62, in which a pre-reading effect is performed using a common pre-reading effect pattern as the above-mentioned pre-reading per-type effect pattern.

FIGS. 62(a) to 62(d) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are common hits that indicate the possibility of both jackpots and time-saving hits. It is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a pre-read effect type to a pre-read effect type jackpot type. Changes in the look-ahead production format for common winning systems include a change in the expected value level of a win (time-saving hit, jackpot), and a change to make it clear whether the type of win is a jackpot or a time-saving hit. is included. Note that the pre-read per type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 62(a) to 62(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 62(d) correspond to “43H” in FIG. 57.

In this example, as a common win-based look-ahead presentation form that indicates that there is a possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit, both a color indicating the expected value level for the jackpot and a shape indicating the expected value level for the time-saving hit are used. It is expressed by displaying.

In FIG. 62(a), the first holding area 411 and the second holding area 412 display a normal holding image in which the prefetch effect is not executed, and the third holding area 413 and the fourth holding area 414 display a normal holding image. The held image is not displayed, only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 62(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62(a). The sub CPU 301 displays the formats (for example, colors and shapes) of the pending images shown in the first pending area 411 to the fourth pending area 414 differently depending on the expected value for a hit (big hit or time-saving hit). . In this embodiment, when the look-ahead effect is not executed or when the expected value for a hit is the lowest, the pending image is displayed as a white triangle, and the image is displayed as a white triangle. The expected value for a short hit increases in the order of ``star''.

In this example, in FIG. 62(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 is a white triangle (expected value level "0"), and the form of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 is The format of the retained image shown in 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2").

FIG. 62(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(b), and the form of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in FIG. 62(b) is , is an image showing that the yellow pentagon has changed to the green hexagon (expected value level "3") when being shifted to the second reservation area 412.

FIG. 62(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(c), and the form of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 62(c) is , when shifted to the first holding area 411, from a green hexagon (a common winning look-ahead presentation form with an expected value level of ``3'') to a rainbow triangle (a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form with an expected value level of ``5'') This is an image showing the change.

In other words, the look-ahead effect shown in FIGS. 62(b) and 62(c) determines whether the format of the pending image is a format that indicates the expected value for a jackpot or a format that indicates the expected value for a time-saving hit. This is a performance that is difficult to grasp from its form. On the other hand, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 62(d), the format of the pending image indicates the expected value for a jackpot, and the expected value is extremely high (for example, expected value level "5"). It is possible to grasp something.

As described above, in this embodiment, depending on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the look-ahead performance is divided into a look-ahead time-saving performance pattern that shows the expected value for a time-saving hit, and a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern that shows the expected value for the jackpot. , a pre-read common winning effect pattern indicating an expected value for a win (big hit or time-saving win). Then, when a look-ahead effect is executed using the look-ahead common winning effect pattern, the player is given an interesting idea of whether the pending image will change into a jackpot-type look-ahead effect form or a time-saving win-type look-ahead effect form. This makes it possible to increase interest.

Note that the format of the pending image that shows the expected value for time savings does not necessarily need to be changed one by one in the order of "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star." Instead, for example, it may be changed to "yellow pentagon (common winning type look-ahead performance form) → red triangle (jackpot type look-ahead performance form)" or "green hexagon (common winning type look-ahead performance form) → It may be changed to a triangular star (a time-saving look-ahead production form). Further, the form of the pending image indicating the expected value for winning does not necessarily have to start from the blue rectangle with the lowest expected value, but may start from the red circle, for example.

Further, the form of the pending image indicating the expected value for winning does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending is shifted, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In addition, in FIG. 62, the common winning system look-ahead performance format is changed to change the expected value from which any winning (jackpot or time-saving hit) is derived, or to change the expected winning from an unknown state to a jackpot. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU 301 may execute the prefetch effect shown below, for example. In this case, the expected value level may be changed at the same time before changing to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance mode.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a common winning look-ahead performance form to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a common winning look-ahead performance form to a jackpot look-ahead performance form, and then further changes to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form.

[1-10-4. Variations of the common winning look-ahead production format]
In addition, as the form of the pending image, the common winning look-ahead presentation form that indicates the possibility of both jackpot and time-saving winning does not necessarily include the color indicating the expected value for the jackpot and the shape indicating the expected value for the time-saving winning. It is not limited to the form expressed by both. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common winning look-ahead presentation form may be provided. When creating a dedicated common win-based look-ahead performance format, it becomes possible to have expectations for both jackpots and time-saving hits, and since the expected value of each is unknown, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for both jackpots and short-time wins, and since the expected value of each is unknown, it will be possible to change the performance format in the future. The player can now play the game with a sense of anticipation, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, with pending images changing from the dedicated common winning look-ahead performance form to the jackpot look-ahead performance form. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a process in which Note that the look-ahead per-type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 63(d) correspond to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG. 58.

Further, FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, ranging from a dedicated common winning look-ahead performance form to a time-saving winning look-ahead performance form. It is a figure which shows the process by which a pending image changes. Note that the pre-read per type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) correspond to "07H", "27H", "43H", or "63H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 64(d) correspond to “31H” in FIG. 57 or 58.

In FIG. 63(a) and FIG. 64(a), a normal pending image in which no prefetch effect is performed is displayed in the first pending area 411 and the second pending area 412, and the third pending area 413 and the second pending area 412 are displayed. No pending image is displayed in the 4 pending area 414, and only a frame is displayed.

In FIG. 63(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 63(a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64(a).

In both FIGS. 63(b) and 64(b), the form of the pending image shown in the third holding area 413 is a dedicated common winning look-ahead presentation form, and is, for example, a shining form. By changing the degree of brightness of the light, the expected value level can be changed.

FIG. 63(c) is an image in which the reservation is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63(b), and the dedicated common winning system that was displayed in the third reservation area 413 in FIG. 63(b) This is an image showing that the prefetch effect form is shifted to the second reservation area 412 without changing the form.

Similarly, FIG. 64(c) is an image in which the reservation is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(b), and the dedicated This is an image showing that the common winning look-ahead presentation form has been shifted to the second reservation area 412 in the same form.

FIG. 63(d) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63(c), and the form of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 63(c) is , is an image showing that when shifted to the first holding area 411, the dedicated common winning look-ahead presentation form changes to a red triangle (expected jackpot value level "4").

On the other hand, FIG. 64(d) is an image in which the pending status is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(c), and the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 64(c) is This is an image showing that when the form is shifted to the first reservation area 411, it changes from the dedicated common winning look-ahead presentation form to a white circle (expected value level of time saving per win "4").

In this way, even if the look-ahead presentation form is expressed as a dedicated common win-based look-ahead presentation form, the dedicated common win-based look-ahead presentation form can be changed to the jackpot-based look-ahead presentation form and the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form. It is possible to make the player find it interesting to see how the game will change, and it is possible to increase interest.

[1-11. Signal output outside the aircraft]
Next, the signal is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), the island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Explain about signals. In this embodiment, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be explained, but it may be possible to input a signal from outside the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each channel of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko game machine include, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8". ”, “Prize Ball Information 2” and “Security”. However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals. The configuration may be such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 65 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 65, CN1 outputs the "prize ball information 1" signal, CH2 outputs the "door/frame open" signal, and CH3 to CH10 output "external information 1" to Each signal of "external information 8" is output, the signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and the signal of "security" is output from CH12. Note that the conditions for outputting signals from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in FIG. 65.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be explained using a signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. In addition, as shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 66 is an example of a timing chart of the "prize ball information 1" signal among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the payout detection switch (not shown) is turned from off to on every time one prize ball is paid out. As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the grand prize opening 131 (see FIG. 4), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out and the starting hole (first starting hole 120 or second starting hole 120) If a game ball enters the starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4), for example, three prize balls will be paid out, and if a game ball enters the general winning hole 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, four prize balls will be paid out. The prize ball is paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for, for example, 120 msec every time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the "prize ball information 1" signal for a period of 120 msec, for example, at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on starting from the previous output of the "prize ball information 1" signal. Outputs a signal of "Information 1". Note that outputting the "prize ball information 1" signal at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is just an example; for example, when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on. Any time between turning on and turning off is sufficient. In addition, outputting the signal of "prize ball information 1" every time 10 prize balls are paid out or outputting for 120 msec is only an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "prize ball information 1" can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be explained. The "security" signal is a signal that is output mainly when an error occurs.

FIG. 67 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. More specifically, for each error name, the occurrence trigger in the main control circuit 200, the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) 67 is a table showing the release trigger, the output time of the "security" signal (indicated as "security signal" in FIG. 67), and notes.

Although the first pachinko game machine does not have a large winning opening for small winnings, FIG. 67 also describes an abnormal winning error in the large winning opening for small winnings for convenience. Moreover, in FIG. 67, the big winning hole 131 is described as the big winning hole for jackpot.

Note that the outline of errors shown in FIG. 67 is just an example, and only some of them may be determined to be errors, or, for example, those not shown in FIG. 67 may be determined to be errors. You can do it like this. Things that are not shown in FIG. 67 but are determined to be errors include, for example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined period of time or more, If there is a game ball that has not been ejected inside the winning hole or the big winning hole for small winnings, or if there is a prize in the big winning hole when the big winning hole is not open, the abnormal error in entering and discharging the big winning hole, the vibration sensor will be activated for a predetermined period of time. This corresponds to a vibration sensor error when the sensor is on for a long time. Also, for example, if a specific area is provided in the jackpot jackpot, and the probability change control is executed after the jackpot game control ends based on the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control. In addition, abnormality in passing to a specific area, or when a game ball passes through a specific area even though there are no unejected game balls inside the jackpot jackpot, will be judged as an error. It is preferable to configure this.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the information related to fraud detection executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (both shown in FIG. 6) will be briefly described below, taking as an example a case where a jackpot abnormal prize winning error occurs.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, if one winning is detected after the initial power is turned on and before the first jackpot jackpot is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) It is determined that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the winning slot, and a "security" signal is output for 12 seconds. In addition, a fraud detection related command indicating that a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error has occurred is transmitted to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the error, so the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds, so that the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds. (Reference) and the island computer (not shown)) can detect the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot grasp the details of the error. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal depending on the content of the error, a device outside the aircraft that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. Good too.

For example, when the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives a fraud detection related command indicating a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, it executes all or part of the notification control shown below, and receives the fraud detection related command. When, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control described below is ended.
- Notification control for displaying, for example, characters such as "Big winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see FIG. 6, for example) via the display control circuit 304.
- Notification control that outputs a voice saying, for example, "Big winning slot abnormal prize winning error" from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6 for example) via the audio control circuit 305.
- Notification control that outputs, for example, a beep sound from the speaker 32 via the audio control circuit 305.
- Notification control in which the LED group 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) is all lit up in red, for example, via the LED control circuit 306.

Note that if there is a power outage before, for example, 30 seconds have passed since receiving the fraud detection related command, the sub CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

In addition, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives a fraud detection related command indicating a jackpot large winning opening abnormal winning error while executing the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of a jackpot large winning opening abnormal winning error, the sub CPU 301 performs the above-mentioned Execute notification control again.

Next, signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming state will be explained with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output outside the machine according to the gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 68, signals that are output are indicated by ◯, and signals that are not output are indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, the output signals differ depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, during the normal gaming state (other than jackpot/small winning, other than variable probability/time saving), no signal is output, and during the low probability time saving gaming state (other than jackpot, other than small winning), "External information 3" is output. ” and “external information 7” are output, and during high-accuracy time-saving gaming states (other than jackpots and small wins), “external information 3,” “external information 5,” and “external information 7” signals are output. Output. In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state, signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are output during the high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state (other than during jackpots and small wins). be done.

In this way, by varying the output signal depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, it is possible to transmit signals to devices outside the machine that can receive the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (see FIG. 6). (not shown)) can grasp the gaming status at the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small win game control process (during the normal game state) is It is the same as the signal output to the Similarly, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the low probability time saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the low probability time saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot, other than the small winning), The signal that is output during the small winning game control process (during the high accuracy time saving game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the high accuracy time saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot, other than during the small winning), The signal output during the control process (during the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot or small win). In other words, a device outside the machine that can receive the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) is used to control the execution of the small winning game control process in the pachinko machine that is the source of the external information. It is not possible to determine whether the However, instead of this, by making the signal that is output during the small winning game control process different from the signal that is output when the small winning game control process is not in progress, the small winning pachinko game machine that is the source of the external information can be It may be possible to determine whether or not the game control process is being executed by an external device that can receive the signal.

In addition, during the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. (during the time-saving game state) and during the small hit game control process (during the high-accuracy time-saving game state) are signals that are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, time saving control may be in progress when both electric support control and special figure shortening control are being executed, or it may be the case that only electric support control is being executed among electric support control and special figure shortening control. The time saving control may be in progress when the time saving control is executed, or the time saving control may be in progress when only the special figure shortening control among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control is being executed.

In addition, in the above description of the first pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to control the A time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state by controlling the main CPU (the functions of the A time saving gaming state, B Although the explanation has been made on the assumption that the function of the time-saving gaming state and the function of the C-time saving gaming state are installed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one function (for example, the function of the A time saving gaming state) is installed among the functions of the A time saving gaming state, the functions of the B working time saving gaming state, and the functions of the C time saving gaming state, and the other functions ( For example, the pachinko gaming machine may not be equipped with the function B for the time-saving gaming state and the function for the time-saving gaming state C). In addition, two of the functions of the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, and the C working time saving gaming state (for example, the A working time saving gaming state function, and the B working time saving gaming state function or the C working time saving function) It may be a pachinko gaming machine that is equipped with only the function of the game state) and not equipped with other functions (for example, the function of the B time-saving game state or the function of the time-saving game state C).

In addition, in a pachinko game machine such as a pachinko game machine called an ST machine, in which the probability change flag is set to on with a 100% probability after the end of the jackpot game state, A time-saving game state function, B time-saving game state function It may be configured such that neither the function of 1 nor the function of the time-saving gaming state C is installed.

[2. Second pachinko game machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be explained. As mentioned above, the second pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 pachinko game machine called DigiPachi. However, the second pachinko game machine differs from the first pachinko game machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Therefore, the game board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

In the following, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, for example, the basic structure of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal board 1184 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the outside of the second pachinko game machine will be explained. (For example, signals output to the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 described later) and the island computers (not shown) provided on each island), the function, shape, arrangement position, etc. of the first pachinko game machine We will omit explanations as much as possible regarding points in common with the above.

Furthermore, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the first pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the second pachinko game machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko game machine, The explanation shall be made using different symbols and step numbers than the machine.

By the way, as a pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are suspended, for example, A pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition of the first special symbol, and the first starting hole and the second starting hole. There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "sequential variable machine") in which a starting condition is established in the order of winnings.

[2-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 69, a game area 1105 is formed in the game board unit 1010.

Note that the various members arranged in the gaming area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 1120, etc.) are the same as the various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine (see FIG. 4). Although there are some things in common, I will explain them once again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 1110, and approximately the center of the game area 1105. A center accessory 1115 arranged in the section, a first starting opening 1120, a general winning opening 1122, a passing gate unit 1125, a special electric accessory unit 1130, a second starting opening 1140A, 1140B, and a normal electric winning opening. It includes an object unit 1145, a small winning unit 1150, an LED unit 1160, an outlet 1178, and a back unit (not shown) disposed behind the game board unit 1010. Note that the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the explanation will be omitted for this second pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 1100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. Further, on the front side of the game panel 1100, a guide rail 1110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the firing device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes its direction of travel while heading downwards in the game area 1105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 1100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Furthermore, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be provided in a portion to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arcuate outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are given). The game area 1105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 1116 above. The game balls launched towards the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

The game ball fired toward the game area 1105 by the firing device 1006 flows down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 collide with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 1100, and flow downward while changing the direction of travel. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 1106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 1107.

In addition, the center accessory 1115 has a warp entrance 1117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed on the center accessory 1115. The stage 1118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction at the lower front of the display area of the display device 1007. Note that the stage 1118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 1119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 1118 at approximately the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability of first starting than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 1117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 1117 but did not enter the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) in the opening 1120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 1120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 1120 described above, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When winning (passage) of a game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later), starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize winnings)
A plurality of general winning holes 1122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 1122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 1123 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later).

When the general winning hole switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later) detects winning (passage) of game balls to the general winning hole 1122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game ball to the general winning hole 1122 is paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 1122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of the general winning hole 1122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general prize-winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right area 1107, and includes a passage gate 1126 that is configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126. 1127 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later).

When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 1126 is detected by the passing gate switch 1127, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information of the normal symbol is held until a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). . The suspended normal symbol start information is provided to the normal symbol hit determination process. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the prize sphere is not paid out. Furthermore, the passage gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left region 1106 instead of or in addition to the right region 1107.

Further, the passage gate 1126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous activation device. That is, the condition for transitioning from a non-jackpot gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) to a jackpot gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device operate, but the stop display mode that indicates a jackpot When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the accessory continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated when the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later). It may be activated to shift to a jackpot game state.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 includes a jackpot jackpot 1131, a jackpot jackpot count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later) that detects winning (passage) of a game ball to the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131. , special electric accessories 1133 are integrated. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right side area 1107.

The jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 described above, a jackpot jackpot jackpot that can win a game ball hit to the left may be arranged, or a center accessory 1115 A jackpot prize opening for a jackpot in which a game ball can be won may be arranged in the upper part of the game machine.

In addition, the jackpot jackpot opening 1131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when the jackpot gaming state is controlled to be an advantageous gaming state for the player. This is the winning opening. When the jackpot jackpot count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later) detects that a game ball has entered the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 that operates the special electric shutter 1134 (see FIG. 70 described later). The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131, and in an open state that allows the game ball to enter (pass through) the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131. ) is impossible or difficult, and the state is configured to be transitionable. The state transition of the jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131 from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. It is in a gaming state.

(Second starting port)
In this embodiment, as second starting ports, a second starting port 1140A and a second starting port 1140B are arranged in the gaming area 1105, and both of these second starting ports 1140A and 1140B are used for right-handed players. The game ball cannot win (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to win a prize). However, the invention is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win a prize in the second starting opening 1140A and/or the second starting opening 1140B.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141A (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141B (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). Even if the game ball lands in either of the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B, it becomes a trigger for the second special symbol hit determination process.

When the second starting port switches 1141A, 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later) detect winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A, 1140B, starting information of the second special symbol is extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces) of start information that has been set is retained. The suspended starting information is provided for the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in this embodiment, on the downstream side as the flowing direction of the game ball that was hit to the right but did not enter the jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131, there are two vertically flowing paths 1107a and 1107b as the flowing path of the game ball. is formed. A game ball that is hit to the right and flows further downstream without entering the jackpot jackpot 1131 is sent to the upper flow path 1107a or the lower flow path 1107b by the branch nail 1108 shown in FIG. 69, for example. Can be sorted.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that game balls distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win prizes, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win prizes. However, it is not essential that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow route 1107a land in the second starting port 1140A. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a prize can be won with a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately 1/3 to 1/5) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a. In addition, the game balls that flowed down the upper flow path 1107a but did not enter the second starting port 1140A are configured to be discharged from the machine through the out port 1178.

The second starting port 1140B is arranged so that game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can be won, but details thereof will be described later in the description of the normal electric accessory unit 1145.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged on the downward flow path 1107b side, and has a prize opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball wins (passes through), and a prize mouth to this prize mouth. It is a unit body that integrates a switch that detects winning of game balls and a normal electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141B. However, it is not essential that the above-mentioned winning opening be the second starting opening 1140B, and for example, the first starting opening may be the above-mentioned winning opening.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 1147 that can be moved forward and backward, and a general electricity solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 70 described later) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 1147. The normal electric accessory 1146, that is, the shutter 1147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 1140B, and an open state in which it is impossible to enter a game ball into the second starting port 1140B. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. Note that instead of the general power shutter 1147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member, such as a blade member, called a so-called electric tulip, may be used. Moreover, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Small winning unit)
The small winning unit 1150 includes a small winning large winning opening 1151 and a small winning large winning opening count switch 1152 that detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the small winning large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 70 described later). It is a unit body that integrates a small hit shutter 1153 that can move forward and backward in the front and back direction, and a small hit solenoid 1154 that can operate this small hit shutter 1153.

By moving the small win shutter 1153 back and forth in the front and back direction, the small win shutter 1153 has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the small win large win opening 1151 and a game ball can enter the small win large win opening 1151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter a prize.

When a game ball wins when the small winning large winning opening 1151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small winning large winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). When a game ball is detected by the small winning big prize opening count switch 1152, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the small winning jackpot 1151 is not limited to ten.

Further, the small winning unit 1150 is arranged on the downstream side of the normal electric accessories unit 1145 in the lower flow path 1107b. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric accessory 1146, even if the small winning large prize opening 1151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the downward flow path 1107b is small. Before reaching the large winning opening 1151, the player enters the second starting opening 1140B provided on the upstream side, so it becomes difficult (or impossible) to win the small winning opening 1151.

In addition, in this embodiment, the big winning opening for jackpot 1131 and the big winning opening for small winning 1151 are provided separately, but the invention is not limited to this, and the big winning opening that is opened when the jackpot game control process is executed, The big winning hole opened at the time of execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning hole.

(Out port)
The out port 1178 is any of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 1120, the second starting port 1140A, 1140B, the jackpot jackpot 1131, the general winning port 1122, etc.) that are fired toward the gaming area 1105. This is to eject out of the machine any game balls that did not win. This out port 1178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 1105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 1178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between the plurality of general winning openings 1122 or between the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 and the small winning unit 1150, etc. The game balls flowing down the area 1105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100, as described above. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 1058 such as movable accessories controlled by a sub-control circuit 1300 (see FIG. 70 described later). The performance accessory group 1058 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 1007. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 1058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 70 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the second pachinko game machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko game machine, they will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 1300 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch. It is composed of a control circuit 1400 and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, processing executed when the power is turned on, processing related to gaming operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 1201. The main CPU 1201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for proceeding with the game. The main RAM 1203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201 and has a function of storing values of various flags and variables. Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 1203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 includes an I/O port 1205 that is connected to enable communication with various devices, and a command output port 1206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 1300 so as to output various commands. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol display section 1161, a normal symbol reserve display section 1162, a first special symbol display section 1163, a second special symbol display section 1164, a first special symbol reserve display section 1165, and a first special symbol display section 1165. 2. A reservation display section 1166 for special symbols, a display section 1167 for probability change notification, a display section 1168 for short-time notification, a solenoid 1148 for normal electricity, a solenoid 1135 for special electricity, a solenoid 1154 for small hit, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 1170, an error notification monitor 1172, and the like. Main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc., which will be described later, under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. It is also possible to display a setting confirmation code, etc. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 1200 includes a first starting port switch 1121, a second starting port switch 1141A, 1141B, a passing gate switch 1127, a big winning port count switch 1132 for jackpots, a general winning port switch 1123, and a large winning port switch for small winnings. A mouth count switch 1152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 1200 via I/O port 1205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and is used when transmitting data to a hall computer 1186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 1184, a setting key 1174 that is operated to change or confirm setting values if the pachinko game machine has a setting function (described later), and backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 are transferred to the gaming hall administrator. A backup clear switch 1176, etc., which can be cleared in response to an operation, is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later, but the invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing setting values may be provided.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 be housed in a predetermined case so that they cannot be easily touched by a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 1174 and backup clear switch 1176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that have a configuration that makes it impossible to access the setting key 1174 and backup clear switch 1176 in the case. When the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 1174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 1176.

Note that in this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this; It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the gaming parlor administrator from easily accessing the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, an audio control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, an accessory control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in FIG. 70, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the second pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub CPU 1301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A that converts image data into an image signal. Equipped with converter etc.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, performance image data, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 1032. The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command from the sub CPU 1301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP is for amplifying signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 1058). The accessory control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Furthermore, the accessory control circuit 1307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory operation command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 1308 is connected to command output port 1206 and receives various commands sent from main control circuit 1200.

The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/launch control circuit 1400 includes a payout device 1082 that can pay out game balls, and a payout device 1082 that makes the game balls fire. A firing device 1006 capable of controlling the player, a card unit 1180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 1400 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180. The ball rental operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. Note that although the operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

Further, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, the dispensing/firing control circuit 1400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). (not shown) to control the firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created in order to supply the power supply voltage necessary for gaming to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.

A power switch 1095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 1450. The power switch 1095 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. Although the second pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, there is a normal gaming state in which neither probability variable control nor time-saving control is executed, a high-precision time-saving gaming state in which both probability variable control and time-saving control are executed, and a probability-variable control but time-saving control is executed. There are a high probability non-time saving gaming state in which the game is not executed, and a low probability time saving gaming state in which the probability change control is not executed but the time saving control is executed. It is now possible to proceed. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 1201 is not limited to this, and any gaming state among the normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy time-saving gaming state can be progressed. You may choose not to do so. For example, the game may be made to proceed in any one of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the game may be prevented from proceeding in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. good.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal game mode in the normal gaming state, and right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 1301 executes control to display a normal game mode (for example, whether to play right or left) in the display area of the display device 1007, for example.

[2-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 71 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78 described below), that is, when a game ball enters the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1140A, 1140B. This is a table that is referred to when determining a "time saving win", "small hit", "big hit", or "loss" by lottery based on the random number value for jackpot determination extracted at the time of the lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the first special symbol hit determination process are "time saving win", "big hit", and "loss", and "small win" is not included in the lottery targets. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the second special symbol hit determination process are "time saving win", "small win", "big hit", and "loss". However, a "small hit" may be included in the lottery targets in the first special symbol hit determination process.

The random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process, as described above. In this embodiment, the random number value for jackpot determination is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination in the first special symbol hit determination process. The hit determination table of the first special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value for each value of the probability variable flag (0 or 1). Relationship with data, relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and range of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "loss" (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In addition, in the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 determines "time saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination. The hit determination table of the second special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1). Relationship with the data, relationship between the range (width) of the random value for jackpot determination determined as a “small hit” and the corresponding small hit determination value data, and the relationship between the random value for jackpot determination determined as a “jackpot” The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot judgment that is determined to be a "loss" and the corresponding loss judgment value data are defined. Ru.

In this embodiment, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 executes the "time-saving hit". ”, and the winning/losing judgment value data is determined as “time-saving winning judging value data”. In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and that it has not been won. The judgment value data is determined as "jackpot judgment value data." Further, if the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

Also, for example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 408, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined to be "time saving judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Further, if the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "lose" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". The judgment value data is determined as "time saving judgment value data". In addition, when the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit", The judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 22118 to 22322, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 22323 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines The value data is determined as "loss determination value data."

Further, for example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined to be "time saving judgment value data". In addition, when the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit", The judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data." In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 22118 to 22968, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines The value data is determined as "loss determination value data."

In this way, in this embodiment, for example, among the random numbers for jackpot determination that occur in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 22117 in the case of the second special symbol hit determination process), It is assigned to other judgment value data (for example, time-saving judgment value data and small hit judgment value data) other than the jackpot judgment value data and the loss judgment value data. In addition, the end of the predetermined value (for example, 22323 to 65535 if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing this, for example, when the probability change flag changes from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced ( or larger), it becomes possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data and small hit judgment value data).

In addition, in this example, the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, and the "time-saving win" winning probability when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. By making the probabilities different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed is compared to the "time-saving win" chance when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed. By making the winning probability higher than the winning probability of ``, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become a monotonous game.

However, the probability of winning a "time-saving win" when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving win" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed. It's okay. In this case, for example, if you win a "time-saving win" in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is overlapped, so that if you win the "time-saving win" just before the end of the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state will actually change. This will make it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving win" regardless of whether the probability change flag is on or off. . However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the main CPU 1201 controls to the time-saving gaming state if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving winning", but the probability variation flag is on. In this case, even if the result of the winning determination process is a "time saving win", the control is not made to the time saving gaming state.

[2-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 72 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stopping symbols based on the symbol random number of the special symbol extracted when a game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 or the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B and the winning/losing judgment value data mentioned above. This table is referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" that determine the symbol (that is, when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 in FIG. 78, which will be described later). The "selected symbol command" is a command for specifying a symbol determined according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for specifying the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a command for specifying. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201, for example, sends the selection symbol command and symbol designation command as follows. Select as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 selects a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command, for example, as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main CPU 1201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 2 to 9, the main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, for example, regardless of the symbol random number value of the first special symbol from 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 "z7" is selected as the command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, regardless of the symbol random number value of the special symbol being between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 executes the selected symbol command ``z10'' is selected as the symbol designation command, and ``zA8'' is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 executes the small hit game control process. In the small winning game control process, for example, the small winning shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) is operated to enable the game ball to enter (pass through) the small winning large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) or to open it easily. A prize ball can be paid out by executing control to set the state.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 30 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z12" as the selection symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selection symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z14" as the selection symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command.

In this example, the win/loss judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random value for jackpot judgment with reference to the special symbol hit judgment table (see Figure 71), and then the special symbol judgment table (see Figure 71) is determined. 72), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the winning or losing of the special symbol, the selection symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

Although the description is omitted in the second pachinko game machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbol stops. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions according to symbol commands. Further, in the special symbol display sections 1163 and 1164, a time saving win display mode, a jackpot display mode, a small win display mode, or a loss display mode is derived based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Further, a decorative symbol stopping manner determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stopping manner determining table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine is also stored in the program ROM 1302 of the sub control circuit 1300.

[2-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 73 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table is used when determining the winning gaming state and/or the subsequent gaming state (in other words, the following (When executing the hit type determination process in S1036 in FIG. 78). The form of the winning game state shown in FIG. 73 indicates the form of the jackpot gaming state or the form of the small winning gaming state. Further, the mode of the gaming state after that indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the winning gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C time-saving gaming state is controlled without being controlled to the winning gaming state, so the subsequent gaming state will be the C-time saving gaming state. Indicates the mode.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the aspect of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z8", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 50. Determine. When the selected symbol command is "z2" and "z9", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 100. Determine. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned time-saving hit display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164, and then Without controlling to the jackpot game state, the time saving flag is set on and the determined number of time saving times is set, thereby making it possible to control to the C time saving gaming state. In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving win", the win game state is not controlled, so the mode of the win game state is not determined. In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saving win", the set time saving number is the same regardless of the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set time saving number may be varied depending on the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times to be set is determined according to the selection symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. are different. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", it is possible to have variations in the subsequent progress of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 1201 performs a "time-saving winning" lottery as shown in FIG. 72, and the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". In this case, although the display mode of the time-saving win indicating that the "time-saving win" has been won is derived to the special symbol display sections 1163 and 1164, it is not controlled to the C time-saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 1201 performs a "time-saving win" lottery even if the probability change flag is on, and if the result of the win determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the display mode of the loss to a special symbol. The information may be displayed on the display sections 1163 and 1164. Furthermore, when the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving hit judgment value data may not be assigned to the random value for jackpot judgment, that is, the winning judgment process may be performed in which the "time-saving win" is not included in the lottery result. .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state where the time-saving flag is off even if the probability change flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving win", the system shifts to the high-probability time-saving gaming state. You can do it like this.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small win", the form of the winning game state and the form of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of openings of the small winning large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) to one time as the mode of the small winning gaming state. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small win", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned small win display mode to the second special symbol display section 1164, and then displays the determined small win big win. By setting the number of openings of the mouth 1151, it is possible to control the small winning game state. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small win", after the end of the small win game state, the main CPU 1201 does not change either the probability change flag or the time saving flag, and is controlled to the small win game state. Return to the previous gaming state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the form of the winning game state and the form of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z11", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds as 10 rounds as the jackpot gaming state, and sets the probability variable flag and time saving as the subsequent gaming state. Among the flags, it is decided to set only the probability variation flag to ON, and it is decided to set the probability variation number to 10,000 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164 and then switch to the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. becomes.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", and "z12", the main CPU 1201 sets the number of rounds to 10 rounds, 4 rounds, and 10 rounds, respectively, as the mode of the jackpot game state. decided on. In addition, as for the subsequent gaming state, in any case, it is decided to set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and it is decided to set both the probability variation number and the time saving number to 10,000. . In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, It becomes possible to control to a highly accurate time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z13", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds and 10, respectively, as the jackpot game state. In addition, as for the mode of the subsequent gaming state, in either case, it is decided to set only the time-saving flag of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag to ON. Further, the number of times to save time is determined to be set to, for example, 200 times when the selected symbol command is "z6", and to 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, It becomes possible to control the time-saving gaming state. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is the A-time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that the mode of time saving control in the high accuracy time saving gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as "time saving performance") is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state, but may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving gaming state. .

Furthermore, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), the main CPU 1201 determines the winning game state and None of the subsequent gaming state aspects are set. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 1201 continues to control the previous gaming state without changing the gaming state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), the aspect of the winning game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state aspects are set, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. 73. However, in this example, in order to clearly indicate that neither the winning game state nor the subsequent game state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 73.

In this way, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table in FIG. Win/loss determination value data is determined based on the random number value for jackpot determination (performing win/loss determination), and a win/loss (“time-saving win,” “small win,” “big hit,” or “loss”) is determined. Thereafter, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table in FIG. A selected symbol command is determined based on the winning/losing determination value data, and the type of display mode (for example, time saving type, jackpot type) derived to the special symbol display sections 1163, 1164 is determined. Note that the above-mentioned winning/losing determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that it is performed from the time the variable display of the special symbol begins until the final display. That's not the purpose.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 73, in this embodiment, the number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6") or 300 times. times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the number of time saving times in the C time saving game state that is controlled is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times. times (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). That is, the expected value of the number of time savings in the A time saving gaming state is higher than the expected value of the number of time saving times in the C time saving gaming state. In this way, by making the time-saving gaming state A more advantageous to the player than the time-saving gaming state C, it is possible to increase the position of the "jackpot". For example, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur due to winning a "jackpot" but being at a disadvantage compared to not winning a "jackpot" (winning a "time saving"). becomes.

In addition, instead of setting the expected value of the number of working hours in the A time saving game state to be higher than the expected value of the number of working hours in the C working time saving game state, the expected value of the number of working hours in the C working time saving gaming state is set as the expected value of the number of working hours in the A working time saving gaming state. The value may be set higher than the expected value. In this way, by making the time-saving game state C more advantageous for the player than the time-saving game state A, it is possible to increase the positioning of the "time-saving win". For example, even if the state continues for a long period of time without winning a "jackpot", if a "time-saving win" is won, the game is controlled to the relatively advantageous C-time-saving gaming state, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. It becomes possible to do so.

[2-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 74 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko game machine. Further, FIG. 75 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the second pachinko game machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. Note that the "Remarks" column in FIGS. 74 and 75 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 1201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 1120, and determines the second special pattern when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B. Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol. The special symbol variation pattern table in FIGS. 74 and 75 is a table that is referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process in S1037 in FIG. 78, which will be described later.

In a normal game state in which left-handed hitting is a normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 74, for example.

As shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for low start in FIG. If so, set the read-ahead flag. The sub CPU 1301 that has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 1201 performs a prefetch effect if the prefetch flag is set.

Note that in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not to perform the prefetch effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may also make the determination.

On the other hand, in a game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, that is, a high-accuracy time-saving game state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, or a low-accuracy time-saving game state, a special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set the prefetch flag when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start, but is not limited to this.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the random value for reach determination, and the random value for performance selection. Determined by However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values in place of or in addition to any of the above.

Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start in Figure 75, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start in Figure 74. The expected value of the variable display frequency of the special symbol per unit time is larger than that in the determined case. In particular, when determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is variable over an extremely long period of time, for example approximately 600000 msec (for example, long fluctuation A to C). Display is performed. On the other hand, when determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start, the second special symbol is variablely displayed only for a very short time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, super fast fluctuation). .

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 1301. The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

Although not shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, for example, by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection for each set value, the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol to be determined can be made different. Good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the normal game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 74) for low start, and for example, in the high accuracy time saving game state, the high accuracy In the time-saving game state and the low-accuracy time-saving game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables with different expected values of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time may be provided, and the special symbol It is also possible to use different tables to refer to when determining the variation pattern of .

In addition, the time-saving hits A and B shown in the "Notes" column in Figures 74 and 75 indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). This is a reach performance that shows. Similarly, jackpot-related reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reach A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a short-time hit or a jackpot.

Although the description is omitted in the second pachinko game machine, similar to the first pachinko game machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (See FIG. 17), a normal symbol type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19). Then, the main CPU 1201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same manner as the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 include the special symbol control process executed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (FIGS. 42 and 86), etc.) ), below, the special symbol control process will be explained anew, including the same process as the process performed in the first pachinko game machine, with the step numbers changed.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S1001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process in S1001, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001. .

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more. If the value is "0" for all of the above, the demo display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 1300 receives a demonstration display command, if the demonstration display command is a demonstration display command of the main special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demonstration display effect.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 1301 can display either one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol, and the other is used as the secondary special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in a normal game state where left-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode, and a gaming state where right-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state). , high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, low-accuracy time-saving game state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 1301 performs variable display of decorative symbols and display effects of characters, etc. for the main special symbols, and audio effects for the main special symbols. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the sub special symbol is a jackpot, for example, the sub special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced. In addition, among the game states where right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, in the low-accuracy time-saving game state, other effects are used instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main special symbol. An image (for example, a countdown effect of the remaining number of time savers until the end of the time saver game state) may be displayed.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1001.

If it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S1002), that is, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 executes the process. is moved to S1003. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S1002.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1002 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S1002), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1004.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process in S1003, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process in S1004, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1004.

If it is determined in S1005 that the first special symbol is not the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S1005), that is, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 executes the process. is moved to S1006. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the first special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S1005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1005 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES in S1005), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1007.

In S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process in S1006, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1007.

In S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process in S1007, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1008.

In S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1007.

If it is determined in S1008 that it is not the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol (NO in S1008), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1010.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S1008), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1009.

In S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process in S1009, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1010.

In S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process in S1010, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1011.

In S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1010.

If it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is not at the timing to start the variable display (NO determination in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and transfers the process to the main control main process (FIGS. 20 to 20). (see Figure 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1011 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES determination in S1011), that is, no process related to the first special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process of S1012, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S1001 to S1012) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

In this way, in this embodiment, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the process related to the second special symbol is executed. is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started, special symbol management processing described below is performed in priority order. is executed.

[2-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1003, S1006, S1009, and S1012 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76) will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

For example, if the special symbol management process is called and executed in S1003 or S1009 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol will be the processing target, and the special symbol management process will be executed in S1006 or S1009 during the special symbol control process. When called and executed in S1012, the first special symbol becomes the processing target.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S1021), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S1021), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S1022, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1023. Note that the main CPU 1201 performs the processes from S1023 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S1022.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S1023 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S1024 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S1025 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S1026 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot termination processing. This process of S1028 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

After completing the processing of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76). In addition, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004 if the special symbol management process is called in S1003 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S1007 if it is called in S1006, and calls it in S1009. If it has been called, the process returns to S1010, and if it has been called in S1012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1031).

If it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S1031), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S1031), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1032.

In S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off. The special symbol suspension flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is determined as YES (that is, even if the special symbol starting condition is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (S1032 is determined as NO). ), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

If it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol suspension flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO determination in S1032), the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 1201 stops the special symbol variable display. Finish the start process. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol suspension flag is off (YES in S1032), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1033.

In S1033, the main CPU 1201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S1033, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination process is performed by referring to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71) and using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, for the first special symbol, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a jackpot, or a loss, and for the second special symbol, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a small hit, a jackpot, or a loss. It is determined whether there is. In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, and turns on the small hit flag when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit. , and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is set to on. After executing the process in S1034, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1035. The time-saving winning flag is turned off at the time of transition to the C-time-saving gaming state, the small winning flag is turned off at the start of the small winning gaming state, and the jackpot flag is turned off at the start of the jackpot gaming state.

In the above special symbol hit determination process (see S1034), first, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in this process, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit. If it is determined in this process that it is not a small win, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a time saving win, and if it is determined in this process that it is not a time saving win, it is determined that it is a loss.

In S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034) (for example, time saving hit, small hit, jackpot, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "select symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, but by providing multiple types of losses, the special symbol hit determination process The stopping symbol may be determined when the result is a loss. After executing the process in S1035, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, small hit, or jackpot). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S1035) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 73). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but there may be only one type of jackpot, and there may be one type of time-saving winning. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing multiple types of wins, multiple types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or multiple types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process in S1036, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034), the random value for reach determination or/and the random number for performance selection. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the numerical value and the like. In this embodiment, in the normal game state where left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74), In game states where right-handed hitting is the normal gaming mode (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), a variation pattern table of special symbols for high starts (see FIG. 75) ), the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. After executing the process in S1037, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1038.

In S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1037) is determined as the special symbol variation time. Ru. After executing the process in S1038, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1039.

In S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 77) is performed. (see S1024) will be performed. After executing the process in S1039, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1040.

In S1040, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 are updated. After executing the process in S1040, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1041.

In S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S1041, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets an interruption-prohibited section, and prohibits the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management processing (S1041) and the special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S1042)). It is preferable to do this within the interval.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1024 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIGS. 79 and 80 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target. In addition, in the special symbol variable display end processing described below, the special symbol that is the target of processing is simply referred to as the "special symbol", and the special symbol that is not the target of processing is referred to as "the other special symbol".

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S1051), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S1051), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol suspension flag value. After executing the process in S1052, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off based on the special symbol suspension flag value loaded in S1052.

If it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (if NO in S1053), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol suspension flag is off (YES in S1053), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1025 in FIG. 77 ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S1054, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1055.

In S1055, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol performance stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S1055, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1056.

In S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. The confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of guaranteed variations or the remaining number of time savings. You can also manage the numbers. After executing the process in S1056, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1057.

In S1057, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit.

In S1057, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a small hit (NO determination in S1057), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1059.

On the other hand, in S1057, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit (YES determination in S1057), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1058.

In S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping during execution of the small winning game control process. After executing the process in S1058, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1059.

In S1059, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot.

In S1059, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a jackpot (NO determination in S1059), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1059, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot (YES determination in S1059), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting during execution of the jackpot game control process. After executing the process in S1060, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1061.

In S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (NO determination in S1061), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and replaces the process with the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is being displayed variably (YES in S1061), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. After executing the process in S1062, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the sight test signal is output to the outside. This test firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped due to a loss. After executing the process in S1063, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1064.

In S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the hit flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) for the special symbol to be processed is a jackpot, the other special symbol is being displayed variably, and the other special symbol is a hit. Even if the result of the determination process is a jackpot, the other special symbol will be forced to stop as a loss. After executing the process in S1064, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1065.

In S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to clear the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process in S1065, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1066.

In S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time in the timer of the other special symbol. In this process, a fixed waiting time is set so that when a special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a loss. After executing the process in S1066, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1067.

In S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets "2" to the control state number of the other special symbol. After executing the process in S1067, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1068.

In S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1068, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1069.

In S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing for the other special symbol production stop command. The other special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1069, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display end process of this embodiment, the special symbol suspension flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the hit determination process for this special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) If the result is a jackpot and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, a process is performed to force the variable display of the other special symbol to be a loss.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIGS. 81 and 82 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S1071), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S1071), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1072.

In S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S1072, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S1072), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1073. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1072 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S1072), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1075.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit.

In S1073, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S1073), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1074.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83. In addition, when the main CPU 1201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1073, if it is determined that there is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit (YES in S1073), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs a start setting process of the jackpot game control process or the small win game control process. In this process, signals output to, for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70) and the island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 1184 are generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After performing the process in S1075, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1076.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process in S1075, the main CPU 1201 also performs processing to clear various flags and various counters such as a probability change flag, a probability change counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs, for example, a process (S1077) of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening for jackpot 1131 or the big winning opening for small winning 1151), and the external terminal board 1184. jackpot signal setting process (S1078), process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), game state designation parameter setting process (S1080), and transmission reservation process for jackpot start display command (S1081) ) etc. In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079) and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see FIG. 77) is performed. (see S1026) will be performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1074 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 81 and 82) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs time saving management processing (S1091). The details of this time-saving management process are the same as the process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine, so the explanation will be omitted. After executing the process in S1091, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process in S1092, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1093.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S1094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1094, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 81).

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a loss, the main CPU 1201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the losing display mode is derived, the gaming state will not change.

[2-4-7. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1026 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big prize opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S1101), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S1101), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the grand prize opening number counter value. The big winning opening number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state when the jackpot game control process is executed, and when the small win game control process is executed. , corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the small winning game control process. The count value of the big winning opening number counter (big winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. After executing the process in S1102, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening for jackpot 1131 or the big winning opening for small winning 1151) is the upper limit value. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the jackpot jackpot opening 1131 is opened in the jackpot game state, is, for example, 4 rounds or 4 rounds as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 73). There are 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of openings of the small winning large prize opening 1151 that is opened in the small winning gaming state is, for example, once.

If it is determined in S1103 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit value (YES in S1103), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1104.

In S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1104) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 77) is performed. (see S1028) will be performed. After executing the process in S1104, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1105.

In S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S1106). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1106, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S1103), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the grand prize opening number counter value. After executing the process in S1107, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1108.

In S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs selection processing of the big winning opening to be opened. In this process, the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the jackpot jackpot to be opened when the jackpot game control process is executed, and the small jack jackpot jackpot 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the jackpot jackpot to be opened when the jackpot game control process is executed. The big prize opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. After executing the process in S1108, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) is opened, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the big winning opening, the winning opening for the big winning opening, etc. The number of prize balls, etc. at the time is set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when executing the jackpot game control process, and corresponds to the number of openings of the small winning big winning opening 1151 when executing the small winning game control process. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round or in the small winning game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes. After executing the process in S1109, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1110.

In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when executing the jackpot game control process, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,800 msec when executing the small win game control process. Ru. The maximum number of prizes to be entered into the big prize opening is set to, for example, 10 at the maximum when the jackpot game control process is executed, and is set to, for example, 5 at the maximum when the small win game control process is executed. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning hole is set to 10, for example, for both the big winning hole 1131 for jackpot and the big winning hole 1151 for small winning. However, the values set in various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) is performed. After executing the process in S1110, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1111.

In S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1111) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S1027 in FIG. 77) will be performed. After executing the process in S1111, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1112.

In S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1112, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1113.

In S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

If it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO in S1121), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S1121), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1122.

In S1122, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of game balls that have won in the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, a big winning hole winning counter (for example, big winning hole count switch 1132 for jackpot, big winning hole counting switch 1152 for small winning (see FIG. 70 for both) that counts the number of winning game balls in the big winning hole is used. etc.), it is determined whether the counted value is the maximum number of winning prizes. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter value counted by the big winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203.

In S1122, if it is determined that the number of game balls won in the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) is not the maximum winning number (if S1122 is NO), the main CPU 1201 , the process moves to S1123.

On the other hand, in S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won in the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) is the maximum winning number (when S1122 is determined as YES) , the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1124.

In S1123, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) has not elapsed (if S1123 is NO), the main CPU 1201 controls the opening of the big winning opening. The mouth opening control process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) has elapsed (when S1123 is YES), the main CPU 1201 The process moves to S1124.

In S1124, the main CPU 1201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, big winning opening 1151 for small winning). After executing the process in S1124, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1125.

In S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1125) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, preparations for opening the big winning hole are made again. Processing (see S1026 in FIG. 77) will be performed. After executing the process in S1125, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1126.

In S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1126, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this jackpot end process is called in S1028 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called in S1028 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

If it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S1131), the main CPU 1201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77). , the process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S1131), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1132.

In S1132, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, you can set or reset the values of various flags (e.g., probability change flag, time saving flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.), and various counters (e.g., probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, number of times the big winning hole is opened). A process is performed to set or reset the values of counters, large winning opening winning counters, ceiling counters, etc.). In addition, both the special symbol suspension flag and the ceiling counter are reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is set on, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set on. As a result, the ceiling counter will not be updated in the high probability gaming state where the probability change flag is on. After executing the process in S1132, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1133.

In S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the process of S1133, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[2-5. Small hit rush]
In the second pachinko game machine described above, it is possible to realize a so-called small win rush. The small hit rush will be explained below.

As described above, the second pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the main CPU 1201 selects one of these gaming states. Control to any gaming state. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, so the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 1120 is mainly executed. In addition, in other gaming states (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), right-handed hitting is considered a regular gaming mode, so the game to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is A second special symbol game based on winning balls is mainly executed. In addition, when the winning hole included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first starting hole, the first starting hole is set in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The special symbol game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high probability non-time saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of game balls to the small winning big prize opening 1151 is higher than that in other gaming states (for example, normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state). ), the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time becomes a small winning rush that can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the small win rush mechanism will be explained. First, the game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passage gate 1126. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 1146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, unless the jackpot game control process is executed, the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 will not be in the open state, so the frequency with which the second starting port 1140B will be in the open state in the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state is different from that in the game where the time-saving control is executed. low compared to the state. Therefore, if the small winning big prize opening 1151 is open, the game ball hit right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win in the small winning big winning opening 1151. When a game ball enters the small winning jackpot 1151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. In addition, the game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win a prize in the second starting opening 1140A. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, 1140B, the game ball stops showing a small hit with a relatively high probability of 1 in 3 (approximately) as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71). Not only is the display mode derived, but super-fast fluctuations (for example, variable display time of 1000 msec) are performed as shown in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high starts (see Figure 75), so large The winning frequency of game balls into the winning hole 1151 is increased compared to other gaming states (for example, normal gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1.

On the other hand, in a gaming state in which time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the second starting port 1140B is in an open state due to the execution of electric support control, and when the player is hit right and Most of the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b end up winning in the second starting port 1140B. Therefore, even if the small winning large winning opening 1151 is open, the expected value of a game ball winning into the small winning large winning opening 1151 is low. Furthermore, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, only one prize ball is paid out, for example. If a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flowing path 1107a enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls will be paid out, but the second starting port 1140A does not contain any balls that are hit to the right and are distributed to the upper flowing path 1107a. Only approximately one-third to one-fifth of the game balls distributed to the route 1107a win prizes. In this way, in a gaming state where time saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time is set not to exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is considered a regular game mode, but if right-handed hitting is performed, the right-hit game ball passes through the passage gate 1126 and the stop display mode indicating a normal symbol hit is changed. When drawn out, the normal electric accessory 1146 is activated, and the game ball enters the second starting opening 1140B, thereby potentially opening the large winning opening 1151 for small winning. However, in the normal gaming state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (see Figure 74), so if the game ball enters the second starting opening 1140A, 1140B, Even if it does, the second special symbol is variablely displayed in any of the long variations A to C, which have an extremely long variation time, and the frequency with which the small winning large prize opening 1151 is opened is extremely small. Therefore, there is no practical benefit for the player to play right-handed in the normal gaming state. In addition, when the winning hole included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first starting hole, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is set to 0, for example, so that the actual profit of hitting right is not generated. Good too. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time does not exceed 1, and is smaller than in the game state in which time saving control is executed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that there is a small win rush in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a small hit rush may occur in a highly accurate time-saving game state in which special symbol shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time of special symbols without executing electrical support control.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, a third pachinko game machine will be explained. As mentioned above, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, and has the first route and the second route as the route until it is controlled to the jackpot game state. There is. The first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. In the second route, the V attacker releases the V attacker by deriving the stop display mode that indicates that the result of the special symbol determination is "accessory object release hit", and the game ball that enters the released V attacker This is a case where a prize is won in the V winning hole in the attacker.

In addition, the third pachinko gaming machine does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the starting condition for the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol. It is a priority variable machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sequential variable machine may be used.

Below, in explaining the third pachinko game machine, for example, the basic structure of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, etc., and the external terminal board 2184 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the outside of the third pachinko game machine. (For example, signals output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 described later) and the island computers (not shown) provided on each island), the function, shape, arrangement position, etc. of the first pachinko game machine We will omit explanations as much as possible regarding points in common with the above.

In explaining the third pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the first pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko gaming machine, The description will be made using symbols and step numbers different from those of the gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine will be described. Similar to the first pachinko game machine, this game board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine. A game area 2105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 2010, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down.

Note that various members arranged in the gaming area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine (for example, the first starting port 2120, etc.) may be common to various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. Yes, but I'll explain it again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 2110, and approximately the center of the game area 2105. A center accessory 2115 arranged in the section, a first starting port 2120, a second starting port 2140, a general prize opening 2122, a passage gate unit 2125, a special electric accessory unit 2130, and a normal electric accessory unit. 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description thereof will be omitted for this third pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 2100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. Further, on the front side of the game panel 2100, a guide rail 2110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the launch device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes the direction of travel while heading downwards in the game area 2105. It flows down.

Further, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 2100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front may be made of a transparent member. Further, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent part, and a transparent member may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are provided), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 2105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 2116 above. The game balls launched toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

The game ball fired toward the game area 2105 by the firing device 2006 flows down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 flow downward while changing the direction of travel due to collisions with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 2107.

In addition, the center accessory 2115 has a warp entrance 2117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed on the center accessory 2115. The stage 2118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007. Note that the stage 2118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 2118 at approximately the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of first starting than a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) the entrance 2120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later). Note that the game ball hit to the right may be able to win a prize in the first starting opening 2120. Further, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 2120, a first starting hole may be provided in which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). good.

When winning (passage) of a game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later), starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win a prize in the second starting opening 2140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. When the winning (passage) of a game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided for the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize winnings)
A plurality of general winning holes 2122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball wins in any one of the plurality of general winning holes 2122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later) detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the general winning hole 2122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game ball to the general winning hole 2122 is paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 2122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of the general winning hole 2122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 2125 is disposed in the right side area 2107, and includes a passage gate 2126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126. 2127 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later). When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). The various types of data that have been put on hold are used for normal symbol hit determination processing. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected by the passage gate switch 2127, the prize sphere is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 2125 may be arranged in the left region 2106 instead of or in addition to the right region 2107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a big winning hole 2131, a big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) that detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the big winning hole 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates the The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right area 2107.

The big prize opening 2131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned grand prize opening 2131, a grand prize opening in which a game ball hit to the left can win may be arranged, or a game ball can be placed above the center accessory 2115. A grand prize opening in which a ball can be won may be arranged.

The big winning hole 2131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. It is. When the winning of game balls into the big winning hole 2131 is detected by the big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the grand prize opening 2131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 that operates the special electric shutter 2134 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later). The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the grand prize opening 2131, and an open state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the grand prize opening 2131. and a closed state. The big prize opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route. When the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, in the jackpot game state through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the big prize opening 2131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. This is the gaming state that made it possible.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 2145 includes a prize opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through) a prize, a switch that detects winning of a game ball to this prize opening, and a normal electric accessory unit 2145. It is a unit body that is integrated with the accessory 2146, and is arranged in the right area 2107. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141.

The ordinary electric accessory 2146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 2147 that can be moved forward and backward, and a general electricity solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 88 described later) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 2147. The normal electric accessory 2146, that is, the shutter 2147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 2140, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 2140. or a difficult closed state, and is configured to be able to transition to a state. Note that instead of the general power shutter 2147 that can be moved back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed.

(V prize winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passage gate 2126 in the right area 2107. The V winning device 2150 includes an opening/closing winning opening 2151 that is opened to allow a game ball to enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 that can open and closing the opening/closing winning opening 2151, and this V attacker 2152. A V attacker solenoid 2154 that is activated to open and close the opening and closing prize opening 2151, and a V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. The attacker count switch 2153, the V winning hole 2155 through which the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning hole 2151 can pass, and the V winning hole 2155 through which the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning hole 2151 can pass through. A V winning port switch 2156 detects that a game ball has entered (passed through) the winning port 2155, and a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 does not enter the V winning port 2155. A loss opening 2157 into which game balls can enter (pass through), a V shutter 2158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 that operates this V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning opening 2155, and a V winning opening. A locking member 2160 that can hold only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the device 2150 is provided. Note that the V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passage gate 2126, or may be provided in the left region 2106.

The V attacker 2152 is made of an arcuate member and is always in a closed state that closes the opening/closing prize opening 2151. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and a stop display mode indicating that the "accessory object is released" which will be described later is derived, almost at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol ends, the V attacker solenoid 2154 ( (See FIG. 88, which will be described later), the V-attacker 2152 is activated, for example, once. When the V attacker 2152 is activated once, the opening/closing prize opening 2151 becomes open for 1800 msec, for example. While the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

Note that the manner in which the V attacker 2152 is opened when the stop display manner indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, the release may be performed twice for 900 msec, It may be closed based on the fact that a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls have entered the inside of the V winning prize device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the inside of the V prize winning device 2150. When the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 is detected by the V attacker count switch 2153, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and the main CPU 2201 functions. The value of the V attacker winning prize counter is added. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the V-attacker 2152 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 2154 to open and close the prize even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) in which the opening/closing prize opening 2151 can be opened has not elapsed. Port 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 2155. That is, the V winning hole 2155 is a winning hole that becomes an opportunity to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state through the second route described above.

The V winning hole switch 2156 is for detecting passage of a game ball to the V winning hole 2155. The main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) continues the opening control of the V attacker 2152 when detecting passage of a game ball to the V winning hole 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 is opened. That is, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state via the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled through the first route, a round game is executed in which the big winning opening 2131 is moved from the closed state to the open state, whereas the second route When the jackpot game state is controlled through the route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is moved from the closed state to the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is moved from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but from the middle of the round game, for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled, A round game in which 2131 is moved from a closed state to an open state may be executed.

In addition, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is opened), the V winning hole and the jackpot game can be created. The number of attackers released in each state may be one at a time. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 2155 provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. When enters, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot gaming state via the second route).

The losing hole 2157 is configured so that game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but have not passed through the V winning hole 2155 enter (pass through). The game balls that have passed through the loss port 2157 are discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, if all of the game balls that entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss port 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends. do.

The V shutter 2158 has a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 2155 and a game ball entering the V winning hole 2155 due to the operation of the V shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 88 described later). A constant movement is always performed between the open mode and the open mode where the ball can pass through (or easily). In this embodiment, for example, the V-shutter 2158 always performs a constant operation in a 7000 msec cycle (period) in which the operation of "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed" is repeated.

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning a prize opening 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning a prize device 2150. Game balls that enter the V winning device 2150 but are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged from the losing port 2157 to the outside of the machine. Even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged from the losing port 2157 to the outside of the machine.

In addition, the locking member 2160 releases the locking of the game ball by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown) after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed since the V-attacker 2152 was activated. The game ball released from the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning hole 2155, and if the V winning hole 2155 is opened at this timing, it will win (pass) the V winning hole 2155, and this If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it will pass through the losing opening 2157. Note that without providing the locking member 2160, the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157.

(Out port)
The out port 2178 is for various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the large winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) of the objects fired toward the gaming area 2105. This is for ejecting game balls that have not won or entered any prizes out of the machine. This out port 2178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 2105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 2178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between the plurality of general winning openings 2122 or between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second starting opening 2140, The game balls flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 similarly to the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 2100. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 2058 such as movable accessories that are arranged around the display area of the display device 2007 and controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 2058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 88 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the third pachinko game machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko game machine, they will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 88, like the first pachinko game machine, the third pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 2200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 2200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 2300, a payout/emission control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

A main ROM 2202, a main RAM 2203, an initial reset circuit 2204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 2201. The main CPU 2201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the third pachinko game machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 2203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201. . Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 2203 from being lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 includes an I/O port 2205 that is connected to be able to communicate with various devices, etc., and a command output port 2206 that is connected to be able to output various commands to the sub control circuit 2300. Also equipped.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol display section 2161, a normal symbol reserve display section 2162, a first special symbol display section 2163, a second special symbol display section 2164, a first special symbol reserve display section 2165, and a first special symbol display section 2165. 2. A reservation display section 2166 for special symbols, a display section 2168 for short-time notification, a solenoid 2148 for normal electricity, a solenoid 2135 for special electricity, a solenoid 2154 for V attacker, a solenoid 2159 for V shutter, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 2170, an error notification monitor 2172, and the like. Main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, set values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

The error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. You can also display a code while checking settings. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first starting port switch 2121, a second starting port switch 2141, a passage gate switch 2127, a big winning port count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V winning port switch 2156, and a general A prize opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 2200 via I/O port 2205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a calling device (not shown) that is used when transmitting data to a hall computer 2186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 2184, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the setting key 2174 that is operated to change or confirm the setting value, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 can be accessed by the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 2176, etc., which can be cleared according to an operation, is connected. In addition, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. Good too.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 be housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall cannot easily touch them. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 2174 and backup clear switch 2176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that are configured to have only the corresponding locations of the setting key 2174 and backup clear switch 2176 in the case. When a pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key controlled by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 2174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 2176.

Note that in this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this; It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game parlor from easily accessing the setting key 2174 or the backup clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, an audio control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, an accessory control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 88, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 2302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the third pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub CPU 2301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A that converts image data into an image signal. Equipped with converter etc.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various types of image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, performance image data, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 2032. The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 2058). The accessory control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Further, the accessory control circuit 2307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory activation command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 2308 is connected to command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from main control circuit 2200.

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine, and the payout/launch control circuit 2400 includes a payout device 2082 for paying out game balls, a game ball A firing device 2006 for firing balls, a card unit 2180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 2400 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball rental operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. Note that although the operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

Furthermore, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, the dispensing/firing control circuit 2400 controls the firing solenoid in accordance with the rotation angle (rotation amount). (not shown) to control the firing of game balls.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout/shooting control circuit 2400, etc.

A power switch 2095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 2450. The power switch 2095 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/shooting control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. Note that the third pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

Note that probability change control is not executed in the third pachinko gaming machine. Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed and a time-saving gaming state in which time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. It is now possible.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the time-saving game state. The sub CPU 2301 executes control to display, for example, a playing style that is a normal game mode in the display area of the display device 2007.

[3-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 89 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 89, when a game ball enters (passes through) the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a hit determination process based on the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol jackpot determination random number. Then, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined to be a "time-saving hit," a "big hit," or a "loss." In addition, when a game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines the special symbol based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random value for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol. The result of the hit determination process is determined to be a "time saving win", a "big hit", or a "accessories opening win".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent "accessory object release hit" from being determined when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, but even if it is determined as "accessory object release hit". It is preferable that the second special symbol be determined with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than a "jackpot") than when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. In addition, it is not essential to prevent the second special symbol from being determined as a "lose" when the hit determination process is performed, but if it is determined as a "lose", the "accessory object opening hit" The probability may be higher than the probability determined based on "accessory object being released", or may be lower than the probability determined based on "accessory object being released".

The special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 includes data used for the first special symbol hit determination process that is executed based on winning in the first starting port 2120, such as "time-saving hit" and "jackpot". ” or the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot judgment determined as “loss” and the corresponding judgment value data (“time-saving hit judgment value data”, “jackpot judgment value data”, “loss judgment value data”) The relationship with In addition, as data used in the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning in the second starting opening 2140, a jackpot determined as a "time saving hit", "big hit", or "accessories opening hit" The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for judgment and the corresponding judgment value data ("time saving hit judgment value data", "jackpot judgment value data", "accessories release hit judgment value data") is specified. There is.

Note that this third pachinko gaming machine does not have a function to change the jackpot probability determined as a "jackpot", but this is not essential; for example, the probability variable flag may be turned on depending on the type of jackpot, etc. The jackpot probability may be increased by setting the number.

In addition, in this third pachinko game machine, the total random number of jackpot determination random numbers for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 65,536. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

In addition, when the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the opening of the accessory are set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of hitting the jackpot and the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set to be higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set constant regardless of the setting value, and the probability of hitting the jackpot You may set the probability to be higher at high settings than at low settings, or you may set the jackpot probability to be constant regardless of the setting value, and set the probability of opening a role item to be higher at high settings than at low settings. You can. However, even if the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that the time-saving winning probability be set to be a common probability for all settings, for example.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability or the probability of opening a role object according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 may be changed for each set value to change the winning rate of the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each setting value to change the passage rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of times of time saving continuation may be changed for each setting value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of opening the accessory, the frequency of opening the V winning hole 2155 (that is, the frequency of operation of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times the time saving continues. By employing one or more of these, it may be configured such that the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state is higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 90 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 2120, 2140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a "symbol designation command". The "select symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the variable display stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 99. Even so, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201 selects a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command, for example, as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 61 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 will issue a selection symbol command as Select "z4" and select "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, when the accessory opening hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows, for example. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

Although the explanation is omitted in the third pachinko game machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the first special symbol display section 2163 or the second special symbol display section 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbol stops. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions according to symbol commands. In addition, in the special symbol display sections 2163 and 2164, a display mode for short time winning, a display mode for jackpot, a display mode for opening a role object, or a display mode for losing is derived based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Ru. Further, a decorative symbol stopping manner determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stopping manner determining table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine is also stored in the program ROM 2302 of the sub control circuit 2300.

[3-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 91 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the jackpot gaming state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the subsequent gaming state (more specifically, (time saving flag and time saving end conditions). The mode of the gaming state after that indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C time-saving game state is controlled without being controlled to the jackpot game state. "L" shown in the time saving end condition column of FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the variable display frequency of the first special symbol and the variable display frequency of the second special symbol. Similarly, "M" indicates the variable number of times the second special symbol is displayed, and "N" indicates the number of times the accessory is released. Note that the remarks column in FIG. 91 is provided for convenience to make it easier to understand.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the aspect of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=6, N=3. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=3, N=3. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of rounds as an aspect of the jackpot game state is not determined.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the number of rounds as a mode of the jackpot gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state (A time-saving gaming state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions as L=50, M= 5. Determine N=2. In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions as L=50, M= 5. Determine N=1. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines not to set the time saving flag on. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions as L=50, M= 5. Determine N=2.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and the control is made to the jackpot game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 , the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, it is determined to set the time saving flag to ON, and the time saving end conditions are determined to be L=50, M=5, and N=2. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory object released", if the control is not made to the jackpot gaming state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot gaming state. Not only that, but also the time saving flag is not set on, and after executing control based on the opening of the accessory, the game state is returned to the state immediately before the opening of the accessory.

Furthermore, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 determines the jackpot gaming state and the subsequent gaming state. Do not set either. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 2201 continues to control the previous gaming state without changing the gaming state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), both the jackpot gaming state aspect and the subsequent gaming state aspect as described above. Since it is not set, there is no need to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 91. However, in this embodiment, in order to clearly indicate that neither the jackpot gaming state nor the subsequent gaming state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 91.

In addition, "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of time saving end conditions in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the gaming state, but are not limited to this, It is also possible to use different conditions. For example, all of the ending conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different for the A time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state, or the A time saving gaming state and the B time saving gaming state may be different. Only one of the time-saving gaming states, the time-saving gaming state and the C-time-saving gaming state, may be different. Also, only one of the ending conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state. , only one of the time saving gaming states A, B, and C may be different. That is, the ending condition of at least one of the ending conditions "L", "M", and "N" is changed to the ending condition of at least one of the A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, and C working time saving gaming state. It may be made different depending on the game state.

[3-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 92 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the third pachinko game machine. Note that the "Remarks" column in FIG. 92 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 2120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 2140. Determine the fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 2140. 2. Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 2201 controls the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol so that the game ball enters the first starting hole 2120 and enters the prize. The decision is made based on the random number value for performance selection extracted when (passing).

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 extracts the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball enters (passes) the first starting port 2120. It is determined based on the random number value for effect selection.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "lose", the main CPU 2201 changes the variation pattern of the first special symbol to the value of the time saving flag, and the game ball enters the first starting port 2120 (passes through). ) is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for production selection extracted when In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, right-handed hitting is considered to be a regular gaming mode, so it is thought that the game ball will hardly ever land in the first starting opening 2120.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is “time-saving hit”, the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol to the second special symbol when the game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140. It is determined based on the extracted random number value for performance selection.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 generates a variation pattern of the second special symbol as an effect extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on random number for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "accessory object opening hit" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start opening. A fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for performance selection extracted when the game ball wins at 2140.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "accessory object opening hit" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the fluctuation time However, it is decided to have an extremely long variation performance of, for example, 600,000 msec. If the value of the time saving flag is "0", basically the game ball will not enter (pass through) the second starting port 2140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the game ball enters the second starting port 2140, This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player even if the game ball wins, but this is not necessarily essential.

Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a prefetch flag when the random number value for performance selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 2301 which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 2201 performs a pre-read effect if the pre-read flag is set.

Although it is not shown in the special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 92 for convenience, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 sets the prefetch flag when the time saving flag is off, and when the time saving flag is on or If the probability change flag is on, the look-ahead flag is not set.

Further, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 may also make the determination.

Note that the main CPU 2201 may also set the prefetch flag (so that the prefetch effect is performed) when the time saving flag is on or when the probability change flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a prefetch flag may be set (so that a prefetch effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of changes per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301. The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

In addition, the time-saving hits A and B shown in the "Remarks" column of Figure 92 are reaches that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). It's a performance. Similarly, jackpot-related reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reach A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a short-time hit or a jackpot.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, the explanation is omitted, but similarly to the first pachinko game machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (See FIG. 17), a normal symbol type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19). Then, the main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 include the special symbol control process executed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (FIGS. 42 and 103), etc.) ), below, the same processes as those performed in the first pachinko game machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S2001, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, the main CPU 2201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process when both the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held are "0" for a certain period of time or more. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 2300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 2301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the second pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as explained in the first pachinko gaming machine There is no.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S2002), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2002), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol is not a variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not pending (NO determination in S2003), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has not started variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol has not been withheld (NO determination in S2004), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process. , the process returns to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is pending (YES in S2004), the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S2005. Move to.

Returning to S2003, if it is determined that the second special symbol is a variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is pending (YES in S2003), the main CPU 2201 executes the process as follows. Move to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is pending as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is pending, it may be a priority changing machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 2120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winnings to the second starting opening 2140.

[3-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is determined as YES), in the special symbol management process, when S2003 is determined as YES, the second special symbol is the processing target, and when S2004 is determined as YES, the processing target is the second special symbol. Special symbols are to be processed. Further, if the control state number is not 0 (NO determination in S2002), the special symbol management process targets the special symbol being executed.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S2011), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2011), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S2012, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2013. Note that the main CPU 2201 performs the processes from S2013 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S2013 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S2014 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 96. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S2015 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. This process of S2016 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening control processing. This process of S2017 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this V winning device release control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs grand prize opening preparation processing. This process of S2018 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S2019 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot end processing. This process of S2020 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

After completing the processing of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 93). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S2021), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S2021), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S2022, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 89) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a jackpot, or a loss. Further, if the second special symbol is a processing target, it is determined whether it is a time saving hit, a jackpot, or a role opening hit. After executing the process in S2023, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, time saving hit, jackpot, accessory opening hit, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "select symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process in S2024, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (time saving hit, jackpot hit, accessory opening hit). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S2024) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 91). In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit when an accessory is released, the type of win determined is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 2155 opened based on the release of the accessory. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, there are multiple types of time-saving hits, jackpots, and accessory release hits, but there may be only one type of time-saving hits, jackpots, and/or accessory release hits. . Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of time-saving hits, jackpots, and/or accessory release hits, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. After executing the process in S2025, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the value of the time saving flag, the random number value for reach determination, or / The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value for effect selection, etc. After executing the process in S2026, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 92), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process in S2027, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed. It happens. After executing the process in S2028, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 (for example, probability change remaining number of times, time saving number of times remaining, etc.) are updated. After executing the process in S2029, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S2030, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management process (S2030), special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S2031)) within the interrupt-prohibited section. It is preferable to do so.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is a process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S2041), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S2041), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process in S2042, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S2043, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. As mentioned above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is confirmed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of probability variations or the remaining number of time savings may be managed. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, if this special symbol game determination process is a process called in S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S2051), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S2051), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S2052, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S2052), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2060. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2052 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S2052), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating that the accessory has been released, and when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of the jackpot game control processing. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S2053, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2054.

In addition, in the jackpot game control start setting process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening 2131 (S2055), sets the jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S2057), a gaming state designation parameter setting process (S2058), and a transmission reservation process for a jackpot start display command (S2059). In addition, by performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process ends, the big winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed. It happens. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the accessory has been released, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating that the accessory has been released.

In S2060, if it is determined that the special symbol has not been released, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S2060), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2061. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2060 that the accessory has been released, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stopped display mode indicating that the accessory has been released (YES in S2060), the main CPU 2201 executes the process in S2061. Move to.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for game control per accessory release. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal for opening the accessory) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S2061, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 set in this process is, for example, one time. After executing the process in S2062, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set a signal per role release to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and processing to set a game state specification parameter (S2065). ), and the transmission reservation process (S2066) of the start display command per accessory release. In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after this special symbol game determination process is completed. It happens. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98. In addition, when the main CPU 2201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first performs time saving management processing (S2071). Since the third pachinko game machine, which is called a 1 type and 2 type mixed machine, is not controlled to a high-accuracy gaming state, the time saving management process executed in the third pachinko game machine is not performed in the first pachinko game machine as shown in FIG. ~ There are some differences from the processing described with reference to FIG. 39. Specifically, in the first pachinko game machine, it was explained that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on when the variable probability flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In the pachinko game machine No. 3, the game is not controlled to a high-precision gaming state. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to on when the variable probability flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. It's different. In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), after determining whether or not the variable probability flag is off (see S191), the condition that the variable probability flag is off is set. Although the process of S192 is performed, the third pachinko game machine differs in that it performs the process of S192 without performing the process of S191 because it is not controlled to the high probability gaming state as described above. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process in S2071, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. Become. After executing the process in S2072, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2073.

In S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2074, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S2081), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S2081), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, an opening pattern is set in which opening is performed only once for a maximum of 1800 msec, but the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, opening for a maximum of 900 msec may be performed twice at most each time. , the first time may be opened for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second time may be opened for a maximum of 1200 msec, for example. Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns are provided within a range that does not exceed a specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total for each accessory opening, and which one of these opening patterns is selected based on the symbol random number of the special symbol, for example. It may be set to one of the following opening patterns. After executing the process in S2082, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning opening 2155 is performed. After executing the process in S2083, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S2084), after the completion of this V winning device opening preparation process, the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) will be held. After executing the process in S2084, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2085, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S2091), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device release control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S2091), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening/closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winning game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150, is the maximum number of winning balls. Ru. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S2092), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2093.

On the other hand, in S2092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (YES in S2092), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the V prize winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing prize opening 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum open time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process. (See Figure 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V prize winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2093), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 2150 (ie, the opening/closing winning opening 2151). After executing the process in S2094, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a V winning prize is detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the V winning a prize opening 2155 within a specified time (that is, whether there has been detection by the V winning a prize opening switch 2156). In addition, the above-mentioned specified time may be the time related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150, for example, the game ball is stopped by the locking member 2160 within the specified time after the operation of the V attacker 2152 starts. The above-mentioned specified time can be set to be within a specified period of time after the lock is released.

If it is determined in S2095 that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S2095), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for the per-V game control. In this process, a signal (eg, per-V signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 15 rounds is executed as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 91), so the player can understand that the jackpot game control process is executed. As in the case, a large amount of prize balls can be won. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V winning game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and called, but the V winning game control can also be called the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2097.

In addition, in the start setting process of the V winning game control in S2096, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this processing, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) that is first executed based on the opening of the accessory object is processed as a round game of the first round. That is, the V winning game control that is executed when it is determined that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S2095) is started from the second round of the round game. After executing the process in S2097, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set round display LED data. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the number of times the V attacker 2152 operates) (S2099), and sets the V winning signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100). , a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), a game state designation parameter setting process (S2102), a transmission reservation process of a V winning start display command (S2103), etc. are performed. Furthermore, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed. It happens. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined in S2095 that there is no V-winning detection (NO determination in S2095), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the process of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the big winning opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S2111), the main CPU 2201 ends the big prize opening preparation process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S2111), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 2203. After executing the process in S2112, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of openings of the grand prize opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S2113 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit value (YES in S2113), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S2114), the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 94) is performed after the big winning hole opening preparation process is completed. It happens. After executing the process in S2114, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S2113), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S2117, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs selection processing of the big winning opening to be opened. This process is started when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a jackpot, and a stop display mode indicating the jackpot is derived (YES is determined in S2052 in FIG. 97). In the case of the jackpot game control process, the big winning hole 2131 is selected as the big winning hole to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory, a stop display mode indicating the opening of the accessory is derived (YES is determined in S2060 in FIG. 97), and a V winning is detected (in FIG. 100 (YES in S2095), the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening/closing winning hole 2151) is selected as the big winning hole to be opened. After executing the process in S2118, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of prizes to be won in the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, and the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. The number of prize balls etc. at the time of winning into the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are set. The number of times the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the big prize opening 2131 or the V prize winning device 2150 as separate processes. After executing the process in S2119, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2120.

In addition, the above-mentioned "big winning hole 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the big winning hole selected in S2118 as the big winning hole to be opened among the big winning hole 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, the opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is generated. After executing the process in S2120, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S2121), after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94) will be held. After executing the process in S2121, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2122, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (NO determination in S2131), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (YES in S2131), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls won in the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, the big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88) counts the number of winning game balls into the big winning hole 2131 or the V attacker count switch counts the number of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150. At step 2153 (see FIG. 88), it is determined whether the counted value is the maximum number of winning prizes. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the big winning opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker counting switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2132, if it is determined that the number of game balls won in the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S2132), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winnings (YES in S2132), the main CPU 2201 returns the process to S2134. Move.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the grand prize opening control process and continues the process. , returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2133), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. After executing the process in S2134, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2135), after the end of this big winning opening control process, the big winning opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed again. ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S2135, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2136, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (NO in S2141), the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94). , the process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (YES in S2141), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g. probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set, and values of various counters (e.g. probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or a reset process is performed. After executing the process in S2142, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the process of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[4. Expansion example]
Below, an example of expansion common to the first pachinko game machine, second pachinko game machine, and third pachinko game machine described above will be explained. In addition, since the symbols given to each component are different depending on the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, in the following explanation, a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third pachinko game machine) Reference numerals are omitted unless the explanation is limited to Pachinko gaming machines.

[4-1. Extended example of variable control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to set the probability variation flag on depending on the type of jackpot, and when the probability variation flag is set to on, the number of probability variations is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the following embodiments may be used.

For example, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the jackpot, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area, the jackpot It may be a so-called V probability change machine that sets a probability change flag to ON at the end of the game control process. In addition, the above-mentioned specific area can be set to an open state in which a game ball can pass through or easily, and an open state in which a game ball cannot enter, for example, by operating a movable member in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process. It is possible to displace it into a closed state that is possible or difficult.

In such a V probability changing machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, there are cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and the case where the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the case where the result is a jackpot, we calculate the ease of passage of the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, that is, the probability that the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process. It may be different.

FIG. 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, Diagrams showing cases in which the opening mode of the area is the first opening mode, (B) the case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the case where the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode It is. Note that the first opening mode and the second opening mode are modes in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area, and the third opening mode is a mode in which it is difficult to pass the game ball into the specific area. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Although FIG. 104 shows a mode in which the big winning opening is opened for a short time and then opened for a long time, the opening mode of the big winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the first opening mode, while the big winning hole is in the open state, the specific area is also in the open state, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the big winning hole is started. It becomes. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is in an open state, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 104(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in the open state from the start of the short opening of the big winning opening until the end of the long opening of the big winning opening. ing. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is extremely easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is extremely easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(C), in the third opening mode, the big winning hole is opened for a short period of time and for a predetermined period after the long opening of the big winning hole is started (these two times are both for a short period of time). ), certain areas are closed. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control, even one game ball among the plurality of game balls that entered the jackpot can pass through a specific area in either the first opening mode or the second opening mode. It is difficult compared to That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability change flag will be turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. Set.

In addition, in FIG. 104, during execution of the jackpot game control process, as an example of the opening mode of the specific area where it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. , an example in which two modes, a first open mode and a second open mode, are provided has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which at least one game ball out of the plurality of game balls that entered the big winning hole can easily pass through the specific area is limited to two. There may be only one mode or three or more modes.

Further, in FIG. 104, during execution of the jackpot game control process, a specific area is opened in which it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole. As an example, an example in which the third opening mode is provided has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area among the plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot is 1. The present invention is not limited to the embodiment, and two or more embodiments may be provided.

FIG. 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the expanded example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 2. The special symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. That is, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the hit selection symbol command will select, for example, "z0" with a 40% selection rate and "z1" with a 10% selection rate. "z2" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. Additionally, if the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot, the hit selection symbol command will select, for example, "z3" with a 15% selection rate and "z4" with a 50% selection rate. "z5" is selected with a selection rate of 35%.

FIG. 106 is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the expanded example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 106, the jackpot type (for example, number of rounds, opening mode of a specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the winning selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot (3R normal jackpot A) in the third opening mode. Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot A). Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A). Further, when the winning selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R normal jackpot B) of the third opening mode. When the selected symbol command at the time of winning is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot B). When the selected symbol command at the time of winning is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot C) of the second opening mode.

That is, according to FIGS. 104 to 106 above, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 3R normal jackpot A with a selection rate of 40%, and a selection rate of 10%. A selection rate of 10R normal jackpot A is determined, and a selection rate of 50% determines a 10R probability variable jackpot A. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15%, and 10R probability variable jackpot B with a selection rate of 50%. , 10R probability variable jackpot C is determined with a selection rate of 35. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the probability change flag is set at the end of the jackpot game control process. It is possible to vary the probability of being set to on.

In addition, in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which it is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 107, the opening may be opened in response to the winning of a game ball into the grand prize opening.

FIG. 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example (the specific area is the big winning opening timing). An example in which the opening state is controlled based on winning in the mouth), where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. It is a figure which shows when it is an open aspect.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the grand prize opening is opened, the first game ball enters the grand prize opening, and the grand prize opening is counted. When the switch detects that the first game ball has won, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch, the big winning hole becomes closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area will be open. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107(B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the grand prize opening is opened, the first game ball enters the grand prize opening, and the grand prize is won. Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is kept open for a certain period of time. Even if the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch, the specific area will be closed until the winning hole is closed. does not become open and remains closed. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control, it is difficult for even one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot to pass through the specific area compared to the first opening mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability will change at the end of the jackpot game control process. Flag is set on.

In addition, in the above, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the probability variation flag is set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process, but the example is not limited to this, for example. , If the game ball passes through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, the time saving flag may be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a mixed machine of one type and two types, such as the third pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the above, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit. Although an example has been described in which the opening mode is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an opening mode exclusively for the first special symbol or an opening mode exclusively for the second special symbol may be provided.

In addition, in the above, in both cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the passage of the game ball to the specific area is Although an example has been described in which the difficult third aspect is determined, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process for either one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one It may be configured such that only the mode (first mode or second mode) in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area is determined.

In addition, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is set twice during the short opening of the grand prize opening and at a predetermined time after the long opening of the grand prize opening has started. However, if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area may be kept open for a short period of time, but the specific area may be kept open for only one time or multiple times. There may be.

In addition, a specific area may be closed when a predetermined opening time has elapsed, the round in which the specific area is open ends, or when a specified number of big winning openings or a prize is entered in the specific area. It may be controlled to do the following. Furthermore, one or more conditions for closing may be combined.

In addition, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed (for example, high-probability time-saving gaming state, high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, etc.) have reached a predetermined upper limit number of times (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number of times"). It may also be a so-called limiter machine that is alternately and repeatedly executed until the target is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as the "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the gaming state after the jackpot game control process ends becomes a gaming state in which probability variable control is not executed. (for example, normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc.). At this time, the loop count is also reset. In addition, in such a gaming machine, the limiter number may be a fixed number of times, or may be determined, for example, according to a symbol random number value of a special symbol, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. Further, if it is a setting device, the number of limiters may be set differently depending on the setting value.

In addition, although the so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached is described above, the jackpot gaming state is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot gaming state and the game state in which the time saving control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until a limiter number of times is reached. This is particularly effective in the case of a machine that mixes one type and two types, such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned V probability changing machine, when the game ball passes through a specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, the gaming state in which the probability variation control is executed continues. Therefore, in such a V-probability changing machine, if the limiter number is N times, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, it is assumed that the predetermined limiter number has been reached. After the jackpot game control process ends, the gaming state is controlled to a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, although the predetermined limiter number of times has not been reached, the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the gaming state after the jackpot game control process is completed will be controlled to a gaming state in which probability change control is not executed. The same applies to gaming machines in which when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In addition, after the jackpot game control process is completed, the game state is controlled such that the probability change control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.), and a predetermined It may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.) in which probability change control is not executed when a special symbol game is played a number of times. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games (hereinafter referred to as "ST number") in which probability variable control is executed may be a fixed number or may be different each time. Furthermore, if it is a setting device, the expected value of the number of STs may be made to differ depending on the setting value. Furthermore, it may be a so-called falling type gaming machine in which, for example, a falling lottery is performed and probability variable control is terminated based on the result of the falling lottery, or for example, when a game ball passes through a specific area during a jackpot gaming state. It may also be a so-called V probability variable type gaming machine in which probability variable control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends.

[4-2. Expansion example of time-saving control]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the time saving control can be executed after the jackpot game control process ends. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, the time saving control may be executed.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, a specific random number (for example, a special symbol hit determination Separately from the special symbol hit determination process, a time saving win/loss determination process may be performed to determine whether or not to execute time saving control using a random number value, a symbol random number value of a special symbol, etc. When performing a time-saving win/loss judgment when the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a small hit or a loss, for example, if the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the starting hole is If it is a numerical value, it can be determined that the time saving control is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, a time-saving win/loss determination process may be performed.

In addition, when performing the time-saving win/loss determination process separately from the special symbol hit determination process, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed in the same frame prior to the special symbol hit determination process.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving winning/losing judgment process, a random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment that is exclusively used for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is generated within a predetermined range, and, for example, the time-saving winning/losing judgment is performed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting slot. A random number value may be extracted, and the extracted time-saving win/loss random number may be used to perform the time-saving win/loss determination process.

In addition, it is not essential that the random numerical value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process be extracted based on the fact that a game ball has won in the starting opening, but may be extracted from other areas (for example, general winning opening, small winning opening, etc.). The selection may be made based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize (such as a big prize opening). Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area is provided that triggers the execution of the time-saving win/loss determination process, and a random value to be used in the time-saving win/loss determination process is extracted based on, for example, a game ball passing through this dedicated area. You can do it like this.

By the way, for example, if the time-saving winning/losing judgment process and the special symbol winning/losing judging process are executed at different timings, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed during the variable display of the special symbol, which will derive a stop display mode that indicates a jackpot when it is confirmed to be displayed. The result of this time-saving win/loss determination process may be a "time-saving win". In such a case, the main CPU may, for example, forcefully derive a display mode that indicates "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win".

In addition, the sub-CPU can visually determine whether the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving loss." It is preferable to perform control to display a display effect (such as a display effect) on a display device. In this case, since the results of the time-saving win/loss determination process are displayed on the display device in addition to the results of the special symbol hit determination process, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying an effect image on the display device that makes it possible to visually determine whether the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving loss," the time-saving win/loss determination process is possible. The display device is designed to display performance images where it is impossible or difficult to visually determine whether the processing result is a "time-saving hit" or a "time-saving loss" (for example, a fluctuating display of decorative patterns, a character display, etc.) You may also execute controls that are displayed on the screen. In this case, it is possible to maintain interest until the results of the time-saving win/loss determination process are disclosed.

In addition, in a general pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the sub-CPU displays a performance image that indicates, for example, a right-hand hit instruction as a recommended method of firing a game ball in a jackpot game state. The information is controlled to be displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this regard, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving hit", the sub CPU The display device is controlled to display an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a recommended game ball firing method. However, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving win", a presentation image showing a recommended method of launching game balls when time-saving control is executed may be always displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on "per time reduction" is a predetermined number of times or more (for example, two or more times), it will be displayed, but if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than two times), it will not be displayed. You can do it like this. Note that the above-mentioned specific conditions are not limited to the number of time reductions, but may be any conditions as appropriate.

In addition, if the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed before the special symbol hit determination process is executed, the sub CPU will perform the following operations under the condition of "time-saving win" (i.e., under the situation where the time-saving flag is set to ON) Control may be executed to display on the display device an effect image that can be visually or easily grasped to determine whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is to be executed.

In addition, the type of random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the extraction timing of the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the conditions for determining a time-saving win in the time-saving win/loss determination process, the execution timing of the time-saving win/loss determination process, the time-saving win/loss determination process The game state in which the game can be executed, the mode of the time-saving game state, the number of time-savings set when the time-saving game is won, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the rewriting timing of the number of time-savings, the probability of winning the time-saving game, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment. Processing related to time saving, such as displaying processing results, is summarized as follows.

(Type of random number used for time-saving win/loss judgment process)
Random values used in the time-saving win/loss determination process include, for example, random values for special symbol hit determination, special symbol determination random values, normal hit determination random values, normal symbol determination random values, special symbol fall determination random values, and The random number may be any one of a plurality of types of random numbers, such as a dedicated random number for time-saving winning/losing determination. Further, if the setting machine is used, when changing the setting, the changed setting value may be used to perform the time-saving win/loss determination process.

In addition, the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss determination process is not limited to one type (for example, only the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination), but also multiple types of random numbers (for example, the random number value for special symbol hit determination and the random number value for symbol determination). ) may be used for determination.

(Random value extraction timing used for time-saving win/loss determination process)
The extraction timing of the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss judgment process is when the game ball enters the starting hole, which is the trigger for the special symbol hit determination process, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate, which is the trigger for the normal symbol hit determination process. The timing may be arbitrary, such as when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving win/loss determination process. In addition, the extraction of random numbers used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed based on winnings in a specific winning opening where prize balls are paid out, or based on winnings in a specific winning hole etc. where prize balls are paid out, or based on winnings in a specific winning gate etc. where prize balls are not paid out. It may also be based on passage to the mouth or the like.

In addition, if the random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment processing is extracted based on the winning (passage) of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball will be able to win the prize regardless of whether the game ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port. Even if there is, the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination may be extracted, or the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination may be extracted only when a game ball enters one of the specific starting slots.

(Conditions for determining a time-saving win in the time-saving win/loss determination process)
When performing time-saving winning/losing judgment processing using the extracted random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment, the extracted random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment is a specific random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment (for example, specific time-saving winning/losing judgment value data). It is preferable to determine that the time saving has been achieved at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss judgment process using the random value for special symbol hit judgment, the time-saving judgment process is performed when specific loss judgment value data, specific small hit judgment value data, and/or specific jackpot judgment value data are used. It is better to make it so that it is determined as a hit. In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the symbol random number value of the special symbol, it is recommended that a time-saving win is determined when a specific losing symbol, a specific small winning symbol, or a specific jackpot symbol is used. . In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the special symbol fall determination random value data, it is preferable that the time-saving win is determined when the special symbol fall determination random value data is specific. Furthermore, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the changed setting value, it is preferable that the time-saving win is determined when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case where the time-saving win/loss determination process is performed using the random number value for normal hit determination or the random number value for normal symbol determination. Furthermore, the conditions for determining a time saving win in the time saving win/loss determination process are not limited to the above conditions, but can be arbitrarily determined to be various conditions.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win", the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a hit when the accessory is released. In addition, if the game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opens passes through the V winning opening 2155, the execution or non-execution of time saving control and the number of times saving are determined according to the type of opening of the accessory. It is better to do this. Then, even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that the accessory has been opened and the V attacker 2152 has opened it, the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is executed. If not, the main CPU 2201 may decide whether to execute the time-saving control and the number of times of time-saving based on the "time-saving win" if the result of the time-saving determination process is "time-saving win". However, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving loss" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release hit", and the game ball enters the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 releases it. does not pass through the V winning hole 2155, time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time-saving win/loss judgment process)
When executing the time-saving win/loss determination process at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the random value for time-saving win/loss determination acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball in the starting hole, the main CPU uses the special symbol startup information. Similarly, it is recommended to hold the acquired random number value for time-saving win/loss determination.

Further, the main CPU may execute the time-saving win/loss determination process immediately after extracting the random number value to be used in the time-saving win/loss determination process (for example, before being put on hold), or may suspend the extracted random number value, The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed before the variable display of the special symbols is started, or the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Game state in which time-saving win/loss determination processing can be executed)
The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed in any of the normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and time-saving gaming state, or may be executed in a gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed (for example, normal It may be executed only in a gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.). In addition, conditions for executing the time-saving win/loss determination process, such as executing the time-saving win/loss determination process in any gaming state or executing the time-saving win/loss determination process only in a specific gaming state, may be determined in advance, and the conditions may be set in advance. The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed when the specified conditions are met.

(Aspects of time-saving control)
The mode of time saving control executed according to the type of jackpot and the mode of time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving win/loss determination process may be the same mode or may be different modes. For example, if a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag are prepared, and time-saving control is executed depending on the type of jackpot, the first time-saving flag is set to ON, and based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process, the first time-saving flag is set to ON. When time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set on. In this case, time saving control with different functions may be executed depending on whether the first time saving flag is set to on or the second time saving flag is set to on. For example, when the first time saving flag is set on, both the special figure shortening control and electric support control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set on, the special figure shortening control and electric support control are performed. It is possible to perform only one of the controls. In addition, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, control is performed to the first time-saving game state in which only special figure shortening control is performed out of special figure shortening control and electric support control, and the second time saving flag is turned on. When set to , the control may be performed in a second time-saving game state in which only the electric support control among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control is performed. However, which of the multiple time-saving flags to set on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process, for example, or may be determined based on the time-saving win/loss determination process executed. The decision may be made depending on the gaming state at the time the game is played.

(Number of time reductions set when time reduction is applied)
It is preferable that the number of time reductions set when the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win" is determined according to the gaming state when the time saving win/loss determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if multiple random numbers for time-saving win/loss determination are specified as time-saving win/loss determination value data, the number of time savings to be set may be set to the gaming state when the time-saving win/loss determination process is performed. Alternatively or in addition, the determination may be made in accordance with the extracted random number value for time-saving win/loss determination. For example, if the random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment extracted based on the winning of a game ball in the starting slot is the first time-saving winning judgment value data, the number of time-savings is determined to be "100", and the second time-saving In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of time saving times to be "50".

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU may newly set the number of time savings determined based on the “time saving per unit” in place of the remaining number of time savings (that is, reset the remaining number of time savings). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of time savers is greater or less than the remaining number of time savers, broadening the range of game play, and adding interest to the time saver game state when the time saver flag is on. This makes it possible to increase interest.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the “per time reduction” to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the remaining number of time-savings will not become less than the current number of remaining time-savings, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU performs the process of newly setting the number of time reductions determined based on the “time reduction per unit” as the remaining number of time reductions, and the process of setting the number of time reductions determined based on the “percentage of time reduction” as the remaining number of time reductions. One of the processes for adding to the number of times may be predetermined, and the number of time saving times may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine in which time-saving control is executed with different functions depending on whether the first time-saving flag is set to on or the second time-saving flag is set to on, the time-saving win/loss determination process If the result is "per time saving", the main CPU controls whether the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on "per time saving" are the same function's time saving control or the time saving control of different functions. The process for setting the number of time reductions may be different depending on whether it is control or not. For example, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "per-time saving" are time-saving controls with the same function, the number of time-savings determined based on the "per-time saving" is set as the remaining number of time-savings. If the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "per-time saving" are time-saving controls of different functions, the time-saving control being executed is based on the "per-time saving" instead of the remaining number of time-savings being executed. The determined number of time reductions may be newly set (that is, the remaining number of time reductions may be reset). In addition, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving hit" are time-saving controls of different functions, the time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" will be applied after the remaining number of running time savings has been exhausted. Control may also be executed.

In addition, when setting the number of time savings based on the fact that the result of the time saving win/fail determination process is "time saving win", the number of time saving times may be set to "0". That is, when the number of time savings to be set is determined to be "0", the time saving flag is set on even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win". Furthermore, if the result of the time saving win/fail judgment process performed during the execution of the time saving control is "time saving win" and the number of time saving times is set to "0", the running time saving control ends.

(Start timing of time saving control)
The start timing of the time saving control that is executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is a "time saving win" can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, time saving control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time in which the special symbol is determined. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small win, time saving control can be started based on the end of the small win game control process. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, time saving control can be started based on the end of the jackpot game control process.

The start timing of the time-saving control that is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process being "time-saving winning" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is changed to the special symbol winning/losing judgment process in the same frame. If it is done in advance, even if the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is a "time-saving win", if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a jackpot, the "time-saving win" is invalidated (based on the "time-saving win"). It is preferable to set the time saving flag to on based on the winning selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set to on depending on the type of jackpot).

Further, the start timing of the time saving control that is executed based on the result of the time saving win/loss determination process being a "time saving win" is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed before the special symbol winning/losing judgment process in the same frame, the time-saving control may be started immediately (before the special symbol winning/losing judgment process is performed) based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process. good. In this case, the gaming state (i.e., whether time-saving control is executed or not) may be different between when the random number value used for the time-saving win/loss determination process is extracted and when the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed, which can increase interest. becomes.

Furthermore, the start timing of the time-saving control that is executed based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process being a "time-saving win" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time saving win/loss determination process becomes "time saving win", until the time saving control is started, the sub CPU can perform an incitement effect to determine whether or not the time saving control will start. It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, if the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process being a jackpot (a jackpot in which time-saving control is executed), this jackpot game control is terminated. Based on this, the time saving control based on the jackpot may be started. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory (the opening of the accessory for which time-saving control is executed) and the V attacker 2152 releases the game ball, the passage of the game ball to the V prize opening 2155 is Even when the jackpot game control is executed due to the detection, it is preferable that the time saving control is started based on the end of the jackpot game control. In addition, even if the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving win" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is that the accessory is released. Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU executes the time saving based on the "time saving win" based on the opening/closing winning opening 2151 being closed. It is a good idea to start controlling.

(Timing of end of time-saving gaming state)
The timing at which the time-saving gaming state ends is, for example, ``in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed, when the variable display of special symbols is executed for the set number of time-savings,'' or ``in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed.'' , "When the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process" or "When the time-saving number is set to 0 even though the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a time-saving hit", etc. It is.

In addition, in the gaming state where the time saving control is executed, if the small winning game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the time saving control will continue to be executed even after the small winning game control process ends. be done.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is opened because the stop symbol mode indicating that the special symbol hit determination process is a hit of the opening of the accessory object is derived during execution of the time saving control. However, if the passing of the game ball to the V winning hole 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 opens and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CPU 2201 will continue to operate even after the opening/closing winning hole 2151 is closed. Continuously execute time saving control.

(Time saving number of rewrites)
When the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed in a gaming state where time-saving control is executed (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU The number of time savings may be rewritten, or the number of time savings may not be rewritten (that is, the time saving control may be executed until the number of time savings in the currently executed time saving control is exhausted).

In addition, when rewriting the number of time reductions, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time reductions determined based on "per time reduction" at the time when the number of time reductions in the time reduction control being executed is exhausted, It may be set when executing the special symbol hit judgment process, it may be set when the variable display of the special symbol starts or stops, it may be set during the time saving win/loss judgment process, or it may be set at various timings. can do. In addition, when setting at the time of time saving win/fail judgment process, the number of time saving times determined based on "time saving win" will be overwritten with the number of time saving times in the time saving control being executed. Alternatively, either one of "rewrite the number of time reductions" and "add to the previous number of time reductions" may be determined in advance, and the number of time reductions may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(probability of time saving)
When performing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting opening or the second starting opening, The time-saving win/loss determination process (hereinafter referred to as the "second time-saving win/loss determination process") is performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting slot. may be different. For example, the time-saving winning probability when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be higher than the winning-time-saving probability when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed, or the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed. The probability of winning in time saving when the first time saving winning/losing determination process is performed may be higher than the probability of winning in time saving when the first time saving winning/losing determination process is performed and the second time saving winning/losing determination process. The time saving probability may be set to be the same or almost the same in the case where the above is performed.

(Result display of time-saving win/fail judgment process)
A time-saving win/loss determination result display section that displays the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process (whether the time-saving success or failure), and/or the number of time-saving decisions determined based on the result of the time-saving win/fail determination process (time-saving win). A winning time reduction number display unit may be provided to display the number of shortened winning times. It is preferable that the time-saving winning/losing determination result display section and/or the winning time-saving number display section be provided in an LED display group including a special symbol display section, etc., and controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub-CPU may display, on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, the result of the time-saving determination process and/or the number of time-savings determined based on the time-saving win. good.

(interval)
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss and the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU determines the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, The interval time may be longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss and the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving loss". In addition, since the variable display of the decorative pattern is synchronized with the variable display of the special pattern, in this case, the sub-CPU displays a performance image indicating "time saving win" until the above-mentioned interval time elapses, for example, on the liquid crystal display. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit when an accessory is released and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on the hit when the accessory is released, the main CPU 2201 When the result of the judgment process is "Time-saving win", the interval time after the operation for opening the accessory is made longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is "Time-saving loss". It may be the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Expansion example related to management of gaming media]
The first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine described in this specification play games using game media, and receive rewards (for example, prizes) based on the results of the games. The present invention can be applied to all types of gaming machines in which balls, prize data, etc.) are awarded. In other words, if the game is played by firing or inserting game media (e.g., game balls, medals, etc.) by the physical actions of the player, and the game media is paid out based on the result of the game, First, the main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game media held by the player and enable games played by circulating enclosed game balls or games played without medals. Furthermore, the device that electromagnetically manages the game media held by the player may be a game media management device that is attached to (connected to) the main control circuit and manages the game media.

In the case of a gaming machine that plays games by circulating enclosed gaming balls, the gaming balls as gaming media are configured so that they can be played without being discharged to the outside, so when a prize is won, the prize balls are paid out. Instead, prize ball data as game media is provided. In this specification, the term "payout game value" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, if a prize is entered into a winning slot with a number of prize balls of 15, if the game machine is an enclosed type game machine, prize ball data with a value corresponding to the 15 prize balls will be given. Furthermore, the gaming value is not necessarily limited to the prize ball or prize ball data, but may be anything that corresponds to the prize ball or prize ball data.

When managed by a gaming media management device connected to the main control circuit, the gaming media management device is a device that has ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is installed in the gaming machine, and is connected to an external device (not shown). It is connected to the game media handling device and the two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides the necessary game media when the player performs the game media lending operation (i.e., when the player inserts the game media). or the payout operation of game media in the event that a win is won (the winning combination is established) related to the payout of game media (i.e., payout of game media to the player on the line, and payout of the necessary game media to the player) It may be possible to perform an operation to electromagnetically record game media to be used in a game. In addition, the gaming media management device not only manages the actual number of gaming media, but also displays the number of owned gaming media on the front of the pachinko gaming machine based on the management result of the number of gaming media. A media number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on this owned game media number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that can be used by a player in a game using an electromagnetic method.

In addition, in this case, the game media management device has the ability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to the external game media handling device, and In addition to being operated directly by a person, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the player and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable to have the ability to allow a player to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is equipped with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming media handling device has an input slot for valuables such as banknotes, and a recording medium. (For example, an IC card) insertion slot, a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the side of the gaming media handling device. (both not shown).

The flow of the game at that time is, for example, when the player deposits valuable value into the gaming media handling device using one of the methods, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of one of the lending operation means described above. Then, the amount of game media corresponding to the value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. The player then plays the game and repeats the above operations if more game media are required. After that, as a result of the game, a predetermined number of game media are acquired, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game The medium handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media management device transmits the number of game media, it clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device only transmits the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player is transmitted. It is also possible to divide and process. Furthermore, instead of just ejecting the recording medium, cash or cash equivalent may be ejected, or it may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game media handling device may be configured to be able to insert a member recording medium of a gaming parlor, and to store the membership recording medium in the member recording medium so that it can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), a locking operation for locking the data communication of gaming media or valuable value can be performed on the gaming media handling device or the gaming media management device. Good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded using an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In addition, although the above describes the case where the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine, the game media management device can also be applied to a pachislot machine, a slot machine that uses game balls, and an enclosed game machine. A player's gaming media can also be managed.

In this way, by providing the above-mentioned game media management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where game media are physically used in the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can players be prevented from coming into direct contact with gaming media, the gaming environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of gaming machines can also be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It also happens. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game media and the game media input and payout ports. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, communication cables are used to transmit data regarding increases and decreases in gaming media due to consumption, lending, and payout of gaming media to enclosed gaming machines that are configured to allow gaming without the gaming media being ejected to the outside. When the present invention is applied to a gaming system having a gaming media management device connected to the gaming media management device so as to be able to transmit and receive optical signals via the gaming media management device, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

Below, an outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be explained. In the enclosed game machine, the firing device is located above the game area and fires game balls as game media from above into the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed pestle pushes out the waiting game ball toward the launch pad. This moves the game ball to the launch pad. Further, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects the game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. Since the game ball is thus configured to be launched from above as a game medium into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game balls ejected from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by a ball polishing device. The game balls polished by the ball polishing device are transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the firing device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, but are configured so that a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. Furthermore, instead of providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism for discharging game balls to the outside of the game machine and a taking-in mechanism for taking the game balls polished outside the game machine into the inside of the game balls are provided. Good too. In this case, the taking-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter exclusively for taking in, or may be configured to take in from a winning opening provided in the gaming area.

In an enclosed type game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine, so an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding the game balls is not provided. In an enclosed game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside, so the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as a result of playing a game. In an enclosed game machine, a player starts playing after acquiring balls lent from a game media management device. Here, obtaining a ball means that the player obtains game media in terms of data management. Then, by firing the game balls from the firing device, the balls held are consumed, and the number of balls held decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through each winning hole provided in the gaming area, the number of balls is paid out in accordance with the conditions set according to the winning hole, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held increases by lending from the game media management device. Furthermore, for example, when a game ends, all of the game value (i.e., the balls held) stored in the enclosed gaming machine may be liquidated, or a portion of the balls held may be sent to the gaming media management device. When all or part of the balls held are integrated into the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device, the gaming value stored in the enclosed gaming machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls held decreases. . Furthermore, although there is no concept of foul balls in gaming machines where the game ball is shot from above the playing area, foul balls do occur when the game ball is shot from below like in conventional gaming machines. sell. Therefore, in the case of a game machine in which game balls are shot from below, the number of balls held increases or decreases depending on whether foul balls occur or not. Note that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates that the balls held are consumed, loaned, and paid out. Further, "increase/decrease in game media" indicates an increase/decrease in the number of balls held due to consumption, lending, and payout. Furthermore, "data regarding increases and decreases in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data regarding the decrease in the number of balls held due to game balls being fired and the increase in the number of balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect when the game ball passes through each winning hole. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Furthermore, when a game ball is fired, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game media management device by the player's operation. Further, the above liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine, and accepts requests for converting the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device into balls held (renting balls) and counting balls held (returning). Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game media management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game media management device. Here, "gaming value" refers to money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into balls by the gaming media management device. In this second embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. Further, the counted balls can be used for exchanging prizes, etc. at a game hall where the game system is installed.

Furthermore, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power source. As a result, even if the power is turned off at night, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, by using this backup power source, for example, the door opening sensor may continue to detect the opening of the door frame. This can also prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

Note that enclosed type gaming machines only need to be constructed so that the players cannot touch the game balls; for example, a type that circulates the game balls only in the machine without circulating them in an island facility. , and those in which the game balls circulate through island equipment but the players cannot touch the game balls are also included in the enclosed type game machines.

The gaming media management device has a gaming machine connection board. The game media management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signals) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine. This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with one of the gaming machine and the gaming media management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination that received the transmission signal receives the same signal as the transmission signal. A confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, by comparing the confirmation signal sent from the destination with the transmission signal at the transmission source and determining whether they are the same, the signal transmitted from the transmission source can be prevented from being tampered with. You can confirm that the message is being sent to the sender. Thereby, fraudulent acts such as tampering with transmission/reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section that modulates a signal, and the transmission source transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to include a demodulation section that performs demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device were read, it would be difficult to decipher the signals, and the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device would be difficult to decipher. Fraudulent acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the transmission destination sends an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may also be sent to the sender.

By comparing the transmitted signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible to not only confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received based on the authorization signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts. Also, instead of directly communicating and connecting the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, and the main control circuit is connected via the frame control circuit. It may also be configured to be communicatively connected to a game media management device. Further, a firing control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the firing control circuit and the game medium management device. In this case, error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at a symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol indicate a jackpot symbol. Take steps to ensure that you do not have to worry about it.

To be more specific, while performing both variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol, the main CPU displays the other special symbol. The special symbols are forcibly stopped at a symbol combination indicating a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one special symbol stops at a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the jackpot gaming state as described above, but in this jackpot gaming state, the starting conditions for the first special symbol and the starting condition for the second special symbol are set. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game Based on the transition from the small winning gaming state to the small winning gaming state (stopping at the symbol combination indicating the small winning symbol), the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the transition from the small winning gaming state to the general gaming state ( Based on the termination of the small winning game, the process of restarting the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small winning symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the small winning gaming state as described above, but in this small winning gaming state, the starting conditions of the first special symbol and the second special None of the symbol starting conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are performed, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small hit symbol, the main CPU As for the other special symbol, the special symbol consisting of the LED group is displayed in a variable manner in the same manner as during the variable display, but the measurement of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

[4-4. Other expansion examples]
In this specification, the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine have been described as examples, but the technology described in this specification can be applied to other pachinko gaming machines such as pachislot, etc. It can be applied to gaming machines.

Regardless of whether the technology described in this specification is applied to a pachinko game machine or a pachislot, a performance that involves a temporary stop of symbols may include a temporary stop using the reel. Note that the symbol "stop" includes a permanent stop and a temporary stop, and the "stop" can be interpreted either way. Further, the operation for playing the game by the player may be any operation such as operation of a lever, handle, button, etc., or touch.

In a pachinko game machine, the administrator of the game machine may set the performance etc. by operating the performance button, but there are cases where the machine is operated so that the player starts playing after setting the performance button. be. In this case, it is conceivable that the operation by the administrator will eventually become the operation for the player to play the game. Similarly, in pachi-slot, an administrator may play a 2-bet game, and in a state where a BB flag corresponding to the 2-bet game is established, a player may play a 3-bet game. In this case, although the player can play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game, the 2-bet game may be played by the administrator of the gaming machine, so the game played by the administrator (for example, 2-bet games) A bet game, etc.), selection of a hole menu, etc. may be operations for a player to play a game.

In pachinko gaming machines, the main CPU controls the player's playing method by notifying whether the player is playing right-handed or left-handed. It may be possible to notify that it is unintended by the control of the sub CPU.

In pachislot, the main CPU may manage the player's playing method, such as the player's push order (assist), but if the player's playing method is not the intended one, errors, warnings, etc. The fact that the game is unintended may be notified under the control of the sub CPU.

Further, in the pachinko game machine, the main control board and the payout control board are mounted on separate boards, but they may be on one board. In pachislot, there may be no payout control board, but payout may be controlled by a main control board, or may be separated into a main control board and a payout control board.

Additionally, pachislot machines usually have a rectangular housing that houses the equipment necessary for various games, and a door that can be opened and closed with respect to the housing. It is possible. On the other hand, in the case of pachinko, the outer frame is regarded as the casing, the outer frame and base door are regarded as the casing, and the entire gaming machine consisting of the outer frame, base door, glass door, and tray unit is regarded as the casing. is possible. Note that there may be a unit, a middle frame, an intermediate part, etc. in which various control boards are provided between the case and the door or between the frame and the door, and the door, frame, case, etc. In addition, various control boards, display means, decorative parts, accessories, etc. may be present.

Below, a game board P1100 of a pachinko game machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be explained. Note that components that are the same or similar to those of the embodiments described above will be given the same names or the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

The game board P1100 shown in FIG. 108 includes a transparent plate unit P1110, a game area P1120, a ball launch path P1130, a warp path P1140, a stage P1150, a general prize opening unit P1160, an upper attacker part P1170, a lower attacker part P1180, an out port P1190, It is equipped with an upper movable performance accessory P2000, a rotating accessory P3000, etc.

A transparent plate unit P1110 shown in FIG. 108 is provided to be located on the front side of the game board P1100. The transparent plate unit P1110 is formed to cover the entire front side of the game board P1100, including the front of the opening area 1d opened at the center of the game board P1100. The transparent plate unit P1110 includes a base plate P1111 located around the opening area 1d, a base plate P1210 (see FIG. 113, etc.), a light guide plate P1112 (transparent panel) of the light guide plate unit, and the like. The light guide plate P1112 is arranged in front of the opening area 1d, and can perform a light emission effect using light emitted from a plurality of LEDs.

The game area P1120 shown in FIGS. 108, 111, 113, etc. is an area where the game ball can roll. The game area P1120 is formed on the front surface of the transparent plate unit P1110. The game area P1120 is formed to surround the opening area 1d.

The ball firing path P1130 shown in FIG. 108 is a path that guides the game ball fired from the firing device 6 shown in FIG. 1 etc. to the gaming area P1120. The ball firing path P1130 is defined by an outer rail P1131 and an inner rail P1132. Ball firing path P1130 is formed on the left side of game area P1120.

The warp passage P1140 shown in FIG. 108 is a passage that leads the game ball to a stage P1150 which will be described later. The warp passage P1140 is formed in the shape of a tunnel in which a game ball can roll. The warp passage P1140 is formed along the lower left edge of the opening area 1d. The upper end of the warp passage P1140 is opened to face the game area P1120. The lower end of the warp passage P1140 is opened so as to face a stage P1150, which will be described later.

The stage P1150 shown in FIG. 108 is for distributing the flow area of the game balls in the game area P1120. The stage P1150 is formed at the lower edge of the opening area 1d. The stage P1150 has an upper surface on which the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The left and right center portions, left portion, and right portion of the upper surface of the stage P1150 are formed to be concave downward and to be inclined forward. As a result, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage P1150 falls downward (to the lower game area P1120) from any of the left and right center, left and right parts.

The general winning hole unit P1160 shown in FIG. 108 has a general winning hole P1161a, which will be described later, in which game balls can be won. The general prize winning opening unit P1160 is arranged at the lower left of the gaming area P1120 (lower left of the opening area 1d). Details of the general winning a prize unit P1160 will be described later.

The upper attacker part P1170 shown in FIG. 108 is a part having a first big prize opening P1176, which will be described later, in which a game ball can be won. The upper attacker part P1170 is located at the upper right of the game area P1120 (upper right of the opening area 1d). The upper attacker part P1170 has a plurality of walls erected forward from the game area P1120 and a plurality of walls erected rearward from the cover P1171, which will be described later, to form a flow path (flow path) for the game ball, which will be described later. A path P1172) is formed. Details of the upper attacker section P1170 will be described later.

The lower attacker part P1180 shown in FIG. 108 is a part having a second big prize opening P1300 (described later) in which a game ball can be won, a first starting opening P1350, an upper second starting opening P1250, a lower second starting opening P1360, etc. be. The lower attacker part P1180 is arranged at the lower right of the game area P1120 (lower right of the opening area 1d). In the lower attacker part P1180, a flow path (flow path P1230) for a game ball, which will be described later, is formed by a plurality of walls that are erected rearward from a cover P1220, which will be described later. Details of the lower attacker section P1180 will be described later.

The out port P1190 shown in FIG. 108 is a part where game balls that have not won (balls entered) any of the winning ports or starting ports finally flow into. The out port P1190 is formed at the lower end of the left and right center of the gaming area P1120.

The upper movable performance accessory P2000 shown in FIG. 108 is an accessory that can be moved in the vertical direction. The upper movable performance accessory P2000 is arranged behind (behind) the rotating accessory P3000, which will be described later. The operation of the upper movable performance accessory P2000 is controlled by the sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the accessory control circuit 307) shown in FIG. 6, for example. Details of the upper movable performance accessory P2000 will be described later.

The rotating accessory P3000 shown in FIG. 108 is an accessory that can rotate and move. The rotating accessory P3000 is arranged above the opening area 1d when viewed from the front. Further, the rotating accessory P3000 is arranged in front of the upper movable performance accessory P2000. The operation of the rotating accessory P3000 is controlled by the sub-control circuit 300 shown in FIG. 6, for example. Details of the rotating accessory P3000 will be described later.

Below, details of the general winning a prize unit P1160 will be explained using FIGS. 109 and 110.

The general winning a prize opening unit P1160 includes a main body portion P1161, a reflector P1162, a left side light emitting base P1163, and a right side light emitting base P1164.

The main body portion P1161 is formed into a substantially fan shape when viewed from the front. The main body portion P1161 is made of a material that is translucent (capable of transmitting light). A sticker (not shown) for decorating the main body P1161 is pasted on the front surface of the main body P1161. The main body portion P1161 includes a general winning opening P1161a.

The general winning hole P1161a is for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls without performing a lottery when game balls enter the game ball. The general winning hole P1161a is formed by recessing the left and right center portions on the upper surface of the main body portion P1161.

The reflector P1162 is for guiding light from light emitting parts P1163a and P1164a, which will be described later, to the front. The reflector P1162 is arranged at the rear of the main body part P1161. The reflector P1162 is made of a material that does not have translucency (does not transmit light). The reflector P1162 is provided so as to penetrate the transparent plate unit P1110 in the front-rear direction. The reflector P1162 includes a left light guide portion P1162a and a right light guide portion P1162b.

The left light guide portion P1162a and the right light guide portion P1162b are formed into a substantially cylindrical shape with the axial direction facing the front-rear direction. The left light guide portion P1162a is arranged on the left side of the general prize winning opening P1161a in a front cross-sectional view. The right light guide portion P1162b is arranged on the right side of the general prize winning opening P1161a in a front cross-sectional view.

The left light emitting board P1163 and the right light emitting board P1164 are for emitting light behind the reflector P1162. The left light emitting board P1163 and the right light emitting board P1164 each include light emitting parts P1163a and P1164a.

The light emitting part P1163a is attached to the left light emitting base P1163 so as to be able to emit light forward (to the main body part P1161 side). The light emitting part P1163a is arranged behind the left light guide part P1162a of the reflector P1162. The light emitting part P1163a is arranged inside the left light guide part P1162a in a front cross-sectional view. The light emitting part P1163a is configured by, for example, an LED or the like.

The light emitting part P1164a is attached to the right light emitting base P1164 so as to be able to emit light forward (to the main body part P1161 side). The light emitting part P1164a is arranged behind the right light guide part P1162b of the reflector P1162. The light emitting part P1164a is arranged inside the right light guide part P1162b in a front cross-sectional view. The light emitting part P1164a is configured by, for example, an LED or the like.

The general winning a prize opening unit P1160 configured in this way irradiates light forward from the light emitting parts P1163a and P1164a at a predetermined timing. The light passes through the left light guide portion P1162a and the right light guide portion P1162b of the reflector P1162 and enters the main body portion P1161. The light travels forward within the main body P1161 and exits to the outside of the main body P1161. Thereby, the main body portion P1161 can be caused to emit light by the light.

In this embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting parts P1163a and P1164a is guided into the main body part P1161 via a reflector P1162 that cannot transmit light. According to this, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the light emitting parts P1163a and P1164a from being diffused before being guided into the main body part P1161. In this way, the left and right light emitting parts P1163a and P1164a can easily cause the main body part P1161 to emit light as intended.

Below, details of the upper attacker part P1170 will be explained using FIGS. 108 and 111.

The upper attacker part P1170 shown in FIGS. 108 and 111 includes a cover P1171, a flow path P1172, a detour entrance P1173, a detour exit P1174, a detour P1175, a first big prize opening P1176, a shutter P1177, and the like.

A cover P1171 shown in FIG. 108 is a substantially plate-shaped member located in front of the upper attacker part P1170. The cover P1171 has a plurality of walls erected rearward. The cover P1171 forms a flow path P1172, which will be described later, with a plurality of walls and the like that are erected forward from the game area P1120 (base plate P1111).

A flow path P1172 shown in FIG. 111 is a flow path for the game ball in the upper attacker section P1170. Flow path P1172 is included in gaming area P1120. The flow path P1172 is formed to be able to guide the game ball from the flow path entrance P1172a formed at the upper end of the upper attacker part P1170 to the flow path outlet P1172b formed at the lower end of the upper attacker part P1170 so as to pass through a predetermined path. Ru.

A detour entrance P1173 shown in FIG. 111 is a hole that serves as an entrance for a game ball to a detour P1175, which will be described later. The detour entrance P1173 is formed to penetrate the base plate P1111 in the front-rear direction. The detour entrance P1173 is formed directly below the flow path entrance P1172a. A wall portion is formed around the detour entrance P1173 except for the upper side.

A detour exit P1174 shown in FIG. 111 is a hole that serves as an exit for a game ball from a detour P1175, which will be described later. The detour exit P1174 is formed to penetrate the base plate P1111 in the front-rear direction. The detour exit P1174 is formed to the lower left of the detour entrance P1173. Below the detour exit P1174, a plate-shaped wall portion whose plate surface is generally oriented in the vertical direction is formed.

The detour P1175 shown in FIG. 111 detours the game ball to the back side of the game area P1120. The detour P1175 is formed by a predetermined member or the like fixed to the back side of the base plate P1111. The detour P1175 is formed in the shape of a tunnel through which game balls flow on the back side of the game area P1120. The detour P1175 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged in an upper right and lower left orientation. The right end of the detour P1175 is connected to the detour entrance P1173. The left end of the detour P1175 is connected to the detour exit P1174.

The first grand prize opening P1176 shown in FIGS. 108 and 111 is for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls when a game ball wins (enters). The first big prize opening P1176 is formed into a substantially box-like shape when viewed from the front with the upper part opened by a plurality of walls and the like. The upper end of the first big prize opening P1176 is opened relatively widely in the left-right direction.

Moreover, the first big prize opening P1176 is formed directly below the detour exit P1174. Specifically, the upper left end of the first big prize opening P1176 is located to the left of the detour exit P1174. The upper right end of the first big prize opening P1176 is located to the right of the detour exit P1174. A first big winning hole count switch P1176a is arranged in the vertical midway of the first big winning hole P1176. A collection port P1178 that penetrates the transparent plate unit P1110 in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower end of the first large winning port P1176 (below the first large winning port count switch P1176a).

The shutter P1177 shown in FIG. 111 opens and closes the first big prize opening P1176. The shutter P1177 is formed into a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the vertical direction. The shutter P1177 is arranged with its longitudinal direction generally oriented in the left-right direction so as to close the opening at the upper end of the first big prize opening P1176. The shutter P1177 is configured to be switchable by a solenoid (not shown) between a state in which it projects forward beyond the game area P1120 and a state in which it is retracted to the rear of the game area P1120. The shutter P1177 closes the first big prize opening P1176 while protruding forward. Further, the shutter P1177 opens the first big prize opening P1176 in a backwardly retracted state.

Below, details of the lower attacker part P1180 will be explained using FIGS. 108 and 112 to 122.

The lower attacker part P1180 shown in FIGS. 108 and 112 includes a base plate P1210, a cover P1220, a flow path P1230, a passage gate P1240, an upper second starting port P1250, an opening/closing unit P1260 (blade member P1261), an upper detour entrance P1270, Upper detour exit P1280, upper detour P1290, second big prize opening P1300, lower attacker unit P1310 (shutter P1311), lower detour entrance P1320, lower detour exit P1330, lower detour P1340, first starting port P1350, and It is equipped with a lower second starting port P1360, etc.

The base plate P1210 shown in FIGS. 112 to 117 is a plate-shaped member that becomes the base of the lower attacker part P1180. The base plate P1210 is arranged with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The base plate P1210 is formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front. The base plate P1210 is arranged at the lower right portion of the transparent plate unit P1110. A first starting port P1350, which will be described later, is formed in the base plate P1210. Moreover, a plurality of holes are formed in the base plate P1210, penetrating in the front-rear direction. Some of the plurality of holes are provided with members such as a blade member P1261, a shutter P1311, a passage gate switch P1241, etc., which will be described later. Further, some (other) of the plurality of holes constitute an upper detour entrance P1270, etc., which will be described later.

The cover P1220 shown in FIGS. 108 and 112 is a substantially plate-shaped member located in front of the lower attacker portion P1180. The cover P1220 is formed in a shape corresponding to the base plate P1210. As shown in FIG. 118, the cover P1220 has a plurality of walls extending rearward. The cover P1220 forms a flow path P1230, which will be described later, by the plurality of walls and the like.

A flow path P1230 shown in FIG. 113 is a flow path for the game ball in the lower attacker portion P1180. Flow path P1230 is included in gaming area P1120. The flow path P1230 is formed so as to be able to guide the game ball along a predetermined path from the flow path entrance P1231 formed at the upper end of the lower attacker portion P1180 toward the lower left in general.

Further, the flow path P1230 is roughly divided into two regions by the wall portion (wall portion P1232) of the cover P1220. The wall portion P1232 is formed on the left side of the center portion in the left-right direction so as to extend across the lower attacker portion P1180 in the vertical direction. That is, the flow path P1230 is divided into a right region and a left region with the wall portion P1232 in between when viewed from the front. The game ball is configured to be movable from the right side area of the channel P1230 to the left side area via a lower detour P1340, which will be described later.

The passage gate P1240 shown in FIGS. 113, 118, and 119 is for providing an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery on the condition that the game ball passes through. The passage gate P1240 is formed by the wall portion of the cover P1220, etc. into a passage shape through which game balls can pass. As shown in FIG. 113, the passage gate P1240 is formed immediately below the channel entrance P1231. A pass gate switch P1241 is arranged immediately below the pass gate P1240.

The upper second starting port P1250 shown in FIGS. 108, 113, 118, and 119 is for providing an opportunity for a winning lottery on the condition that the game ball wins (enters). The upper second starting port P1250 is formed into a substantially box-like shape when viewed from the front with an open upper portion formed by a plurality of walls and the like. The upper end portion of the upper second starting port P1250 has a relatively large opening in the left-right direction.

Further, the upper second starting port P1250 is formed below the passage gate P1240. An upper second starting port count switch P1251 is arranged at a vertical midway point of the upper second starting port P1250. A collection port P1252 that penetrates the base plate P1210 in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower end of the upper second starting port P1250 (below the upper second starting port count switch P1251).

The opening/closing unit P1260 shown in FIGS. 116 and 117 includes a blade member P1261, and is configured to be able to open and close the blade member P1261 by a solenoid (not shown). The opening/closing unit P1260 is fixed to the rear surface of the base plate P1210.

The blade member P1261 shown in FIGS. 113, 116, 118, and 119 opens and closes the upper second starting port P1250. The blade member P1261 is formed into a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the vertical direction. More specifically, the blade member P1261 is formed in an inclined shape that descends from the right to the left. The blade member P1261 is arranged with its longitudinal direction generally oriented in the left-right direction so as to close the opening at the upper end of the upper second starting port P1250. The blade member P1261 is configured to be switchable between a state in which it protrudes forward from the game area P1120 and a state in which it is retracted to the rear of the game area P1120 by a solenoid provided in the opening/closing unit P1260. The blade member P1261 closes the upper second starting port P1250 while protruding forward. In addition, the blade member P1261 is retracted backward and opens the upper second starting port P1250.

The upper detour entrance P1270 shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 is a hole that becomes the entrance of the game ball to the upper detour P1290, which will be described later. The upper detour entrance P1270 is formed to penetrate the base plate P1210 of the transparent plate unit P1110 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 113, the upper detour entrance P1270 is formed immediately above the right side portion of the blade member P1261.

The upper detour exit P1280 shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 is a hole that serves as an exit for the game ball from the upper detour P1290, which will be described later. The upper detour exit P1280 is formed to penetrate the base plate P1210 of the transparent plate unit P1110 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 113, the upper detour outlet P1280 is formed immediately above the left side portion of the blade member P1261.

Note that the upper detour entrance P1270 and the upper detour exit P1280 are formed as one hole in the base plate P1210. As shown in FIG. 113, the cover P1220 is divided into a right side and a left side when viewed from the front by a wall portion or the like, and the section divided on the right side is formed as an upper detour entrance P1270. Further, the portion divided on the left side is formed as the upper detour exit P1280.

The upper detour P1290 shown in FIGS. 113 and 117 detours the game ball to the back side of the game area P1120. The upper detour P1290 is formed by a predetermined member fixed to the back side of the base plate P1210. The upper detour P1290 is formed in the shape of a tunnel through which game balls flow on the back side of the game area P1120. The upper detour P1290 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged in an upper right and lower left orientation. The right end portion of the upper detour P1290 is connected to the upper detour entrance P1270. The left end of the upper detour P1290 is connected to the upper detour exit P1280.

The second big winning hole P1300 shown in FIG. 108, FIG. 113, FIG. 118 and FIG. 119 is for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls when a game ball wins (enters). The second big prize opening P1300 is formed into a substantially box-like shape when viewed from the front with the upper part open by a plurality of walls and the like. The upper end of the second big prize opening P1300 is opened relatively widely in the left-right direction.

Moreover, the second big prize opening P1300 is formed at the lower left of the upper second starting opening P1250. The second big prize opening P1300 is formed at a position separated from the upper second starting opening P1250. A second big winning hole count switch P1301 is arranged in the middle of the second big winning hole P1300 in the vertical direction. A collection port P1302 that penetrates the base plate P1210 in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower end of the second large winning port P1300 (below the second large winning port count switch P1301).

The lower attacker unit P1310 shown in FIG. 117 has a shutter P1311, and is configured to be able to open and close the shutter P1311 by a solenoid (not shown). The lower attacker unit P1310 is fixed to the rear surface of the base plate P1210.

The shutter P1311 shown in FIGS. 113, 116, 118, and 119 opens and closes the second big prize opening P1300. The shutter P1311 is formed into a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the vertical direction. The shutter P1311 is arranged with its longitudinal direction generally oriented in the left-right direction so as to close the opening at the upper end of the second big prize opening P1300. The shutter P1311 is configured to be switchable between a state in which it protrudes forward beyond the game area P1120 and a state in which it is retracted to the rear of the game area P1120 by a solenoid provided in the lower attacker unit P1310. The shutter P1311 closes the second big prize opening P1300 while protruding forward. Further, the shutter P1311 opens the second big prize opening P1300 in a backwardly retracted state.

The lower detour entrance P1320 shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 is a hole that becomes the entrance of the game ball to the lower detour P1340, which will be described later. The lower detour entrance P1320 is formed to penetrate the base plate P1210 in the front-rear direction. The lower detour entrance P1320 is formed at the lower left of the shutter P1311.

Note that a wall portion P1232 is formed on the left side of the lower detour entrance P1320. That is, as described above, the passage gate P1240, the upper second starting port P1250, the opening/closing unit P1260 (blade member P1261), the upper detour entrance P1270, the upper detour exit P1280, the upper detour P1290, the second big prize opening P1300, the lower Attacker unit P1310 (shutter P1311) and lower detour entrance P1320 are formed in a region on the right side of flow path P1230 partitioned by wall portion P1232.

The lower detour exit P1330 shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 is a hole that serves as an exit for the game ball from the lower detour P1340, which will be described later. The lower detour exit P1330 is formed to penetrate the base plate P1210 in the front-rear direction. The lower detour exit P1330 is formed at the lower left portion of the base plate P1210. The lower detour exit P1330 is formed so that its vertical position is lower than the lower detour entrance P1320.

The lower detour P1340 shown in FIG. 113 detours the game ball to the back side of the game area P1120. The lower detour P1340 is formed by a predetermined member fixed to the back side of the base plate P1210. Details of the rear guide portion P1341 will be described later.

The first starting port P1350 shown in FIGS. 108, 113 to 117 is for providing an opportunity for a winning lottery on the condition that the game ball wins (enters). The first starting port P1350 is formed at the lower left of the base plate P1210 and above the lower detour exit P1330. The first starting port P1350 is formed in a substantially box shape with an upper opening. The rear side of the first starting port P1350 is connected to a notch formed in the base plate P1210. The first starting port P1350 is provided with a first starting port count switch (not shown).

The lower second starting port P1360 shown in FIGS. 108, 113, 118, and 119 is for providing an opportunity for a winning lottery on the condition that the game ball wins (enters the ball). The lower second starting port P1360 is formed immediately below the lower detour exit P1330. The lower second starting port P1360 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper side. The rear side of the lower second starting port P1360 is connected to a hole formed so as to penetrate the base plate P1210 in the front-rear direction. The lower second starting port P1360 is provided with a lower second starting port count switch (not shown).

In this way, the lower detour outlet P1330, the first starting port P1350, and the lower second starting port P1360 are formed in the left region of the flow path P1230 defined by the wall portion P1232. More specifically, the lower detour exit P1330, the first starting port P1350, and the lower second starting port P1360 are formed at positions spaced to the left from the wall portion P1232. In addition, the details of the positional relationship of members near the lower detour exit P1330, the first starting port P1350, and the lower second starting port P1360 will be described later.

Further, the lower detour P1340 is formed on the back side of the game area P1120 so as to straddle the wall portion P1232 in the left-right direction, that is, to span the right side area and the left side area of the channel P1230. Below, details of the rear guide portion P1341 of the lower detour P1340 will be described using FIGS. 120 to 122.

The rear guide portion P1341 shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 is a member that guides the game ball from the lower detour entrance P1320 to the lower detour exit P1330 in the lower detour P1340. The rear guide portion P1341 is fixed to the rear surface of the base plate P1210. The rear guide portion P1341 is formed in a longitudinal shape. The rear guide portion P1341 is arranged in a slightly inclined posture with its longitudinal direction directed toward the upper right and lower left when viewed from the front. The rear guide portion P1341 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open front side. The upper surface of the bottom plate P1343 (lower side surface) of the rear guide portion P1341 is formed so that a game ball can roll thereon. The rear guide portion P1341 includes a first slope portion P1344, a second slope portion P1345, a right side guide portion P1346, and a left side guide portion P1347.

The first inclined portion P1344 is a portion of the bottom plate P1343 whose upper surface is inclined downward to the left. The first inclined portion P1344 is formed to extend from the right end of the bottom plate P1343 to near the left end.

The second inclined portion P1345 is a portion of the bottom plate P1343 whose upper surface is inclined forward and downward. The second inclined portion P1345 is formed at the left end portion of the bottom plate P1343. The second sloped part P1345 is formed on the left side of the first sloped part P1344 so as to be continuous with the first sloped part P1344 in the left-right direction. A step is provided in the vertical direction at the connection portion between the second slope portion P1345 and the first slope portion P1344. The second inclined portion P1345 is formed to have the lowest height on the upper surface of the bottom plate P1343 compared to other portions. The front end of the second sloped portion P1345 is formed to protrude more forward than the front end of the first sloped portion P1344.

The right side guide part P1346 is a part for guiding the game ball toward the lower left in the rear side guide part P1341. The right side guide portion P1346 is formed into a substantially right triangular shape in plan view with the hypotenuse facing toward the left front. The right guide portion P1346 is formed at the right rear end of the first inclined portion P1344.

The left guide part P1347 is a part for guiding the game ball forward in the rear guide part P1341. The left guide portion P1347 is formed into a substantially right triangular shape in plan view with the hypotenuse facing toward the front right. The left guide portion P1347 is formed at the left end of the second inclined portion P1345.

In this way, the lower detour P1340 is formed on the back side of the gaming area P1120 so as to straddle the wall portion P1232 in the left-right direction, that is, to span the right side area and the left side area of the channel P1230.

Below, the details of the positional relationship of members near the first starting port P1350, the lower detour exit P1330, and the lower second starting port P1360 will be described using FIG. 123. In addition, below, for convenience, the first starting port P1350, the lower detour exit P1330, and the lower second starting port P1360 may be referred to as "three ports".

As shown in FIG. 123, the three ports are arranged so as to be continuous in the vertical direction with almost no gaps. Specifically, among the three ports, a first starting port P1350, a lower detour exit P1330, and a lower second starting port P1360 are arranged in order from the upper side to the lower side. Above the three mouths, stage P1150, more specifically, a downwardly recessed left and right center portion of stage P1150 (hereinafter referred to as “stage center portion P1151”) is arranged.

Further, the three openings are arranged at positions spaced to the left from the wall portion P1232 of the lower attacker portion P1180. Specifically, the three openings are arranged to the left from the wall portion P1232 with a width at least equal to or larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. A gaming area P1120 is formed between the three mouths and the wall portion P1232. Further, a lower detour P1340 (rear guide portion P1341) is arranged on the rear side of the gaming area P1120 between the three mouths and the wall portion P1232. Further, above between the three mouths and the lower attacker part P1180, a stage P1150, more specifically, a right part of the stage P1150 that is recessed downward (hereinafter referred to as "stage right part P1152") is arranged. be done.

Further, the three openings are arranged at positions spaced to the right from the general winning opening unit P1160. Specifically, the three openings are arranged to the right from the general winning opening unit P1160 with a width at least equal to or larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. A gaming area P1120 is formed between the three openings and the general winning opening unit P1160. Further, a stage P1150, more specifically, a left part of the stage P1150 that is recessed downward (hereinafter referred to as "stage left part P1153") is arranged above between the three mouths and the lower attacker part P1180. be done.

Below, the main flow of game balls in a game will be explained using FIGS. 124 to 128. Note that the thick black line (solid line and dotted line) arrows shown in FIGS. 124 to 128 indicate an example of the flow of the game ball. Further, the thick black dotted arrow shown in FIG. 124 indicates an example of the flow of game balls in the warp passage P1140. Further, the thick black dotted line arrows shown in FIGS. 125 to 128 indicate an example of the flow of game balls in various detours (the flow of game balls on the back side of the game area P1120).

As shown in FIG. 124, the game ball fired from the firing device 6 shown in FIG. 1 etc. is guided to the game area P1120 by the ball firing path P1130. Then, depending on the momentum of the shot game ball, it flows through an area to the left of the opening area 1d or an area to the right of the opening area 1d. Although not shown for convenience, a large number of game nails are provided in the game area P1120. In this way, the game ball guided to the game area P1120 repeatedly collides with the game nail and bounces in various directions while falling through the game area P1120.

When the game ball falls through the game area P1120 on the left side of the opening area 1d (so-called left-handed hitting), some of the game balls enter the inside of the warp path P1140, and the warp path P1140 causes the game ball to fall into the stage P1150. You will be guided to. The game ball guided to the stage P1150 falls downward (lower game area P1120) from any of the left and right center, left, and right parts of the stage P1150, as described later.

Further, when the game ball falls through the game area P1120 on the right side of the opening area 1d (so-called right-handed hitting), the game ball is first guided to the upper attacker part P1170.

As shown in FIG. 125, the game ball guided to the upper attacker part P1170 flows into the upper attacker part P1170 from the channel entrance P1172a. Then, the game ball is guided from the detour entrance P1173 to the detour P1175, and rolls on the detour P1175 (that is, the back side of the gaming area P1120). Next, the game ball that has rolled on the detour P1175 is returned to the game area P1120 again from the detour exit P1174 and rolls on the shutter P1177. At this time, if the shutter P1177 is opened, the game ball enters the first grand prize opening P1176. Further, the game ball that has rolled on the shutter P1177 falls downward and is discharged to the outside of the upper attacker part P1170 from the flow path outlet P1172b. Then, the game ball discharged to the outside of the upper attacker section P1170 is guided to the lower attacker section P1180.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, the game ball guided to the lower attacker part P1180 flows into the lower attacker part P1180 from the channel entrance P1231. Then, the game ball falls inside the lower attacker part P1180 and is distributed in two directions at the upper second starting port P1250 (see thick black arrows R1a and R1b). Then, the game balls sorted to the left as indicated by the thick black arrow R1a roll on the blade member P1261 and are guided from the upper detour entrance P1270 to the upper detour P1290 on the way, and are guided to the upper detour P1290 (i.e. , the back side of the gaming area P1120). Then, the game ball that has rolled on the upper detour P1290 is returned to the game area P1120 again from the upper detour exit P1280, and rolls on the blade member P1261. At this time, if the blade member P1261 is in the open state, the game ball enters the upper second starting port P1250.

Then, the game balls rolling on the blade member P1261 fall and are distributed in two directions at the second big prize opening P1300 (see thick black arrows R2a and R2b). Then, the game balls sorted to the left as indicated by the thick black arrow R2a roll through the shutter P1311. At this time, if the shutter P1311 is opened, the game ball enters the second grand prize opening P1300. Then, the game ball that has rolled the shutter P1311 is guided from the lower detour entrance P1320 to the lower detour P1340 (towards the back of the game board P1100), and is guided to the rear guide portion P1341 of the lower detour P1340 (i.e., the game area (back side of P1120). Then, the game ball that has rolled on the lower detour P1340 is returned to the game area P1120 side (towards the front of the game board P1100) from the lower detour exit P1330.

As described above, the lower second starting port P1360 is arranged immediately below the lower detour exit P1330. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 128, when the game ball is returned from the lower detour exit P1330 to the gaming area P1120 side again, the game ball easily enters the lower second starting port P1360, as shown by the thick black arrow R3. He will be pitched in.

In addition, only the game balls that have flowed from the right side game area P1120 (that is, the game balls that have flowed from the lower attacker section P1180 via the lower detour P1340) are at the lower detour exit P1330 and the lower second starting port P1360. Instead, the game balls flowing from the left side game area P1120 also fall. For example, a game ball that has rolled on the stage P1150 is falling.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128, the game ball that has fallen from the left stage P1153 of the stage P1150, as shown by the thick black arrow R4, enters the first starting port P1350, the lower detour exit P1330, and the lower second It falls to the left of the starting port P1360. In addition, the game ball that has fallen from the right stage P1152 of the stage P1150 is to the right of the first starting port P1350, the lower detour exit P1330, and the lower second starting port P1360 (i.e., 3 (the area between the two mouths and the wall P1232).

In addition, the game ball that has fallen from the stage central portion P1151 of the stage P1150 falls to the first starting port P1350 located directly below, as shown by the thick black arrow R6. If the fallen game ball can pass through between the game nails (not shown), it will win a prize in the first starting hole P1350.

Furthermore, even if a game ball falls from the center part P1151 of the stage, if it collides with a game nail (not shown), for example, it will be bounced to the left as shown by the thick black arrow R6b, 1 starting opening P1350, lower detour exit P1330 and lower second starting opening P1360) and the general winning opening unit P1160.

In addition, even if a game ball falls from the center part P1151 of the stage, if it collides with a game nail (not shown), it will be bounced to the right as shown by the thick black arrow R6a, P1350, the lower detour exit P1330 and the lower second starting port P1360), and the game area P1120 between the wall P1232.

In this way, in the game area P1120 between the three mouths and the wall P1232, even though the game ball flows from the right to the left when the ball is hit to the right, the game ball Since the ball rolls on the lower detour P1340 on the back side of the game area P1120, it is possible to prevent a collision with a game ball falling from above (see thick black arrows R5 and R6a). In other words, since the areas in which the game balls roll in two directions (rightward and downward) can be overlapped in front view, it is possible to save space in the rolling area of the game balls. It is possible to form a winning hole, etc., and it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging game components.
In addition, since the game area P1220 can be secured on the left and right sides of the lower detour exit P1330, the game balls discharged from the lower detour exit P1330 are not uniformly guided to the lower second starting port P1360, but instead of being led to the lower second starting port P1360. It is also possible to generate a losing ball that does not land in the mouth P1360, thereby increasing the gameplay.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is disclosed which includes a grand prize opening unit having a guiding path for guiding a game ball launched to the right side of a game board to a grand prize opening. For example, as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-35176.

However, the big winning hole is often formed relatively large because it is necessary to secure a wide winning area, and even if you try to form another winning hole near the big winning hole, it is difficult to secure the placement space. There was a point.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can easily secure a space for arranging a winning opening.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment is
A game machine equipped with a game board P1100 having a game area P1120 on the front side in which a game ball can roll,
The game board P1100 is
A first winning opening (first starting opening P1350) provided in the gaming area P1120,
A first ball passage provided on the front side of the game board and in which the game ball can roll (for example, a passage P1172 of the upper attacker part P1170 or a passage P1230 of the lower attacker part P1180);
an inlet (lower detour entrance P1320) that is provided on the downstream side of the first ball passage and guides the game ball toward the back side of the game board P1100;
a second ball passage (lower detour P1340) in which game balls flowing in from the inflow port (lower detour entrance P1320) can roll;
a discharge port (lower detour exit P1330) that is provided on the downstream side of the second ball passage (lower detour P1340) and guides the game ball toward the front of the game board P1100;
a second prize opening (lower second starting opening P1360) provided in the gaming area P1120 and provided below the discharge opening (lower detour exit P1330),
The second winning opening (lower second starting opening P1360) is provided below the first winning opening (first starting opening P1350),
On the left and right sides of the first winning opening (first starting opening P1350), a gaming area P1120 is formed where the game ball that did not flow into the first winning opening (first starting opening P1350) can roll downward. has been
At least one of the gaming areas P1120 formed on the left and right sides of the first winning opening (first starting opening P1350) is located on the front side of the gaming board of the second ball passage (lower detour P1340). It is characterized by being formed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the winning opening.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various changes can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in this embodiment, the "first winning hole" is the first starting hole P1350, and the "second winning hole" is the lower second starting hole P1360, but the invention is not limited to this.

Furthermore, the configuration of the rear guide portion P1341 is not limited to that according to this embodiment. For example, the rear guide portion P1341 may have various configurations, such as having a curved or bent shape when viewed from the front.

Below, the upper movable performance accessory P2000 and the upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300 will be explained using FIGS. 129 to 148.

[Upper movable performance accessory P2000]
The upper movable performance accessory P2000 performs performance by moving. Specifically, the upper movable performance accessory P2000 performs a performance using a first performance part P2110 and a second performance part P2120, which will be described later. Although the details will be described later, the upper movable performance accessory P2000 performs a performance by rotating around an axis extending in the left-right direction. The explanation will be based on the state where the camera is facing forward.

The upper movable performance accessory P2000 is formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The upper movable performance accessory P2000 is arranged with its longitudinal direction facing left and right. The upper movable performance accessory P2000 mainly includes a first performance part P2110, a second performance part P2120, a raised/lowered part P2140, and a drive mechanism P2200.

[First production department P2110]
The first effect part P2110 shown in FIGS. 129 to 131, 135, etc. is decorated with appropriate decorations, and performs effects by being moved. Specifically, the first presentation part P2110 is decorated to imitate the left and right eyes and eyebrows of a person. The first performance part P2110 is provided on the front side of the upper movable performance accessory P2000. The first production part P2110 mainly includes an eyebrow movable body P2111, a movable body support arm P2112, a pupil decoration body P2113, an ornamental illumination board P2114, a rear cover P2115, an outer lens P2116, a diffusion sheet P2117, a light guide lens P2118, and an inner lens. Equipped with P2119.

The eyebrow movable body P2111 shown in FIGS. 129 to 131 and 135 is a part that moves when performing effects. The eyebrow movable body P2111 is formed in a shape imitating a human eyebrow. A pair of left and right eyebrow movable bodies P2111 are provided in the front part of the first presentation part P2110. The left eyebrow movable body P2111 is provided so that its longitudinal direction is downward to the right. The right eyebrow movable body P2111 is provided so that its longitudinal direction is downward to the left. The left and right eyebrow movable bodies P2111 are provided so as to be symmetrical to each other. An eyebrow shaft portion P2111a is provided at the rear of the eyebrow movable body P2111 (see FIG. 131). The eyebrow shaft portion P2111a is provided so as to extend rearward from the eyebrow movable body P2111 with its axis directed in the front-rear direction.

A movable body support arm P2112 shown in FIG. 131 supports the eyebrow movable body P2111. The movable body support arm P2112 is formed into an arm shape. A pair of left and right movable body support arms P2112 are provided behind the eyebrow movable body P2111. The left movable body support arm P2112 is provided so that its longitudinal direction is downward to the right. The right movable body support arm P2112 is provided so that its longitudinal direction is downward to the left. The left and right movable body support arms P2112 are provided so as to be symmetrical to each other. Below, the left movable body support arm P2112 will be explained, and the description of the right movable body support arm P2112 will be omitted.

An insertion hole (not shown) is formed in the front surface of the movable body support arm P2112. The insertion hole is provided near the left end of the movable body support arm P2112. The eyebrow shaft portion P2111a of the eyebrow movable body P2111 is inserted into the insertion hole.

Furthermore, an arm shaft portion P2112a is formed on the rear surface of the movable body support arm P2112. The arm shaft portion P2112a is provided near the right end portion of the movable body support arm P2112. The arm shaft portion P2112a is provided so as to extend rearward from the rear surface of the movable body support arm P2112 with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The arm shaft portion P2112a is supported by a drive mechanism P2200, which will be described later.

In this way, the movable body support arm P2112 supports the eyebrow movable body P2111 so as to be rotatable around the eyebrow shaft portion P2111a.

The pupil decoration body P2113 shown in FIGS. 129 to 131 and 135 is a part that constitutes the front surface of the first effect section P2110. The pupil decoration P2113 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The pupil decoration body P2113 is provided behind the eyebrow movable body P2111 with its longitudinal direction facing in the left-right direction. A pupil through hole P2113a is formed in the pupil decoration P2113 (see FIG. 131). The pupil through hole P2113a is formed in a shape that resembles a human pupil when viewed from the front. A pair of left and right pupil through holes P2113a are formed, and the left and right pupil through holes P2113a are formed to be symmetrical to each other. The surface (front surface) of the pupil decoration body P2113 constitutes the "first effect surface" according to the present invention.

The accessory illumination board P2114 shown in FIG. 131 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape. The accessory illumination board P2114 is provided with its board surface facing forward and backward, and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are provided on the front surface of the accessory illumination board P2114 over substantially the entire left and right sides of the accessory illumination board P2114. By causing the LED to emit light, it is possible to irradiate light to the front of the accessory illumination board P2114.

The rear cover P2115 shown in FIG. 131 is a part that constitutes the rear part of the first production section P2110. The rear cover P2115 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The rear cover P2115 is provided behind the accessory illumination board P2114 with its longitudinal direction facing the left-right direction, and supports the accessory illumination board P2114.

An outer lens P2116, a diffusion sheet P2117, a light guide lens P2118, and an inner lens P2119 are provided in order from the front between the pupil decoration body P2113 and the accessory illumination board P2114 (see FIG. 131). These outer lenses P2116 and the like are provided in pairs on the left and right at positions corresponding to the pupil through holes P2113a of the pupil ornament P2113. By providing these outer lenses P2116 and the like, the portion where the pupil through hole P2113a is formed can be illuminated as a whole by irradiating light from the LED of the accessory illumination board P2114.

[Second production department P2120]
The second effect part P2120 shown in FIGS. 132 and 133 is decorated with appropriate decorations and performs effects by being moved. Specifically, the second presentation part P2120 is decorated to imitate the eyes and eyebrows on one side of a person's left and right sides. The second performance part P2120 is provided on the lower surface of the upper movable performance accessory P2000. The second performance section P2120 mainly includes an eyebrow decoration P2121, an ornamental illumination board P2122, a light guide lens P2123, an upper cover P2124, and a pupil movable body unit P2130.

The eyebrow decoration body P2121 shown in FIGS. 132 and 133 is a part that constitutes the lower surface of the second presentation part P2120. The eyebrow decoration P2121 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The eyebrow decoration body P2121 is provided at the lower part of the second presentation part P2120 with the longitudinal direction facing the left-right direction. The eyebrow decoration P2121 is formed in a shape that imitates the left and right eyebrows of a person when viewed from the bottom. The front surface (lower surface) of the eyebrow decoration P2121 constitutes the "second presentation surface" according to the present invention.

The accessory illumination board P2122 shown in FIG. 133 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape. The accessory illumination board P2122 is provided with its board surface facing up and down, and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the accessory illumination board P2122 over substantially the entire left and right sides of the accessory illumination board P2122. By causing the LED to emit light, it is possible to irradiate light toward the eyebrow decoration P2121 side.

A light guiding lens P2123 is provided between the eyebrow decoration P2121 and the accessory illumination board P2122 (see FIG. 133). By providing the light guide lens P2123, the eyebrow decoration P2121 can be illuminated as a whole by irradiating light from the LED of the accessory illumination board P2122.

The upper cover P2124 shown in FIG. 133 is a part that constitutes the upper part of the second production section P2120. The upper cover P2124 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The upper cover P2124 is provided above the accessory illumination board P2122 with its longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction, and supports the accessory illumination board P2122.

The pupil movable body unit P2130 shown in FIGS. 133 and 134 is a part that moves when performing effects. A pair of left and right pupil movable body units P2130 are provided above the upper cover P2124. The pupil movable body unit P2130 includes a pupil movable body P2131, an illumination board P2132, and a light guide lens P2133. Note that the left and right pupil movable body units P2130 are formed so as to be generally symmetrical to each other. Therefore, in the following, the left pupil movable body unit P2130 will be described, and the right pupil movable body unit P2130 will be omitted.

The pupil movable body P2131 shown in FIGS. 133 and 134 is formed in a shape that imitates a part (half part) of a human's left and right pupils when viewed from the bottom. The pupil movable body P2131 is provided at the lowest side of the pupil movable body unit P2130.

The illumination board P2132 shown in FIG. 134 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape. The illumination board P2132 is provided above the pupil movable body P2131 with its plate surface facing up and down. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the illumination board P2132 over substantially the entire left and right sides of the illumination board P2132. By causing the LED to emit light, light can be irradiated downward to the illumination board P2132.

A light guiding lens P2133 is provided between the pupil movable body P2131 and the illumination board P2132 (see FIG. 134). By providing the light guiding lens P2133, the entire pupil movable body P2131 can be illuminated by irradiating light from the LED of the illumination board P2132.

The pupil movable body P2131, the illumination board P2132, and the light guide lens P2133 are fixed to each other and formed into a unit. Note that a left pupil cover P2231, which will be described later, is also fixed to the left pupil movable unit P2130 (see FIG. 134). Further, a right pupil cover P2232, which will be described later, is also fixed to the right pupil movable unit P2130 (see FIG. 134).

[Elevated part P2140]
The lifted/lowered portion P2140 shown in FIGS. 130, 132, and 135 is a portion that is lifted and lowered by an upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300, which will be described later. The lifted/lowered part P2140 is provided so as to be interposed between the first performance part P2110, the second performance part P2120, and the upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300 described later. The lifted/lowered part P2140 mainly includes a base member P2141, a left mounting shaft member P2142, a right mounting shaft member P2143, a left mounting guide P2144, a right mounting guide P2145, a left carriage P2146, and a right carriage P2147.

The base member P2141 shown in FIGS. 130, 135, etc. constitutes the left and right center portions of the raised and lowered portion P2140. The base member P2141 is formed to extend in the left-right direction behind the first presentation section P2110 and the second presentation section P2120, and is bent forward at both left and right ends thereof. The horizontal width of the base member P2141 is formed to be approximately the same as that of the first effect portion P2110 and the second effect portion P2120.

The left attachment shaft member P2142 shown in FIGS. 135 and 136 is for attaching the left rotation shaft (insertion member P2213 to be described later) of the upper movable performance accessory P2000. The left mounting shaft member P2142 is fixed to the left end of the base member P2141.

The right attachment shaft member P2143 shown in FIGS. 135 and 137 is for attaching the right rotation shaft (rotation shaft P2143a to be described later) of the upper movable performance accessory P2000. The right mounting shaft member P2143 is fixed to the right end of the base member P2141. The right mounting shaft member P2143 is provided with a rotation shaft P2143a. The rotation shaft P2143a is provided so as to extend leftward from the right mounting shaft member P2143 with its axis oriented in the left-right direction. The rotation shaft P2143a is inserted into a through hole provided at the right end of the base member P2141.

A left attachment guide P2144 shown in FIGS. 135 and 136 is a member for attaching a left carriage P2146, which will be described later, to a left attachment shaft member P2142. The left mounting guide P2144 is fixed to the left side of the left mounting shaft member P2142. A shaft hole P2144a and a long hole P2144b are formed in the left mounting guide P2144.

The shaft hole P2144a shown in FIG. 136 is formed so as to pass through the vicinity of the upper end of the left mounting guide P2144 in the front-rear direction.

The elongated hole P2144b shown in FIG. 136 is provided below the shaft hole P2144a with its extending direction substantially in the left-right direction. The elongated hole P2144b is formed in an arc shape centered on a first pin P2146a, which will be described later, when viewed from the front.

A right attachment guide P2145 shown in FIGS. 135 and 137 is a member for attaching a right carriage P2147, which will be described later, to a right attachment shaft member P2143. The right mounting guide P2145 is fixed to the right side of the right mounting shaft member P2143.

The left carriage P2146 shown in FIGS. 129, 130, and 135 is a part that is attached to an upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300 (left side guide part P2310), which will be described later. The left carriage P2146 is fixed to the left mounting guide P2144. The left carriage P2146 is formed to be movable up and down along the left guide portion P2310. The left carriage P2146 is provided with a first pin P2146a and a second pin P2146b.

Both the first pin P2146a and the second pin P2146b are provided to extend forward from the left carriage P2146. The first pin P2146a is provided above the second pin P2146b. The first pin P2146a is inserted into the shaft hole P2144a, and the second pin P2146b is inserted into the long hole P2144b (see FIG. 136).

The right carriage P2147 shown in FIGS. 129, 130, and 135 is a part that is attached to an upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300 (right side guide part P2320), which will be described later. The right carriage P2147 is fixed to the right mounting guide P2145. The right carriage P2147 is formed to be movable up and down along the right guide portion P2320. A pressing member P2147a is provided on the right carriage P2147.

A pressing member P2147a shown in FIG. 135 restricts forward movement of the right mounting guide P2145. The pressing member P2147a is formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front. More specifically, the pressing member P2147a includes a portion extending in the vertical direction and a portion extending leftward from the lower end of the portion. The holding member P2147a is provided in front of the right mounting guide P2145.

[Drive mechanism P2200]
The drive mechanism P2200 drives the first presentation section P2110 and the second presentation section P2120. The drive mechanism P2200 includes an accessory rotation drive section P2210, an eyebrow rotation drive section P2220, and a pupil rotation drive section P2230.

[Accessory object rotation drive unit P2210]
The accessory rotation drive unit P2210 shown in FIGS. 139 to 141 rotates the upper movable performance accessory P2000. The accessory rotation drive unit P2210 mainly includes a left shaft hole member P2211, a rotation bush P2212, an insertion member P2213, a transmission gear P2214, a motor gear P2215, a rotation drive motor P2216, and a right shaft hole member P2217.

The left shaft hole member P2211 shown in FIGS. 139 and 140 includes a plate-like portion P2211a whose plate surface is oriented in the left-right direction, and the plate-like portion P2211a is positioned to the right of the left mounting shaft member P2142. (See FIG. 140). The left shaft hole member P2211 is placed on the left end of the accessory illumination board P2122 and is fixed to the eyebrow decoration P2121. A shaft hole P2211b and a guide P2211c are formed in the left shaft hole member P2211.

The shaft hole P2211b shown in FIG. 140 is formed to penetrate the plate-like portion P2211a. Further, a guide P2211c is formed on the left-facing surface of the plate-shaped portion P2211a. The guide P2211c is formed to protrude leftward from the plate-like portion P2211a. The guide P2211c is formed in an arc shape concentric with the shaft hole P2211b when viewed from the left side. The guide P2211c is formed along the outer circumferential surface of the left mounting shaft member P2142 at the upper rear of the shaft hole P2211b when viewed from the left side.

The rotary bush P2212 shown in FIG. 140 is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape. The rotary bush P2212 is rotatably provided in the shaft hole P2211b with its axis oriented in the left-right direction. A protrusion (not shown) is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the rotary bush P2212. The rotating bush P2212 is provided so that its axis coincides with the axis of the rotating shaft P2143a.

The insertion member P2213 shown in FIGS. 139 and 140 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and is inserted into the inner circumferential surface of the rotary bush P2212 with its axis oriented in the left-right direction. A groove portion P2213a is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the insertion member P2213. The protrusion (not shown) of the rotary bush P2212 is engaged with the groove P2213a. The left end portion of the insertion member P2213 is fixed to the left mounting shaft member P2142.

The transmission gear P2214 shown in FIGS. 139 and 141 to 143 is provided on the right side of the insertion member P2213 with its axis oriented in the left-right direction, and is fixed to the insertion member P2213. The transmission gear P2214 is provided so that its axis coincides with the rotation axis P2143a.

Motor gear P2215 shown in FIGS. 139, 141, and 142 transmits driving force to transmission gear P2214. Motor gear P2215 is provided above and behind transmission gear P2214 with its axis oriented in the left-right direction. Motor gear P2215 is provided to mesh with transmission gear P2214.

A rotary drive motor P2216 shown in FIGS. 139 and 141 rotates a motor gear P2215. Rotary drive motor P2216 is provided to the right of motor gear P2215 with output shaft P2216a facing left. A motor gear P2215 is fixed to the left end of the output shaft P2216a. The rotation drive motor P2216 is supported by a motor bracket (not shown). The motor bracket is placed on the accessory illumination board P2122 and fixed to the eyebrow decoration P2121.

The right shaft hole member P2217 shown in FIG. 138 is provided to be located to the left of the right mounting shaft member P2143. The right shaft hole member P2217 is placed on the right end of the accessory illumination board P2122 and is fixed to the eyebrow decoration P2121. A shaft hole (not shown) is formed in the right shaft hole member P2217, and the rotation shaft P2143a of the right mounting shaft member P2143 is inserted into the shaft hole.

By configuring the accessory rotation drive unit P2210 in this way, the upper movable performance accessory P2000 can be rotated around the rotation axis P2143a. A detailed explanation will be given below with reference to FIGS. 139 and 141.

First, the rotary drive motor P2216 is driven. When rotation drive motor P2216 is driven, motor gear P2215 rotates. Here, the transmission gear P2214 is fixed to the left mounting shaft member P2142 via the insertion member P2213. Therefore, when the motor gear P2215 that meshes with the transmission gear P2214 rotates, the rotational drive motor P2216 and eventually the upper movable performance accessory P2000 (other than the insertion member P2213 and the lifted/lowered part P2140) move around the rotation shaft P2143a and the rotation bush P2212. Rotate around the axis.

[Eyebrow rotation drive unit P2220]
The eyebrow rotation drive unit P2220 shown in FIGS. 139 and 141 to 143 moves the eyebrow movable body P2111. The eyebrow rotation drive unit P2220 mainly includes a movable rack P2221, an idle gear P2222, a first bevel gear P2223, a second bevel gear P2224, a bevel gear shaft P2225, a shaft gear P2226, a transmission gear P2214, a motor gear P2215, and a rotational drive motor P2216. The transmission gear P2214, the motor gear P2215, and the rotation drive motor P2216 belong to the accessory rotation drive section P2210 as described above, but they also belong to the eyebrow rotation drive section P2220.

The movable rack P2221 shown in FIGS. 139, 141, and 142 is provided behind the pupil decoration body P2113 with its longitudinal direction facing the left-right direction. The movable rack P2221 is supported by the rear cover P2115 (see FIG. 131) so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The movable rack P2221 is formed with a long hole P2221a, a guide hole P2221b, a gear P2221c, and an engaging portion P2221d.

The elongated holes P2221a shown in FIG. 142 are formed in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the movable rack P2221, with their longitudinal directions oriented in the left and right directions. The protrusion P2115a of the rear cover P2115 is inserted into the elongated hole P2221a. Thereby, the movable rack P2221 is supported by the rear cover P2115 so as to be movable in the left-right direction.

The guide hole P2221b shown in FIG. 142 is for guiding the movable body support arm P2112. The guide hole P2221b is formed so as to extend to the left, then to the upper left, and then to the left in a front view. A pair of left and right guide holes P2221b are formed. The movable body support arm P2112 is inserted into the guide hole P2221b.

A gear P2221c shown in FIG. 142 is formed at the upper end of the movable rack P2221 on the left side of the guide hole P2221b.

The engaging portion P2221d shown in FIG. 139 is a portion that engages with a movable rack P2234, which will be described later. The engaging portion P2221d is formed to protrude rearward from the left and right middle portions of the movable rack P2221.

Idle gear P2222 shown in FIGS. 139, 141, and 142 transmits driving force to gear P2221c. The idle gear P2222 is provided with its axis directed in the front-rear direction and meshed with the gear P2221c.

The first bevel gear P2223 shown in FIGS. 139, 142, and 143 transmits driving force to the idle gear P2222. The first bevel gear P2223 is provided above and to the left of the idle gear P2222 with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The first bevel gear P2223 is provided to mesh with the idle gear P2222.

The second bevel gear P2224 shown in FIGS. 139 and 142 transmits driving force to the first bevel gear P2223. The second bevel gear P2224 is provided behind the first bevel gear P2223 with its axis oriented in the left-right direction. The second bevel gear P2224 is provided to mesh with the first bevel gear P2223.

The bevel gear shaft P2225 shown in FIGS. 139, 141, and 142 transmits driving force to the second bevel gear P2224. The bevel gear shaft P2225 is provided with its extending direction facing the left-right direction. The right end portion of the bevel gear shaft P2225 is fixed to the second bevel gear P2224.

The shaft gear P2226 shown in FIGS. 139, 141, and 142 transmits driving force to the bevel gear shaft P2225 (second bevel gear P2224). Shaft gear P2226 is fixed to the left end of bevel gear shaft P2225 with its axis oriented in the left-right direction. Shaft gear P2226 is provided above transmission gear P2214 so as to mesh with transmission gear P2214.

The transmission gear P2214, the motor gear P2215, and the rotary drive motor P2216 have been described above, so their explanation will be omitted here.

By configuring the eyebrow rotation drive unit P2220 in this way, the eyebrow movable body P2111 can be rotated. A detailed description will be given below with reference to FIGS. 139, 141, and 142.

First, when the rotary drive motor P2216 is driven, as described above, the upper movable performance accessory P2000 (the part other than the insertion member P2213 and the lifted/lowered part P2140) rotates around the axis of the rotation shaft P2143a and the rotation bush P2212. do. Then, shaft gear P2226 moves along the outer periphery of transmission gear P2214. Since the shaft gear P2226 and the transmission gear P2214 mesh with each other, the shaft gear P2226 rotates with respect to the transmission gear P2214 fixed to the left mounting shaft member P2142. As a result, the bevel gear shaft P2225 and the second bevel gear P2224 also rotate. Then, the first bevel gear P2223 that meshes with the second bevel gear P2224 also rotates, and the idle gear P2222 that meshes with the first bevel gear P2223 also rotates. As the idle gear P2222 rotates, the movable rack P2221 that meshes with the idle gear P2222 moves in the left-right direction. Thereby, the movable body support arm P2112 and the eyebrow movable body P2111 fixed to the movable body support arm P2112 are guided by the guide hole P2221b and rotate around the eyebrow shaft portion P2111a. In this way, the eyebrow movable body P2111 also rotates at the same time as the upper movable performance accessory P2000 (portions other than the raised and lowered part P2140, etc.) rotates.

[Pupil rotation drive unit P2230]
The pupil rotation driving section P2230 shown in FIGS. 134, 139, and 143 moves the pupil movable unit P2130. The pupil rotation drive unit P2230 mainly includes a left pupil cover P2231, a right pupil cover P2232, a movable gear P2233, a movable rack P2234, a movable rack P2221, an idle gear P2222, a first bevel gear P2223, a second bevel gear P2224, a bevel gear shaft P2225, and a shaft gear. P2226, transmission gear P2214, motor gear P2215, and rotational drive motor P2216. The transmission gear P2214, the motor gear P2215, and the rotation drive motor P2216 belong to the accessory rotation drive section P2210 and the eyebrow rotation drive section P2220 as described above, and the movable rack P2221, the idle gear P2222, the first bevel gear P2223, and the The two-bevel gear P2224, the bevel gear shaft P2225, and the shaft gear P2226 belong to the eyebrow rotation drive section P2220, but also belong to the pupil rotation drive section P2230.

The left pupil cover P2231 shown in FIGS. 134, 139, and 143 covers the left pupil movable unit P2130 from above. A left transmission gear P2231a is formed in the left pupil cover P2231.

The left transmission gear P2231a is provided at the right rear portion of the left pupil cover P2231 with its axis directed in the vertical direction.

The right pupil cover P2232 covers the right pupil movable body unit P2130 from above. A first right transmission gear P2232a and a second right transmission gear P2232b are formed on the right pupil cover P2232.

The first right transmission gear P2232a is provided at the left rear part of the right pupil cover P2232 with its axis directed in the vertical direction. The first right transmission gear P2232a is provided to mesh with the left transmission gear P2231a.

The second right transmission gear P2232b is provided above the first right transmission gear P2232a with its axis directed in the vertical direction. The second right transmission gear P2232b is integrated with the first right transmission gear P2232a.

The movable gear P2233 shown in FIGS. 139 and 143 is provided in front of the second right transmission gear P2232b with its axis directed in the vertical direction. Movable gear P2233 is provided to mesh with second right transmission gear P2232b.

The movable rack P2234 shown in FIGS. 139 and 143 transmits driving force to the movable gear P2233. The movable rack P2234 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above. The movable rack P2234 is provided above the movable gear P2233 with its longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction. The protrusion of the movable gear P2233 is inserted into the elongated hole formed in the movable rack P2234, and is engaged with the movable gear P2233 at the protrusion. The movable rack P2234 engages with the engaging portion P2221d of the movable rack P2221 at its front portion.

The transmission gear P2214, the motor gear P2215, and the rotary drive motor P2216 have been described above, so their explanation will be omitted here.

By configuring the pupil rotation driving section P2230 in this manner, the pupil movable body unit P2130 can be rotated. A detailed explanation will be given below with reference to FIGS. 139 and 143.

First, when the rotary drive motor P2216 is driven, as described above, the upper movable performance accessory P2000 (the part other than the insertion member P2213 and the lifted/lowered part P2140) rotates around the axis of the rotation shaft P2143a and the rotation bush P2212. do. Then, shaft gear P2226 moves along the outer periphery of transmission gear P2214. Since the shaft gear P2226 and the transmission gear P2214 mesh with each other, the shaft gear P2226 rotates with respect to the transmission gear P2214 fixed to the left mounting shaft member P2142. As a result, the bevel gear shaft P2225 and the second bevel gear P2224 also rotate. Then, the first bevel gear P2223 that meshes with the second bevel gear P2224 also rotates, and the idle gear P2222 that meshes with the first bevel gear P2223 also rotates. As the idle gear P2222 rotates, the movable rack P2221 that meshes with the idle gear P2222 moves in the left-right direction. Then, the movable rack P2234 that engages with the movable rack P2221 also moves in the left-right direction, and the movable gear P2233 rotates. Then, the second right transmission gear P2232b and the first right transmission gear P2232a rotate, and the left transmission gear P2231a that meshes with the first right transmission gear P2232a also rotates. This causes the pupil movable body unit P2130 to rotate. In this way, the pupil movable body unit P2130 also rotates simultaneously with the rotation of the upper movable performance accessory P2000 (other than the raised/lowered part P2140, etc.) and the rotation of the eyebrow movable body P2111.

[Upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300]
The upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300 shown in FIGS. 129 and 144 to 148 is for driving the upper movable performance accessory P2000 and the lower movable performance accessory (not shown) up and down. The upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300 mainly includes a left guide part P2310, a right guide part P2320, a left drive mechanism P2330, and a right drive mechanism P2340.

The left guide part P2310 shown in FIG. 144 guides the upper movable performance accessory P2000 and the lower movable performance accessory (not shown) up and down. The left guide portion P2310 is provided on the game board P1100 with its longitudinal direction facing up and down. A left side elevation shaft P2311 is formed on the right side surface of the left side guide portion P2310 and extends in the vertical direction from its lower end to its upper end. The left lifting shaft P2311 is inserted into the inside of the left carriage P2146 to guide the left carriage P2146 (and ultimately the upper movable performance accessory P2000) up and down.

The right guide part P2320 shown in FIG. 147 is for vertically guiding the upper movable performance accessory P2000 and the lower movable performance accessory (not shown). The right guide portion P2320 is provided on the game board P1100 with its longitudinal direction facing up and down. A right-side elevation shaft P2321 is formed on the left side surface of the right-side guide portion P2320, and extends in the vertical direction from its lower end to its upper end. The right side elevating shaft P2321 guides the right carriage P2147 (and ultimately the upper movable performance accessory P2000) up and down by being inserted into the inside of the right carriage P2147.

The left drive mechanism P2330 shown in FIGS. 144 to 146 is for driving the upper movable performance accessory P2000 up and down. The left drive mechanism P2330 mainly includes an upper pulley P2331, a lower pulley P2332, a belt P2333, a transmission gear P2334, and a lifting drive motor P2335.

The upper pulley P2331 shown in FIG. 145 is a member formed in a substantially circular plate shape. The upper pulley P2331 is rotatably supported near the upper end of the right surface of the left guide portion P2310.

The lower pulley P2332 shown in FIG. 146 is a member formed in a substantially circular plate shape. The lower pulley P2332 is rotatably supported near the lower end of the right surface of the left guide portion P2310 (below the upper pulley P2331). A gear P2332a is formed on the lower pulley P2332.

The belt P2333 shown in FIGS. 145 and 146 supports the upper movable performance accessory P2000. Belt P2333 is wound around upper pulley P2331 and lower pulley P2332.

A transmission gear P2334 shown in FIG. 146 transmits driving force to the lower pulley P2332. Transmission gear P2334 is arranged to mesh with gear P2332a formed on lower pulley P2332.

The elevating drive motor P2335 shown in FIG. 146 is a drive source for elevating the upper movable performance accessory P2000 up and down. The elevating drive motor P2335 is provided near the lower end of the right side of the left guide portion P2310. Driving force from an output shaft (not shown) of the lifting drive motor P2335 is transmitted to the transmission gear P2334. When the transmission gear P2334 is rotated by the driving force of the elevation drive motor P2335, the lower pulley P2332 is rotated in accordance with the rotation of the transmission gear P2334. This causes belt P2333 to rotate between upper pulley P2331 and lower pulley P2332.

The right drive mechanism P2340 shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 is for driving the upper movable performance accessory P2000 up and down. The right drive mechanism P2340 mainly includes an upper pulley (not shown), a lower pulley P2342, a belt P2343, a transmission gear P2344, and a lifting drive motor P2345. Note that the right drive mechanism P2340 is configured in substantially the same manner as the left drive mechanism P2330 (substantially symmetrical), so the configuration will be briefly described below.

An upper pulley (not shown) and a lower pulley P2342 are provided on the left side of the right guide portion P2320. A belt P2343 is wound around the upper pulley (not shown) and the lower pulley P2342. The driving force of a lift drive motor P2345 is transmitted to the lower pulley P2342 via a transmission gear P2344. The belt P2343 rotates by the driving force of the lifting drive motor P2345.

By configuring the upper accessory object lifting mechanism P2300 in this way, the upper movable performance accessory P2000 can be raised, lowered, and tilted. Specifically, as the belt P2333 and the belt P2343 rotate, the left carriage P2146 fixed to the belt P2333 and the right carriage P2147 fixed to the belt P2343 move up and down, which in turn moves the upper movable performance accessory P2000. It can be raised, lowered and tilted.

[Operation of upper movable performance accessory P2000 during performance]
The operation of the upper movable performance accessory P2000 when performing a performance will be described below.

The upper movable performance accessory P2000 is located behind the rotating accessory P3000 in the state before performing the performance (initial position) and is not visible to the player (see FIG. 108).

When performing the performance, first, the elevation drive motor P2335 of the left drive mechanism P2330 is driven to rotate the belt P2333 and lower the left carriage P2146. Similarly, the lift drive motor P2345 of the right drive mechanism P2340 is driven to rotate the belt P2343 and lower the right carriage P2147.

By doing so, as shown in FIG. 149, the upper movable performance accessory P2000 is lowered to a position visible to the player. As a result, the surface of the pupil decoration P2113 (first performance surface) moves to a performance position that is easily visible to the player. At this time, at least a portion of the eyebrow movable body P2111 protrudes outward (upward) from the end of the surface (first presentation surface) of the pupil decoration body P2113 when viewed from the front.

Next, the rotation drive motor P2216 is driven to rotate the upper movable performance accessory P2000 (portions other than the raised and lowered part P2140 etc.) counterclockwise in the left side view (see FIG. 139, etc.).

By doing so, as shown in FIG. 150, the eyebrow decoration P2121 of the upper movable performance accessory P2000 is directed forward (front). As a result, the surface of the eyebrow decoration P2121 (second performance surface) moves to a performance position that is easily visible to the player. At this time, the surface (first effect surface) of the pupil decoration P2113 is directed upward, that is, moved to a standby position where it is difficult for the player to see.

At this time, the rotary drive motor P2216 is driven to move the movable rack P2221 and rotate the movable gear P2233. As a result, the pupil movable body unit P2130 rotates (see FIG. 143, etc.).

Then, as shown in FIG. 150, the left and right pupil movable body units P2130 (pupil movable body P2131) respectively protrude from the inside of the end of the surface (second presentation surface) of the eyebrow decoration body P2121 to the outside (downward). . Thereby, the left and right pupil movable body units P2130 form a shape that imitates the left and right pupils when viewed from the front.

By rotating the upper movable performance accessory P2000 in this way, the performance surface that the player visually recognizes changes from the surface of the pupil decoration P2113 (first performance surface) to the surface of the eyebrow decoration P2121 (second performance surface). ) will be changed. Further, the pupil movable body unit P2130 moves (rotates) so that it can be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, it is possible to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, as the rotary drive motor P2216 is driven and the movable rack P2221 moves, the movable body support arm P2112 and the eyebrow movable body P2111 fixed to the movable body support arm P2112 rotate (relative to the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113). (see Figure 142, etc.).

Then, as shown in FIG. 151, the left and right eyebrow movable bodies P2111 move so as to fit inside the outer peripheral end of the pupil decoration body P2113 in plan view.

In this way, when the upper movable performance accessory P2000 rotates, the eyebrow movable body P2111 of the first performance part P2110 rotates and retracts inward at the same time as the rotation, so that the liquid crystal located behind the upper movable performance accessory P2000 It is possible to prevent the eyebrow movable body P2111 from hitting the eyebrow movable body P2111.

Furthermore, by driving the rotary drive motor P2216, the surface (second performance surface) of the eyebrow decoration P2121 of the upper movable performance accessory P2000 (portion other than the raised/lowered part P2140 etc.) becomes visible to the player. At the same time, the pupil movable body unit P2130 can be moved so as to protrude downward from the eyebrow decoration body P2121, and the eyebrow movable body P2111 can be moved so as to fit inside the pupil decoration body P2113. That is, a single drive source can express various movements and perform various effects.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the upper movable performance accessory P2000 is tilted. Specifically, the elevator drive motor P2345 is driven so that the right carriage P2147 goes up, and the elevator drive motor P2335 is driven so that the left carriage P2146 goes down. Then, the upper movable performance accessory P2000 (portions other than the raised and lowered part P2140, etc.) rotates counterclockwise in front view around the first pin P2146a (see FIG. 136). This rotation range is regulated by the second pin P2146b and the elongated hole P2144b, and the upper movable performance accessory P2000 (portions other than the raised and lowered part P2140 etc.) will tilt up to a predetermined angle. In addition, when tilting the upper movable performance accessory P2000, it is not necessary to drive only the elevation drive motor P2345 so that the right carriage P2147 rises, without driving the elevation drive motor P2335.

Here, the light guide plate P1112 has a light emitting region P1112a that can reflect light forward due to partial surface processing. The light emitting region P1112a is provided around the pupil movable body unit P2130 (at least a part of the periphery of the eyebrow decoration body P2121). The light emitting region P1112a is formed in a shape that imitates the pupils and eyebrows on one side of the left and right sides when viewed from the front (see FIG. 153). In the state where the upper movable performance accessory P2000 is tilted, light is irradiated from the illuminated board P2132 to the light guide plate P1112 in front, and the light is most strongly reflected forward in the light emitting area P1112a. It is possible to perform an interesting presentation that more closely reminds people of human eyes and eyebrows.

Furthermore, by tilting the upper movable performance accessory P2000, the angle in the longitudinal direction of the eyebrow decoration P2121 is changed so that the surface (first performance surface) of the pupil decoration P2113 is directed forward (see FIG. 149). is approximately the same as the longitudinal angle of the eyebrow movable body P2111. As a result, the surface of the pupil decoration P2113 (first presentation surface) is visible to the player (first mode), and the surface of the eyebrow decoration P2121 (second presentation surface) is visible to the player. The relationship with the possible state (second aspect) can be increased.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 153, when the upper movable performance accessory P2000 is tilted upward to the right, the right mounting guide P2145 etc. provided on the right side of the upper movable performance accessory P2000 will be pulled out to the left. Become. At this time, since the holding member P2147a is formed to extend leftward from its lower end, even if the right mounting guide P2145 is pulled out to the left, this leftward extending portion pushes the right mounting guide P2145 forward. It can be pressed from Therefore, forward movement of the right mounting guide P2145 can be restricted.

At the end of the performance, the upper movable performance accessory P2000 returns to the initial position (see FIG. 108) by performing an operation opposite to that described above. At that time, when the upper movable performance accessory P2000 rotates so that the surface (second performance surface) of the eyebrow decoration P2121 faces downward (moves to a standby position where it is difficult for the player to see), the left and right pupil movable objects The unit P2130 moves on the back side of the eyebrow decoration P2121 (second presentation surface) so as to fit inside the outer peripheral end of the eyebrow decoration P2121.

In this way, when the upper movable performance accessory P2000 rotates, the pupil movable body unit P2130 rotates and retracts inward at the same time as the rotation, so that the pupil movable body unit P2130 is attached to the liquid crystal located behind the upper movable performance accessory P2000. It is possible to prevent P2130 from hitting the target.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with performance devices have been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a gaming machine that has a production rotating body with a built-in light-emitting unit and a plurality of production surfaces, and is capable of displaying productions during jackpots, game information, etc. on the plurality of production surfaces. has been done.

However, there is a problem in that the performance content displayed on the performance screen lacks interest because the same performance mode is repeatedly displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the presentation content.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
It has a plurality of presentation surfaces including a first presentation surface (the surface of the pupil decoration P2113) and a second presentation surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration P2121) which is a presentation surface different from the first presentation surface. A gaming machine equipped with an upper movable performance accessory P2000 (performance device),
a performance operation control circuit 89 (performance surface control means) capable of controlling the movement of the first performance surface or the second performance surface between a standby position that is difficult for the player to see and a performance position that is easily visible for the player;
an eyebrow movable body P2111 (movable body) provided on the first production surface;
A production operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means) capable of controlling the movement of the eyebrow movable body P2111,
The production operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means)
When controlling the movement of the first performance surface from the standby position to the performance position, at least a portion of the eyebrow movable body P2111 that is located inside the end of the first performance surface in the standby position is Controlling the movement so that the end of the first performance surface protrudes from the inside to the outside,
When controlling the movement of the first performance surface from the performance position to the standby position, at least a portion of the eyebrow movable body P2111 protruding outward from the end of the first performance surface in the performance position is The movement is controlled so that it fits inside the end of the first performance surface.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation content. Furthermore, when the performance surface is controlled to move to the standby position, interference with other members can be prevented.

Specifically, when the upper movable performance accessory P2000 rotates from a state where the first performance surface is visible to a state where the second performance surface is visible, the first performance part P2110 simultaneously rotates. Since the eyebrow movable body P2111 rotates and fits inside the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113, it is possible to prevent the eyebrow movable body P2111 from hitting the liquid crystal located behind the upper movable performance accessory P2000.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with performance devices have been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a gaming machine that has a production rotating body with a built-in light-emitting unit and a plurality of production surfaces, and is capable of displaying productions during jackpots, game information, etc. on the plurality of production surfaces. has been done.

However, there is a problem in that the performance content displayed on the performance screen lacks interest because the same performance mode is repeatedly displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the presentation content.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
It has a plurality of presentation surfaces including a first presentation surface (the surface of the pupil decoration P2113) and a second presentation surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration P2121) which is a presentation surface different from the first presentation surface. A gaming machine equipped with an upper movable performance accessory P2000 (performance device),
a performance operation control circuit 89 (performance surface control means) capable of controlling the movement of the first performance surface or the second performance surface between a standby position that is difficult for the player to see and a performance position that is easily visible for the player;
an eyebrow movable body P2111 (movable body) provided on the first production surface;
A production operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means) capable of controlling the movement of the eyebrow movable body P2111,
The production operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means)
When the first performance surface is controlled to move to the performance position by the performance operation control circuit 89 (performance surface control means), the eyebrow movable body P2111 is moved parallel to the first performance surface. Accordingly, at least a part of the eyebrow movable body P2111, which is housed inside the end of the first performance surface in the standby position, is moved so as to protrude outward from the inside of the end of the first performance surface. It is something to control.
That is, it is provided with a performance operation control circuit 89 (performance surface control means) that can switch and control the movement of the first performance surface and the second performance surface to a performance position that is easily visible to the player. Here, switching the presentation surface means that the first presentation surface is easily visible and the second presentation surface is difficult to see, and the first presentation surface is difficult to see and the second presentation surface is easy to see. The aim is to control the movement of the movable body so that the

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation content. Furthermore, the performance can be performed without increasing the width of the performance device in the front-rear direction.

Specifically, since the eyebrow movable body P2111 is formed to move parallel to the first performance surface (the surface of the pupil decoration body P2113), the movement of the eyebrow movable body P2111 causes the upper movable performance role to move. The width of the object P2000 in the front-rear direction does not increase, and interference between members can be suppressed.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with performance devices have been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a gaming machine that has a production rotating body with a built-in light-emitting unit and a plurality of production surfaces, and is capable of displaying productions during jackpots, game information, etc. on the plurality of production surfaces. has been done.

However, there is a problem in that the performance content displayed on the performance screen lacks interest because the same performance mode is repeatedly displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the presentation content.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
It has a plurality of presentation surfaces including a first presentation surface (the surface of the pupil decoration P2113) and a second presentation surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration P2121) which is a presentation surface different from the first presentation surface. A gaming machine equipped with an upper movable performance accessory P2000 (performance device),
a performance operation control circuit 89 (performance surface control means) capable of controlling the movement of the first performance surface or the second performance surface between a standby position that is difficult for the player to see and a performance position that is easily visible for the player;
a pupil movable body P2131 (movable body) provided on the second production surface;
A production operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means) capable of controlling the movement of the pupil movable body P2131,
The production operation control circuit 89 (movable body control means)
When the second performance surface is controlled to move to the performance position by the performance operation control circuit 89 (performance surface control means), at least a portion of the pupil movable body P2131 is moved from the end of the second performance surface. Controls movement so that it protrudes outward,
When the second performance surface is controlled to move to the standby position by the performance operation control circuit 89 (performance surface control means), the second performance surface protrudes outward from the end of the second performance surface in the performance position. The movement of at least a part of the pupil movable body P2131 is controlled so that it fits inside the end of the second performance surface on the back side of the second performance surface.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation content. Furthermore, when the performance surface is controlled to move to the standby position, interference with other members can be prevented.

Specifically, the pupil movable body P2131 is not provided on the same surface as the eyebrow decoration P2121, but is provided above the eyebrow decoration P2121 (see FIG. 133). Therefore, when the second performance surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration P2121) is easily visible to the player, the pupil movable body P2131 is located on the back side (backward) of the eyebrow decoration P2121. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect with depth using the pupil movable body P2131. In a state in which the second performance surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration P2121) is difficult for the player to see (a state in which the surface of the eyebrow decoration P2121 is directed downward), the pupil movable body P2131 Since it fits inside the outer peripheral end of the eyebrow decoration P2121 on the back side of the eyebrow decoration P2121, interference with other members can be prevented.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with performance devices have been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a gaming machine that has a production rotating body with a built-in light-emitting unit and a plurality of production surfaces, and is capable of displaying productions during jackpots, game information, etc. on the plurality of production surfaces. has been done.

However, there is a problem in that the performance content displayed on the performance screen lacks interest because the same performance mode is repeatedly displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can make the content of the performance more interesting.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
It has a plurality of presentation surfaces including a first presentation surface (the surface of the pupil decoration P2113) and a second presentation surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration P2121) which is a presentation surface different from the first presentation surface. A gaming machine comprising an upper movable performance accessory P2000 (performance device) and a light guide plate P1112 (display means) provided on the front side of the upper movable performance accessory P2000,
A performance operation control circuit 89 (performance surface control means) capable of controlling the movement of the first performance surface or the second performance surface to a performance position that is easily visible to the player,
The first performance surface includes a decoration part of the first aspect (decoration imitating the left and right eyes and eyebrows of a person),
The second presentation surface includes a decoration part of a second aspect related to a part of the first aspect (a decoration imitating a part of a person's left and right pupils and an eyebrow),
The light guide plate P1112 (display means) displays a third aspect related to a part of the first aspect on at least a part of the periphery of the second rendering surface (the other part of the left and right eyes of the person). This is a display using a light-emitting area P1112a that simulates the following.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation content. Furthermore, an effect related to the effect displayed on the first effect surface (the surface of the eye decoration body P2113) is displayed using the second effect surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration object P2121) and the display means (light guide plate P1112). By doing this, you can create innovative performances.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with performance devices have been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a gaming machine that has a production rotating body with a built-in light-emitting unit and a plurality of production surfaces, and is capable of displaying productions during jackpots, game information, etc. on the plurality of production surfaces. has been done.

However, there is a problem in that the performance content displayed on the performance screen lacks interest because the same performance mode is repeatedly displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the presentation content.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
It has a plurality of presentation surfaces including a first presentation surface (the surface of the pupil decoration P2113) and a second presentation surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration P2121) which is a presentation surface different from the first presentation surface. A gaming machine equipped with an upper movable performance accessory P2000 (performance device),
A performance operation control circuit 89 (performance surface control means) capable of controlling the movement of the first performance surface or the second performance surface to a performance position that is easily visible to the player,
The first presentation surface includes a decorative portion of the first aspect,
The second presentation surface includes a decorative portion of a second aspect related to a part of the first aspect,
When the second performance surface is controlled to move to a performance position that is easily visible to the player, an upper accessory lifting mechanism P2300 (tilting means) is provided that tilts the upper movable performance accessory P2000.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
Even if the presentation device is tilted, the relationship between a part of the first aspect and the second aspect is maintained.

According to such a configuration, a novel performance can be realized by performing a performance related to the performance displayed on the first performance screen using the second performance screen and the display means.

Specifically, by tilting the upper movable performance accessory P2000, the longitudinal angle of the eyebrow decoration P2121 is approximately the same as the longitudinal angle of the eyebrow movable body P2111 in the performance displayed on the first performance surface. It will be the same. As a result, the surface of the pupil decoration P2113 (first presentation surface) is visible to the player (first mode), and the surface of the eyebrow decoration P2121 (second presentation surface) is visible to the player. It is possible to enhance the relationship with the possible state (second mode) and provide an interesting performance to the player.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with performance devices have been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a gaming machine that has a production rotating body with a built-in light-emitting unit and a plurality of production surfaces, and is capable of displaying productions during jackpots, game information, etc. on the plurality of production surfaces. has been done.

However, there is a problem in that the performance content displayed on the performance screen lacks interest because the same performance mode is repeatedly displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the presentation content.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
It has a plurality of presentation surfaces including a first presentation surface (the surface of the pupil decoration P2113) and a second presentation surface (the surface of the eyebrow decoration P2121) which is a presentation surface different from the first presentation surface. A gaming machine equipped with an upper movable performance accessory P2000 (performance device),
a performance operation control circuit 89 (performance surface control means) capable of controlling the movement of the first performance surface or the second performance surface to a performance position that is easily visible to the player;
An eyebrow movable body P2111 (movable body) provided on the first performance surface,
The first presentation surface includes a decorative portion of the first aspect,
The second presentation surface includes a decorative portion of a second aspect related to a part of the first aspect,
In the first aspect, the eyebrow movable body P2111 moves in one direction,
In the second aspect, the second performance surface moves in the first direction.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
Even if the second presentation surface moves in the first direction, the relationship between a part of the first aspect and the second aspect is maintained.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation content. Furthermore, a novel performance can be realized by performing a performance related to the performance displayed on the first performance screen using the second performance screen and the display means.

Specifically, in a state where the surface (first presentation surface) of the pupil decoration body P2113 is visible to the player (first aspect), the right eyebrow movable body P2111 is controlled to move in a direction in which it tilts upward to the right. ing. Then, in a state where the surface (second performance surface) of the eyebrow decoration P2121 is visible to the player (second mode), the upper movable performance accessory P2000 is controlled to move in the direction of tilting upward to the right. That is, since the right eyebrow movable body P2111 in the first mode and the upper movable performance accessory P2000 in the second mode are controlled to move in substantially the same direction, the first mode and the second mode It is possible to further increase the relevance of

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in this embodiment, the first presentation section P2110 and the second presentation section P2120 are decorated to imitate human eyes and eyebrows, but the decoration may be arbitrary. can.

In addition, in this embodiment, one drive source (rotary drive motor P2216) rotates the upper movable performance accessory P2000 (portions other than the raised and lowered part P2140, etc.), moves the pupil movable body unit P2130, and controls the eyebrow movement. Although the movable body P2111 is moved, each of these operations may be performed by separate drive sources.

In addition, in this embodiment, the eyebrow movable body P2111 is assumed to protrude from the outer peripheral end of the pupil decoration body P2113 in both the initial position shown in FIG. 108 and the production position shown in FIG. 149 when viewed from the front. However, as mentioned above, the drive source for the rotation of the upper movable performance accessory P2000 (parts other than the raised/lowered part P2140 etc.) and the drive source for the movement of the eyebrow movable body P2111 are set as separate drive sources, and the eyebrow movable In the initial position (FIG. 108), the body P2111 is located inside the outer peripheral end of the pupil decoration P2113, and when it moves to the production position (FIG. 149) (as it moves), it is located inside the outer peripheral end of the pupil decoration P2113. It may move so as to protrude from the inside to the outside.

By doing this, the player will visually recognize that the right eyebrow movable body P2111 moves. Here, in a state where the surface (first performance surface) of the pupil decoration body P2113 is visible to the player (first aspect), the right eyebrow movable body P2111 moves in a direction of tilting upward to the right. Then, in a state where the surface (second performance surface) of the eyebrow decoration P2121 is visible to the player (second mode), the upper movable performance accessory P2000 moves in the direction of tilting upward to the right. That is, since the player will visually recognize that the right eyebrow movable body P2111 in the first mode and the upper movable performance accessory P2000 in the second mode move in substantially the same direction, The relationship between the production and the second production can be further enhanced.

Below, the rotating accessory P3000 will be explained using FIGS. 154 to 170.

The rotating accessory P3000 performs a predetermined effect by rotating a rotating body P3400 (described later) and causing a light emitting means P3300 to emit light. The rotating accessory P3000 is placed above the game board P1100. The rotating accessory P3000 mainly includes a left side support part P3100, a right side support part P3200, a light emitting means P3300, a rotating body P3400, a driving means P3500, and a shielding means P3600.

The left side support portion P3100 shown in FIGS. 154 to 156 is a member fixed to the game board P1100. The left support portion P3100 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The rear part of the left side support part P3100 is fixed to the game board P1100 with screws or the like.

The right side support portion P3200 is a member fixed to the game board P1100. The right side support part P3200 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The right side support part P3200 is arranged to the right of the left side support part P3100 with a predetermined interval therebetween. The rear part of the right support part P3200 is fixed to the game board P1100 with screws or the like.

A rotating body P3400, which will be described later, is arranged between the left side support part P3100 and the right side support part P3200. The rotating body P3400 and the like are fixed to the game board P1100 by the left side support part P3100 and the right side support part P3200.

The light emitting means P3300 shown in FIGS. 155 to 159 irradiates light toward the outside of the rotating body P3400 by irradiating the inside of the rotating body P3400, which will be described later. The light emitting means P3300 mainly includes a support shaft P3310, a substrate support section P3320, a substrate P3330, a light emission section P3340, and a rotation support section P3350.

A support shaft P3310 shown in FIGS. 156, 158, and 159 is a member that supports a substrate support portion P3320, etc., which will be described later. The support shaft P3310 is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape. The support shaft P3310 is arranged with its longitudinal direction facing left and right. Both left and right end portions of the support shaft P3310 are supported by a left side support portion P3100 and a right side support portion P3200, respectively. The support shaft P3310 is fixed to the left side support part P3100 and the right side support part P3200 so as to be unrotatable.

The substrate support part P3320 is a member that supports a substrate P3330, which will be described later. The substrate support part P3320 mainly includes a support plate part P3321 and a boss part P3322.

The support plate portion P3321 is a portion formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The support plate portion P3321 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape with its longitudinal direction facing left and right when viewed from the rear. A recessed portion P3321a is formed in the support plate portion P3321.

The recessed portion P3321a is a portion formed by recessing the back surface of the support plate portion P3321 toward the front. The recessed portion P3321a is formed in the vertical midway portion (approximately at the vertical center) of the support plate portion P3321. The recessed portion P3321a is formed along the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the support plate portion P3321 from the left end to the right end of the support plate portion P3321. The support shaft P3310 is disposed to be fitted into the recess P3321a of the support plate portion P3321. In this way, the support plate portion P3321 (substrate support portion P3320) is supported by the support shaft P3310.

The boss portion P3322 is a portion for attaching a substrate P3330, which will be described later, to the support plate portion P3321. The boss portion P3322 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The boss portion P3322 is arranged with its longitudinal direction facing forward and backward. The boss portion P3322 is formed to protrude forward from the front surface of the support plate portion P3321. A plurality of boss portions P3322 are provided on the support plate portion P3321.

A substrate P3330 shown in FIGS. 155 to 159 is a member on which a light emitting section P3340, which will be described later, is provided. The substrate P3330 is formed into a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The substrate P3330 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The vertical width and horizontal width of the substrate P3330 are formed to be approximately the same as the vertical width and horizontal width of the support plate portion P3321. The substrate P3330 is arranged in front of the support plate part P3321. The board P3330 is fixed to the boss portion P3322 with screws or the like. Thereby, the substrate P3330 is supported by the substrate support part P3320.

The light emitting part P3340 is a member that can emit light. As the light emitting unit P3340, for example, an LED capable of emitting light in an appropriate color is used. The light emitting section P3340 is provided on the front surface of the substrate P3330. A plurality of light emitting parts P3340 are provided over substantially the entire front surface of the substrate P3330.

The rotation support part P3350 shown in FIGS. 155, 157, and 158 is a part that rotatably supports a rotating body P3400, which will be described later. The rotation support part P3350 is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the side. The rotation support section P3350 is arranged to the left of the substrate support section P3320 and the substrate P3330. The rotation support part P3350 is fixed to the left end of the substrate support part P3320. A support shaft P3310 is inserted through the center of the rotation support part P3350 so as to be unable to rotate relative to it.

The rotating body P3400 shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 159, 160, and 161 has a plurality of (two in this embodiment) presentation surfaces and is rotatable. The rotating body P3400 mainly includes a first presentation surface P3410, a first lens member P3420, a second presentation surface P3430, a second lens member P3440, a first connection surface P3450, a second connection surface P3460, and a left side surface. P3470 and right side P3480. That is, in this embodiment, a first performance surface P3410 is provided as an example of a first performance section, and a second performance surface P3430 is provided as an example of a second performance section. Note that the effect part may have a shape other than a planar shape, and may be an effect part formed in an uneven shape or a effect part formed in a curved shape.

Note that, as described later, the rotating body P3400 is provided so as to be rotatable. Therefore, below, as shown in FIG. 155, FIG. 156, FIG. 159, FIG. 160, and FIG. The configuration of the rotating body P3400 will be explained based on the following.

The first performance surface P3410 shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 159, and 160 is a portion that is appropriately decorated. The first performance surface P3410 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape with the longitudinal direction facing left and right. The first performance surface P3410 is arranged with the board surface facing forward and backward. Appropriate characters, figures, symbols, coloring, etc. are applied as decorations on the front surface of the first performance surface P3410. A portion (first transparent portion) that can transmit light is formed on the first performance surface P3410. In this embodiment, the entire first performance surface P3410 is formed as a first light-transmitting portion.

The first lens member P3420 shown in FIGS. 156 and 159 is a member for appropriately guiding (diffusing, etc.) the light irradiated onto the first presentation surface P3410. The first lens member P3420 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape with its longitudinal direction facing left and right. The first lens member P3420 is arranged with its plate surface facing forward and backward. The first lens member P3420 is fixed to the rear surface of the first presentation surface P3410.

The second performance surface P3430 shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 159, 160, and 161 is a portion that is appropriately decorated. The second performance surface P3430 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape with its longitudinal direction facing left and right. The second performance surface P3430 is arranged with the board surface facing forward and backward. The second performance surface P3430 is arranged behind the first performance surface P3410. Appropriate characters, figures, symbols, coloring, etc. are applied as decorations on the rear surface of the second performance surface P3430. The second presentation surface P3430 is decorated with a decoration different from that of the first presentation surface P3410. A portion (second transparent portion) that can transmit light is formed on the second performance surface P3430. In this embodiment, the entire second performance surface P3430 is formed as a second light-transmitting portion. That is, the second performance surface P3430 (second transparent part) is different from the first performance surface P3410 (first transparent part) in shape, characters, figures, symbols, coloring, etc. is formed.

The second lens member P3440 shown in FIGS. 155, 159, 160, and 161 is a member for appropriately guiding (diffusing, etc.) the light irradiated onto the second presentation surface P3430. The second lens member P3440 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape with its longitudinal direction facing left and right. The second lens member P3440 is arranged with its plate surface facing forward and backward. The second lens member P3440 is fixed to the front surface of the second presentation surface P3430.

The first connection surface P3450 shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 159, 160, and 161 is a part that connects the first performance surface P3410 and the second performance surface P3430. The first connecting surface P3450 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape with its longitudinal direction facing left and right. The first connecting surface P3450 is arranged with the plate surface facing up and down. The front end of the first connection surface P3450 is fixed to the upper end of the first production surface P3410. The rear end of the first connection surface P3450 is fixed to the upper end of the second performance surface P3430. Thereby, the first connection surface P3450 connects the upper ends of the first performance surface P3410 and the second performance surface P3430. Appropriate decoration is applied to the upper surface of the first connecting surface P3450. In this embodiment, the first connecting surface P3450 is formed so that light cannot pass therethrough.

The second connection surface P3460 is a part that connects the first performance surface P3410 and the second performance surface P3430. The second connecting surface P3460 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape with its longitudinal direction facing left and right. The second connecting surface P3460 is arranged with the plate surface facing up and down. The front end of the second connection surface P3460 is fixed to the lower end of the first production surface P3410. The rear end of the second connection surface P3460 is fixed to the lower end of the second production surface P3430. Thereby, the second connection surface P3460 connects the lower ends of the first performance surface P3410 and the second performance surface P3430. Appropriate decoration is applied to the lower surface of the second connection surface P3460. In this embodiment, the second connecting surface P3460 is formed so that light cannot pass therethrough.

The left side surface P3470 shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 160, and 161 is a portion forming the left side of the rotating body P3400. The left side surface P3470 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The left side surface P3470 is fixed to the left end portions of the first presentation surface P3410, the second presentation surface P3430, the first connection surface P3450, and the second connection surface P3460. A circular hole P3471 is formed in the left side surface P3470.

The circular hole P3471 is a hole that penetrates the left side surface P3470 from side to side. The circular hole P3471 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side.

The right side surface P3480 is a portion forming the right side of the rotating body P3400. The right side surface P3480 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The right side surface P3480 is fixed to the right end portions of the first presentation surface P3410, the second presentation surface P3430, the first connection surface P3450, and the second connection surface P3460. A gear P3481 is formed on the right side P3480.

Gear P3481 is to which driving force from driving means P3500, which will be described later, is transmitted. The gear P3481 is integrally formed on the right side of the right side P3480 with its axis oriented left and right.

In this way, the rotating body P3400 has six surfaces including the first presentation surface P3410, the second presentation surface P3430, the first connection surface P3450, the second connection surface P3460, the left side surface P3470, and the right side surface P3480. It is formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped.

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156, 158, and 159, the rotating body P3400 accommodates the substrate support part P3320, the substrate P3330, and the light emitting part P3340 of the light emitting means P3300. As shown in FIG. 158, a rotation support part P3350 of the light emitting means P3300 is inserted into the left side surface P3470 (circular hole P3471 shown in FIG. 160) of the rotating body P3400 so as to be relatively rotatable. A support shaft P3310 of the light emitting means P3300 is inserted through the right side surface P3480 (center portion of the gear P3481) of the rotating body P3400 so as to be relatively rotatable. A gear P3481 on the right side P3480 is inserted into a housing portion P3510 of a drive means P3500, which will be described later. In this way, the rotating body P3400 accommodates the substrate P3330 and the like, and is arranged so as to be rotatable about the support shaft P3310.

Driving means P3500 shown in FIGS. 155, 156, and 162 controls the rotation of rotating body P3400. The drive means P3500 mainly includes a housing part P3510, a motor P3520, a drive gear P3530, a first detection gear P3540, a second detection gear P3550, a first detection sensor P3560, and a second detection sensor P3570.

The accommodating portion P3510 accommodates a drive gear P3530, a first detection gear P3540, and a second detection gear P3550, which will be described later. The housing portion P3510 is formed into a box shape having an internal space. The housing portion P3510 is fixed to the right support portion P3200. In addition, in FIG. 162, in order to show the inside of the housing part P3510 (driving gear P3530, etc.), the right side of the housing part P3510 is shown in an open state.

The motor P3520 is a device (drive source) that generates a driving force for rotationally driving the rotating body P3400. Motor P3520 is fixed to the right side of housing part P3510.

A drive gear P3530 shown in FIG. 162 is rotated by the driving force of a motor P3520. The drive gear P3530 is arranged inside the housing part P3510 with its axis facing left and right. Drive gear P3530 is fixed to an output shaft (not shown) of motor P3520. The drive gear P3530 is arranged below and behind the gear P3481 of the rotating body P3400 inserted into the housing part P3510. Drive gear P3530 meshes with gear P3481.

The first detection gear P3540 is for detecting the rotational position of the rotating body P3400. The first detection gear P3540 is arranged inside the housing part P3510 with its axis facing left and right. The first detection gear P3540 is arranged above and behind the gear P3481. The first detection gear P3540 is meshed with the gear P3481.

The second detection gear P3550 is for detecting the rotational position of the rotating body P3400. The second detection gear P3550 is arranged inside the housing part P3510 with its axis facing left and right. The second detection gear P3550 is arranged below and in front of the gear P3481. Second detection gear P3550 is meshed with gear P3481.

The first detection sensor P3560 shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 detects whether the first detection gear P3540 is at a predetermined rotational position. The first detection sensor P3560 is fixed to the upper part of the housing part P3510. A part (detection section) of the first detection sensor P3560 is inserted into the housing section P3510, and can detect whether the first detection gear P3540 is at a predetermined rotational position.

The second detection sensor P3570 shown in FIG. 155 detects whether the second detection gear P3550 is at a predetermined rotational position. The second detection sensor P3570 is fixed to the lower part of the housing part P3510. A part (detection section) of the second detection sensor P3570 is inserted into the housing section P3510, and can detect whether or not the second detection gear P3550 is at a predetermined rotational position.

In the drive means P3500 configured in this way, when the motor P3520 is driven, the driving force of the motor P3520 is transmitted to the gear P3481 of the rotating body P3400 via the drive gear P3530. Thereby, the rotating body P3400 rotates around the support shaft P3310 of the light emitting means P3300.

Further, as the rotating body P3400 rotates, the first detection gear P3540 and the second detection gear P3550 rotate. By detecting whether or not the first detection gear P3540 and the second detection gear P3550 are at a predetermined rotational position by the first detection sensor P3560 and the second detection sensor P3570, the rotational position of the rotating body P3400 is determined. can be detected.

Specifically, the rotating body P3400 is in a state where the first performance surface P3410 is facing the front (front), that is, a position where the first performance surface P3410 is visible to the player (hereinafter, this position is simply referred to as "performance position"). ''), the first detection sensor P3560 detects that the first detection gear P3540 is at a predetermined rotational position. That is, the first detection sensor P3560 can detect that the first performance surface P3410 is at the performance position.

Further, in a state in which the rotating body P3400 faces the second performance surface P3430 to the front (front), that is, in a state in which the second performance surface P3430 is rotated until it is located at the performance position, the second detection sensor P3570 detects the It is detected that the second detection gear P3550 is at a predetermined rotational position. That is, the second detection sensor P3570 can detect that the second performance surface P3430 is at the performance position.

In this way, the first detection sensor P3560 and the second detection sensor P3570 can detect that either the first performance surface P3410 or the second performance surface P3430 is located at the performance position. . By driving or stopping the motor P3520 based on the detection, either the first performance surface P3410 or the second performance surface P3430 can be rotated to an arbitrary performance position.

The shielding means P3600 shown in FIGS. 159 and 163 to 166 limits the irradiation range of light irradiated from the light emitting means P3300 onto the inner surface of the rotating body P3400 to a predetermined range. The shielding means P3600 mainly includes a light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and a rotating body side shielding means P3620.

The light emitting means side shielding means P3610 shown in FIGS. 159, 163, 164 and 166 is a member fixed to the light emitting means P3300. The light emitting means side shielding means P3610 mainly includes a left shielding part P3611, a right shielding part P3612, an upper connecting part P3613, a lower connecting part P3614, a left fixing part P3615, and a right fixing part P3616.

The left shielding part P3611 is a part forming the left part of the light emitting means side shielding means P3610. The left shielding portion P3611 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The vertical width of the rear end portion of the left shielding portion P3611 is formed to be approximately the same as the vertical width of the substrate P3330 of the light emitting means P3300. The front end portion of the left shielding portion P3611 is formed into an arc shape in side view that bulges forward from the rear end portion. More specifically, when the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 is attached to the substrate P3330 as described later, the front end of the left shielding part P3611 is shaped like an arc centered on the support shaft P3310 when viewed from the side. (See Figure 159). The left shielding portion P3611 is formed in an appropriate shape when viewed from the front. The left shielding portion P3611 according to the present embodiment is formed to extend approximately vertically when viewed from the front, and a step (bent portion) is formed in the middle of the upper and lower portions so that the lower portion is located to the left compared to the upper portion. has been done.

The right shielding part P3612 is a part forming the right part of the light emitting means side shielding means P3610. The right shielding portion P3612 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The right shielding part P3612 is arranged to the right of the left shielding part P3611. The right shielding portion P3612 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the left shielding portion P3611 when viewed from the side. The right shielding portion P3612 is formed in an appropriate shape when viewed from the front. The right shielding portion P3612 according to the present embodiment is inclined to the left from both the upper and lower ends toward the upper and lower midpoints so that the upper and lower midpoints are located inside (to the left) compared to both the upper and lower ends when viewed from the front. It is formed like this.

The upper connecting portion P3613 is a portion that connects the left shielding portion P3611 and the right shielding portion P3612. The upper connecting portion P3613 is formed in a longitudinal shape with its longitudinal direction facing left and right. Both left and right end portions of the upper connecting portion P3613 are connected to the upper end portions of the left shielding portion P3611 and the right shielding portion P3612, respectively. Thereby, the upper connecting part P3613 connects the upper ends of the left shielding part P3611 and the right shielding part P3612.

The lower connecting portion P3614 is a portion that connects the left shielding portion P3611 and the right shielding portion P3612. The lower connecting portion P3614 is formed in a longitudinal shape with its longitudinal direction facing left and right. Both left and right end portions of the lower connecting portion P3614 are connected to the lower end portions of the left shielding portion P3611 and the right shielding portion P3612, respectively. Thereby, the lower connecting portion P3614 connects the lower ends of the left shielding portion P3611 and the right shielding portion P3612.

The left fixed part P3615 is a part fixed to the substrate P3330. The left fixed portion P3615 is formed in a longitudinal shape with its longitudinal direction facing up and down. Both upper and lower ends of the left fixed part P3615 are connected to the left parts of the upper connecting part P3613 and the lower connecting part P3614, respectively.

The right fixed portion P3616 is a portion fixed to the substrate P3330. The right fixing portion P3616 is formed in a longitudinal shape with its longitudinal direction facing up and down. Both upper and lower ends of the right fixed part P3616 are connected to the right parts of the upper connecting part P3613 and the lower connecting part P3614, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 159 and 163, the left fixing part P3615 and the right fixing part P3616 are fixed to the front surface of the board P3330 with screws or the like. As a result, the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 is attached to the left and right center portions of the substrate P3330. At this time, among the plurality of light emitting parts P3340 provided on the substrate P3330, the light emitting part P3340 arranged at the left and right center of the board P3330 is located inside the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 (in front view, the left shielding part P3611, (range surrounded by the right shielding part P3612, the upper connecting part P3613, and the lower connecting part P3614).

The rotating body side shielding means P3620 shown in FIGS. 159, 163, 165, and 166 is a member fixed to the rotating body P3400. The rotating body side shielding means P3620 mainly includes a left shielding part P3621, a right shielding part P3622, a first connecting part P3623, and a second connecting part P3624.

The left shielding portion P3621 is a portion forming the left portion of the rotating body side shielding means P3620. The left shielding portion P3621 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The vertical width of the rear end portion of the left shielding portion P3621 is formed to be approximately the same as the vertical width of the second lens member P3440. The left shielding portion P3621 is formed into an appropriate shape when viewed from the front. The left shielding portion P3621 according to the present embodiment is formed to extend approximately vertically when viewed from the front, and a step (bent portion) is formed in the middle of the upper and lower portions so that the upper portion is located to the left compared to the lower portion. has been done. A recessed portion P3621a is formed in the left shielding portion P3621.

The recessed portion P3621a is formed by recessing the front end portion of the left shielding portion P3621 toward the rear. The recessed portion P3621a is formed approximately at the vertical center of the front end portion of the left shielding portion P3621. The recessed portion P3621a is formed in a substantially arc shape when viewed from the side. More specifically, as will be described later, when the rotating body side shielding means P3620 is attached to the second lens member P3440, the recessed portion P3621a is formed to have an arc shape centered on the support shaft P3310 when viewed from the side. (See Figure 159). Further, the radius of the recessed portion P3621a is formed to be approximately the same (strictly speaking, to be slightly larger) than the radius of the circular arc of the left shielding portion P3611 of the light emitting means side shielding means P3610.

The right shielding part P3622 is a part forming the right part of the rotating body side shielding means P3620. The right shielding portion P3622 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing left and right. The right shielding part P3622 is arranged to the right of the left shielding part P3621. The distance between the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622 (left and right distance) is formed to be approximately the same as the distance between the left shielding portion P3611 and the right shielding portion P3612 of the light emitting means side shielding means P3610. The right shielding portion P3622 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the left shielding portion P3621 when viewed from the side. The right shielding portion P3622 is formed in an appropriate shape when viewed from the front. The right shielding portion P3622 according to the present embodiment is inclined to the left from both the upper and lower ends toward the upper and lower middle parts so that the upper and lower middle parts are located inside (to the left) compared to both the upper and lower end parts when viewed from the front. It is formed like this. A concave portion P3622a is formed in the right shielding portion P3622.

The recessed portion P3622a is formed by recessing the front end portion of the right shielding portion P3622 toward the rear. The recessed portion P3622a is formed approximately at the vertical center of the front end portion of the right shielding portion P3622. The recessed portion P3622a is formed to have substantially the same shape as the recessed portion P3621a of the left shielding portion P3621 when viewed from the side.

The first connecting portion P3623 is a portion that connects the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622. The first connecting portion P3623 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape with the plate surface facing up and down. Both left and right end portions of the first connecting portion P3623 are connected to the upper end portions of the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622, respectively. Thereby, the first connecting portion P3623 connects the upper ends of the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622.

The second connecting portion P3624 is a portion that connects the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622. The second connecting portion P3624 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape with the plate surface facing up and down. Both left and right end portions of the second connecting portion P3624 are connected to the lower end portions of the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622, respectively. Thereby, the second connecting portion P3624 connects the lower ends of the left shielding portion P3621 and the right shielding portion P3622.

As shown in FIGS. 159 and 163, the first connecting portion P3623 and the second connecting portion P3624 are fixed to the front surface of the second lens member P3440 with screws or the like. As a result, the rotor-side shielding means P3620 is attached to the left-right center portion of the second lens member P3440 (in the same position as the light-emitting means-side shielding means P3610 in the left-right direction).

Below, the performance mode by the rotating accessory P3000 configured as described above will be explained.

First, as shown in FIGS. 159 and 166, a case will be described in which the first performance surface P3410 of the performance surfaces of the rotating body P3400 is located at a position facing the front (direction position).

In this case, the first performance surface P3410 is easily visible to the player. Furthermore, since the second performance surface P3430 faces backward, it is difficult for the player to see it. At this time, the rotating body side shielding means P3620 fixed inside the second presentation surface P3430 (second lens member P3440) is located behind the substrate P3330 of the light emitting means P3300.

In this state, the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 fixed to the front surface of the substrate P3330 and the rotating body side shielding means P3620 fixed to the inside of the second presentation surface P3430 are in a separately separated state (hereinafter simply referred to as " (referred to as "separated state"). In the separated state, a large gap is formed between the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and the first effect surface P3410 of the rotating body P3400. Therefore, the light from the plurality of light emitting parts P3340 provided on the substrate P3330 passes through the gap between the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and the first presentation surface P3410 of the rotating body P3400. The entire area of one lens member P3420 is irradiated. The light that has passed through the first lens member P3420 is irradiated onto the entire inside of the first presentation surface P3410. As a result, as shown in FIG. 167, light is emitted substantially uniformly from the entire first presentation surface P3410 to the outside, and the entire first presentation surface P3410 emits light substantially uniformly. That is, in this case, light is irradiated from the light emitting means P3300 to the entire inner surface side (first irradiation range) of the first presentation surface P3410 according to the first presentation surface P3410 (first transparent part). .

Next, as shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, a case will be described in which the second performance surface P3430 of the performance surfaces of the rotating body P3400 is located at a position facing the front (direction position).

In this case, the second performance surface P3430 is easily visible to the player. Furthermore, since the first performance surface P3410 faces backward, it is difficult for the player to see it. At this time, the rotating body side shielding means P3620 fixed inside the second presentation surface P3430 (second lens member P3440) is located in front of the substrate P3330 of the light emitting means P3300.

In this state, the front end of the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 fixed to the front surface of the substrate P3330 fits into the recesses (recess P3621a and recess P3622a) of the rotating body side shielding means P3620 fixed inside the second production surface P3430. It is located so that it is crowded. In this way, a state in which one cylindrical member extending from the substrate P3330 to the second production surface P3430 is formed by the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and the rotating body side shielding means P3620 (hereinafter simply referred to as a "restriction state") ). In the restricted state, the shielding means P3600 limits the irradiation range of light from the plurality of light emitting parts P3340 provided on the substrate P3330 to a predetermined range.

Specifically, among the plurality of light emitting parts P3340, the light emitted from the light emitting part P3340 arranged inside the shielding means P3600 (light emitting means side shielding means P3610) cannot exit to the outside of the shielding means P3600. Can not. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting section P3340 is emitted only to the range of the second presentation surface P3430 located inside the shielding means P3600 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 170).

On the other hand, among the plurality of light emitting parts P3340, light emitted from the light emitting part P3340 arranged outside the shielding means P3600 (light emitting means side shielding means P3610) cannot enter inside the shielding means P3600. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting section P3340 is emitted only to the range of the second presentation surface P3430 located outside the shielding means P3600 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 170).

In this way, when the second performance surface P3430 is controlled to move to the performance position, the shielding means P3600 enters the restricted state and limits the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light emitting part P3340 to the inside of the second performance surface P3430. It can be limited to a predetermined range (a range located inside or outside of the shielding means P3600 when viewed from the front). That is, the light irradiation range (first irradiation range) when the first performance surface P3410 is controlled to move to the performance position, and the light irradiation range when the second performance surface P3430 is controlled to move to the performance position. The range (second irradiation range) can be made different. As a result, for example, by causing the inner light emitting part P3340 and the outer light emitting part P3340 of the shielding means P3600 to emit light in different manners (for example, different brightness, color, timing, etc.), the second performance surface P3430 can be made non-uniform. can be made to emit light.

In particular, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the shape of the shielding means P3600 when viewed from the front is formed to correspond to the decoration applied to the second presentation surface P3430. As a result, the irradiation range (second irradiation range) of the light emitted from the light emitting means P3300 is made to correspond to the second presentation surface P3430 (second transparent part), and the decoration of the second presentation surface P3430 It can be made to emit light to make it more appealing. For example, by forming the characters on the second presentation surface P3430 and the shielding means P3600 so that they match when viewed from the front, the characters can be made to emit light in a manner different from other decorations.

Further, in this embodiment, in the restricted state, the rear end portion of the rotor-side shielding means P3620 is located behind the substrate P3330 (see FIG. 168). This effectively prevents the light emitted from the light emitting part P3340 provided on the front surface of the substrate P3330 from going around from behind the shielding means P3600 (irradiating from the inside to the outside of the shielding means P3600 or from the outside to the inside). can be suppressed to

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 168 etc., the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 has a shape that bulges out in an arc centered on the support shaft P3310 (rotation center of the rotating body P3400), and the rotating body side The shielding means P3620 has an arcuate concave shape centered on the support shaft P3310. This makes it possible to reduce the gap between the restricted shielding means P3600 (light-emitting means side shielding means P3610 and rotary body side shielding means P3620) while eliminating interference between members when the rotating body P3400 rotates. .

That is, by forming an arc-shaped portion along the rotation locus of the rotating body P3400 in the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and the rotating body side shielding means P3620, interference between the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and the rotating body side shielding means P3620 is prevented. can be avoided. Also, with this configuration, the opposing portions (arc-shaped portions) of the light emitting means side shielding means P3610 and the rotating body side shielding means P3620 can be brought closer to each other to reduce the gap, thereby improving the light shielding property. can be improved. Thereby, it is possible to effectively suppress the light emitted from the light emitting part P3340 from leaking beyond the shielding means P3600.

In this way, depending on the type of the performance surface (first performance surface P3410 or second performance surface P3430) whose movement is controlled to the performance position, the manner in which the decorative surface emits light by the light emitting means P3300 can be varied. As a result, different effects (light emission effects) can be performed depending on the type of decorative surface, and the interest of the effect by the rotating accessory P3000 can be improved.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with performance devices have been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a gaming machine that has a production rotating body that has a built-in light-emitting part and a plurality of production surfaces, and can display a performance during a jackpot, game information, etc. on the plurality of production surfaces. Disclosed.

However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem in that the performance contents displayed on the performance surface are simply the same performance mode repeatedly displayed, which lacks interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A gaming machine equipped with a rotating body P3400 formed from a plurality of performance surfaces (performance parts) that have transparent parts and are visible to the player,
a light-emitting means P3300 that is provided inside the rotating body P3400 and is capable of irradiating light to the outside of the rotating body P3400 through the light-transmitting part by irradiating light to the inner surface of at least one production surface;
a shielding means P3600 that limits the irradiation range of light emitted from the light emitting means P3300 onto the inner surface of the performance surface to a predetermined range;
a driving means P3500 that rotates the rotating body P3400 and controls the movement of any one of the plurality of performance surfaces to a performance position that is easily visible to the player;
The plurality of performance surfaces are
A first production surface P3410,
A second performance surface P3430 that is a different performance surface from the first performance surface P3410,
The rotating body P3400 is configured to move when the first performance surface P3410 is controlled to move to the performance position by the shielding means P3600, and when the movement of the second performance surface P3430 is controlled to the performance position. The irradiation range of the light irradiated onto the inner surface of the presentation surface is different between the two.

Moreover, the shielding means P3600 according to this embodiment is
a rotating body side shielding means P3620 provided on the rotating body P3400;
a light emitting means side shielding means P3610 provided in the light emitting means P3300;
including;
The shielding means P3600 is
As the rotating body side shielding means P3620 moves with the rotation of the rotating body P3400, the light irradiated from the light emitting means P3300 onto the inner surface of the production surface (production section) together with the light emission means side shielding means P3610. It is possible to limit the irradiation range to a predetermined range,
When the first performance surface P3410 is controlled to move to the performance position, the irradiation range of the light irradiated from the light emitting means P3300 onto the inner surface of the first performance surface P3410 becomes the first irradiation range, and the When the second performance surface P3430 is controlled to move to the performance position, the irradiation range of light irradiated from the light emitting means P3300 onto the inner surface of the second performance surface P3430 is the first irradiation range. This is characterized by a different second irradiation range.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine.

Specifically, the lighting mode of the performance surface by the light emitting means P3300 is determined depending on whether the first performance surface P3410 is controlled to move to the performance position or the second performance surface P3430 is controlled to move to the performance position. can be made different. That is, depending on the type of the performance surface that is controlled to move to the performance position, different light emitting performances are possible, which in turn makes it possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with performance devices have been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a gaming machine that has a production rotating body that has a built-in light-emitting part and a plurality of production surfaces, and can display a performance during a jackpot, game information, etc. on the plurality of production surfaces. Disclosed.

However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem in that the performance contents displayed on the performance surface are simply the same performance mode repeatedly displayed, which lacks interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A gaming machine equipped with a rotating body formed from a plurality of presentation parts that have a transparent part and are visible to a player,
a light-emitting means provided inside the rotating body and capable of irradiating light toward the outside of the rotating body through the light-transmitting part by irradiating light onto the inner surface of at least one production section;
a shielding means for limiting the irradiation range of the light irradiated from the light emitting means to the inner surface of the production part to a predetermined range;
a drive means for rotating the rotating body and controlling the movement of any one of the plurality of presentation sections to a presentation position that is easily visible to the player;
The plurality of performance surfaces are
A first production surface P3410,
A second performance surface P3430 that is a different performance surface from the first performance surface P3410,
The shielding means P3600 is
including a rotating body side shielding means P3620 provided on the rotating body P3400,
The rotating body side shielding means P3620 is
By moving with the rotation of the rotating body P3400, the first performance surface P3410 is controlled to move to the performance position, and the second performance surface P3430 is controlled to move to the performance position. The invention is characterized in that the irradiation range of the light irradiated onto the inner surface of the performance surface is made different depending on the case where the performance surface is exposed.

Further, the first performance surface P3410 according to the present embodiment is
having a first transparent part formed in a predetermined shape,
The second performance surface P3430 is
a second light-transmitting portion formed in a shape different from that of the first light-transmitting portion;
The rotating body side shielding means P3620 is
When the first presentation surface P3410 is controlled to move to the presentation position by moving with the rotation of the rotary body P3400, the irradiation range of the light irradiated from the light emitting means P3300 is set to the first presentation surface P3410. When the first irradiation range corresponds to the light-transmitting part, the first light-transmitting part emits light, and the second effect surface P3430 is controlled to move to the effect position, the light-emitting means It is characterized in that the irradiation range of the light emitted from P3300 becomes a second irradiation range corresponding to the second light-transmitting part, so that the second light-transmitting part emits light.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine.

Specifically, the lighting mode of the performance surface by the light emitting means P3300 is determined depending on whether the first performance surface P3410 is controlled to move to the performance position or the second performance surface P3430 is controlled to move to the performance position. can be made different. That is, depending on the type of the performance surface that is controlled to move to the performance position, different light emitting performances are possible, which in turn makes it possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with performance devices have been known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-161333.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-161333 discloses a gaming machine that has a production rotating body that has a built-in light-emitting part and a plurality of production surfaces, and can display a performance during a jackpot, game information, etc. on the plurality of production surfaces. Disclosed.

However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem in that the performance contents displayed on the performance surface are simply the same performance mode repeatedly displayed, which lacks interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A gaming machine equipped with a rotating body formed from a plurality of presentation parts that have a transparent part and are visible to a player,
a light-emitting means provided inside the rotating body and capable of irradiating light toward the outside of the rotating body through the light-transmitting part by irradiating light onto the inner surface of at least one production section;
a shielding means for limiting the irradiation range of the light irradiated from the light emitting means to the inner surface of the production part to a predetermined range;
a drive means for rotating the rotating body and controlling the movement of any one of the plurality of presentation sections to a presentation position that is easily visible to the player;
The shielding means P3600 is
a rotating body side shielding means P3620 provided on the rotating body P3400;
a light emitting means side shielding means P3610 provided in the light emitting means P3300;
including;
The shielding means P3600 is
By moving the rotating body-side shielding means P3620 as the rotating body P3400 rotates, together with the light-emitting means-side shielding means P3610, the irradiation range of the light irradiated from the light-emitting means P3300 onto the inner surface of the presentation surface is determined. and a state in which the irradiation range of the light irradiated from the light emitting means to the inner surface of the presentation surface is not limited.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine.

Specifically, the lighting mode of the performance surface by the light emitting means P3300 is determined depending on whether the first performance surface P3410 is controlled to move to the performance position or the second performance surface P3430 is controlled to move to the performance position. can be made different. That is, depending on the rotation of the rotating body P3400, different light emitting effects are possible, and the interest of the gaming machine can be improved.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various changes can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, the movement (rotation) of the rotating body P3400 by the driving means P3500 and the irradiation of light by the light emitting means P3300 can be controlled arbitrarily. By appropriately setting the timing of both, it is possible to perform various effects.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example has been shown in which the first performance surface P3410 and the second performance surface P3430 are entirely translucent (light can be transmitted throughout); It is also possible to make only a part of the surface P3410 and the second effect surface P3430 a light-transmitting part (only a part can transmit light). For example, it is also possible to form the first presentation surface P3410 by combining a translucent member and a non-translucent member depending on the decoration applied to the surface.

Further, it is also possible to use only the rotating body side shielding means P3620 as the shielding means P3600. That is, it is also possible to omit the light emitting means side shielding means P3610. In this case, when the second performance surface P3430 is controlled to move to the performance position, the range of light irradiation is limited by the rotating body side shielding means P3620.

Further, the configuration (shape, size, etc.) of the shielding means P3600 is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, it is possible to have an appropriate shape, size, etc., depending on the decoration applied to the performance surface.

Moreover, the shielding means P3600 does not necessarily need to be provided on the rotating body P3400 like the rotating body side shielding means P3620 of this embodiment. In other words, the shielding means P3600 may be of any type as long as it can be switched between a state in which the light irradiation range is limited and a state in which it is not limited in accordance with the movement control (rotation) of the rotating body P3400. For example, in accordance with the movement control of the rotating body P3400, the rotating body P3400 is moved by a separately provided driving means (or using the driving force of the driving means P3500) to a position where the light irradiation range is restricted and a position where it is not restricted. It is also possible to use the possible member as the shielding means P3600.

The production device P4000 will be explained below using FIGS. 171 to 191.

The production device P4000 shown in FIG. 171 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. For convenience, it is assumed that the production device P4000 is provided in a game board P1100 that is another example of the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention.

The production device P4000 is installed on the game board P1100. The performance device P4000 gives a visual impression to the player by controlling the movement of the movable body P4300 at a position visible to the player in the opening area 1d of the game board P1100. The production device P4000 includes a movement control mechanism P4010, a movable body P4300, and a reinforcing cover P4400.

The movement control mechanism P4010 moves the movable body P4300 between a standby position shown in FIG. 171, which is a position that is difficult to see from the player, and a production position shown in FIGS. 185 to 187, which is a position that is visible to the player. It controls movement. Note that a detailed description of the movable body P4300 will be given later.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 171, the standby position is below the opening area 1d of the game board P1100 (a position that overlaps with the lower part of the game board P1100). Further, as shown in FIGS. 185 to 187, the presentation position is the lower part of the opening area 1d. The movement control mechanism P4010 includes an elevation movement control mechanism P4100 and a left-right movement control mechanism P4200.

The vertical movement control mechanism P4100 shown in FIGS. 171, 172, and 185 controls the movement of the movable body P4300 in the vertical direction. Here, the movable body P4300 is provided in a left-right movement control mechanism P4200, which will be described later, and the elevation movement control mechanism P4100 controls the movement of the movable body P4300 via the left-right movement control mechanism P4200. That is, the elevation movement control mechanism P4100 directly controls the movement of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 in the vertical direction. Note that a detailed explanation of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 will be given later.

As shown in FIGS. 171 and 185, the elevation movement control mechanism P4100 controls the movement of the lateral movement control mechanism P4200 (movable body P4300) between the standby position and the production position. In addition, below, the structure of the elevation movement control mechanism P4100 will be mainly described based on the state in which the movable body P4300 is located at the standby position. The vertical movement control mechanism P4100 includes a left side movement unit P4110 and a right side movement unit P4160.

The left side movement unit P4110 moves the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 in the vertical direction on the left side of the game board P1100, and guides the movement in the vertical direction. The left moving unit P4110 includes a base portion P4120, a first motor P4130, a first transmission portion P4140, and a lifting shaft P4150.

The base portion P4120 is provided with a first motor P4130, a first transmission portion P4140, and a lifting shaft P4150, which will be described later. The base portion P4120 is fixed to the left side portion of the game board P1100. The base portion P4120 has a substantially box shape that opens toward the rear. Furthermore, the base portion P4120 has a substantially rectangular shape that is elongated in the vertical direction when viewed from the front.

The first motor P4130 shown in FIG. 171 is a drive source for moving the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 in the vertical direction. The first motor P4130 is installed on the upper part of the base part P4120. Further, the first motor P4130 is installed on the left side portion of the base portion P4120. As shown in FIG. 172, the first motor P4130 is provided such that an output shaft P4131 penetrates the base portion P4120 in the front and back and projects rearward.

The first transmission section P4140 shown in FIG. 172 transmits the driving force generated by the first motor P4130 to the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 side. The first transmission section P4140 is installed on the left side of the base section P4120. The first transmission section P4140 includes an output gear P4141, a first gear P4142, and a second gear P4143.

Output gear P4141 takes out the driving force of first motor P4130. Output gear P4141 is fixed to the rear end of output shaft P4131 of first motor P4130.

The first gear P4142 is arranged substantially below the output gear P4141 and meshes with the output gear P4141. The first gear P4142 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the base portion P4120 about an axis facing in the front-rear direction.

The second gear P4143 is arranged substantially below the first gear P4142 and meshes with the first gear P4142. The second gear P4143 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the base portion P4120 about an axis facing in the front-rear direction.

The elevating shaft P4150 guides the vertical movement of the lateral movement control mechanism P4200. The elevating shaft P4150 has a substantially cylindrical shape that is elongated in the vertical direction. The elevating shaft P4150 is installed on the right side of the base portion P4120. Moreover, the elevating shaft P4150 is installed so as to be spaced apart from the rear surface of the base portion P4120.

The right side moving unit P4160 guides the vertical movement of the left and right movement control mechanism P4200 on the right side of the game board P1100. The right side moving unit P4160 includes a base portion P4170 and a lifting shaft P4180.

The base portion P4170 is provided with a lifting shaft P4180, which will be described later. The base portion P4170 is fixed to the right side portion of the game board P1100. The base portion P4170 has a substantially box shape that opens toward the rear. Further, the base portion P4170 has a substantially rectangular shape that is elongated in the vertical direction when viewed from the front.

The elevating shaft P4180 guides the vertical movement of the lateral movement control mechanism P4200. The elevating shaft P4180 has a substantially cylindrical shape that is elongated in the vertical direction. The elevating shaft P4150 is installed on the left side of the base portion P4170. Further, the elevating shaft P4180 is installed so as to be spaced apart from the rear surface of the base portion P4170.

The left-right movement control mechanism P4200 shown in FIGS. 171 to 178 and 185 to 187 supports the movable body P4300 and controls the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction. The left-right movement control mechanism P4200 controls the movement of the movable body P4300 in the presentation position, as shown in FIGS. 185 to 187. Further, the horizontal movement control mechanism P4200 is controlled to move in the vertical direction by the vertical movement control mechanism P4100. The left-right movement control mechanism P4200 is arranged between the left movement unit P4110 and the right movement unit P4160. The left-right movement control mechanism P4200 includes a base part P4210, a cover part P4220, a connecting part P4230, a rack part P4240, a guide part P4250, a second motor P4260, and a second transmission part P4270.

A base portion P4210 shown in FIGS. 172, 174 to 178 is provided with a second motor P4260 and a second transmission portion P4270, which will be described later. The base portion P4210 includes a main body portion P4211 and a support portion P4219.

The main body portion P4211 shown in FIG. 175 constitutes the majority of the base portion P4210. The main body portion P4211 has a substantially box shape that opens toward the rear. Further, the main body portion P4211 has a substantially rectangular shape that is elongated in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The main body portion P4211 includes a front wall portion P4212, an upper wall portion P4215, a lower wall portion P4216, a left wall portion P4217, and a right wall portion P4218.

The front wall portion P4212 constitutes the front portion of the main body portion P4211. The front wall portion P4212 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The front wall portion P4212 includes a guide hole portion P4213 and a first biasing portion receiving portion P4214.

The guide hole portion P4213 shown in FIGS. 174 and 177 guides the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction. The guide hole P4213 is formed to penetrate the front wall P4212 in the front and back directions. The guide hole P4213 is formed approximately at the center of the front wall P4212 in the vertical direction. The guide hole P4213 has a shape elongated in the left-right direction.

The first urging portion receiving portion P4214 shown in FIG. 178 receives the urging force of the urging portion described later. The first biasing portion receiving portion P4214 is provided in the right side portion of the front wall portion P4212 so as to protrude rearward.

The upper wall portion P4215 shown in FIG. 175 constitutes the upper portion of the main body portion P4211. The upper wall portion P4215 is provided at the upper end of the front wall portion P4212. The upper wall portion P4215 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing up and down. The upper wall portion P4215 includes a cutout portion P4215a.

The cutout portion P4215a is obtained by cutting out the rear portion of the upper wall portion P4215. The cutout portion P4215a is formed at the center portion of the upper wall portion P4215 in the left-right direction.

The lower wall portion P4216 constitutes the lower portion of the main body portion P4211. The lower wall portion P4216 is provided at the lower end of the front wall portion P4212. The lower wall portion P4216 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing up and down.

The left wall portion P4217 constitutes the left side portion of the main body portion P4211. The left wall portion P4217 is provided at the left end of the front wall portion P4212. The left wall portion P4217 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the left-right direction.

The right wall portion P4218 constitutes the right side portion of the main body portion P4211. The right wall portion P4218 is provided at the right end of the right wall portion P4218. The right wall portion P4218 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the left-right direction.

The support portion P4219 supports a guide portion P4250, which will be described later. The support portion P4219 is formed to extend upward from the right end portion of the main body portion P4211.

A cover portion P4220 shown in FIG. 172 covers the opening of the main body portion P4211. The cover portion P4220 has a plate shape that is elongated in the left-right direction and whose thickness direction is oriented in the front-rear direction. The cover part P4220 and the main body part P4211 constitute a housing that accommodates a second transmission part P4270, which will be described later.

The connecting portion P4230 connects the cover portion P4220 (base portion P4210) and the rack portion P4240, which will be described later. The connecting portion P4230 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The right side portion of the connecting portion P4230 is fixed to the left end portion of the rear surface of the cover portion P4220. Further, the left side portion of the connecting portion P4230 projects further to the left than the left end portion of the cover portion P4220.

The rack section P4240 shown in FIGS. 172 to 174 converts the rotation transmitted by the first transmission section P4140 into vertical movement of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200. The rack portion P4240 is fixed to the left side portion of the connecting portion P4230. The rack portion P4240 includes a main body portion P4241, a guide hole portion P4242, and a rack tooth portion P4243.

The main body portion P4241 shown in FIGS. 173 and 174 constitutes most of the rack portion P4240. The main body portion P4241 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The main body portion P4241 has a substantially rectangular shape that is elongated in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The lower portion of the main body portion P4241 is fixed to the front surface of the left side portion of the connecting portion P4230.

The guide hole portion P4242 is a hole that vertically passes through the main body portion P4241. The elevating shaft P4150 of the left moving unit P4110 is inserted into the guide hole P4242. By inserting the elevating shaft P4150 into the guide hole P4242, vertical movement of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 is guided in the left side portion of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200.

The rack tooth portion P4243 meshes with the second gear P4143 of the first transmission portion P4140. The rack tooth portion P4243 is provided at the left end portion of the main body portion P4241. The rack tooth portion P4243 meshes with the second gear P4143 in a state where the elevating shaft P4150 is inserted into the guide hole portion P4242.

The guide portion P4250 shown in FIGS. 173 and 174 guides the vertical movement of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200. The guide part P4250 is fixed to the upper end of the support part P4219. The guide portion P4250 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The guide portion P4250 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The guide portion P4250 includes a guide hole portion P4251.

The guide hole portion P4251 is a hole that vertically passes through the guide portion P4250. An elevating shaft P4180 of the right side moving unit P4160 is inserted into the guide hole P4251. By inserting the elevating shaft P4180 into the guide hole P4251, vertical movement of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 is guided in the right side portion of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200.

A second motor P4260 shown in FIG. 173 is a drive source for moving the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction. The second motor P4260 is installed on the left side of the base portion P4210 (main body portion P4211). As shown in FIG. 176, the second motor P4260 is provided such that an output shaft P4261 penetrates the base portion P4210 in the front and back directions and projects rearward.

The second transmission section P4270 shown in FIGS. 174 to 178 transmits the driving force generated by the second motor P4260 to the movable body P4300. The second transmission section P4270 includes an output gear P4271, a first gear P4272, a second gear P4273, a belt P4274, a tension pulley P4275, a tension applying section P4276, a first pulley P4277, and a second pulley P4278. .

The output gear P4271 shown in FIGS. 174 to 176 takes out the driving force of the second motor P4260. Output gear P4271 is fixed to the rear end of output shaft P4261 of second motor P4260.

The first gear P4272 is arranged substantially below the output gear P4271 and meshes with the output gear P4271. The first gear P4272 is rotatably supported around an axis facing in the front-rear direction.

The second gear P4273 is disposed approximately to the right of the first gear P4272 and meshes with the first gear P4272. The second gear P4273 is rotatably supported around an axis facing in the front-rear direction. Further, a belt P4274, which will be described later, is wound around the second gear P4273.

The belt P4274 shown in FIGS. 174 to 178 is formed in an endless shape and is wound around a second gear P4273 and a tension pulley P4275, which will be described later. The belt P4274 is arranged above the guide hole P4213 in the front wall P4212 so as to extend in the left-right direction.

Belt P4274 rotates as second gear P4273 rotates. The belt P4274 has rack-shaped teeth P4274a formed in a part of the inner peripheral surface (the surface facing the second gear P4273). The tooth portion P4274a meshes with the second gear P4273.

A tension pulley P4275 shown in FIG. 178 is around which a belt P4274 is wound. The tension pulley P4275 is rotatably supported on the right side of the front wall portion P4212 about an axis facing in the front-rear direction via a tension applying portion P4276, which will be described later.

The tension applying portion P4276 rotatably supports the tension pulley P4275 and applies tension to the belt P4274. The tension applying portion P4276 is arranged on the right side portion of the front wall portion P4212. The tension applying section P4276 includes a tension pulley supporting section P4276a and a biasing section P4276d.

The tension pulley support portion P4276a rotatably supports the tension pulley P4275. The tension pulley support portion P4276a is supported so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The tension pulley support portion P4276a is configured to support the tension pulley P4275 on the left side. Further, the tension pulley support portion P4276a includes a hole portion P4276b and a second biasing portion receiving portion P4276c.

The hole P4276b is a hole that penetrates the tension pulley support part P4276a back and forth. The hole P4276b is formed on the right side of the tension pulley support P4276a. The hole P4276b has a long hole shape that is elongated in the left-right direction. A first biasing portion receiving portion P4214 formed in the front wall portion P4212 is inserted into the hole P4276b.

The second biasing portion receiving portion P4276c receives the biasing force of a biasing portion P4276d, which will be described later. The second biasing portion receiving portion P4276c is provided so as to protrude rearward from the right end portion of the tension pulley supporting portion P4276a.

The biasing portion P4276d biases the tension pulley support portion P4276a to the right. By urging the tension pulley P4275 to the right via the tension pulley support portion P4276a by the urging portion P4276d, a constant tension can be applied to the belt P4274. The biasing portion P4276d is interposed between the first biasing portion receiving portion P4214 and the second biasing portion receiving portion P4276c of the tension pulley support portion P4276a. A compression spring is configured to bias the second biasing portion receiving portions P4276c away from each other.

The first pulley P4277 shown in FIGS. 174, 176, and 177 is arranged approximately to the right of the second gear P4273. The first pulley P4277 is arranged below the belt P4274 so as to be in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the belt P4274. Furthermore, the first pulley P4277 is arranged such that its upper end is located above the lower end of the second gear P4273. The first pulley P4277 is rotatably supported around an axis facing in the front-rear direction. The first pulley P4277 rotates in accordance with the rotation of the belt P4274.

The second pulley P4278 shown in FIGS. 174, 177, and 178 is arranged approximately to the left of the tension pulley P4275. The second pulley P4278 is arranged below the belt P4274 so as to come into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the belt P4274. The second pulley P4278 is arranged such that its upper end is located above the lower end of the tension pulley P4275. Further, the second pulley P4278 is arranged at approximately the same height as the first pulley P4277. The second pulley P4278 is rotatably supported around an axis facing in the front-rear direction. The second pulley P4278 rotates in accordance with the rotation of the belt P4274.

The movable body P4300 shown in FIGS. 173 to 182 is movable in the vertical and horizontal directions under movement control by an elevation movement control mechanism P4100 and a left-right movement control mechanism P4200. The movable body P4300 is installed so as to be movable in the left-right direction with respect to the left-right movement control mechanism P4200. The movable body P4300 has a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the movable body P4300 has a shape that resembles a fighter jet. The movable body P4300 includes a base portion P4310, an engaging portion P4320, a substrate P4330, and a cover portion P4340.

A base portion P4310 shown in FIG. 179 holds a substrate P4330 and a cover portion P4340, which will be described later. The base portion P4310 is installed in the left-right movement control mechanism P4200. The base portion P4310 includes a main body portion P4311, a roller accommodating portion P4312, and a guided portion P4313.

The main body portion P4311 constitutes most of the base portion P4310. The main body portion P4311 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The main body portion P4311 has a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front.

The roller accommodating portion P4312 accommodates a roller P4322, which will be described later. A pair of roller accommodating parts P4312 are arranged on both sides in the left-right direction in the lower part of the main body part P4311. The roller accommodating portion P4312 is open rearward and downward.

The guided portion P4313 shown in FIGS. 177, 179, 181, and 182 is a portion that is guided in the left-right direction by the guide hole P4213 of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200. The guided portion P4313 is provided so as to extend downward from the center portion in the left-right direction in the lower portion of the main body portion P4311. The guided portion P4313 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The guided portion P4313 includes a protrusion P4314 and an enlarged diameter portion P4315.

The protrusion P4314 shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the guided portion P4313. A pair of protrusions P4314 are provided at intervals in the left-right direction. The protrusion P4314 has a substantially cylindrical shape. The protrusion P4314 is inserted into the guide hole P4213.

The enlarged diameter portion P4315 is provided at the rear end of the protrusion P4314. The enlarged diameter portion P4315 has a diameter larger than that of the protrusion P4314. The outer diameter of the expanded diameter portion P4315 is larger than the vertical dimension of the guide hole portion P4213.

By inserting the above-mentioned protrusion P4314 into the guide hole P4213, it is possible to guide the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction along the guide hole P4213. Further, by providing the above-mentioned enlarged diameter portion P4315 at the rear end portion of the protrusion P4314, it is possible to prevent the protrusion P4314 from slipping out of the guide hole P4213.

The engaging portion P4320 shown in FIGS. 179 to 182 is fixed to the base portion P4310 and engages with the belt P4274. The engagement portion P4320 includes a fixed portion P4321, a roller P4322, and an engagement guide portion P4323.

The fixed part P4321 is fixed to the rear surface of the base part P4310. The fixed portion P4321 has a shape that is elongated in the left-right direction. The fixed part P4321 is fixed to the base part P4310 via an appropriate fastener.

The roller P4322 shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 is rotatably supported by the fixed portion P4321 around an axis facing in the front-rear direction. The roller P4322 has a disk shape. The rollers P4322 are provided at both ends in the left and right direction on the front surface of the fixed portion P4321. The roller P4322 is accommodated in the roller accommodating portion P4312 with the fixed portion P4321 fixed to the base portion P4310. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 182, the roller P4322 is in contact with the upper surface of the upper wall portion P4215 of the base portion P4210 (main body portion P4211).

The engagement guide portion P4323 shown in FIGS. 179 to 182 engages with the belt P4274 and guides the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction. The engagement guide portion P4323 is provided at the center portion in the left-right direction on the lower surface of the fixed portion P4321. The engagement guide section P4323 includes a guide section P4324, an engagement section P4325, and an engagement maintenance section P4326.

The guide portion P4324 shown in FIGS. 180 to 182 guides the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction. The guide portion P4324 has an elongated shape in the left-right direction. The left-right dimension of the guide portion P4324 is smaller than the left-right dimension of the fixed portion P4321. The guide portion P4324 includes a vertical portion P4324a and a horizontal portion P4324b.

The vertical portion P4324a shown in FIG. 182 is a portion that projects downward from the rear end portion of the lower surface of the fixed portion P4321. The vertical portion P4324a has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction.

The horizontal portion P4324b is a portion that projects forward from the lower end of the vertical portion P4324a. The horizontal portion P4324b has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing up and down.

The guide portion P4324 described above has a substantially L-shape in cross-sectional view (side view). As shown in FIG. 182, the guide portion P4324 has an upper surface of the horizontal portion P4324b facing the lower surface of the upper wall portion P4215 of the base portion P4210 (main body portion P4211). Thereby, the guide portion P4324 can guide the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction by sandwiching the upper wall portion P4215 together with the roller P4322.

The engaging portion P4325 shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 engages with the belt P4274. The engaging portion P4325 is provided at the center portion in the left-right direction on the lower surface of the guide portion P4324. The engaging portion P4325 includes a vertical portion P4325a and a horizontal portion P4325b.

The vertical portion P4325a shown in FIG. 182 is a portion that projects downward from the front end of the lower surface of the guide portion P4324. The vertical portion P4325a has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction.

The horizontal portion P4325b is a portion that projects rearward from the lower end of the vertical portion P4325a. The horizontal portion P4325b has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing up and down. A toothed portion P4325c that meshes with a toothed portion P4274a of the belt P4274 is formed on the upper surface of the horizontal portion P4325b.

The engaging portion P4325 described above has a substantially L-shape in cross-sectional view (side view). As shown in FIG. 182, the engaging portion P4325 holds the belt P4274 by vertically sandwiching it between the lower surface of the guide portion P4324 and the upper surface of the horizontal portion P4325b. Further, in this state, the tooth portion P4325c of the engaging portion P4325 and the tooth portion P4274a of the belt P4274 mesh with each other. Thereby, the engaging portion P4325 can be engaged with the belt P4274, and the operation of the belt P4274 can be transmitted to the movable body P4300.

The engagement maintaining portion P4326 shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 maintains the engagement between the engaging portion P4325 and the belt P4274. The engagement maintaining portion P4326 is provided on the lower surface of the guide portion P4324. Furthermore, a pair of engagement maintaining portions P4326 are provided on both sides of the engagement portion P4325 in the left-right direction. The engagement maintaining portion P4326 includes a vertical portion P4326a and a horizontal portion P4326b.

The vertical portion P4326a shown in FIG. 182 is a portion that projects downward from the rear end portion of the lower surface of the guide portion P4324. The vertical portion P4326a has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction.

The horizontal portion P4326b is a portion that projects forward from the lower end of the vertical portion P4326a. The horizontal portion P4326b has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing up and down.

The engagement maintaining portion P4326 described above has a substantially L-shape in cross-sectional view (side view). As shown in FIG. 182, the engagement maintaining portion P4326 holds the belt P4274 by vertically sandwiching it between the lower surface of the guide portion P4324 and the upper surface of the horizontal portion P4326b. Further, the vertical portion P4326a of the engagement maintaining portion P4326 can restrict rearward movement of the belt P4274 engaged with the engagement portion P4325. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the belt P4274 from coming off from the engagement portion P4325.

A board P4330 shown in FIG. 179 is mounted with appropriate electronic components (functional components). The substrate P4330 is fixed to the front surface of the base part P4310. The substrate P4330 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The substrate P4330 has a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front. The front surface of the board P4330 is a mounting surface on which an appropriate light emitting means is mounted.

The cover portion P4340 constitutes the appearance of the movable body P4300 when viewed from the front. Cover part P4340 is fixed to the front surface of base part P4310 so as to cover base part P4310 and substrate P4330. The cover part P4340 includes a main body part P4341, a contact part P4342, and a positioning protrusion P4343.

The main body portion P4341 constitutes most of the cover portion P4340. The main body portion P4341 has a substantially box shape that opens toward the rear. Further, the main body portion P4341 has a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front. The main body portion P4341 is formed of a transparent member that can transmit light from the light emitting means provided on the substrate P4330.

The contact portion P4342 protrudes forward on the front surface of the main body portion P4341. The contact portion P4342 is arranged at the left end of the lower end of the main body P4341. As shown in FIG. 177, the contact portion P4342 is arranged to the left of the guide portion P4324 of the engagement portion P4320. Further, the contact portion P4342 is arranged below the guide portion P4324. The contact portion P4342 has a substantially cylindrical shape.

The positioning protrusion P4343 protrudes downward from the lower end of the main body P4341. The positioning protrusion P4343 is provided at the center portion of the main body portion P4341 in the left-right direction. The positioning protrusion P4343 has a shape in which the left and right dimensions become smaller toward the bottom when viewed from the front.

A reinforcing cover P4400 shown in FIGS. 171, 183, and 184 connects the left moving unit P4110 and the right moving unit P4160. The reinforcing cover P4400 is arranged at the lower part of the rear surface of the game board P1100. Further, the reinforcing cover P4400 is arranged in front of the movable body P4300. The reinforcing cover P4400 includes a main body portion P4410, a regulating means P4420, and a cutout portion P4430.

The main body portion P4410 constitutes the majority of the reinforcing cover P4400. The main body portion P4410 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. Further, the main body portion P4410 has a shape that is elongated in the left-right direction. The main body part P4410 is fixed at both ends in the left and right direction to the lower part of the left moving unit P4110 and the lower part of the right moving unit P4160, respectively, via appropriate fasteners.

The regulating means P4420 limits the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction within a predetermined movement range by coming into contact with the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 in a predetermined case. The regulating means P4420 constitutes a pair of walls spaced apart in the left-right direction. The regulating means P4420 is provided on the rear surface of the main body portion P4410 so as to protrude rearward. Further, the regulating means P4420 is arranged to the left of the center portion in the left-right direction of the main body portion P4410. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 171, the regulating means P4420 is located to the left of the center portion in the left-right direction in the opening area 1d of the game board P1100. The regulating means P4420 includes a first wall P4421, a second wall P4422, and a third wall P4423.

The first wall portion P4421 constitutes an upper portion of the regulating means P4420. The first wall portion P4421 can limit the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction at the production position to within a first range R1 that is a range between the left and right first wall portions P4421. The first wall portion P4421 is formed closer to the production position than the standby position.

The first wall portion P4421 has a shape that extends linearly in the vertical direction. The vertical dimension of the first wall portion P4421 is formed to be smaller than the distance between the left and right first wall portions P4421. That is, the first range R1 has a shape that is elongated in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the vertical dimension of the first wall portion P4421 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the contact portion P4342 when viewed from the front.

The second wall portion P4422 constitutes a lower portion of the regulating means P4420. The second wall portion P4422 prevents the horizontal movement of the movable body P4300, which moves in the vertical direction from the standby position to the approximately central portion of the regulating means P4420, between the left and right second wall portions P4422. It is possible to limit it within a second range R2. The second wall portion P4422 is formed closer to the standby position than the production position.

The second wall portion P4422 has a shape that extends linearly in the vertical direction. The distance between the left and right second wall portions P4422 is formed smaller than the distance between the left and right first wall portions P4421. That is, the width of the second range R2 in the left-right direction is smaller than the width of the first range R1 in the left-right direction. Further, the vertical dimension of the second wall portion P4422 is formed to be larger than the distance between the left and right second wall portions P4422. That is, the second range R2 has a shape that is elongated in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. Further, the distance between the left and right second wall portions P4422 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the contact portion P4342 when viewed from the front.

The third wall portion P4423 constitutes a portion between the first wall portion P4421 and the second wall portion P4422. The third wall portion P4423 controls the horizontal movement of the movable body P4300, which moves in the vertical direction between the first range R1 and the second range R2, in the range between the left and right third wall portions P4423. can be limited within a third range R3.

The third wall portion P4423 is continuous with the lower end portion of the first wall portion P4421 and the upper end portion of the second wall portion P4422. The third wall portion P4423 has a curved shape so that the distance between the left and right third wall portions P4423 gradually decreases as it goes downward (so that the width of the third range R3 becomes narrower). Ru. Further, the third wall portion P4423 has an arcuate shape that is convex toward the center in the left-right direction of the third range R3 when viewed from the front. Further, the inner surface of the third wall portion P4423 and the inner surface of the second wall portion P4422 are continuous so that no corner is formed. Further, the vertical dimension of the third wall portion P4423 and the distance between the left and right third wall portions P4423 are formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the contact portion P4342 when viewed from the front.

The cutout portion P4430 is a cutout-shaped portion at the lower end of the main body portion P4410. The cutout portion P4430 is formed at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the main body portion P4410. As shown in FIG. 171, a starting opening (first starting opening P1350) through which a game ball wins (passes through) is arranged in the notch P4430.

The first starting port P1350 shown in FIG. 171 is located approximately at the center in the left-right direction in the opening area 1d of the game board P1100. Further, below the first starting port P1350 on the rear surface of the game board P1100, a positioning recess P4001 is provided to receive the positioning protrusion P4343 of the movable body P4300 in the standby state. By receiving the positioning protrusion P4343 by the positioning recess P4001, it becomes possible to position the movable body P4300 in the standby state.

Below, movement control of the production device P4000 configured as described above will be explained. In addition, below, the movement control to move the movable body P4300 made into a standby position to a production position is demonstrated.

In the standby position shown in FIG. 171, the movable body P4300 is located below the opening area 1d of the game board P1100 (a position overlapping the lower part of the game board P1100) when viewed from the front. In the standby position, the movable body P4300 is hidden behind the game board P1100, and is in a position that is difficult to see from the player. In this state, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 189(a), the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 is located in the second range R2 of the regulating means P4420.

First, movement control by the elevation movement control mechanism P4100 will be explained. When the first motor P4130 is driven, the second gear P4143 rotates around the axis via the output gear P4141 and the first gear P4142 which mesh with each other as shown in FIG. 172.

The rotation of the second gear P4143 is transmitted to the rack portion P4240 of the left-right movement control mechanism P4200. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 185 and 189(b), the movable body P4300 moves upward via the left-right movement control mechanism P4200.

As described above, when controlling the upward movement of the movable body P4300, the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 moves upward through the second range R2 and the third range R3 in the regulating means P4420.

By controlling the movement as described above, the movable body P4300 is brought to the performance position. In the performance position, the movable body P4300 is in a position where the player can visually recognize the lower part of the opening area 1d. Furthermore, in the state shown in FIG. 185, the movable body P4300 is located at approximately the center in the left-right direction in the opening region 1d.

Next, movement control by the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 will be explained. When the second motor P4260 is driven, the second gear P4273 rotates around the axis via the output gear P4271 and the first gear P4272 shown in FIG. 176 that mesh with each other. The rotation of the second gear P4273 is transmitted to the belt P4274 wound around the second gear P4273 and the tension pulley P4275, and the belt P4274 rotates. As a result, the movable body P4300 that engages with the belt P4274 is controlled to move rightward, for example, as shown in FIGS. 186 and 190(a).

Furthermore, if the second motor P4260 is driven to rotate in the opposite direction to the movement control described above, the movable body P4300 is controlled to move leftward as shown in FIGS. 187 and 190(b). Ru. In this manner, at the performance position, the movable body P4300 can be controlled to move in the left and right direction.

As described above, when controlling the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction at the performance position, the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 moves in the left-right direction in the first range R1 in the regulating means P4420. Note that the movable body P4300 is controlled to move in the left-right direction so that the contact portion P4342 does not contact the left and right first wall portions P4421. Note that the regulating means P4420 may be configured to regulate the movement of the movable body P4300 in the horizontal direction within a predetermined range over the entire movable range of the movable body P4300 in the vertical direction. For example, no matter where in the performance position the movable body P4300 is located, the shape may be such that the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left and right direction is restricted within the first range R1 by the first wall portion P4421. A regulating means P4420 may also be formed. Further, the restricted range may vary depending on the location of the movable body P4300.

Next, movement control in which the movable body P4300, which has been set to the production position, is set to the standby position will be explained. In addition, in the following example, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 190(b), the movable body P4300, which has been controlled to move leftward at the production position, is controlled to move to the standby position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 188 and 191, the movable body P4300 is moved diagonally downward when moving the movable body P4300 from the performance position to the standby position. At this time, rightward movement control by the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 and downward movement control by the elevation movement control mechanism P4100 are performed simultaneously.

As described above, when controlling the movement of the movable body P4300 diagonally downward, the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 moves diagonally downward in the third range R3 of the regulating means P4420. Note that the movement of the movable body P4300 is controlled so that the contact portion P4342 does not contact the left and right third wall portions P4423.

As described above, by moving the movable body P4300 diagonally downward, the movable body P4300 can be positioned approximately at the center in the left-right direction of the opening area 1d. Next, the movable body P4300 is controlled to move downward to the standby position by the elevation movement control mechanism P4100.

As described above, when moving the movable body P4300 downward, the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 moves downward in the second range R2 in the regulating means P4420.

According to the above-described production device P4000, the range in which the movable body P4300 can move in the left and right direction is limited to the left and right walls (the first wall P4421, the second wall P4422, and the third wall P4421, the second wall P4422, and the third (the first range R1, the second range R2, and the third range R3) between the wall portions P4423). As a result, even if an impact is applied to the gaming machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, the regulating means P4420 can restrict the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left and right direction within a predetermined range, and the movable body P4300 It is possible to prevent contact with other members of the game board P1100.

Further, the width of the second range R2 in the regulating means P4420 is made narrower than the width of the first range R1. As a result, when the movable body P4300 is located at the standby position, the movement of the movable body P4300 is restricted within a relatively narrow range, thereby securing a space for placing other members around the regulating means P4420. In addition, by widening the movable range of the movable body P4300 in the left and right direction at the performance position, it is possible to provide a variety of performance modes.

Further, since the third wall portion P4423 of the regulating means P4420 has a curved shape, the inner surface of the third wall portion P4423 and the inner surface of the second wall portion P4422 can be continuous so that no corner is formed. As a result, when the movable body P4300 moves between the performance position and the standby position, a shock is applied to the gaming machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, and the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 is moved to the third wall. When abutting against P4423, the movement of the movable body P4300 can be smoothly guided by the third wall P4423. Further, in this embodiment, the third wall portion P4423 has an arcuate shape that is convex toward the center in the left-right direction of the third range R3. Thereby, a relatively large space for arranging other members can be secured outside the third wall portion P4423.

Further, the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the guide portion P4324 of the movable body P4300 (a position shifted from the guide portion P4324 in the left-right direction (left side)). This prevents the contact portion P4342 and the guide portion P4324 from overlapping and increasing the thickness of the movable body P4300, which would require extra movement space in the front-rear direction (depth direction). Members can be placed. In addition, since the impact when the contact portion P4342 and the regulating means P4420 come into contact is not directly applied to the guide portion P4324, there is no possibility that the guide portion P4324 will be damaged or there will be problems in the engagement between the guide portion P4324 and the belt P4274. This can be prevented from occurring.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, the technology of a gaming machine including a movable accessory (movable body) is well known. For example, as described in JP-A No. 2010-11934.

JP-A No. 2010-11934 discloses a gaming machine that includes a movable accessory and a box-shaped accessory storage case that can accommodate the movable accessory, and that can store the movable accessory in the accessory storage case. is disclosed.

However, in such a game machine, if a shock is applied to the game machine or an external force is applied to the movable accessory, there is a risk that it will come into contact with the accessory storage case or other game components and be damaged. Ta.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the movable body from coming into contact with other members.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A movable body P4300 that can move between a standby position and a production position,
a movement control mechanism P4010 capable of controlling the movement of the movable body P4300;
regulating means P4420 regulating movement of the movable body P4300;
A gaming machine comprising:
The movable body P4300 moves in an up-down direction (first direction), which is a moving direction from the standby position to the production position, and in a left-right direction (second direction), which is different from the up-down direction at the production position. is movable;
The movable body P4300 has a contact portion P4342 that can come into contact with the regulating means P4420,
The regulating means P4420 limits the distance that the movable body P4300 can move in the left-right direction within a predetermined range by coming into contact with the contact portion P4342,
The predetermined range becomes narrower as the movable body P4300 moves from the presentation position to the standby position.

Such a configuration can prevent movable body P4300 from contacting other members. That is, even if an impact is applied to the game machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, the regulating means P4420 can restrict the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left and right direction within a predetermined range, and the movable body P4300 can It is possible to prevent contact with other members of the board P1100.

Further, the width of the second range R2 in the regulating means P4420 is made narrower than the width of the first range R1. As a result, when the movable body P4300 is located at the standby position, the movement of the movable body P4300 is restricted within a relatively narrow range, thereby securing a space for placing other members around the regulating means P4420. In addition, by widening the movable range of the movable body P4300 in the left and right direction at the performance position, it is possible to provide a variety of performance modes.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, the technology of a gaming machine including a movable accessory (movable body) is well known. For example, as described in JP-A No. 2010-11934.

JP-A No. 2010-11934 discloses a gaming machine that includes a movable accessory and a box-shaped accessory storage case that can accommodate the movable accessory, and that can store the movable accessory in the accessory storage case. is disclosed.

However, in such a game machine, if a shock is applied to the game machine or an external force is applied to the movable accessory, there is a risk that it will come into contact with the accessory storage case or other game components and be damaged. Ta.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the movable body from coming into contact with other members.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A movable body P4300 that can move between a standby position and a production position,
a movement control mechanism P4010 capable of controlling the movement of the movable body P4300;
regulating means P4420 regulating movement of the movable body P4300;
A gaming machine comprising:
The movement control mechanism P4010 is
an elevation movement control mechanism P4100 (first movement control means) capable of controlling movement from the standby position to the production position by controlling the movement of the movable body P4300 in the vertical direction;
a left-right movement control mechanism P4200 (second movement control means) capable of controlling the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left-right direction;
including;
The movable body P4300 has a contact portion P4342 that can come into contact with the regulating means P4420,
The regulating means P4420 can limit the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left and right direction by coming into contact with the contact portion P4342, and is formed closer to the production position than the standby position, and is formed closer to the production position than the standby position. A first wall portion P4421 capable of restricting movement in the direction within a first range R1, and a first wall portion P4421 formed closer to the standby position than the production position, restricting movement of the movable body P4300 in the left and right direction within the first range R1. a second wall portion P4422 that can be limited within a second range R2 having a width in the left-right direction smaller than R1; and a second wall portion P4422 that has a curved surface that is continuous with the first wall portion P4421 and the second wall portion P4422. 3 wall portion P4423.

Such a configuration can prevent movable body P4300 from contacting other members. That is, even if an impact is applied to the game machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, the regulating means P4420 can restrict the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left and right direction within a predetermined range, and the movable body P4300 can It is possible to prevent contact with other members of the board P1100.

Further, by forming the third wall portion P4423 into a curved shape, the inner surface of the third wall portion P4423 and the inner surface of the second wall portion P4422 can be made to be continuous so that no corners are formed. As a result, when the movable body P4300 moves between the performance position and the standby position, a shock is applied to the gaming machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, and the contact portion P4342 of the movable body P4300 is moved to the third wall. When abutting against P4423, the movement of the movable body P4300 can be smoothly guided by the third wall P4423.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, the technology of a gaming machine including a movable accessory (movable body) is well known. For example, as described in JP-A No. 2010-11934.

JP-A No. 2010-11934 discloses a gaming machine that includes a movable accessory and a box-shaped accessory storage case that can accommodate the movable accessory, and that can store the movable accessory in the accessory storage case. is disclosed.

However, in such a game machine, if a shock is applied to the game machine or an external force is applied to the movable accessory, there is a risk that it will come into contact with the accessory storage case or other game components and be damaged. Ta.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the movable body from coming into contact with other members.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A movable body P4300 that can move between a standby position and a production position,
a movement control mechanism P4010 capable of controlling the movement of the movable body P4300;
regulating means P4420 regulating movement of the movable body P4300;
A gaming machine comprising:
The movement control mechanism P4010 is
an elevation movement control mechanism P4100 (first movement control means) capable of controlling movement from the standby position to the production position by controlling the movement of the movable body P4300 in the vertical direction (first direction);
a left-right movement control mechanism P4200 (second movement control means) capable of controlling the movement of the movable body P4300 in a left-right direction (second direction) different from the direction of movement control by the elevation movement control mechanism P4100;
The movable body P4300 has a contact part P4342 that can come into contact with the regulating means P4420, and a guide part P4324 to be guided in the left and right direction,
The regulating means P4420 limits the distance that the movable body P4300 can move in the left-right direction within a predetermined range by coming into contact with the contact portion P4342,
The contact portion P4342 is provided in the movable body P4300 at a position that does not overlap with the guide portion P4324.

Such a configuration can prevent movable body P4300 from contacting other members. That is, even if an impact is applied to the game machine or an external force is applied to the movable body P4300, the regulating means P4420 can restrict the movement of the movable body P4300 in the left and right direction within a predetermined range, and the movable body P4300 can It is possible to prevent contact with other members of the board P1100.

Further, it is possible to secure a range in which the movable body P4300 can move, and to effectively utilize the space below the guide portion P4324 when the movable body P4300 is located at the standby position. That is, by providing the abutting portion P4342 and the regulating means P4420 at a position that does not overlap with the guide portion P4324 (a position shifted in the left-right direction with respect to the guide portion P4324), it is not necessary to provide unnecessary movement space in the depth direction. is removed, and other members can be placed.

Note that the elevation movement control mechanism P4100 is one form of first movement control means.
Further, the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 is one form of second movement control means.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various changes can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, the movement control by the elevation movement control mechanism P4100 and the movement control by the left-right movement control mechanism P4200 are not limited to the above-mentioned aspects. For example, the order of each movement control may be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable body P4300 is controlled to move in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the movable body P4300 may be able to be controlled to move diagonally, and various directions can be adopted as the direction in which the movement of the movable body P4300 is controlled.

Further, in this embodiment, the movable body P4300 is modeled after a fighter jet, but the shape of the movable body P4300 is not limited to this, and various shapes can be adopted.

Below, a game board P1100 of a pachinko game machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be explained. Note that components that are the same or similar to those of the embodiments described above will be given the same names or the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

The pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment differs greatly from the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment in that it has an accessory different from the upper movable performance accessory P2000 and the rotating accessory P3000. Specifically, the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment includes a movable performance accessory P5000 (lower accessory device P5100, right accessory device P5200, and upper left accessory device P5300) and a performance device P6000 as accessories. Equipped with.

Below, the movable performance accessory P5000 according to this embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 192 to 204.

Note that in FIG. 195, illustration of the accessory decoration P5111 is omitted for convenience. Further, in FIG. 197, illustration of the base member P5130 is omitted for convenience. Further, in FIG. 201 (and FIGS. 205 to 207 described later), illustration of the link arm P5120 and the base member P5130 is omitted for convenience. Further, in FIGS. 202 to 204, illustration of the accessory decoration P5111 is omitted for convenience.

As described above, the movable performance accessory P5000 shown in FIG. 192 includes the lower accessory device P5100, the right accessory device P5200, and the upper left accessory device P5300.

[Lower accessory device P5100]
First, the configuration of the lower accessory device P5100 will be explained.

The lower accessory device P5100 shown in FIGS. 192 to 198 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at appropriate timing. The lower accessory device P5100 is provided at the lower part of the game board P1100 with its longitudinal direction facing the left-right direction. The lower accessory device P5100 includes a lower accessory P5110, a link arm P5120, a base member P5130, a crank gear P5140, a motor gear P5150, a rotary drive motor P5160, a cover member P5170, and a screw P5180. Although the details will be described later, the lower accessory device P5100 is formed so that the lower accessory P5110 can be displaced between a standby position and a production position, but in the following, the lower accessory P5110 is in the standby position. The explanation will be based on the condition.

The lower accessory P5110 shown in FIGS. 193 to 200 and 202 performs effects by moving. The lower accessory P5110 includes an accessory decoration body P5111, an accessory illumination board P5112, a rear cover P5113, and an accessory control arm P5114.

The accessory decoration P5111 shown in FIGS. 194, 200, etc. constitutes the front part of the lower accessory P5110, and is a part that is visually recognized by the player. The accessory decoration P5111 is made of a light-transmitting material (lens). The ornamental object P5111 is provided with its longitudinal direction oriented substantially in the left-right direction (more specifically, slanted slightly to the right). The accessory decoration P5111 is decorated with appropriate decorations.

The accessory illumination board P5112 shown in FIGS. 195 and 200 is provided so that its board surface is oriented in the front-rear direction and its longitudinal direction is slightly downward to the right. The accessory illumination board P5112 is provided behind the accessory decoration body P5111. A plurality of LEDPs 5112a are provided on the front surface of the accessory illumination board P5112 over substantially the entire area of the accessory illumination board P5112. By causing the LEDP5112a to emit light, it is possible to irradiate light to the front of the accessory illumination board P5112. By irradiating light from the LEDP5112a of the accessory illumination board P5112, the entire accessory decoration body P5111 can be illuminated.

The rear cover P5113 shown in FIGS. 195 to 200 and 202 is a part that constitutes the rear part of the lower accessory P5110. The rear cover P5113 is provided behind the accessory illumination board P5112, and supports the accessory illumination board P5112. The rear cover P5113 includes a rear cover main body P5113A, an arm portion P5113B, a first boss portion P5113a, a second boss portion P5113b, a third boss portion P5113c, and a fourth boss portion P5113d.

The rear cover main body P5113A shown in FIGS. 200 and 202 constitutes the main structure of the rear cover P5113. The rear cover main body P5113A is provided with its longitudinal direction facing the left-right direction.

The arm portion P5113B shown in FIGS. 200 and 202 is formed to extend downward from approximately the left and right center of the rear cover body P5113A.

The first boss portion P5113a shown in FIGS. 198 to 200 and 202 is inserted into a first long hole P5122 of a link arm P5120, which will be described later, and a first control hole P5131 of a base member P5130, which will be described later. The first boss portion P5113a is formed to protrude rearward from the left side of the rear cover main body P5113A. The first boss portion P5113a is formed in a cylindrical shape with its axis directed in the front-rear direction.

The second boss portion P5113b shown in FIGS. 198 to 200 and 202 is inserted into a second control hole P5132 of a base member P5130, which will be described later. The second boss portion P5113b is formed to protrude rearward from the upper and lower middle portions of the arm portion P5113B. The second boss portion P5113b is formed in a cylindrical shape with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The second boss portion P5113b is provided on the lower right side of the first boss portion P5113a.

The third boss portion P5113c shown in FIGS. 199, 200, and 202 is inserted into a rotation shaft hole P5114a of an accessory control arm P5114, which will be described later. The third boss portion P5113c is formed to protrude rearward from approximately the center of the rear cover main body P5113A. The third boss portion P5113c is formed in a cylindrical shape with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The third boss portion P5113c is provided to the right of the first boss portion P5113a and above the second boss portion P5113b.

The fourth boss portion P5113d shown in FIGS. 199, 200, and 202 is inserted into a control hole P5114b of an accessory control arm P5114, which will be described later. The fourth boss portion P5113d is formed to protrude rearward from the right portion of the rear cover main body P5113A. The fourth boss portion P5113d is formed in a cylindrical shape with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The fourth boss portion P5113d is provided to the right and below the third boss portion P5113c (and the first boss portion P5113a) and above the second boss portion P5113b.

The accessory control arm P5114 shown in FIGS. 197 to 200 and 202 is for smoothly moving the lower accessory P5110. The accessory control arm P5114 is provided behind the rear cover P5113. The accessory control arm P5114 includes a rotation shaft hole P5114a, a control hole P5114b, and a boss portion P5114c.

The rotation shaft hole P5114a shown in FIGS. 199, 200, and 202 is provided on the left side of the accessory control arm P5114. The rotation shaft hole P5114a is formed so as to penetrate the accessory control arm P5114 in the front-rear direction. A third boss portion P5113c of the rear cover P5113 is inserted into the rotation shaft hole P5114a (see FIG. 200).

The control hole P5114b shown in FIGS. 199, 200, and 202 is formed in an arc shape (partially annular shape) centered on the rotation shaft hole P5114a when viewed from the rear. The control hole P5114b is formed to penetrate the accessory control arm P5114 in the front-rear direction. The control hole P5114b is provided on the right side of the rotation shaft hole P5114a. A fourth boss portion P5113d of the rear cover P5113 is inserted into the control hole P5114b (see FIGS. 200 and 202).

The boss portion P5114c shown in FIGS. 199, 200, and 202 is inserted into a second control hole P5132 of a base member P5130, which will be described later. The boss portion P5114c is formed to protrude rearward from the right side of the accessory control arm P5114. The boss portion P5114c is provided to the right and below the rotation shaft hole P5114a and the control hole P5114b.

In this way, the accessory control arm P5114 is rotatably provided with respect to the rear cover P5113 about the axis of the third boss portion P5113c inserted into the rotation shaft hole P5114a.

The link arm P5120 shown in FIGS. 194, 195, 197 to 199 and 202 transmits the driving force to the lower accessory P5110. The link arm P5120 is provided with its longitudinal direction facing substantially in the vertical direction. The link arm P5120 is provided at the rear of the left part of the lower accessory P5110. The link arm P5120 includes a rotation axis P5121, a first elongated hole P5122, and a second elongated hole P5123.

A rotation axis P5121 shown in FIGS. 197 to 199 and FIG. 202 is the center of rotation of the link arm P5120. The rotation shaft P5121 is formed to protrude rearward from the lower part of the link arm P5120. The rotation shaft P5121 is formed in a cylindrical shape with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The rotation shaft P5121 includes a through hole P5121a.

A shaft P5133 provided in a base member P5130, which will be described later, is inserted through the through hole P5121a shown in FIGS. 198 and 199. The through hole P5121a is formed at the center of the rotation axis P5121 so as to penetrate the link arm P5120 in the front-rear direction.

The first long hole P5122 shown in FIGS. 197 to 199 and FIG. 202 is a long hole that extends vertically in the upper part of the link arm P5120. The first elongated hole P5122 is formed to penetrate the link arm P5120 in the front-rear direction. The first boss portion P5113a of the rear cover P5113 is inserted into the first elongated hole P5122 (see FIGS. 198 and 202).

The second elongated hole P5123 shown in FIGS. 197 to 199 and FIG. 202 is through which a crank portion P5142 of a crank gear P5140, which will be described later, is inserted. The second elongated hole P5123 is an elongated hole that extends substantially vertically at the lower part of the link arm P5120. More specifically, the second elongated hole P5123 is formed so that its upper part is slightly inclined to the left. The second elongated hole P5123 is formed to penetrate the link arm P5120 in the front-rear direction. The second elongated hole P5123 is provided below the first elongated hole P5122.

The base member P5130 shown in FIGS. 194 to 196 and 198 constitutes the rear part of the lower accessory device P5100. The base member P5130 is provided with its longitudinal direction facing the left-right direction. The base member P5130 includes a first control hole P5131, a second control hole P5132, and a shaft P5133.

The first control hole P5131 shown in FIGS. 196, 198, and 202 is a long hole formed approximately in the center of the base member P5130 in the left-right direction. The first control hole P5131 is formed in a straight line with its longitudinal direction (stretching direction) oriented substantially in the left-right direction. More specifically, the first control hole P5131 is formed slightly downward to the right. The first control hole P5131 is formed to penetrate the base member P5130 back and forth. The first boss portion P5113a of the rear cover P5113 is inserted into the first control hole P5131 (see FIGS. 198 and 202).

The second control hole P5132 shown in FIG. 196, FIG. 198, and FIG. 202 is formed in a circular arc shape downward to the left in rear view. The second control hole P5132 is formed such that its right end (upper end) is located to the right and above the first control hole P5131. The second control hole P5132 is formed so that its left end (lower end) is located below the first control hole P5131 and between the right end and left end of the first control hole P5131 in the left-right direction. The second boss portion P5113b of the rear cover P5113 is inserted into the second control hole P5132. Further, the boss portion P5114c of the accessory control arm P5114 is inserted into the second control hole P5132 (see FIGS. 196 and 202).

The shaft P5133 shown in FIGS. 195 and 198 is formed in a cylindrical shape. The shaft P5133 is provided with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The shaft P5133 is fitted into the base member P5130 so as to protrude forward from the base member P5130. The shaft P5133 is inserted into the through hole P5121a of the rotation shaft P5121 of the link arm P5120 (see FIG. 198).

In this way, the base member P5130 supports the link arm P5120 so as to be able to swing left and right about the axis of the shaft P5133.

A crank gear P5140 shown in FIGS. 195, 197 to 199, and 202 transmits driving force to the link arm P5120. Crank gear P5140 is provided with its axis oriented in the front-rear direction. The crank gear P5140 includes a gear portion P5141 and a crank portion P5142.

A gear portion P5141 shown in FIGS. 199 and 201 is a portion that meshes with a motor gear P5150, which will be described later. The gear portion P5141 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and is provided with teeth on its outer peripheral surface. The gear portion P5141 is provided on the right side of the crank gear P5140 with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The gear portion P5141 includes a through hole P5141a.

A shaft portion P5173 of a cover member P5170, which will be described later, is inserted through the through hole P5141a shown in FIGS. 201 and 202. The through hole P5141a is provided on the right side of the crank gear P5140 (in the center of the gear portion P5141). The through hole P5141a is formed so as to penetrate the gear portion P5141 back and forth.

The crank portion P5142 shown in FIG. 202 is formed to protrude rearward from the left side of the crank gear P5140. The crank portion P5142 is provided at the lower left of the through hole P5141a. The crank portion P5142 is inserted into the second elongated hole P5123 of the link arm P5120.

Motor gear P5150 shown in FIGS. 197 to 199 and FIG. 202 transmits driving force to crank gear P5140. Motor gear P5150 is provided on the lower right side of crank gear P5140 with its axis oriented in the front-rear direction. Motor gear P5150 is provided to mesh with gear portion P5141 of crank gear P5140.

A rotary drive motor P5160 shown in FIGS. 193 to 195 and 198 rotates a motor gear P5150. Rotary drive motor P5160 is provided in front of motor gear P5150 with output shaft P5161 facing rearward. A motor gear P5150 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft P5161. Rotary drive motor P5160 is fixed to cover member P5170, which will be described later.

The cover member P5170 shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, FIG. 197, FIG. 198, and FIG. 201 constitutes the front part of the lower accessory device P5100. The cover member P5170 is provided with its longitudinal direction facing the left-right direction. The cover member P5170 is provided to cover the lower part of the base member P5130 from the front, and is fixed to the base member P5130. The cover member P5170 includes a cover body P5171, a bearing portion P5172, a shaft portion P5173, a screw hole P5174, and a rib P5175.

A cover main body P5171 shown in FIGS. 198 and 201 constitutes the main structure of the cover member P5170. The cover main body P5171 is provided with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction and the longitudinal direction facing in the left-right direction.

A bearing portion P5172 shown in FIG. 198 serves as a bearing for a shaft P5133 provided on a base member P5130. The bearing portion P5172 is formed in a cylindrical shape that protrudes rearward from the cover body P5171. The bearing portion P5172 is provided at a position corresponding to the shaft P5133 provided on the base member P5130, and the shaft P5133 is fitted onto the inner peripheral surface side of the bearing portion P5172.

The shaft portion P5173 shown in FIGS. 198 and 201 is formed in a cylindrical shape. The shaft portion P5173 is provided with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion P5173 is formed to protrude rearward from the inner bottom surface P5171a (see FIG. 201) of the cover body P5171. The shaft portion P5173 is integrally molded with the cover body P5171. The shaft portion P5173 is inserted into the through hole P5141a of the crank gear P5140. At this time, the crank gear P5140 is inserted into the shaft portion P5173 such that the rear surface P5140a of the crank gear P5140 is located forward of the top (rear end portion) of the shaft portion P5173.

A screw hole P5174 shown in FIG. 201 is into which a screw P5180, which will be described later, is inserted. The screw hole P5174 is formed at the center of the shaft portion P5173 in rear view. A female threaded portion is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174. The screw hole P5174 is formed to extend forward from the rear end of the shaft portion P5173. A part of the screw hole P5174 is formed in the cover body P5171. More specifically, the screw hole P5174 is formed to extend from the rear end of the shaft portion P5173 to the front of the inner bottom surface P5171a of the cover main body P5171 and to the rear of the outer bottom surface P5171b of the cover main body P5171. . That is, the screw hole P5174 is formed extending from the shaft portion P5173 to the cover body P5171.

The rib P5175 shown in FIGS. 198 and 201 is formed to protrude rearward from the periphery of the shaft portion P5173. The rib P5175 is formed in an annular shape centered on the axis of the shaft portion P5173 when viewed from the rear. The height of the rib P5175 is formed to be lower than the height of the shaft portion P5173. The rib P5175 is provided so as to be able to come into contact with the front surface of the gear portion P5141.

A screw P5180 shown in FIGS. 198 and 201 rotatably fixes the crank gear P5140 to the cover member P5170. The screw P5180 includes a screw shaft portion P5181 and a screw head P5182.

A male thread portion is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the screw shaft portion P5181. The screw shaft portion P5181 is inserted into the screw hole P5174 and screwed into the screw hole P5174. The screw shaft portion P5181 is formed to have approximately the same length as the screw hole P5174.

As a result, the screw shaft portion P5181 is a portion of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 that is provided on the shaft portion P5173 (the rear part and the middle part of the front and back), and a portion of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 that is provided on the cover body P5171. (front part). That is, the screw shaft portion P5181 (screw P5180) is provided so as to span both the shaft portion P5173 and the cover body P5171. Further, the tip (front end) of the screw shaft portion P5181 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the screw hole P5174 (see FIG. 201).

The screw head P5182 is formed so that its diameter is larger than the diameter of the shaft portion P5173. The screw head P5182 is provided so as to come into contact with the tip (rear end) of the shaft portion P5173. At this time, a gap is provided between the screw head P5174a and the rear surface P5140a of the crank gear P5140.

The cover member P5170 and screw P5180 formed in this manner support (fix) the crank gear P5140 so as to be rotatable around the shaft portion P5173.

[Right accessory device P5200]
The right accessory device P5200 shown in FIG. 192 is provided on the right side of the game board P1100 with its longitudinal direction facing up and down. The configuration of the right accessory device P5200 is generally the same as that of the lower accessory device P5100, so a description thereof will be omitted.

[Top left accessory device P5300]
The upper left accessory device P5300 shown in FIG. 192 is provided at the upper left of the game board P1100 with its longitudinal direction facing substantially in the vertical direction. The configuration of the upper left accessory device P5300 is generally the same as the lower accessory device P5100, so a description thereof will be omitted.

[Operation of lower accessory device P5100 during production]
The operation of the lower accessory device P5100 when performing a performance will be described below with reference to FIGS. 202 to 204.

The lower accessory P5110 of the lower accessory device P5100 is movable between a state before performing the performance (see FIG. 202) and a state performing the performance (see FIG. 204). Below, the positions of the lower accessory P5110, link arm P5120, and crank gear P5140 in the state before performing the performance (see Figure 202) are referred to as "accessories standby position," "arm standby position," and "gear standby position," respectively. It is called. In addition, the positions of the lower accessory P5110, link arm P5120, and crank gear P5140 in the state where the performance is being performed (see Figure 204) are respectively referred to as "accessory performance position," "arm performance position," and "gear performance position." to be called.

In the accessory standby position shown in FIG. 202, most of the lower accessory P5110 is located behind the game board P1100, and only a portion is visible to the player.

When performing the performance, first, the rotary drive motor P5160 (see FIG. 198, etc.) is driven. As a result, motor gear P5150 fixed to output shaft P5161 of rotary drive motor P5160 rotates. Then, the crank gear P5140 that meshes with the motor gear P5150 (the crank gear P5140 in the gear standby position) rotates counterclockwise in rear view around the axis of the through hole P5141a (shaft portion P5173 of the cover member P5170).

Then, the crank portion P5142 of the crank gear P5140 moves substantially upward inside the second elongated hole P5123 of the link arm P5120 in the arm standby position. When the crank part P5142 presses the inner peripheral surface of the second elongated hole P5123, the link arm P5120 rotates counterclockwise in rear view about the axis of the rotation axis P5121 (shaft P5133 provided in the base member P5130). Rotate (see Figure 203).

Then, the first boss portion P5113a of the rear cover P5113 inserted into the first elongated hole P5122 of the link arm P5120 is pressed approximately to the right. In this way, the link arm P5120 transmits the driving force of the rotary drive motor P5160 to the lower accessory P5110 (rear cover P5113), so that the first boss portion P5113a of the lower accessory P5110 is connected to the first control hole P5131. Move inside along the extending direction of the first control hole P5131 (toward the lower right). Further, the second boss portion P5113b of the lower accessory P5110 moves inside the second control hole P5132 along the extending direction of the second control hole P5132 (toward the upper right). By doing so, the lower accessory P5110 that was in the accessory standby position moves to the upper right while changing the inclination so that the height of the right part of the lower accessory P5110 becomes higher (see FIG. 203).

When the lower accessory P5110 further moves to the upper right while changing its inclination, the accessory control arm P5114 moves the rear cover P5113 around the axis of the third boss portion P5113c of the rear cover P5113 inserted into the rotation shaft hole P5114a. Rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the back. The rotation of the accessory control arm P5114 with respect to the rear cover P5113 allows smooth movement of the lower accessory P5110. Relative movement of the accessory control arm P5114 with respect to the rear cover P5113 is regulated by the control hole P5114b and the fourth boss portion P5113d of the rear cover P5113.

In this way, the crank gear P5140 moves to the gear presentation position shown in FIG. 204, and the link arm P5120 moves to the arm presentation position shown in FIG. It can be moved to the desired position. Most of the lower accessory P5110 is visible to the player at the accessory presentation position shown in FIG. 204.

When finishing the performance, the lower accessory P5110, link arm P5120, and crank gear P5140 move from the standby position (accessories standby position, arm standby position, and gear standby position) to the performance position (accessories performance position, arm performance), respectively. position and gear production position). Thereby, the lower accessory P5110 moves from the accessory presentation position shown in FIG. 204 to the accessory waiting position shown in FIG. 202.

As described above, the link arm P5120 is displaced between the arm standby position (see FIG. 202) and the arm performance position (see FIG. 204) each time the performance is executed and finished, so the shaft of the cover member P5170 It repeats swinging around P5173 many times. In this case, a large force will be applied to the shaft portion P5173 due to the swinging of the link arm P5120.

Here, in this embodiment, the screw P5180 comes into contact with both the shaft portion P5173 and the cover body P5171 (astride both the shaft portion P5173 and the cover body P5171), and fixes the crank gear P5140. Therefore, the force applied to the root of the shaft portion P5173 can be received by the screw P5180. Therefore, the force applied to the shaft portion P5173 can be dispersed, and the shaft portion P5173 can be prevented from breaking from the base. Note that the shaft portion P5173 and the cover main body P5171 may be constructed as separate members and configured to be fixed together. Further, the shaft portion P5173 and the cover body P5171 may be configured to be fixed to separate members, respectively.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, the technology of gaming machines such as pachinko machines is well known. For example, as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-180975.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-180975 discloses a gaming machine in which a shaft part provided on a movable body is inserted into a bearing part provided on a predetermined member, so that a movable body can rotate with respect to a predetermined member. ing.

In such gaming machines, it is desired to further improve the interest for players.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
Crank gear P5140 (movable body),
a cover member P5170 (base part) to which the crank gear P5140 can be attached;
a shaft portion P5173 (receiving portion) provided on the cover member P5170 and to which the crank gear P5140 can be attached;
a screw P5180 (fixing means) capable of movably fixing the crank gear P5140 to the cover member P5170;
It is equipped with the following.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest of the player.
Further, in this embodiment, the crank gear P5140 is rotatably fixed to the shaft portion P5173. Then, by rotating the crank gear P5140, the lower accessory P5110 can be moved to a position (presentation position) where it can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation content.

Further, the shaft portion P5173 is a shaft portion P5173 that stands up from the cover member P5170 (cover main body P5171),
The crank gear P5140 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion P5173,
The screw P5180 comes into contact with both the shaft portion P5173 and the cover member P5170 to fix the crank gear P5140.

According to such a configuration, damage to the shaft portion P5173 can be suppressed by dispersing the force applied to the shaft portion P5173.
Further, in this embodiment, the screw shaft portion P5181 is connected to both a portion of the inner circumferential surface of the screw hole P5174 provided on the shaft portion P5173 and a portion of the inner circumferential surface of the screw hole P5174 provided on the cover body P5171. come into contact with Thereby, the force applied to the shaft portion P5173 can be dispersed, and in turn, it is possible to prevent the shaft portion P5173 from breaking from the base.

Further, the shaft portion P5173 is integrally molded with the cover member P5170 (cover main body P5171).

According to such a configuration, the number of parts can be reduced.
Further, in this embodiment, a screw hole P5174 is formed extending from the shaft portion P5173 to the cover member P5170 (cover main body P5171). Therefore, by integrally molding the shaft portion P5173 with the cover member P5170, it is possible to suppress misalignment between the portion of the screw hole P5174 on the cover body P5171 side and the portion of the screw hole P5174 on the shaft portion P5173 side. Therefore, damage to the shaft portion P5173 can be suppressed.

Further, the shaft portion P5173 includes a screw hole P5174 (hole portion) into which the screw P5180 can be inserted,
The crank gear P5140 is fixed to the cover member P5170 by inserting the screw P5180 into the screw hole P5174.

According to such a configuration, the crank gear P5140 can be easily fixed to the cover member P5170.
Further, in this embodiment, a screw hole P5174 is formed extending from the shaft portion P5173 to the cover member P5170 (cover main body P5171). By inserting the screw P5180 into the screw hole P5174 formed in this way, the screw P5180 covers the portion of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 that is provided on the shaft portion P5173, and the portion of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 that is provided on the shaft portion P5173. The crank gear P5140 can be easily fixed in a state in which it is in contact with both of the parts provided on the main body P5171.

Further, the hole is a screw hole P5174,
The screw P5180 is a screw inserted into the screw hole P5174, and the crank gear P5140 is fixed by the screw head P5182 of the screw P5180.

According to such a configuration, the crank gear P5140 can be easily fixed to the cover member P5170 by the screw head P5182 of the screw P5180.
Further, in this embodiment, the crank gear P5140 is inserted through the shaft portion P5173 such that the rear surface P5140a of the crank gear P5140 is located forward of the top (rear end portion) of the shaft portion P5173. Therefore, by the screw head P5182 coming into contact with the top (rear end) of the shaft portion P5173, the crank gear P5140 can be fixed in a rotatable state rather than in an inoperable state.
Further, in this embodiment, the rib P5175 is provided so as to be able to come into contact with the front surface of the gear portion P5141. Therefore, the position of the crank gear P5140 in the front-rear direction can be regulated by the screw head P5182 and the rib P5175. Further, by receiving the force from the crank gear P5140 by the rib P5175, the force (burden) applied to the shaft portion P5173 can be reduced.

Further, the screw hole P5174 is formed extending from the shaft portion P5173 to the cover member P5170 (cover main body P5171).

According to such a configuration, by inserting the screw P5180 into the screw hole P5174, the screw P5180 can be easily brought into contact with both the shaft portion P5173 and the cover body P5171.
Further, in this embodiment, the screw shaft portion P5181 is provided on both the portion of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 that is provided on the shaft portion P5173, and the portion of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 that is provided on the cover body P5171. At the same time, the tip (front end) of the screw shaft portion P5181 is provided so as to come into contact with the bottom surface of the screw hole P5174. Thereby, the space of the screw hole P5174 can be filled, and the force applied to the shaft portion P5173 can be received by both the outer peripheral surface and the bottom surface of the screw shaft portion P5181. Therefore, damage to the shaft portion P5173 can be suppressed.

Further, the crank gear P5140 is provided with a crank portion P5142 (crank portion) that is movable between a gear standby position (first position) shown in FIG. 202 and a gear presentation position (second position) shown in FIG. 204. It is a rotating gear.

According to such a configuration, by operating the crank gear P5140, other members can be operated by the crank portion P5142.
Further, in this embodiment, by rotating the motor gear P5150 by the rotary drive motor P5160, the crank gear P5140 can be displaced between the gear standby position (first position) and the gear production position (second position). .

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment can switch between the arm standby position (third position) shown in FIG. 202 and the arm production position (fourth position) shown in FIG. 204 by contacting the crank part P5142. It is provided with a movable link arm P5120 (second movable body).

According to such a configuration, by operating the crank gear P5140, the link arm P5120 can be operated by the crank portion P5142.
Further, in this embodiment, by displacing the crank gear P5140 between the gear standby position (first position) and the gear production position (second position), the link arm P5120 is moved to the arm standby position (third position). and the arm presentation position (fourth position).

Further, by contacting the link arm P5120, the link arm P5120 can be moved to the accessory waiting position (fifth position) shown in FIG. 202 and the accessory production position shown in FIG. 204 according to the operation of the link arm P5120. (Sixth position) A lower accessory P5110 (third movable body) that can be moved is provided.

According to such a configuration, by operating the link arm P5120, the lower accessory P5110 can be operated.
Further, in this embodiment, the first control hole P5131 of the base member P5130 is formed in a straight line, and the second control hole P5132 is formed in an arc shape. The first boss portion P5113a of the lower accessory P5110 is inserted into the first control hole P5131, and the second boss portion P5113b and the boss portion P5114c are inserted into the second control hole P5132. In this way, the operation of the lower accessory P5110 is controlled by the linear hole and the arcuate hole, so that the lower accessory P5110 moves to a position visible to the player while changing its inclination. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance.
In addition, in this embodiment, the lower accessory P5110 is provided with an accessory control arm P5114 rotatably provided with respect to the rear cover P5113, and the accessory control arm P5114 is connected to the rear cover P5113 (the second boss portion P5113b thereof). The second control hole P5132 of the base member P5130 is supported by the arm P5114 (the boss portion P5114c of the arm P5114). Thereby, it becomes possible to move the lower accessory P5110 smoothly along the second control hole P5132. In addition, since the lower accessory P5110 is supported at multiple points (first boss part P5113a, second boss part P5113b, and boss part P5114c) with respect to the first control hole P5131 and the second control hole P5132, , the stability of the posture of the lower accessory P5110 can be improved.

Further, the link arm P5120 is a swinging member that swings.

According to such a configuration, by operating the crank gear P5140, the link arm P5120 can be swung by the crank portion P5142.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the link arm P5120 moves from the arm standby position (see FIG. 202) to the arm production position (see FIG. 204), the lower accessory P5110 in the accessory standby position (see FIG. 202) side (a position that generally overlaps with the lower accessory P5110 in rear view). Therefore, there is no need to provide a new space for swinging the link arm P5120, so space can be saved.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various changes can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in this embodiment, the tip (front end) of the screw shaft P5181 is in contact with the bottom surface of the screw hole P5174, but the screw shaft P5181 is in contact with the shaft P5173 on the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174. If it is in contact with both the provided part and the part provided in the cover main body P5171 of the inner peripheral surface of the screw hole P5174 (if it is provided so as to span both the shaft part P5173 and the cover main body P5171), As shown in FIG. 205, it does not need to be in contact with the bottom surface of the screw hole P5174.

Further, in this embodiment, the screw hole P5174 of the shaft portion P5173 of the cover member P5170 is formed to extend to the front of the inner bottom surface P5171a of the cover main body P5171 and to the rear of the outer bottom surface P5171b of the cover main body P5171. However, as shown in FIG. 206, it may be formed to penetrate the cover body P5171 (to extend to the outer bottom surface P5171b of the cover body P5171). Thereby, the machining of the screw hole P5174 can be facilitated.

At this time, the screw P5180 may be provided so as to penetrate to the front of the outer bottom surface P5171b of the cover body P5171, as shown in FIG. 206. Thereby, the force applied to the shaft portion P5173 can be easily received by the screw P5180. Alternatively, even if the screw hole P5174 passes through the cover body P5171, the screw P5180 can be inserted to the front of the inner bottom surface P5171a of the cover body P5171 and to the outside of the cover body P5171, as shown in FIG. It may be provided so as to extend to the rear of the bottom surface P5171b.

As described above, in another example of this embodiment, the screw hole P5174 is provided to penetrate the cover member P5170.

According to such a configuration, processing of the screw hole P5174 can be facilitated.
In the example shown in FIG. 206, the screw P5180 is provided so as to penetrate to the front of the outer bottom surface P5171b of the cover body P5171. Thereby, the force applied to the shaft portion P5173 can be easily received by the screw P5180, and damage to the shaft portion P5173 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the fixing means (screw P5180) according to the present invention fixes the movable body (crank gear P5140) in a rotatable state relative to the shaft part (shaft part P5173). The movable body to be fixed by the fixing means is not limited to one that is rotatable, but may be one that is capable of arbitrary movement (for example, linear movement). For example, the fixing means according to the present invention can be applied to fixing the link arm P5120 and the crank portion P5142 of the crank gear P5140. Further, the fixing means according to the present invention can also be applied to fixing the base member P5130 and the lower accessory P5110.

[Production device P6000]
The production device P6000 according to this embodiment will be described below using FIGS. 192 and 208 to 233.

Note that in the drawings used in the following description (for example, FIG. 213), in order to clarify the outline of each member, the member may be appropriately colored for convenience.

The performance device P6000 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. The production device P6000 is installed on the game board P1100, as shown in FIG. 192. More specifically, the performance device P6000 is installed above the opening area 1d of the game board P1100. The performance device P6000 gives a visual impression to the player by controlling the movement of an opening/closing accessory P6300 and a decorative accessory P6600, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 208 to 213, the performance device P6000 includes a base part P6100, an opening/closing control means P6200, an opening/closing accessory P6300, a bullet control means P6400, a bullet accessory P6500, a decorative accessory P6600, and a fixed decorative part P6700. Be equipped.

The base part P6100 shown in FIGS. 208 to 214 is provided with an opening/closing control means P6200, an opening/closing accessory P6300, a bullet control means P6400, a bullet accessory P6500, a decorative accessory P6600, and a fixed decorative part P6700. A detailed explanation of the opening/closing control means P6200, the opening/closing accessory P6300, the bullet control means P6400, and the bullet accessory P6500 will be given later. The base portion P6100 includes a first base portion P6110, a second base portion P6120, and a third base portion P6130.

The first base portion P6110 shown in FIGS. 210, 211, 213, and 214 constitutes the front portion of the base portion P6100 (see FIG. 213). In addition, the first base part P6110 includes a part of the bullet control means P6400 (a drive transmission gear P6420 and a guide gear P6430, which will be described later), and an opening/closing accessory P6300 (a right logo accessory P6310 and a left logo accessory P6320, which will be described later). (See FIG. 211). The first base portion P6110 has a substantially box shape that opens toward the rear. The first base portion P6110 has an elongated shape in the left-right direction. The first base portion P6110 includes a bearing opening P6111, a right shaft bearing portion P6112, and a left shaft bearing portion P6113.

The bearing opening P6111 shown in FIG. 214 penetrates the first base portion P6110 in the front-rear direction. The bearing opening P6111 is located at substantially the center in the left-right direction and the substantially center in the vertical direction of the first base portion P6110. The bearing opening P6111 rotatably supports a guide gear P6430, which will be described later, about an axis facing in the front-rear direction.

The right shaft bearing portion P6112 shown in FIG. 211 penetrates the first base portion P6110 in the front-rear direction. The right shaft bearing portion P6112 is located at the upper part of the right side portion of the first base portion P6110. The right shaft bearing portion P6112 pivotally supports a right crankshaft P6312 (main shaft P6312a) of a right logo accessory P6310, which will be described later.

The left shaft bearing portion P6113 penetrates the first base portion P6110 in the front-rear direction. The left shaft bearing portion P6113 is located at the upper part of the left side portion of the first base portion P6110. The left shaft bearing portion P6113 pivotally supports a left crankshaft P6322 (main shaft P6322a) of a left logo accessory P6320, which will be described later.

The second base part P6120 shown in FIGS. 210, 213, and 214 covers the rear side of the first base part P6110 and accommodates the bullet accessory P6500. The second base part P6120 includes a cover part P6121 and a holder part P6122.

The cover part P6121 covers the rear opening of the first base part P6110. The cover portion P6121 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The cover portion P6121 has an elongated shape in the left-right direction. The cover part P6121 is fixed to the rear part of the first base part P6110.

The holder part P6122 accommodates the bullet accessory P6500. The holder portion P6122 has a substantially cylindrical shape with a bottom that opens forward. The holder part P6122 is formed to protrude rearward from the cover part P6121. The holder portion P6122 is located approximately at the center in the left-right direction and approximately at the center in the vertical direction of the cover portion P6121. Further, the holder portion P6122 is located at a position overlapping the bearing opening P6111 of the first base portion P6110 in a rear view. The holder part P6122 includes a bottom part P6122a and a side part P6122c.

The bottom portion P6122a shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 constitutes the bottom wall of the holder portion P6122. The bottom portion P6122a is located at the rear end of the holder portion P6122. The bottom portion P6122a includes a bearing portion P6122b.

The bearing portion P6122b supports a bullet accessory P6500 (a regulating portion P6530 described later) so as to be rotatable around an axis facing in the front-rear direction. The bearing portion P6122b penetrates the bottom portion P6122a in the front-rear direction.

The side portion P6122c constitutes a side wall of the holder portion P6122. The side portion P6122c includes an opening P6122d.

The opening P6122d is a portion that opens at the side P6122c. The opening P6122d has a shape obtained by cutting out the upper and lower parts of the side portion P6122c. The illustrated example shows an example in which the opening P6122d is provided near the bottom P6122a.

The third base portion P6130 shown in FIGS. 208 to 214 is provided with opening/closing control means P6200. The third base portion P6130 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The third base part P6130 is fixed to the rear part of the first base part P6110. The third base part P6130 is arranged behind the cover part P6121 of the second base part P6120 (see FIG. 213). The third base portion P6130 includes an opening P6131, a right guide pin through hole P6132, and a left guide pin through hole P6133.

The opening P6131 shown in FIGS. 212 and 214 penetrates the third base portion P6130 in the front-rear direction. The opening P6131 is located approximately at the center in the left-right direction and approximately at the center in the vertical direction of the third base portion P6130. The holder part P6122 is inserted into the opening P6131 from the front (see FIG. 214). Further, as described later, a front and rear sensor P6450 provided on the right side of the holder part P6122 in the cover part P6121 is inserted through the opening part P6131.

The right guide pin through hole P6132 passes through the third base portion P6130 in the front-rear direction. The right guide pin through hole P6132 is located at the upper part of the right side portion of the third base portion P6130. The right guide pin through hole P6132 is an arc-shaped elongated hole that slopes toward the lower right when viewed from the rear. A right crank guide pin P6312c of a right crankshaft P6312, which will be described later, is inserted through the right guide pin through hole P6132. The right guide pin through hole P6132 guides the movement of the right crank guide pin P6312c.

The left guide pin through hole P6133 passes through the third base portion P6130 in the front-rear direction. The left guide pin through hole P6133 is located at the upper part of the left side portion of the third base portion P6130. The left guide pin through hole P6133 is an arc-shaped elongated hole that slopes toward the lower right when viewed from the rear. A left crank guide pin P6322c of a left crankshaft P6322, which will be described later, is inserted through the left guide pin through hole P6133. The left guide pin through hole P6133 guides the movement of the left crank guide pin P6322c.

The opening/closing control means P6200 shown in FIGS. 210 and 212 controls the movement of the opening/closing accessory P6300 between the closed position shown in FIGS. 208 and 209 and the open position shown in FIGS. 215 and 216. Moreover, the opening/closing control means P6200 regulates the rotational movement of a bullet accessory P6500 (regulating part P6530), which will be described later. A detailed explanation of the opening/closing accessory P6300 will be given later.

The opening/closing control means P6200 controls the movement of the opening/closing accessory P6300 in response to a control signal from the production device control circuit 338 (control means). The opening/closing control means P6200 includes a first motor P6210, an output gear P6220, a guide portion P6230, a slide rack P6240, and a slide sensor P6250.

The first motor P6210 shown in FIG. 212 is a drive source for opening and closing the opening/closing accessory P6300. The first motor P6210 is provided on the left side of the front surface of the third base portion P6130. The first motor P6210 is provided such that the output shaft passes through the third base portion P6130 in the front and back directions and projects rearward.

Output gear P6220 takes out the driving force of first motor P6210. Output gear P6220 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft of first motor P6210. The slide rack P6240 slides in the left-right direction by the driving force transmitted via the output gear P6220. Note that a detailed explanation of the slide rack P6240 will be given later.

The guide portion P6230 shown in FIG. 212 guides the sliding of the slide rack P6240 in the left-right direction. The guide portion P6230 includes a right guide pin P6231 and a left guide pin P6232.

The right side guide pin P6231 guides the right side portion of the slide rack P6240. The right guide pin P6231 is inserted into a right guide hole P6242 of a slide rack P6240, which will be described later. The right guide pin P6231 projects rearward on the rear surface of the third base portion P6130. The right guide pin P6231 has a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The right guide pin P6231 is provided at the upper part of the right side portion of the third base portion P6130. A washer is provided at the rear end of the right guide pin P6231 to prevent it from falling off from the right guide hole P6242.

The left guide pin P6232 guides the left side portion of the slide rack P6240. The left guide pin P6232 is inserted into a left guide hole P6243 of a slide rack P6240, which will be described later. The left guide pin P6232 projects rearward on the rear surface of the third base portion P6130. The left guide pin P6232 has a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The left guide pin P6232 is provided approximately at the vertical center of the left side portion of the third base portion P6130. A washer is provided at the rear end of the left guide pin P6232 to prevent it from falling off from the left guide hole P6243.

The slide rack P6240 shown in FIG. 210, FIG. 212, FIG. 217, and FIG. P6530) is possible. The slide rack P6240 is in a closed state located on the left side in the sliding direction as shown in FIG. 212, an open/locked state located halfway in the sliding direction as shown in FIG. 217, and an open/unlocked state located on the right side in the sliding direction as shown in FIG. It is possible to slide into and out of the state. Note that detailed explanations of the closed state, open/locked state, and open/unlocked state will be given later.

The slide rack P6240 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The slide rack P6240 is arranged behind the third base part P6130. The slide rack P6240 includes a rack tooth portion P6241, a right side guide hole P6242, a left side guide hole P6243, a right side crank guide hole P6244, a left side crank guide hole P6245, an opening portion P6246, a lock portion P6247, and a detected portion P6248.

The rack tooth portion P6241 meshes with the output gear P6220. The rack tooth portion P6241 is located at the lower part of the left side portion of the slide rack P6240. The rotation (driving force) transmitted by the output gear P6220 is transmitted to the rack teeth P6241, thereby allowing the slide rack P6240 to move in the left-right direction.

The right guide pin P6231 is inserted through the right guide hole P6242. The right guide hole P6242 passes through the slide rack P6240 in the front-rear direction. The right guide hole P6242 has a long hole shape that is elongated in the left-right direction. The width dimension (vertical dimension) of the right guide hole P6242 is smaller than the outer diameter of the washer of the right guide pin P6231. The right guide hole P6242 is located at the upper part of the right side portion of the slide rack P6240.

The left guide hole P6243 is through which the left guide pin P6232 is inserted. The left guide hole P6243 passes through the slide rack P6240 in the front-rear direction. The left guide hole P6243 has a long hole shape that is elongated in the left-right direction. The width dimension (vertical dimension) of the left guide hole P6243 is smaller than the outer diameter of the washer of the left guide pin P6232. The left guide hole P6243 is located above the rack tooth portion P6241 in the left side portion of the slide rack P6240.

A right crank guide pin P6312c of a right crankshaft P6312, which will be described later, is inserted through the right crank guide hole P6244. The right crank guide hole P6244 passes through the slide rack P6240 in the front-rear direction.

The right crank guide hole P6244 is a long hole bent into a substantially S-shape when viewed from the rear. More specifically, the right side crank guide hole P6244 has a right side portion extending in the left-right direction, a center portion (slanted portion) extending diagonally downward to the left, and a left side portion extending in the left-right direction. There is. The right crank guide hole P6244 is located below the right guide hole P6242 in the right side portion of the slide rack P6240.

A left crank guide pin P6322c of a left crankshaft P6322, which will be described later, is inserted through the left crank guide hole P6245. The left crank guide hole P6245 passes through the slide rack P6240 in the front-rear direction.

The left crank guide hole P6245 is a long hole bent into a substantially S-shape when viewed from the rear. More specifically, the left side crank guide hole P6245 has a right side portion extending in the left-right direction, a center portion (slanted portion) extending diagonally downward to the left, and a left side portion extending in the left-right direction. There is. The left crank guide hole P6245 is located above the left guide hole P6243 in the left side portion of the slide rack P6240.

The opening P6246 is through which the holder part P6122 and the front and rear sensors P6450, which will be described later, are inserted. The opening P6246 passes through the slide rack P6240 in the front-rear direction. The opening P6246 has an elongated shape in the left-right direction. Further, the opening P6246 has a substantially circular shape in the middle in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. The opening P6246 is located at approximately the center in the left-right direction and approximately at the center in the vertical direction of the slide rack P6240.

The lock part P6247 locks a part of the operation of the bullet accessory P6500. Note that a detailed explanation of the operation of the bullet accessory P6500 will be described later. The lock portion P6247 projects rearward from the rear surface of the slide rack P6240. The lock portion P6247 has a shape that is elongated from side to side when viewed from the rear. A pair of lock portions P6247 are provided on both sides of the opening P6246. The lock portion P6247 is located approximately at the center in the left-right direction of the opening portion P6246.

A detected portion P6248 shown in FIG. 212 is a portion detected by a slide sensor P6250, which will be described later. The detected portion P6248 protrudes downward at the lower part of the slide rack P6240. The detected portion P6248 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The detected portion P6248 is located at the center of the slide rack P6240 in the left-right direction. The detected part P6248 includes a first detected part P6248a, a second detected part P6248b, and a third detected part P6248c.

The first detected portion P6248a constitutes the right side portion of the detected portion P6248.

The second detected portion P6248b constitutes a central portion in the left-right direction of the detected portion P6248. The lower end of the second detected portion P6248b is located above the first detected portion P6248a.

The third detected portion P6248c constitutes the left side portion of the detected portion P6248. The lower end of the third detected portion P6248c is located above the second detected portion P6248b.

The slide sensor P6250 is capable of detecting the detected portion P6248. The slide sensor P6250 is provided below the detected portion P6248. The slide sensor P6250 includes a first slide sensor P6251, a second slide sensor P6252, and a third slide sensor P6253.

The first slide sensor P6251 is capable of detecting the first detected portion P6248a. The first slide sensor P6251 detects the first detected portion P6248a when it overlaps with the first detected portion P6248a in rear view. The first slide sensor P6251 is arranged at a position (detectable position) overlapping with the first detected portion P6248a of the slide rack P6240 in the closed state shown in FIG. 212. In this embodiment, the first slide sensor P6251 is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the first detected portion P6248a of the slide rack P6240 in the closed state. Thereby, if the slide rack P6240 slides to the right from the closed state, the first slide sensor P6251 no longer overlaps with the first detected portion P6248a (becomes undetectable).

The second slide sensor P6252 is capable of detecting the second detected portion P6248b. The second slide sensor P6252 detects the second detected portion P6248b when it overlaps with the second detected portion P6248b in rear view. The second slide sensor P6252 is arranged at a position (detectable position) overlapping with the second detected portion P6248b of the slide rack P6240 in the closed state shown in FIG. 212. Further, the second slide sensor P6252 is located at a position where it no longer overlaps with the second detected portion P6248b when the slide rack P6240 in the closed state slides to the right and reaches the open/locked state shown in FIG. (position where it becomes undetectable). As a result, the second slide sensor P6252 can detect the second detected portion P6248b until just before the slide rack P6240 changes from the closed state to the open/locked state. The second detected portion P6248b becomes undetectable.

The third slide sensor P6253 is capable of detecting the third detected portion P6248c. The third slide sensor P6253 detects the third detected portion P6248c when it overlaps with the third detected portion P6248c in rear view. The third slide sensor P6253 is arranged at a position (detectable position) overlapping the third detected portion P6248c of the slide rack P6240 in the closed state shown in FIG. 212 and in the open/locked state shown in FIG. 217. Further, the third slide sensor P6253 detects the third detected portion P6248c when the slide rack P6240 in the open/unlocked state slides to the right and reaches the open/unlocked state shown in FIG. It is placed at a position where there is no overlap (a position where detection is impossible). As a result, the third slide sensor P6253 can detect the third detected portion P6248c until just before the slide rack P6240 changes from the closed state to the open/unlocked state, and the third slide sensor P6253 can detect the third detected part P6248c until just before the slide rack P6240 changes from the closed state to the open/unlocked state. In this case, the third detected portion P6248c cannot be detected.

As the first slide sensor P6251, the second slide sensor P6252, and the third slide sensor P6253, various sensors capable of detecting the detected portion P6248, such as a photo sensor, can be used.

The opening/closing accessory P6300 shown in FIGS. 208 to 213 is movable between a closed position and an open position under movement control by an opening/closing control means P6200. The opening/closing accessory P6300 includes a right logo accessory P6310 and a left logo accessory P6320.

The right side logo accessory P6310 constitutes the right side portion of the opening/closing accessory P6300. The right logo accessory P6310 is rotatably connected to the right side portion of the first base portion P6110 around an axis facing in the front-rear direction. The right logo accessory P6310 includes a right accessory main body P6311 and a right crankshaft P6312.

The right accessory main body P6311 shown in FIG. 213 gives a visual impression to the player through rotational movement. The right accessory main body P6311 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. A pattern imitating a logo is provided on the front side of the right accessory main body P6311.

The right crankshaft P6312 shown in FIG. 211 transmits the movement of the slide rack P6240 in the left-right direction to the right accessory main body P6311. The right crankshaft P6312 is rotatably supported by the first base portion P6110. The right crankshaft P6312 includes a main shaft P6312a, an arm P6312b, and a right crank guide pin P6312c.

The main shaft P6312a is inserted into the right shaft bearing portion P6112 of the first base portion P6110. The main shaft P6312a is rotatably supported by the right shaft bearing portion P6112 around an axis facing in the front-rear direction. The front end of the main shaft P6312a is fixed to the right accessory main body P6311.

The arm P6312b connects the main shaft P6312a and a right crank guide pin P6312c, which will be described later. The arm P6312b is formed to extend from the rear end of the main shaft P6312a in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (leftward in FIG. 211).

The right crank guide pin P6312c is inserted into the right guide pin through hole P6132 of the third base portion P6130 and the right crank guide hole P6244 of the slide rack P6240, as shown in FIG. 212. The right crank guide pin P6312c projects rearward from the tip of the arm P6312b (the end on the side opposite to the main shaft P6312a). The right crank guide pin P6312c has a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis directed in the front-rear direction.

A washer is provided at the rear end of the right crank guide pin P6312c to prevent it from falling off from the right crank guide hole P6244. The outer diameter of the washer is larger than the width dimension (dimension perpendicular to the longitudinal direction in rear view) of the right guide pin through hole P6132 and the right crank guide hole P6244.

The left side logo accessory P6320 constitutes the left side portion of the opening/closing accessory P6300. The left logo accessory P6320 is rotatably connected to the left side portion of the first base portion P6110 around an axis facing in the front-rear direction. The left logo accessory P6320 includes a left accessory main body P6321 and a left crankshaft P6322.

The left accessory main body P6321 shown in FIG. 213 gives a visual impression to the player through its rotational movement. The left accessory main body P6321 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. A pattern imitating a logo is provided on the front side of the left accessory main body P6321.

The left crankshaft P6322 shown in FIG. 211 transmits the movement of the slide rack P6240 in the left-right direction to the left accessory main body P6321. The left crankshaft P6322 is rotatably supported by the first base portion P6110. The left crankshaft P6322 includes a main shaft P6322a, an arm P6322b, and a left crank guide pin P6322c.

The main shaft P6322a is inserted through the left shaft bearing portion P6113 of the first base portion P6110. The main shaft P6322a is rotatably supported by the left shaft bearing portion P6113 around an axis facing in the front-rear direction. The front end of the main shaft P6322a is fixed to the left accessory main body P6321.

The arm P6322b connects the main shaft P6322a and a left crank guide pin P6322c, which will be described later. The arm P6322b is formed to extend from the rear end of the main shaft P6322a in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (leftward in FIG. 211).

The left crank guide pin P6322c is inserted into the left guide pin through hole P6133 of the third base portion P6130 and the left crank guide hole P6245 of the slide rack P6240. The left crank guide pin P6322c projects rearward from the tip of the arm P6322b (the end on the side opposite to the main shaft P6322a). The left crank guide pin P6322c has a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis directed in the front-rear direction.

A washer is provided at the rear end of the left crank guide pin P6322c to prevent it from falling off from the left crank guide hole P6245. The outer diameter of the washer is larger than the width dimension (dimension perpendicular to the longitudinal direction in rear view) of the left guide pin through hole P6133 and the left crank guide hole P6245.

Below, the closed position and open position of the opening/closing accessory P6300 as described above will be explained.

In the closed position, as shown in FIGS. 208 and 209, the right side logo accessory P6310 and the left side logo accessory P6320 touch the center part in the left and right direction (the bullet accessory P6500 described later) on the front surface of the first base part P6110, This is the position where it is covered when viewed from the front so that it is difficult for the player to see. In the closed position, the logos on the front sides of the right side logo accessory P6310 and the left side logo accessory P6320 are combined to display a continuous logo (letter) to create a specific meaning.

In the open position, as shown in FIGS. 215 and 216, the right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320 are located at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the first base portion P6110 (the portion where the bullet control means P6400 is located). This is the position where it is exposed when viewed from the front so that it can be seen by the player.

The right side logo accessory P6310 and the left side logo accessory P6320 are moved to the closed position and the open position by rotating around the axes of the main shaft P6312a and the main shaft P6322a as the slide rack P6240 of the opening/closing control means P6200 slides. Moving.

The right side logo accessory P6310 and the left side logo accessory P6320 are in the closed position when the slide rack P6240 is in the closed state. Further, the right side logo accessory P6310 and the left side logo accessory P6320 are in the open position when the slide rack P6240 is in the open/locked state and the open/unlocked state.

Below, the states of the production device P6000 in which the slide rack P6240 is in a closed state, an open/locked state, and an open/unlocked state will be explained using FIGS. 212, 217, and 218.

In the closed state shown in FIG. 212, the slide rack P6240 is located on the left side in the sliding direction. In the closed state, the opening/closing accessory P6300 (the right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320) is in the closed position.

In the closed state, the right guide pin P6231 and the left guide pin P6232 are located at the right end portions of the right guide hole P6242 and the left guide hole P6243. Further, in the closed state, the right crank guide pin P6312c and the left crank guide pin P6322c are located at the right end portions of the right crank guide hole P6244 and the left crank guide hole P6245.

Moreover, in the closed state, each of the first detected part P6248a, the second detected part P6248b, and the third detected part P6248c of the detected part P6248 is connected to the first slide sensor P6251 of the slide sensor P6250, It is located at a position that can be detected by the second slide sensor P6252 and the third slide sensor P6253.

In the open/locked state shown in FIG. 217, the slide rack P6240 is located halfway in the sliding direction. In the open/locked state, the opening/closing accessory P6300 (the right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320) is in the open position.

In the open/locked state, the right guide pin P6231 and the left guide pin P6232 are located halfway between the right guide hole P6242 and the left guide hole P6243 in the left-right direction. Furthermore, in the open/locked state, the right crank guide pin P6312c and the left crank guide pin P6322c are located at the left ends of the inclined portions of the right crank guide hole P6244 and the left crank guide hole P6245.

Moreover, in the open/locked state, the first detected part P6248a and the second detected part P6248b are located at a position where they cannot be detected by the first slide sensor P6251 and the second slide sensor P6252. Further, the third detected portion P6248c is located at a position where it can be detected by the third slide sensor P6253.

In the open/unlocked state shown in FIG. 218, the slide rack P6240 is located on the right side in the sliding direction. In the open/unlocked state, the opening/closing accessory P6300 (the right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320) is in the open position.

In the open/unlocked state, the right guide pin P6231 and the left guide pin P6232 are located at the left ends of the right guide hole P6242 and the left guide hole P6243. Further, in the closed state, the right crank guide pin P6312c and the left crank guide pin P6322c are located at the left ends of the right crank guide hole P6244 and the left crank guide hole P6245.

In addition, in the open/unlocked state, each of the first detected part P6248a, the second detected part P6248b, and the third detected part P6248c of the detected part P6248 is connected to the first slide of the slide sensor P6250. It is located at a position that cannot be detected by sensor P6251, second slide sensor P6252, and third slide sensor P6253.

The control means can determine the position of the slide rack P6240 based on information regarding the detection of the detected portion P6248 by the slide sensor P6250.

The bullet control means P6400 shown in FIGS. 211, 214, 225 to 227 moves the bullet accessory P6500 from the standby position shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 and from the standby position shown in FIGS. 219 and 220. It controls the performance position moved forward and the action of moving it forward. A detailed explanation of the bullet accessory P6500 will be given later. The bullet control means P6400 controls the movement of the bullet accessory P6500 in response to a control signal from the performance device control circuit 338 (control means). The bullet control means P6400 includes a second motor P6410, a drive transmission gear P6420, a guide gear P6430, a rotation sensor P6440, and a front-rear sensor P6450.

The second motor P6410 shown in FIG. 211 is a drive source for operating the bullet accessory P6500. The second motor P6410 is provided on the right side of the second base portion P6120 (not shown in FIG. 211). The second motor P6410 is provided such that the output shaft passes through the second base portion P6120 in the front and rear directions and projects forward.

The drive transmission gear P6420 takes out the driving force of the second motor P6410 and transmits the driving force to a guide gear P6430, which will be described later. The drive transmission gear P6420 includes an output gear P6421, a first gear P6422, a second gear P6423, and a third gear P6424.

The output gear P6421 takes out the driving force of the second motor P6410. Output gear P6421 is fixed to the front end of the output shaft of second motor P6410.

The first gear P6422 is disposed substantially to the left of the output gear P6421 and meshes with the output gear P6421. The first gear P6422 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the first base portion P6110 about an axis facing in the front-rear direction.

The second gear P6423 is disposed approximately to the upper left of the first gear P6422, and meshes with the first gear P6422. The second gear P6423 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the first base portion P6110 about an axis facing in the front-rear direction.

The third gear P6424 is disposed substantially to the lower left of the second gear P6423, and meshes with the second gear P6423. The third gear P6424 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the first base portion P6110 about an axis facing in the front-rear direction.

The guide gear P6430 shown in FIGS. 211, 214, 225 to 227 transmits the driving force transmitted via the drive transmission gear P6420 to the bullet accessory P6500. The guide gear P6430 is rotatably supported in a bearing opening P6111 of the first base portion P6110 about an axis facing in the front-rear direction. Guide gear P6430 has a substantially cylindrical shape. Guide gear P6430 is arranged with its opening direction facing the front-rear direction. Behind the guide gear P6430, cover parts P6121 of the second base part P6120 are provided so as to be slidable relative to each other (see FIG. 214). The guide gear P6430 includes a fitting part P6431, a gear part P6432, a protrusion P6433, and a detected part P6434.

The fitting part P6431 shown in FIGS. 225 to 227 is fitted into the bearing opening P6111 of the first base part P6110 so as to be rotatable about the axis facing in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 214). . Fitting portion P6431 constitutes a front portion of guide gear P6430.

The gear portion P6432 meshes with the third gear P6424. Gear portion P6432 is provided on the outer surface of the rear portion of guide gear P6430.

The protrusion P6433 protrudes from the inner surface of the guide gear P6430. A pair of protrusions P6433 are provided on the inner surface of the guide gear P6430. The protruding portion P6433 is provided on the inner surface of the fitting portion P6431.

The detected portion P6434 is detected by a rotation sensor P6440, which will be described later. The detected portion P6434 protrudes from the outer surface of the guide gear P6430. The detected portion P6434 has a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The detected portion P6434 is provided on the outer surface of the rear portion of the guide gear P6430.

The rotation sensor P6440 shown in FIG. 211 detects the detected portion P6434. Rotation sensor P6440 is arranged on the left side of guide gear P6430 on the rear surface of first base portion P6110. The rotation sensor P6440 is arranged to be able to detect the detected portion P6434 in a state where the bullet accessory P6500 is located at a lockable position described later. As the rotation sensor P6440, various sensors capable of detecting the detected portion P6434, such as a photo sensor, can be used.

The front and back sensor P6450 shown in FIG. 210 is capable of detecting the position of an outer spiral member P6510 of a bullet accessory P6500, which will be described later. The front/rear sensor P6450 has a lever portion (not shown) that detects rearward pressure. As described later, when the bullet accessory P6500 moves backward, the lever part is pressed by the bullet accessory P6500 (pressing part P6513a), and the front and rear sensor P6450 detects that the bullet accessory P6500 is at a predetermined front and back position (described later). It is possible to detect that the device is in the standby position). The front and rear sensor P6450 is provided on the right side of the holder part P6122 on the rear surface of the cover part P6121 of the second base part P6120.

The bullet accessory P6500 shown in FIGS. 214, 221 to 229 is movable between a standby position and a performance position under movement control by a bullet control means P6400. The bullet accessory P6500 has an elongated shape in the front-rear direction. The bullet accessory P6500 is capable of a straight motion of moving in the front-back direction (back-and-forth motion) and a rotational motion of rotating around an axis facing in the front-back direction (rotating motion). The bullet accessory P6500 includes an outer spiral member P6510, an inner spiral member P6520, a regulating part P6530, and a light emitting part P6540.

The outer spiral member P6510 shown in FIGS. 225, 226, 228, and 229 constitutes the outer portion of the bullet accessory P6500. The outer spiral member P6510 has an elongated shape in the front-rear direction. The outer spiral member P6510 has a hollow shape. The outer spiral member P6510 includes an outer body portion P6511, a projection portion P6512, a rear portion P6513, a bullet portion P6514, and a first spring P6515.

The outer body portion P6511 constitutes the body portion of the bullet accessory P6500. The outer body portion P6511 has a substantially cylindrical shape that opens in the front-rear direction. The outer body portion P6511 is arranged inside the guide gear P6430. The outer body portion P6511 includes an outer spiral groove portion P6511a and a front and rear groove portion P6511b.

The outer spiral groove portion P6511a shown in FIGS. 226(a), 228, and 229 is a spiral groove formed on the outer surface of the outer body portion P6511. The outer spiral groove portion P6511a is formed on the outer surface of the outer body portion P6511 over substantially the entire length in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, the outer spiral groove portion P6511a is formed into two parallel spiral grooves (double spiral groove). Further, in this embodiment, the outer spiral groove portion P6511a has a length that goes around the outer surface of the outer body portion P6511 approximately once. The length and other shapes of the outer spiral groove portion P6511a are appropriately set according to the operation of the bullet accessory P6500. As shown in FIG. 226(a), a pair of protrusions P6433 of a guide gear P6430 are engaged with the outer spiral groove P6511a.

The front and back groove portions P6511b shown in FIGS. 228 and 229 are linear grooves formed on the outer surface of the outer body portion P6511. The front-rear groove portion P6511b is formed on the outer surface of the outer trunk portion P6511 from the front end of the outer trunk portion P6511 to an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction. A pair of front and rear groove portions P6511b are provided on the outer surface of the outer body portion P6511. The front and rear groove portions P6511b have a contact surface P6511c.

The contact surface P6511c is a surface facing forward in the front-rear groove portion P6511b. The contact surface P6511c constitutes the rear end (terminus) of the front and rear groove portion P6511b.

The protrusion P6512 shown in FIGS. 226(b) and 229 protrudes from the inner surface of the outer trunk P6511. A pair of protrusions P6512 are provided on the inner surface of the outer trunk P6511. The protrusion P6512 is provided on the rear portion of the inner surface of the outer trunk P6511.

The rear part P6513 shown in FIG. 228 constitutes the rear part of the bullet accessory P6500. The rear portion P6513 is annular and opens in the front-rear direction. The rear portion P6513 is fixed to the rear end portion of the outer body portion P6511. The rear portion P6513 includes a pressing portion P6513a.

The pressing portion P6513a presses the lever portion of the front and rear sensor P6450. The pressing portion P6513a has a concave shape that opens toward the rear. The pressing portion P6513a is located on the right side of the rear portion P6513. The pressing portion P6513a presses the lever portion of the front and rear sensor P6450 in a state where the bullet accessory P6500 is located at the standby position.

The bullet part P6514 constitutes the front part of the bullet accessory P6500. The bullet portion P6514 is formed of a transparent member that can transmit light. The bullet portion P6514 includes a bullet body portion P6514a and a collar portion P6514b.

The bullet body portion P6514a constitutes the majority of the bullet portion P6514. The bullet body portion P6514a has a shape that resembles a bullet (warhead). Specifically, the bullet main body portion P6514a has a rear portion having a substantially cylindrical shape, and a front portion having a shape that becomes more pointed toward the front.

The collar portion P6514b constitutes the rear portion of the bullet portion P6514. The flange portion P6514b has a substantially disk shape with a diameter larger than that of the rear side portion of the bullet body portion P6514a. The outer diameter of the collar portion P6514b is larger than the outer diameter of the outer body portion P6511. The collar portion P6514b is provided at the tip of the outer body portion P6511.

The first spring P6515 is a spring fitted to the outer body portion P6511. The first spring P6515 constitutes a compression coil spring. One end (front end) of the first spring P6515 contacts the flange P6514b.

The inner spiral member P6520 shown in FIGS. 226(b), 228, and 229 can be accommodated inside the outer spiral member P6510. The inner spiral member P6520 has a substantially cylindrical shape. The inner spiral member P6520 has a hollow shape. The outer diameter of the inner spiral member P6520 is smaller than the inner diameter of the outer body portion P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510. The inner spiral member P6520 includes an inner spiral groove portion P6521.

The inner spiral groove portion P6521 is a spiral groove formed on the outer surface of the inner spiral member P6520. The inner spiral groove portion P6521 is formed over substantially the entire outer surface of the inner spiral member P6520 in the front-rear direction. The inner spiral groove portion P6521 spirals in the opposite direction to the outer spiral groove portion P6511a. In this embodiment, the inner spiral groove portion P6521 is formed into two parallel spiral grooves (double spiral groove). In this embodiment, the inner spiral groove portion P6521 has a length that extends approximately once around the outer surface of the inner spiral member P6520. The length and other shapes of the inner spiral groove portion P6521 are appropriately set according to the operation of the bullet accessory P6500. As shown in FIG. 226(b), the inner spiral groove portion P6521 is engaged with a pair of protrusions P6512 of the outer body portion P6511.

From FIG. 212 to FIG. 214, the regulating portion P6530 shown in FIG. 228 rotatably supports the bullet accessory P6500 (inner spiral member P6520) to the holder portion P6122 of the second base portion P6120, The rotational movement of accessory P6500 (inner spiral member P6520) can be regulated. The regulating portion P6530 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The regulating portion P6530 has a circular shape with the upper and lower portions cut out when viewed from the front. The regulating portion P6530 is fixed to the rear end portion of the inner spiral member P6520. The restriction portion P6530 includes a shaft portion P6531, a restriction piece portion P6532, and an opening portion P6533.

The shaft portion P6531 is a portion that is pivotally supported by the holder portion P6122 of the second base portion P6120 (see FIG. 214). The shaft portion P6531 has a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion P6531 is rotatably supported by a bearing portion P6122b of the bottom portion P6122a of the holder portion P6122 about an axis facing in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the inner spiral member P6520 is rotatably supported by the holder part P6122 of the second base part P6120 via the shaft part P6531 of the regulating part P6530.

The regulating piece portion P6532 is a portion that can regulate the rotational movement of the bullet accessory P6500. The regulating piece portion P6532 constitutes an upper end portion and a lower end portion of the regulating portion P6530. The regulating piece portion P6532 has a flat surface shape. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the regulating piece P6532 is exposed through the opening P6122d of the side P6122c of the holder P6122. That is, the regulating piece portion P6532 overlaps with the opening portion P6122d in plan view (bottom view). The regulation piece part P6532 comes into contact with the pair of lock parts P6247, thereby regulating the rotation of the regulation part P6530 (inner spiral member P6520).

The opening P6533 shown in FIG. 228 penetrates the restricting portion P6530 in the front-rear direction. In the illustrated example, the opening P6533 has a vertically elongated shape.

A light emitting section P6540 shown in FIG. 228 causes the bullet section P6514 to emit light. The light emitting part P6540 is provided on the bottom part P6122a of the holder part P6122 of the second base part P6120. The light emitting section P6540 emits light in response to a control signal from the control means. The light emitting section P6540 includes a substrate P6541 and an inner lens P6542.

The board P6541 is mounted with an appropriate light emitting means.

The inner lens P6542 guides the light from the light emitting means forward. In the illustrated example, the inner lens P6542 has a shape in which the center portion in the vertical and horizontal directions protrudes forward. The forwardly protruding portion of the inner lens P6542 is inserted into the opening P6533 of the regulating portion P6530.

The decorative accessory P6600 shown in FIGS. 221 to 225 and 227 is movable in accordance with the movement of the bullet accessory P6500. The decorative accessory P6600 has a two-layer laminated structure in the front-rear direction (two independent members (a first decorative accessory P6610 and a second decorative accessory P6620, which will be described later)), at least a part of which is mutually connected when viewed in the front-rear direction. (structures arranged in an overlapping manner). The decorative accessory P6600 includes a first decorative accessory P6610 and a second decorative accessory P6620.

The first decorative accessory P6610 constitutes the front layer (first layer) of the decorative accessory P6600. The first decorative accessory P6610 is fitted into the outer trunk P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510. The first decorative accessory P6610 is capable of forward and backward movement and rotational movement in conjunction with the movement of the bullet accessory P6500. The first decorative accessory P6610 includes a first decorative base portion P6611 and a first decorative portion P6612.

The first decorative base portion P6611 shown in FIGS. 225 and 227(c) is fitted into the outer body portion P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510. The first decorative base portion P6611 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The first decorative base portion P6611 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front. The first decorative base portion P6611 includes an opening portion P6611a, a projection portion P6611b, a spring receiving portion P6611c, a shaft portion P6611d, and a second spring P6611f.

The opening P6611a passes through the first decorative base portion P6611 in the front-rear direction. The inner diameter of the opening P6611a is larger than the outer diameter of the outer trunk P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510. Further, the inner diameter of the opening P6611a is smaller than the outer diameter of the collar P6514b of the bullet portion P6514. The outer body portion P6511 is inserted through the opening P6611a.

The protrusion P6611b protrudes from the inner surface of the opening P6611a. A pair of protrusions P6611b are provided on the inner surface of the opening P6611a. The protrusion P6611b is engaged with the front-rear groove P6511b of the outer spiral member P6510 (outer trunk P6511) so as to be relatively movable in the front-rear direction within the front-rear groove P6511b (see FIG. 230). Further, the protrusion P6611b is engaged with the front and rear grooves P6511b so as to be relatively immovable in the circumferential direction of the outer spiral member P6510.

The spring receiving portion P6611c receives the first spring P6515. The spring receiving portion P6611c has a shape concave toward the rear on the front surface of the first decorative base portion P6611. The spring receiving portion P6611c is provided around the opening P6611a. The other end (rear end) of the first spring P6515 comes into contact with the spring receiving portion P6611c.

The shaft portion P6611d projects to the rear of the first decorative base portion P6611. The shaft portion P6611d has a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. A plurality of shaft parts P6611d (three in this embodiment) are provided at intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer side of the first decorative base part P6611. The rear end portion of the shaft portion P6611d is provided with an enlarged diameter portion P6611e that is larger in diameter than other portions.

The second spring P6611f is a spring fitted to the shaft portion P6611d. The second spring P6611f constitutes a compression coil spring. One end (front end) of the second spring P6611f comes into contact with the rear surface of the first decorative base part P6611.

The first decorative part P6612 shown in FIGS. 221 and 223 constitutes the decoration in the first decorative accessory P6610. The first decorative portion P6612 has a shape imitating a vortex (spiral) centered on the bullet portion P6514. The first decorative portion P6612 is provided on the front surface of the first decorative base portion P6611. A plurality of first decorative parts P6612 are provided at intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer side of the first decorative base part P6611.

The second decorative accessory P6620 constitutes the rear layer (second layer) of the decorative accessory P6600. The second decorative accessory P6620 is fitted into the outer body portion P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510. The second decorative accessory P6620 is arranged behind the first decorative accessory P6610. The second decorative accessory P6620 is arranged so that at least a portion thereof overlaps with the first decorative accessory P6610 when viewed from the front. The second decorative accessory P6620 is capable of back-and-forth movement and rotational movement in conjunction with the movement of the first decorative accessory P6610. The second decorative accessory P6620 includes a second decorative base portion P6621 and a second decorative portion P6622.

The second decorative base portion P6621 shown in FIGS. 225 and 227(d) is supported by the outer body portion P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510 and is connected to the first decorative base portion P6611. . The second decorative base portion P6621 has a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The second decorative base portion P6621 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front. The outer diameter of the second decorative base portion P6621 is larger than the outer diameter of the first decorative base portion P6611. The second decorative base portion P6621 includes an opening portion P6621a and a shaft receiving portion P6621b.

The opening P6621a passes through the second decorative base portion P6621 in the front-rear direction. The inner diameter of the opening P6621a is larger than the outer diameter of the outer trunk P6511 of the outer spiral member P6510. The outer body portion P6511 is inserted through the opening P6621a.

The shaft receiving portion P6621b penetrates the second decorative base portion P6621 in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion P6611d (excluding the enlarged diameter portion P6611e) is inserted through the shaft receiving portion P6621b. The number of shaft receiving parts P6621b corresponds to the number of shaft parts P6611d (three in this embodiment). The inner diameter of the shaft receiving portion P6621b is smaller than the outer diameter of the enlarged diameter portion P6611e.

As shown in FIG. 230, the second decorative base part P6621 is connected to the first decorative base part P6611 via the shaft part P6611d. The other end (rear end) of the second spring P6611f abuts a portion around the shaft receiving portion P6621b on the front surface of the second decorative base portion P6621. Further, a portion around the shaft receiving portion P6621b on the rear surface of the second decorative base portion P6621 can come into contact with the enlarged diameter portion P6611e.

The second decorative part P6622 shown in FIGS. 221 and 223 constitutes the decoration in the second decorative accessory P6620. The second decorative portion P6622 has a shape imitating a vortex (spiral) centered on the bullet portion P6514. The second decorative portion P6622 is provided on the front surface of the second decorative base portion P6621. A plurality of second decorative parts P6622 are provided at intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer side of the second decorative base part P6621.

A fixed decoration part P6700 shown in FIG. 209 is a decoration fixed to the front surface of the base part P6100. The fixed decorative portion P6700 has a shape imitating a vortex (spiral) centered on the bullet portion P6514. The fixed decorative portion P6700 is arranged outside the second decorative portion P6622 when viewed from the front. A plurality of fixed decoration parts P6700 are provided at intervals from each other.

Below, the states of the above-mentioned bullet accessory P6500 and decorative accessory P6600 at the standby position and presentation position will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 208 to 210, 213, 214, 221, and 222, the standby position is the rearmost side of the movable range of the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 in the front-rear direction. This is the position of At the standby position, the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 are located behind the right logo accessory P6310 (right accessory main body P6311) and the left logo accessory P6320 (left accessory main body P6321). At the standby position, the bullet part P6514 of the bullet accessory P6500, the first decorative accessory P6610, and the second decorative accessory P6620 are in a state close to each other.

In the standby position, if the opening/closing accessory P6300 is in the closed position, the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 are covered by the opening/closing accessory P6300 when viewed from the front, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize them.

In addition, below, the position of the bullet accessory P6500 in the standby position will be referred to as the bullet accessory standby position, the position of the first decorative accessory P6610 in the standby position will be referred to as the first decorative accessory standby position, and the second decoration in the standby position. The position of accessory P6620 will be described as a second decorative accessory standby position.

As shown in FIGS. 214, 221, and 230(a), in the bullet accessory standby position, almost the entire inner spiral member P6520 is inside the outer spiral member P6510 (outer trunk P6511). be accommodated in.

As shown in FIGS. 214 and 230(a), the first decorative accessory P6610 is pushed rearward by the biasing force of the first spring P6515, so that the first decorative accessory P6610 is located at the first decorative accessory standby position. More specifically, the first decorative accessory P6610 is pressed by the flange portion P6514b of the bullet portion P6514 via the first spring P6515, so that the first decorative accessory P6610 is located at the first decorative accessory standby position. At this time, the rear surface of the first decorative accessory P6610 (first decorative base part P6611) comes into contact with the front surface of the second decorative base part P6621 of the second decorative accessory P6620, so that the first decoration Further movement of accessory P6610 to the rear is restricted. At the first decorative accessory standby position, the first spring P6515 is accommodated in the spring receiving part P6611c.

The second decorative accessory P6620 is pushed backward by the biasing force of the second spring P6611f, and is positioned at the second decorative accessory standby position. More specifically, the second decorative accessory P6620 is pressed against the first decorative base portion P6611 via the second spring P6611f, so that the second decorative accessory P6620 is located at the second decorative accessory standby position. At this time, the rear surface of the second decorative base portion P6621 of the second decorative accessory P6620 comes into contact with the front surface of the first base portion P6110, thereby preventing the second decorative accessory P6620 from further moving backward. Regulated.

As shown in FIGS. 219, 220, 223, and 224, the performance position is the most forward position of the range in which the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 can move in the front-rear direction. At the production position, the bullet part P6514 of the bullet accessory P6500 is located in front of the right logo accessory P6310 (right accessory main body P6311) and the left logo accessory P6320 (left accessory main body P6321). Moreover, at the performance position, the bullet part P6514 of the bullet accessory P6500, the first decorative accessory P6610, and the second decorative accessory P6620 are in a state separated from each other.

At the performance position, the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 move forward, making it possible to give a visual impression (impact) to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the standby position shown in FIG. 213, the front end of the first decorative accessory P6610 (first decorative part P6612) and the second decorative accessory P6620 (second decorative part P6622) The front end portions are generally aligned in the front and rear positions. Moreover, in the standby position, the front end of the first decorative accessory P6610 and the front end of the second decorative accessory P6620 are located behind the front end of the fixed decorative part P6700. In addition, in the performance position shown in FIG. 219, the front end of the first decorative accessory P6610 is located forward of the front end of the second decorative accessory P6620, and the front end of the second decorative accessory P6620 is , located forward of the front end of the fixed decorative part P6700. Thereby, it is possible to give the player the impression that the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620 are greatly protruding forward, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Below, the position of the bullet accessory P6500 in the production position will be referred to as the bullet accessory production position, the position of the first decorative accessory P6610 in the production position will be referred to as the first decorative accessory performance position, and the second decorative accessory in the production position. The position of P6620 will be referred to as the second decorative accessory production position.

As shown in FIGS. 220 and 231(b), the bullet accessory P6500 has a part other than the front part of the inner spiral member P6520 outside the outer spiral member P6510 (outer trunk P6511) at the bullet accessory production position. Located in

As shown in FIG. 231(b), the first decorative accessory P6610 moves forward with respect to the inner spiral member P6520 and is pushed backward by the biasing force of the first spring P6515. It is located in the position where decorative accessories are produced. More specifically, the first decorative accessory P6610 is pressed by the flange portion P6514b of the bullet portion P6514 via the first spring P6515, and is positioned at the first decorative accessory production position. At this time, the protruding part P6611b of the first decorative accessory P6610 (first decorative base part P6611) comes into contact with the contact surface P6511c of the front and rear groove part P6511b of the outer spiral member P6510 (outer body part P6511), Further movement of the first decorative accessory P6610 to the rear is restricted.

The second decorative accessory P6620 moves forward with respect to the inner spiral member P6520 and is pushed backward by the biasing force of the second spring P6611f, thereby being located at the second decorative accessory presentation position. More specifically, the second decorative accessory P6620 is pressed against the first decorative base portion P6611 via the second spring P6611f, so that the second decorative accessory P6620 is located at the second decorative accessory production position. At this time, the rear surface of the second decorative base part P6621 of the second decorative accessory P6620 comes into contact with the enlarged diameter part P6611e of the shaft part P6611d of the first decorative accessory P6610, so that the second decorative accessory Further backward movement of P6620 is restricted.

Below, the operation of the production device P6000 configured as described above will be explained. That is, the operation of the opening/closing accessory P6300 under the operation control of the opening/closing control means P6200 and the operation of the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 under the operation control of the bullet control means P6400 will be explained.

First, the operation of moving the opening/closing accessory P6300 from the closed position to the open position and moving the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 from the standby position to the production position will be described.

In the closed state, as shown in FIG. 212, the restriction part P6530 of the bullet accessory P6500 is located between the pair of lock parts P6247. In this state, the regulation piece P6532 comes into contact with the pair of locking parts P6247, thereby regulating the rotation of the regulation part P6530. This restricts the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520.

When the first motor P6210 is driven, the output gear P6220 shown in FIG. 212 rotates. As a result, the driving force of the first motor P6210 is transmitted through the rack teeth P6241 that mesh with the output gear P6220, and the slide rack P6240 moves to the right. The first motor P6210 is driven according to a control signal from the control means.

When the slide rack P6240 moves to the right, the right crank guide pin P6312c of the right logo accessory P6310 and the left crank guide pin P6322c of the left logo accessory P6320 are connected to the right crank guide hole P6244 of the slide rack P6240 and the left crank. It is guided along the guide hole P6245.

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 212 and 217, the right crank guide pin P6312c and the left crank guide pin P6322c are the inclined portions (portions extending diagonally downward to the left) of the right crank guide hole P6244 and the left crank guide hole P6245. It moves downwards guided by. Accordingly, the right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320 rotate counterclockwise in front view around the axes of the main shaft P6312a and the main shaft P6322a.

The control means stops driving the first motor P6210 when the slide rack P6240 enters the open/locked state shown in FIG. 217 due to rightward movement of the slide rack P6240. In this state, the right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320 are in the open position, allowing the bullet accessory P6500 to move back and forth.

In the open/locked state, a portion (right end portion) of the restriction portion P6530 of the bullet accessory P6500 is located between the pair of lock portions P6247. In this state, the rotation of the restricting portion P6530 (inner spiral member P6520) is restricted as in the case of the closed position.

When the second motor P6410 is driven, the output gear P6421 shown in FIG. 211 rotates. The rotation of output gear P6421 is transmitted to guide gear P6430 via first gear P6422, second gear P6423, and third gear P6424. The second motor P6410 is driven according to a control signal from the control means.

Here, as shown in FIG. 226(a), the protrusion P6433 of the guide gear P6430 is engaged with the outer spiral groove P6511a of the outer spiral member P6510. The rotation of the guide gear P6430 is converted into linear movement of the outer spiral member P6510 by the protrusion P6433 moving relatively in the outer spiral groove P6511a. As a result, the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward as the guide gear P6430 rotates.

Here, when the slide rack P6240 is in the open/locked state, the rotation of the restricting portion P6530 is restricted. This restricts the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520. That is, the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward while the inner spiral member P6520 is fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 226(b), the protrusion P6512 of the outer spiral member P6510 is engaged with the inner spiral groove P6521 of the inner spiral member P6520. As a result, as the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward, it is guided by the inner spiral groove portion P6521 and rotates around the rotation axis facing in the front-rear direction.

Here, as shown in FIG. 230(a), the protrusion P6611b of the first decorative accessory P6610 (first decorative base part P6611) is relative to the front and rear grooves P6511b of the outer spiral member P6510 in the circumferential direction. immovably engaged with. The rotation of the outer spiral member P6510 is transmitted to the first decorative accessory P6610 via the projection P6611b.

Further, the first decorative accessory P6610 is connected to the second decorative accessory P6620 (second decorative base portion P6621) via the shaft portion P6611d. The rotation of the first decorative accessory P6610 is transmitted to the second decorative accessory P6620 via the shaft portion P6611d.

From the above, the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620 rotate according to the operation of the outer spiral member P6510.

Further, when the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward, the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6611f expand as shown in FIG. 230(b). The first decorative accessory P6610 moves forward as the second spring P6611f expands. At this time, the protrusion P6611b of the first decorative accessory P6610 (first decorative base P6611) moves relatively within the front and rear grooves P6511b. Furthermore, when the first decorative accessory P6610 moves forward, the shaft portion P6611d moves forward within the shaft receiving portion P6621b of the second decorative accessory P6620 (second decorative base portion P6621). Move to.

When the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward by a predetermined distance, the contact surface P6511c of the front and rear groove portion P6511b comes into contact with the protrusion P6611b, as shown in FIG. 231(a). Further, the enlarged diameter portion P6611e of the shaft receiving portion P6621b comes into contact with the second decorative base portion P6621.

In this state, as the outer spiral member P6510 moves further forward, the protrusion P6611b is pressed against the contact surface P6511c. Thereby, the forward motion of the outer spiral member P6510 is transmitted to the first decorative accessory P6610, and the first decorative accessory P6610 moves forward. Further, in this state, as the first decorative accessory P6610 further moves forward, the second decorative base portion P6621 is pressed against the enlarged diameter portion P6611e. Thereby, the forward movement of the first decorative accessory P6610 is transmitted to the second decorative accessory P6620, and the second decorative accessory P6620 moves forward.

In addition, in the above description, for convenience, an example was given in which the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6611f extend at approximately the same timing, but the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6611f extend at the same timing. The timing is not limited to the above example. As for the timing at which each of the springs expands, various modes can be adopted depending on the spring constant of each spring, etc.

As shown in FIG. 231(b), if the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward until the protrusion P6512 is located at the front end of the inner spiral groove P6521, the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 are at the production position. Become. In this state, the bullet accessory P6500, the first decorative accessory P6610, and the second decorative accessory P6620 are located at the bullet accessory presentation position, the first decorative accessory presentation position, and the second decoration accessory presentation position, respectively. Located in

As shown in FIG. 232, the moving distance L1 of the bullet accessory P6500 in the front-rear direction is larger than the moving distance L2 of the first decorative accessory P6610 in the front-rear direction. Further, the moving distance L2 of the first decorative accessory P6610 in the front-back direction is larger than the moving distance L3 of the second decorative accessory P6620 in the front-back direction.

With the above configuration, it is possible to create a three-dimensional effect in which the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620 are spaced apart from each other in the front and back direction at the performance position, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. can.

The control means controls the operation of the bullet control means P6400 to move the bullet accessory P6500 to the production position, and then drives the first motor P6210 again so that the slide rack P6240 is in the open/unlocked state. . This moves the slide rack P6240 to the right.

Further, the control means stops driving the first motor P6210 when the slide rack P6240 is brought into the open/unlocked state due to rightward movement of the slide rack P6240.

In the open/unlocked state, as shown in FIG. 218, the restriction part P6530 of the bullet accessory P6500 is located to the left of the lock part P6247. In this state, the rotation restriction by the lock portion P6247 of the restriction portion P6530 is released. This allows rotation of the inner spiral member P6520.

When the second motor P6410 is driven in the open/unlocked state, the rotation of the outer spiral member P6510 is transmitted to the inner spiral member P6520 via the protrusion P6512 located at the front end of the inner spiral groove portion P6521. . As a result, the inner spiral member P6520 rotates as the outer spiral member P6510 rotates.

With the above configuration, the outer spiral member P6510, the first decorative accessory P6610, and the second decorative accessory P6620 can be rotated at the production position. That is, in a state where the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520 is restricted, further rotation of the outer spiral member P6510 is disabled in the production position where the protrusion P6512 of the outer spiral member P6510 is located at the front end of the inner spiral groove portion P6521. . On the other hand, if the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520 is allowed, the inner spiral member P6520 rotates as the outer spiral member P6510 rotates, and the outer spiral member P6510, the first decorative accessory P6610, and the second Rotation operation of the decorative accessory P6620 becomes possible.

Next, the operation of moving the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 at the production position to the standby position and moving the opening/closing accessory P6300 from the open position to the closed position will be described.

First, the control means stops driving the second motor P6410 so that the rotational position of the bullet accessory P6500 stops at the lockable position. Here, the lockable position is the rotational position of the bullet accessory P6500 in which the rotation of the regulating part P6530 can be regulated by the slide rack P6240 in the open/locked state and the closed state, as shown in FIGS. 212 and 218. . In the lockable position, the upper and lower surfaces of the upper and lower regulating piece parts P6532 of the regulating part P6530 face upward and downward, respectively. When the bullet accessory P6500 reaches the lockable position, the rotation sensor P6440 detects the detected portion P6434. Thereby, the control means can detect that the bullet accessory P6500 has reached the lockable position.

If the first motor P6210 is driven to rotate in the opposite direction to the movement control described above, the output gear P6220 shown in FIG. 218 will rotate in the opposite direction. This moves the slide rack P6240 to the left.

The control means stops driving the first motor P6210 when the slide rack P6240 enters the open/locked state due to leftward movement of the slide rack P6240.

In the open/unlocked state, if the second motor P6410 is driven to rotate in the opposite direction to the movement control described above, the outer spiral member P6510 moves rearward as the guide gear P6430 rotates.

Here, in the open/unlocked state, as shown in FIG. 217, the rotation of the restricting portion P6530 is restricted. This restricts the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520. As a result, as the outer spiral member P6510 moves rearward, it is guided by the inner spiral groove portion P6521 and rotates around the rotation axis facing in the front-rear direction.

At this time, the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620 also rotate according to the rotation of the outer spiral member P6510.

When the outer spiral member P6510 moves backward, as shown in FIG. 233(a), the first decorative accessory P6610 is pressed backward via the contracting first spring P6515. Thereby, the backward movement of the outer spiral member P6510 is transmitted to the first decorative accessory P6610. At this time, the protrusion P6611b of the first decorative accessory P6610 (first decorative base P6611) moves relatively within the front and rear grooves P6511b.

Furthermore, when the outer spiral member P6510 moves rearward, the second decorative accessory P6620 is pressed rearward via the contracting second spring P6611f. Thereby, the backward movement of the first decorative accessory P6610 is transmitted to the second decorative accessory P6620. At this time, the shaft portion P6611d of the first decorative accessory P6610 moves relatively backward within the shaft receiving portion P6621b of the second decorative accessory P6620 (second decorative base portion P6621).

In addition, in the above description, for convenience, an example was given in which the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6611f contract at approximately the same timing, but the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6611f contract. The timing is not limited to the above example. As the timing at which each of the springs contracts, various modes can be adopted depending on the spring constant of each spring, etc.

If the outer spiral member P6510 moves backward until the protrusion P6512 is located at the rear end of the inner spiral groove P6521, the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 will be in the standby position. In this state, the bullet accessory P6500, the first decorative accessory P6610, and the second decorative accessory P6620 are moved to the bullet accessory waiting position, the first decorative accessory waiting position, and the second decorative accessory waiting position, respectively. Located in

When the bullet accessory P6500 is in the standby position, the lever portion of the front and rear sensor P6450 is pressed by the pressing portion P6513a. Thereby, the control means can detect that the bullet accessory P6500 has reached the standby position.

The control means stops driving the second motor P6410 when the bullet accessory P6500 reaches the standby position. The control means also drives the first motor P6210 to move the slide rack P6240 to the left.

At this time, the right crank guide pin P6312c and the left crank guide pin P6322c are guided by the inclined portions (portions extending diagonally downward to the left) of the right crank guide hole P6244 and the left crank guide hole P6245, and move upward. Accordingly, the right side logo accessory P6310 and the left side logo accessory P6320 rotate clockwise in front view around the axes of the main shaft P6312a and the main shaft P6322a.

The control means stops driving the first motor P6210 when the slide rack P6240 is brought into a closed state due to leftward movement of the slide rack P6240. In this state, the right logo accessory P6310 and the left logo accessory P6320 are in the closed position.

According to the performance device P6000 as described above, it is possible to provide various performance modes and improve the interest of the game. That is, the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 can be operated in a plurality of motion modes including a straight motion and a rotational motion.

Moreover, the bullet control means P6400 according to this embodiment enables the linear motion and rotational motion of the bullet accessory P6500 with the driving force of a single motor (second motor P6410). Thereby, the mechanism can be simplified. Furthermore, since the decorative accessory P6600 (the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620) is operated in conjunction with the operation of the bullet accessory P6500, the mechanism can be further simplified. I can do it.

Further, the bullet control means P6400 according to the present embodiment is capable of switching between a state in which rotation of the inner spiral member P6520 is restricted (open/locked state) and a state in which rotation is permitted (opened/unlocked state). This makes it possible to restrict the rotation of the inner spiral member P6520 and rotate the outer spiral member P6510 while moving it in the front-rear direction, and to rotate the outer spiral member P6510 without moving it in the front-rear direction. Become.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are well known. For example, as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-59498.

JP-A-2016-59498 discloses a gaming machine that includes a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance by rotating.

In such gaming machines, it is desired to further improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
Comprising a first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) and a second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610),
The first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) is movable from a first position (bullet accessory standby position) to a second position (bullet accessory production position),
The second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) is brought into contact with the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) as the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) moves. It is characterized by the fact that it operates by

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a variety of performance modes and improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) that operates in accordance with the operation of the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610),
The second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) and the third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) are characterized in that their operating distances are different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance mode more diverse.

Moreover, the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) is
When the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) moves from the first position (bullet accessory standby position) to the second position (bullet accessory presentation position), the first movable body ( It operates by contacting the first part (contact surface P6511c) of the bullet accessory P6500),
When the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) moves from the second position (bullet accessory presentation position) to the first position (bullet accessory standby position), the first movable body ( It is characterized in that it operates by coming into contact with the second part (first spring P6515) of the bullet accessory P6500).

With such a configuration, the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) can be operated using the operation of the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500).

Moreover, the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) is
When moving from the first position (bullet accessory standby position) to the second position (bullet accessory production position), it is possible to operate in a plurality of different operation modes (straight motion and rotational motion). This is a characteristic feature.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance mode more diverse.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) that operates in accordance with the operation of the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610),
The third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) is
Biasing means (first spring P6515 and second spring P6613f ) is in the third position (second decorative accessory standby position), and the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) moves from the first position (bullet accessory waiting position) to the third position (second decorative accessory standby position). In conjunction with the movement to the second position (bullet accessory performance position), the third position (second decorative accessory standby position) is moved to the fourth position (second decorative accessory performance position). It is characterized by:

With such a configuration, the third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) can be operated using the operation of the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500).

Moreover, the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) is
When moving from the third position (second decorative accessory standby position) to the fourth position (second decorative accessory production position), a plurality of different operation modes (back-and-forth movement and rotational movement) are performed. It is characterized by being operable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance mode more diverse.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) that operates in accordance with the operation of the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610),
The third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) is
The second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) moves from the third position (second decorative accessory standby position) to the fourth position (second decorative accessory production position). In particular, it is characterized in that it can operate in a plurality of different operating modes (back-and-forth motion and rotational motion).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance mode more diverse.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) that operates in accordance with the operation of the second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610),
The second movable body (first decorative accessory P6610) and the third movable body (second decorative accessory P6620) are characterized in that they have a laminated structure.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance mode more diverse.

Moreover, the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) is
When moving from the first position (bullet accessory standby position) to the second position (bullet accessory production position), it can operate in a plurality of different operation modes,
The plurality of motion modes are characterized in that they include at least a straight motion.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance mode more diverse.

Moreover, the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) is
When moving from the first position (bullet accessory standby position) to the second position (bullet accessory production position), it can operate in a plurality of different operation modes,
The plurality of motion modes are characterized in that they are a straight motion and a rotation motion.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance mode more diverse.

Further, the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500), when located at the second position (bullet accessory production position), performs a rotational motion but does not perform a straight movement (back-and-forth motion). That is.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance mode more diverse.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A spiral first groove (outer spiral groove P6511a) is provided on the outer surface of the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500),
The first groove (outside spiral groove P6511a) contacts the first protrusion (protrusion P6433) of the guide gear P6430 provided on the outside of the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500), and the guide gear It is characterized in that the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) moves in a straight line by transmitting the rotational driving force from the drive means (second motor P6410) to P6430.

Such a configuration enables a variety of performances using the rotational driving force of the driving means.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
An internal spiral member (inner spiral member P6520) is housed inside the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) and has a spiral second groove (inner spiral groove P6521) on its outer surface. Prepare,
A second protrusion (protrusion P6512) is provided on the inner surface of the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500),
With the straight movement of the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) in a state where the second protrusion (protrusion P6512) is in contact with the second groove (inner spiral groove P6521), the It is characterized in that the first movable body (bullet accessory P6500) rotates.

With such a configuration, it is possible to perform more diverse performances using the rotational driving force of the driving means (second motor P6410).

Note that the bullet accessory P6500 is one form of the first movable body.
Further, the outer spiral groove portion P6511a is one form of the first groove portion.
Further, the first spring P6515 is one form of biasing means.
Further, the inner spiral member P6520 is one form of an inner spiral member.
Further, the inner spiral groove portion P6521 is one form of a second groove portion.
Moreover, the first decorative accessory P6610 is one form of the second movable body.
Further, the second spring P6613f is one form of biasing means.
Moreover, the second decorative accessory P6620 is one form of the third movable body.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are well known. For example, as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-59498.

JP-A-2016-59498 discloses a gaming machine that includes a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance by rotating.

In such gaming machines, it is desired to further improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
Comprising a first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) and a second movable body (inner spiral member P6520),
When the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is between the first position (standby position) and the second position (direction position), the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) operable and the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) is inoperable,
When the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is in the second position (direction position), the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) and the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) ) can operate together.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a variety of performance modes and improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
comprising a locking means (slide rack P6240) that locks the operation of the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520),
While the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is between the first position (standby position) and the second position (direction position), the locking means (slide rack P6240) is in the first position. When in position 3 (open/locked state), the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is movable and the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) is inoperable,
When the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is in the second position (direction position) and the locking means is in the fourth position (open/unlocked state), the first movable body This is characterized in that both the body (outer spiral member P6510) and the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) are movable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to switch the operation of the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) using the locking means (slide rack P6240).

Further, the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is
It is characterized in that it is capable of performing a first action (rotating action) and a second action (straight moving action) that is different from the first action.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance mode more diverse.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
The second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) can perform the first operation (rotation operation),
The second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) is provided with a regulating member (regulating portion P6530) that regulates the first motion (rotational motion),
The locking means (slide rack P6240) comes into contact with the regulating member (regulating part P6530) in the third position (open/locked state), thereby locking the first movable body (inner spiral member P6520). It is characterized by locking the operation (rotation operation).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance mode more diverse.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
With the locking means (slide rack P6240) locking the first movement (rotation movement) of the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520), the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) It is characterized in that the second movement (straight movement movement) is possible.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance mode more diverse.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
The first motion is a rotational motion, and the second motion is a linear motion.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance mode more diverse.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
The first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is provided with a spiral first groove (outer spiral groove P6511a),
While in contact with the first groove (outer spiral groove P6511a), the rotational driving force from the drive means (second motor P6410) is transmitted to cause the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) to move in a straight line. It is characterized by being equipped with a guide gear P6430 that allows the vehicle to move.

Such a configuration enables a variety of performances using the rotational driving force of the driving means (second motor P6410).

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
The first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is provided with a protrusion P6611b,
The second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) is provided with a spiral second groove (inner spiral groove P6521),
With the projection P6611b and the second groove (inner spiral groove P6521) in contact with each other, the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is moved against the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520). is characterized in that the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) can rotate by moving in a straight line.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance mode more diverse.

Further, the second movable body (inner spiral member P6520) is connected to the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) when the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is in the first position (standby position). spiral member P6510), and when the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is in the second position (direction position), the outside of the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) It is characterized by being located in

With such a configuration, the first position (standby position) can be made compact.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
It is characterized by comprising a third movable body (opening/closing accessory P6300) that operates in conjunction with the operation of the locking means (slide rack P6240).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance mode more diverse.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A fourth movable body (decorative accessory) that moves as the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) moves from the first position (standby position) to the second position (direction position). P6600).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance mode more diverse.

Further, the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) is
A first action (rotating action) and a second action (straight moving action) different from the first action can be performed,
The fourth movable body (decorative accessory P6600) is characterized in that it can perform the first action and the second action.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance mode more diverse.

Moreover, the fourth movable body (decorative accessory P6600) is
As the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) moves from the first position (standby position) to the second position (direction position), the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510) It works when it comes into contact with the
to the first position (standby position) by the urging force of the urging means (first spring P6515 and second spring P6613f) according to the positional relationship with the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510). It is characterized by being energized.

With such a configuration, the fourth movable body (decorative accessory P6600) can be operated using the operation of the first movable body (outer spiral member P6510).

Note that the outer spiral member P6510 is one form of the first movable body.
Further, the outer spiral groove portion P6511a is one form of the first groove portion.
Further, the first spring P6515 is one form of biasing means.
Further, the inner spiral member P6520 is one form of the second movable body.
Further, the inner spiral groove portion P6521 is one form of a second groove portion.
Further, the regulating portion P6530 is one form of a regulating member.
Furthermore, the slide rack P6240 is one form of locking means.
Further, the opening/closing accessory P6300 is one form of a third movable body.
Moreover, the decorative accessory P6600 is one form of the fourth movable body.
Further, the second spring P6613f is one form of biasing means.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various changes can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in this embodiment, when moving the bullet accessory P6500 and the decorative accessory P6600 from the standby position to the production position, the first decorative accessory P6610 first moves forward as the second spring P6611f expands. However, when the outer spiral member P6510 moves forward by a predetermined distance, the protrusion P6611b is pressed against the contact surface P6511c and moves forward, but the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, the first decorative accessory P6610 may be configured to move forward throughout the entire range from the standby position to the performance position when the protrusion P6611b is pressed against the contact surface P6511c.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the standby position, the decorative accessory P6600 (the first decorative accessory P6610 and the second decorative accessory P6620) is moved backward via the first spring P6515 and the second spring P6611f. Although the configuration is such that the device is pressed against the device, it is not limited to this type of configuration. For example, in the standby position, the first decorative accessory P6610 may be directly pressed rearward by the bullet accessory P6500 without using the biasing member. Further, in the standby position, the second decorative accessory P6620 may be directly pressed backward by the first decorative accessory P6610.

Further, in this embodiment, the straight movement of the bullet accessory P6500 is a movement in the front and back direction, but it is not limited to such a mode. Various directions can be adopted as the straight movement of the bullet accessory P6500.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first movable body is modeled after a bullet, but the shape of the first movable body is not limited to this, and various shapes can be adopted.

Moreover, in this embodiment, although the decorative accessory P6600 was made to imitate a whirlpool, the shape of the decorative accessory P6600 is not limited to such an aspect, and various shapes can be adopted.

Below, a pachinko gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that components that are the same or similar to those of the embodiments described above will be given the same names or the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

The pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment differs greatly from the pachinko game machines according to the first to third embodiments in that it includes a performance device P7000. Below, the production device P7000 will be explained using FIGS. 234 to 272.

The production device P7000 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. The production device P7000 is provided on the game board P1100, as shown in FIG. 234. The production device P7000 is fitted into the opening area 1d of the game board P1100, with the front portion protruding forward beyond the front surface of the game board P1100. The performance device P7000 is configured to be able to introduce game balls rolling in the game area P1120 into the inside, and can distribute the game balls to, for example, a specific area P7911 side or a non-specific area P7912 side, which will be described later. The performance device P7000 has decorations imitating the walls of a tower in various parts visible to the player. Note that in the illustrated example, illustrations of decorations are omitted as appropriate.

The production device P7000 includes a front cover part P7100, a rear cover part P7200, a drive unit P7300, a tower accessory P7400, and a specific area unit P7900.

First, the configuration of the front cover part P7100 of the production device P7000 will be explained.

The front cover part P7100 shown in FIGS. 234 to 236 covers a drive unit P7300, a tower accessory P7400, and a specific area unit P7900, which will be described later, from the front. The front cover part P7100 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens toward the rear. The front cover part P7100 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape that is elongated in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. Further, the front cover portion P7100 is formed so that the width dimension (left-right dimension) of the upper portion is small. The front cover part P7100 includes a front wall part P7110, a side wall part P7120, an external discharge passage P7130, and a decorative part P7140.

The front wall portion P7110 constitutes the front wall of the front cover portion P7100. The front wall portion P7110 is formed in a plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The front wall portion P7110 includes an upper window portion P7111 and a lower window portion P7112.

The upper window part P7111 shown in FIG. 236 is a window part provided in the upper part of the front wall part P7110. The upper window portion P7111 is made of a transparent material. The player can visually recognize a drive unit P7300, which will be described later, through the upper window section P7111. Note that in FIGS. 234 and 235, illustration of the upper window portion P7111 is omitted.

A lower window portion P7112 shown in FIG. 236 is a window portion provided below the upper window portion P7111. The lower window portion P7112 is made of a transparent material. The player can visually recognize a tower accessory P7400, which will be described later, through the lower window portion P7112. Note that in FIGS. 234 and 235, illustration of the lower window portion P7112 is omitted.

The side wall portions P7120 shown in FIGS. 235 and 236 constitute the upper, lower, left and right side walls of the front cover portion P7100. The side wall portion P7120 includes a supply portion P7121, a discharge portion P7122, and a recovery portion P7123.

The supply part P7121 serves as an entrance for the game balls rolling in the game area P1120. Game balls are supplied (introduced) into the production device P7000 via the supply section P7121. The supply portion P7121 is formed in the shape of a passage passing through the side wall portion P7120 in the thickness direction. The supply part P7121 is provided in the upper part of the side wall part P7120. A pair of supply parts P7121 are provided so as to be located on both left and right sides of the side wall part P7120.

The discharge part P7122 is an outlet that discharges a part of the game balls supplied inside the presentation device P7000 to the outside. The discharge section P7122 is provided below the supply section P7121. The discharge portion P7122 is provided on both left and right sides of the side wall portion P7120. The right discharge portion P7122 is formed to include a portion that penetrates the right side of the side wall portion P7120 in the left-right direction, and a passage-shaped portion that extends generally in the front-back direction. The right side discharge section P7122 discharges the game ball to the back side (rear surface) of the game board P1100. Further, the left side discharge section P7122 (not shown) is formed including a portion penetrating the left side portion of the side wall section P7120 in the left-right direction, and discharges the game ball to the game area P1120. In addition, the right side discharge part P7122 may also be configured to discharge game balls to the game area P1120 similarly to the left side discharge part P7122.

The collection unit P7123 is for collecting the game balls rolling in the game area P1120. Specifically, the collection unit P7123 collects the game balls that have finished rolling in the left and right areas of the game area P1120, respectively. In this way, the recovery section P7123 has a role as a so-called outlet. A pair of collection parts P7123 are provided so as to be located on both left and right sides of the lower part of the side wall part P7120. In this way, the game balls rolling in the game area P1120 are collected into the inside of the production device P7000 from the collection section P7123 if the game balls do not win in various winning slots or the like.

The external discharge passage P7130 shown in FIG. 234 is a passage for discharging game balls collected from the collection section P7123 and game balls that have passed through a non-specific area P7912 of a specific area unit P7900, which will be described later, to the back side of the game board P1100. . The external discharge passage P7130 is located on the rear side (back side) of the front wall portion P7110 and is provided so as to be invisible to the player.

The decorative portion P7140 shown in FIGS. 235 and 236 covers the sides of the tower accessory P7400. The decorative portion P7140 is provided at the rear of the side wall portion P7120. The decorative portion P7140 is formed in a plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the left-right direction.

Next, the configuration of the rear cover part P7200 of the production device P7000 will be explained using FIGS. 235 and 236.

The rear cover part P7200 covers the drive unit P7300, the tower accessory P7400, and the specific area unit P7900 from the rear. The rear cover portion P7200 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens toward the front. The rear cover portion P7200 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front (back view).

Next, the configuration of the drive unit P7300 of the production device P7000 will be explained.

The drive unit P7300 shown in FIGS. 236, 241 to 245, and 250 operates the tower accessory P7400 and distributes the game balls supplied to the presentation device P7000. Drive unit P7300 is arranged behind the upper part of front cover part P7100. The drive unit P7300 is fixed to the upper portions of the front cover part P7100 and the rear cover part P7200. The drive unit P7300 includes an upper cover part P7310, a croon part P7320, a drive base part P7330, an ejection guide part P7340, a drive part P7350, a distribution part P7360, a drive gear P7370, and a disk part P7380.

The upper cover part P7310 shown in FIGS. 235, 241, and 242 covers a croon part P7320, a drive base part P7330, etc., which will be described later, from above. The upper cover part P7310 is formed into a lid shape with the front and lower sides open. Upper cover part P7310 is arranged at the top of drive unit P7300. The upper cover part P7310 includes a sensor part P7311.

The sensor section P7311 detects the passage of the game ball supplied via the supply section P7121 of the front cover section P7100. That is, the sensor section P7311 detects the game balls supplied from the game area P1120 into the production device P7000. The sensor section P7311 is arranged inside (downstream side) of the pair of supply sections P7121 of the front cover section P7100.

The croon portion P7320 shown in FIGS. 241, 242, 246, 247, and 250 is one in which game balls supplied via the supply portion P7121 roll. That is, the croon section P7320 is for distributing the game balls supplied from the game area P1120 into the production device P7000. The croon section P7320 includes a croon main body P7321, a supply passage section P7322, and a croon support section P7323.

The croon body P7321 is the part on which the game ball rolls. The croon main body P7321 is formed into a substantially dish shape that opens upward. Moreover, the croon main body P7321 is formed into a substantially circular shape when viewed from above. The upper surface of the croon main body P7321 is formed such that the height thereof gradually decreases from the outer portion toward the center portion. The croon main body P7321 includes a hole P7321a.

The hole P7321a is a hole that vertically passes through the croon main body P7321. The game ball rolling on the clone body P7321 passes through the hole P7321a and falls downward. The hole P7321a is formed approximately at the center of the croon main body P7321 in a plan view. Three holes P7321a are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. Specifically, one hole P7321a among the three holes P7321a is formed in the center of the croon main body P7321 in the left-right direction. Further, the other two holes P7321a are formed at the left and right fronts of the hole P7321a formed at the center in the left and right direction (positions shifted left and right from the center in the left and right direction of the croon main body P7321). In this way, the game ball rolling on the croon main body P7321 falls from any of the three holes P7321a (sorted to any of the holes P7321a).

The supply passage section P7322 is a passage that guides the game balls supplied via the supply section P7121 to the clone main body P7321. The upstream side of the supply passage section P7322 is connected to the supply section P7121 (not shown). The downstream side of the supply passage section P7322 is connected to the clone main body P7321. Further, the downstream side of the supply passage portion P7322 is opened in the direction along the circumferential direction at the outer portion of the croon main body P7321 in plan view. In this way, the game ball guided from the supply passage part P7322 to the croon main body P7321 first rolls in the outer part of the croon main body P7321 in the circumferential direction. A pair of supply passage sections P7322 are provided on both left and right sides of the clone body P7321 so as to be able to guide the game balls that have passed through the pair of sensor sections P7311.

The croon support portion P7323 supports the croon main body P7321 and the supply passage portion P7322. The croon support portion P7323 is provided below the croon main body P7321 and the supply passage portion P7322. The croon support part P7323 is fixed to the upper part of a drive base part P7330, which will be described later.

The drive base portion P7330 shown in FIGS. 241, 242, 246, 247, and 250 is fixed to the upper portions of the front cover portion P7100 and the rear cover portion P7200. The drive base portion P7330 includes a drive base main body portion P7331, a support portion P7332, and a swing sensor P7333.

The drive base main body part P7331 constitutes the upper part of the drive base part P7330. The drive base main body portion P7331 is formed into a substantially box shape that opens upward. The drive base main body portion P7331 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. A croon support part P7323 is fixed to the upper part of the drive base main body part P7331. The bottom of the drive base body part P7331 is provided so as to be located below the croon body P7321 (more specifically, the three holes P7321a) supported by the croon support part P7323. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the hole P7321a of the Cloon main body P7321 falls to the bottom of the drive base main body P7331. The bottom portion of the drive base main body portion P7331 is inclined so that the height of the central portion in the left-right direction is lower. Convex portions formed in an upwardly convex shape are provided on both left and right sides of the front portion of the bottom of the drive base main body portion P7331. A relay board for relaying signals related to control of the production device P7000 is provided at the rear of the drive base main body part P7331. The drive base main body portion P7331 includes a rolling guide portion P7331a.

The rolling guide portion P7331a guides the game ball to roll forward at the bottom of the drive base main body portion P7331. The rolling guide portion P7331a is formed in a groove shape extending in the front-rear direction between the left and right convex portions. The rolling guide portion P7331a and the left and right convex portions are formed to be located forward of the three holes P7321a of the croon main body P7321 in plan view. The rolling guide portion P7331a is formed at the center in the left-right direction of the drive base main body portion P7331. The rolling guide portion P7331a is inclined so that the height of the front end portion is lower than that of the rear end portion.

In this way, the drive base main body part P7331 transfers the game ball that has fallen from the hole P7321a of the croon main body P7321 to the bottom of the drive base main body part P7331 (more specifically, the rear part of the bottom part from the rolling guide part P7331a). part) and roll it at the bottom. Then, the game ball rolling on the bottom of the drive base main body part P7331 rolls the rolling guide part P7331a of the bottom part toward the front end side. The game ball that rolls toward the front end of the rolling guide portion P7331a falls downward when it reaches the front end.

The support portion P7332 supports a discharge guide portion P7340, which will be described later. The support part P7332 constitutes the lower part of the drive base part P7330. A pair of support parts P7332 are provided on the left and right sides of the front portion of the drive base main body part P7331 so as to protrude to both sides in the left and right direction. The support portion P7332 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens downward. The support portion P7332 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape in plan view.

Further, the left and right support portions P7332 are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. Here, as described above, the drive base main body part P7331 is arranged above between the left and right support parts P7332. Furthermore, a discharge guide portion P7340, which will be described later, is arranged below between the left and right support portions P7332. In this way, an opening P7332a that is elongated in the left-right direction and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front is formed between the left and right support parts P7332.

The swing sensor P7333 is capable of detecting a detected portion P7363a of the distribution portion P7360, which will be described later. The swing sensor P7333 is provided at the lower part of the drive base main body part P7331. In this embodiment, the swing sensor P7333 is provided at a position where it can detect the detected part P7363a with the distribution part P7360 facing leftward, as shown in FIG. 269.

The discharge guide part P7340 receives a part of the game ball that has fallen from the rolling guide part P7331a of the drive base part P7330, and guides it so as to discharge it to the outside of the front cover part P7100. The discharge guide portion P7340 is formed in a shape that is elongated in the left-right direction. The upper surface of the discharge guide portion P7340 is formed into a substantially plate shape. Further, the upper surface of the discharge guide portion P7340 is formed to be inclined obliquely downward from the center in the left-right direction to both ends in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The discharge guide portion P7340 is fixed to the front end portions of the pair of support portions P7332 of the drive base portion P7330. The discharge guide portion P7340 is provided so as to be located below the rolling guide portion P7331a of the drive base portion P7330 via the opening portion P7332a when viewed from the front. The right end portion of the discharge guide portion P7340 communicates with the right discharge portion P7122 of the front cover portion P7100. Further, the left end portion of the discharge guide portion P7340 communicates with a discharge portion P7122 on the left side (not shown) of the front cover portion P7100. The discharge guide section P7340 includes a sensor section P7341.

The sensor section P7341 detects the passage of a game ball rolling on the discharge guide section P7340 (discharged via the left and right discharge sections P7122). The sensor portions P7341 are provided (in a pair) at both left and right ends of the discharge guide portion P7340.

In this way, when the discharge guide part P7340 receives a game ball that has fallen from the rolling guide part P7331a of the drive base part P7330, the discharge guide part P7340 rolls the game ball to both ends in the left and right direction of the discharge guide part P7340. Then, the game ball rolling toward the left end side of the discharge guide part P7340 is discharged to the game area P1120 again via the left discharge part P7122 (not shown) of the front cover part P7100. Further, the game ball rolling toward the right end of the discharge guide portion P7340 is discharged to the back side (rear surface) of the game board P1100 via the right side discharge portion P7122 of the front cover portion P7100.

A drive section P7350 shown in FIGS. 241, 243 to 245 drives a tower accessory P7400 and a distribution section P7360, which will be described later. The drive part P7350 is fixed to the lower part of the drive base part P7330 (drive base main body part P7331), as shown in FIG. 241. That is, the drive section P7350 is fixed to the upper portions of the front cover section P7100 and the rear cover section P7200 via the drive base section P7330. The drive section P7350 includes a drive frame P7351, a spring section P7352, a first motor P7353, an output gear P7354, and a swing shaft section P7355.

The drive frame P7351 is fixed to the drive base main body part P7331. The drive frame P7351 is formed into a substantially annular shape when viewed from above. The drive frame P7351 includes a locking portion P7351a.

The locking portion P7351a locks a spring portion P7352, which will be described later. The locking portion P7351a projects upward from the top surface of the drive frame P7351. The locking portion P7351a is provided at the right rear portion of the upper surface of the drive frame P7351.

The spring portion P7352 biases a distribution portion P7360, which will be described later, to the right. One end of the spring portion P7352 is locked to a locking portion P7351a of a drive frame P7351, and the other end is locked to a locking portion P7362a of a distribution portion P7360, which will be described later. The spring portion P7352 constitutes a tension spring.

The first motor P7353 is a drive source for the tower accessory P7400 and the distribution section P7360. The first motor P7353 is provided at the left rear portion of the upper surface of the drive frame P7351. The first motor P7353 is provided such that its output shaft vertically passes through the drive frame P7351 and projects downward.

An output gear P7354 shown in FIG. 245 takes out the driving force of the first motor P7353. The output gear P7354 is fixed to the lower end of the output shaft of the first motor P7353.

The swing shaft portion P7355 shown in FIGS. 243, 244, and 251 is the axis around which the distribution portion P7360 swings. The swing shaft portion P7355 is formed in an elongated shape and is arranged with its axial direction facing in the vertical direction. The swing shaft portion P7355 is provided inside the drive frame P7351 (at a position spaced apart from the drive frame P7351) in plan view. Specifically, the swing shaft portion P7355 is provided so as to be located at the inner rear part of the drive frame P7351. The upper end portion of the swing shaft portion P7355 is fixed to the lower portion of the drive base main body portion P7331. The swing shaft portion P7355 is provided so as to extend downward from the drive base main body portion P7331.

The distribution section P7360 shown in FIGS. 235, 241, 243, 244, and 250 receives a portion of the game balls that have fallen from the rolling guide section P7331a of the drive base section P7330 at a predetermined timing, and will be described later. This guides the player to the specific area P7911 (the area where prizes can be won). The distribution part P7360 is provided so as to be able to swing left and right about the swing shaft part P7355 (see FIGS. 244 and 269 to 271). In this way, the distribution unit P7360 constitutes a movable winning opening (see FIG. 250). Most of the distribution part P7360, excluding the front part, is provided below the drive base main body part P7331 of the drive base part P7330. The front portion of the distribution section P7360 is located forward of the drive base main body section P7331 and above the discharge guide section P7340.

Moreover, the distribution part P7360 is provided so as to be suspended from the drive base part P7330 (drive base main body part P7331) via the swing shaft part P7355. Further, the distributing section P7360 is pivoted from a position where the distal end (front end) of the distributing section P7360 faces diagonally to the front left as shown in FIG. It is provided so that it can swing in a range up to a position facing the front right side. In addition, below, the shape etc. of the said distribution part P7360 are demonstrated on the basis of the position where the front-end|tip part of the said distribution part P7360 faces the front shown in FIG. 244. The distribution section P7360 includes a distribution main body section P7361, a plate section P7362, a decorative section P7363, and an inclined section P7364.

The distribution main body part P7361 is the main structure of the distribution part P7360. The distribution main body part P7361 is formed to be elongated in the front-rear direction. The distribution main body portion P7361 includes a bearing portion P7361a, a passage portion P7361b, a hole portion P7361c, and a guide groove portion P7361d.

The bearing portion P7361a is a portion through which the swing shaft portion P7355 is inserted. The bearing portion P7361a is formed to vertically penetrate through the rear end portion of the distribution main body portion P7361.

The passage portion P7361b receives the game ball that has fallen from the rolling guide portion P7331a, and guides it so that it rolls toward the tower accessory P7400 side. The passage portion P7361b is formed in a groove shape that opens upward and extends in the front-rear direction. The passage portion P7361b is formed over substantially the entire distribution body portion P7361 in the front-rear direction. The bottom of the passage portion P7361b is inclined such that the rear end is lower in height than the front end. Thereby, the game ball located in the passage part P7361b rolls toward the rear end side of the passage part P7361b. A tip (front end) of the passage portion P7361b projects forward through an opening P7332a between the left and right support portions P7332 (see FIGS. 244 and 246). In this way, the tip of the passage section P7361b is located forward of the drive base main body section P7331 and above the discharge guide section P7340.

A hole P7361c shown in FIG. 244 is a hole that vertically penetrates at the rear end of the bottom of the passage P7361b. The game ball rolling through the passage P7361b passes through the hole P7361c and falls downward.

The guide groove part P7361d shown in FIG. 244 receives a swing transmission part P7413e of a tower part P7400, which will be described later, and transmits the drive via the swing transmission part P7413e. The guide groove portion P7361d is formed below the passage portion P7361b at a position that generally overlaps in plan view. The guide groove portion P7361d is formed in a groove shape that opens downward and extends in the front-rear direction. The guide groove portion P7361d is formed in the middle of the distribution main body portion P7361 in the front-rear direction.

The plate portions P7362 shown in FIGS. 243 and 244 protrude outward in the left-right direction on both sides of the rear portion of the distribution main body portion P7361 in the left-right direction. The plate portion P7362 is formed in a plate shape with the thickness direction facing in the up-down direction. The plate portion P7362 includes a locking portion P7362a.

The locking portion P7362a locks the spring portion P7352. The locking portion P7362a projects upward from the upper surface of the right plate portion P7362 of the left and right plate portions P7362. The locking portion P7362a locks the other end of the spring portion P7352 (the end opposite to the side locked by the locking portion P7351a). By locking the spring portion P7352 to the locking portion P7362a, the distribution portion P7360 is biased to the right by the spring portion P7352.

The decorative portions P7363 protrude outward in the left-right direction on both sides of the front portion of the distribution main body portion P7361 in the left-right direction. The decorative portion P7363 is formed in an arc shape with the swing shaft portion P7355 as the center in plan view. The front surface of the decorative portion P7363 is decorated to resemble the wall of a tower. The decorative portion P7363 can prevent the rear portion of the distribution portion P7360 from being visible to the player even when the distribution portion P7360 swings from side to side. The decorative portion P7363 includes a detected portion P7363a.

The detected portion P7363a is a portion detected by the swing sensor P7333. The detected portion P7363a protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the left decorative portion P7363 of the left and right decorative portions P7363. As shown in FIG. 269, the detected portion P7363a is detected by the swing sensor P7333 when the distribution portion P7360 is in a state facing left (when it is in a position facing diagonally forward and left).

The inclined portion P7364 guides the game ball that has fallen from the rolling guide portion P7331a so as to roll toward the discharge guide portion P7340 side. The inclined portions P7364 protrude outward in the left-right direction on both sides of the front end portion of the distribution main body portion P7361 in the left-right direction. The inclined portion P7364 is provided at a position overlapping the discharge guide portion P7340 in plan view. The upper surface of the inclined portion P7364 is inclined such that the height of the tip in the protruding direction is lower. Thereby, the game ball located on the inclined part P7364 rolls toward the tip end side in the protruding direction of the inclined part P7364. Moreover, the game ball rolling on the inclined part P7364 falls downward (toward the ejection guide part P7340 side) from the tip of the inclined part P7364 in the protruding direction.

Here, the distribution section P7360 is provided so as to be able to swing from side to side about the swing shaft section P7355 as the center of swing as described above. That is, the part of the distribution part P7360 that is located forward of the drive base main body part P7331 (the part located above the discharge guide part P7340), specifically the tip (front end) of the passage part P7361b and the left and right parts. The relative positional relationship of the inclined portion P7364 with the rolling guide portion P7331a of the drive base main body portion P7331 is constantly changing. In other words, as the distribution part P7360 swings left and right, the passage part P7361b of the distribution part P7360 is positioned in front of the rolling guide part P7331a without shifting in the left-right direction (the state in which the passage part P7361b of the distribution part P7360 is positioned in front of the rolling guide part P7331a without being displaced from the rolling guide part P7331a). The rolling guide can be divided into two states: a state in which the game ball that has fallen from the rolling guide part P7361b cannot enter the passage part P7361b) and a state in which it is misaligned (a state in which the game ball that has fallen from the rolling guide part P7331a cannot enter the passage part P7361b). The state of communication between the section P7331a and the distribution section P7360 (passage section P7361b) changes constantly.

In this way, when the distribution part P7360 receives a game ball that has fallen from the rolling guide part P7331a of the drive base part P7330 in the passage part P7361b, the distribution part P7360 transfers the game ball to the tower accessory P7400 through the passage part P7361b and the hole part P7361c. side (specific area P7911 side or non-specific area P7912 side, which will be described later). In addition, if the game ball that has fallen from the rolling guide part P7331a is not received by the passage part P7361b but is received by the slope part P7364, the distribution part P7360 transfers the game ball to the ejection guide part P7340 side (direction direction) via the slope part P7364. to the outside discharge side of the device P7000).

The drive gear P7370 shown in FIGS. 243 and 245 is to which the driving force from the output gear P7354 of the drive section P7350 is transmitted. Drive gear P7370 is formed into a substantially disk shape. The drive gear P7370 is attached to the lower part of the drive frame P7351 so as to be rotatable relative to the drive frame P7351. The drive gear P7370 includes a gear portion P7371 and an opening portion P7372.

The gear portion P7371 is a portion that meshes with the output gear P7354. Gear portion P7371 is formed on the outer periphery of drive gear P7370.

The opening P7372 is an opening that vertically passes through the drive gear P7370. The opening P7372 is formed into a circular shape in plan view. The opening P7372 is formed at a position eccentric to the center of the drive gear P7370 in plan view. Specifically, the center position of the opening P7372 is provided at a position shifted forward with respect to the center position of the drive gear P7370.

A disk portion P7380 shown in FIGS. 238, 243, and 245 is provided within an opening P7372 of a drive gear P7370. The disk portion P7380 is formed into a substantially disk shape. The outer diameter of the disk portion P7380 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the opening P7372 of the drive gear P7370. The disk portion P7380 is disposed within the opening P7372 of the drive gear P7370 and is provided to be rotatable relative to the drive gear P7370. The disk portion P7380 is fixed to the upper surface of an upper end portion P7413 (main body portion P7413a) of a tower accessory P7400, which will be described later. The disk portion P7380 includes an opening portion P7381 and a wall portion P7382.

The opening P7381 is an opening that vertically passes through the disk portion P7380. The opening P7381 is formed in an elliptical shape that is elongated in the front-rear direction when viewed from above. A fitting portion P7413b of a tower accessory P7400, which will be described later, is fitted into the opening P7381. The opening P7381 is formed so as to overlap the hole P7361c of the distribution section P7360 in plan view even when the distribution section P7360 swings left and right.

The wall portion P7382 is a wall that projects upward from the rear portion of the opening portion P7381 in the disk portion P7380. The wall portion P7382 is formed in an arc shape corresponding to the rear portion of the opening portion P7381 in plan view.

Next, the configuration of the tower accessory P7400 of the production device P7000 will be explained.

The tower accessory P7400 shown in FIGS. 237 to 240 and 268 can be operated by the driving force of the drive unit P7300. As shown in FIG. 237, the tower accessory P7400 is formed into a substantially truncated cone shape that is elongated in the vertical direction. The tower accessory P7400 has an appearance imitating a tower. The tower accessory P7400 is rotatably supported by a specific area unit P7900, which will be described later, at its lower end, approximately at the center in a plan view (bottom view), and whose upper end rotates in a circular motion (swivel motion). , swing motion) (see FIG. 268).

The tower accessory P7400 moves the game ball from the drive unit P7300 to a first stage part P7500, a second stage part P7600, and a third stage part P7700 located at the upper, middle, and lower stages of the tower accessory P7400. are rolled in order to lead to a specific area unit P7900, which will be described later. Note that detailed descriptions of the first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700 will be given later. The tower accessory P7400 includes a rear frame P7410, a front frame P7420, a first stage part P7500, a second stage part P7600, a third stage part P7700, and a cover part P7800.

First, the configuration of the rear frame P7410 of the tower accessory P7400 will be described.

The rear frame P7410 shown in FIGS. 239, 240, and 248 constitutes the rear portion of the tower service P7400, and is relatively movably connected to the drive unit P7300. The rear frame P7410 includes a frame cover portion P7411, a rear support portion P7412, and an upper end portion P7413.

The frame cover portion P7411 is a cover-like member having an outline similar to the rear half of a substantially truncated cone. The frame cover part P7411 is open at the front and bottom. The frame cover part P7411 covers a first stage part P7500, a second stage part P7600, and a third stage part P7700, which will be described later, from the rear. A plurality of openings are formed in the frame cover part P7411, penetrating in the front-rear direction. In this way, as shown in FIG. 248, a plate portion P7514 of the first stage base portion P7510 and a portion of the first drive transmission portion P7540, which will be described later, are exposed to the outside of the frame cover portion P7411 through the opening. ing. As shown in FIG. 248, a plate portion P7613 of a second stage base portion P7610 and a portion of a second drive transmission portion P7640, which will be described later, are exposed to the outside of the frame cover portion P7411 through the opening. . The frame cover part P7411 includes a swing shaft part P7411a.

The swing shaft portion P7411a shown in FIGS. 252 and 253 is an axis that becomes the center of the swing motion of the first stage portion P7500 (support portion P7520 and first stage main body P7530), which will be described later. The swing shaft portion P7411a is formed in an elongated shape and is arranged with its axial direction facing the front-rear direction. The swing shaft portion P7411a is provided so as to protrude forward on the front surface of the frame cover portion P7411.

The rear support portion P7412 shown in FIGS. 239 and 240 constitutes the support of the rear frame P7410. The rear support portions P7412 are provided (in a pair) on both sides of the frame cover portion P7411 in the left-right direction. The rear support portion P7412 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape that is elongated in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. Further, the rear support portion P7412 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. The pair of rear struts P7412 are provided so as to be inclined toward each other toward the upper end.

The upper end portion P7413 shown in FIGS. 237 to 240, 250, and 251 constitutes the upper end portion of the rear frame P7410. The upper end portion P7413 is formed as a separate member from the frame cover portion P7411 and the rear support portion P7412, as shown in FIGS. 239 and 240. The upper end portion P7413 is fixed to the upper end portion (approximately semi-disc-shaped portion) of the frame cover portion P7411. The upper end portion P7413 includes a main body portion P7413a, a fitting portion P7413b, a hole portion P7413c, a sensor portion P7413d, and a swing transmission portion P7413e.

The main body portion P7413a shown in FIG. 237 is the main structure of the upper end portion P7413. The main body portion P7413a is formed in a substantially disk shape with the thickness direction facing up and down. As shown in FIG. 238, a disk portion P7380 of the drive unit P7300 is fixed to the upper surface of the main body portion P7413a.

The fitting portion P7413b is a portion that fits into the opening P7381 of the disc portion P7380. The fitting part P7413b is formed in the shape of a wall that projects upward from the upper surface of the main body part P7413a. The fitting portion P7413b is formed in an arc shape, which together with the wall portion P7382 of the disk portion P7380 constitutes an elliptical wall corresponding to the shape of the opening portion P7381, in plan view.

On the upper surface of the main body part P7413a, the inner part of the elliptical wall surrounded by the wall part P7382 of the disc part P7380 and the fitting part P7413b passed through the hole part P7361c of the distribution part P7360 and fell downward. The game ball rolls.

The hole P7413c is a hole that vertically passes through the main body P7413a. The hole P7413c is formed in the inner part of an elliptical wall surrounded by the wall P7382 of the disc part P7380 and the fitting part P7413b. The game ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body part P7413a passes through the hole part P7413c and falls downward.

The sensor section P7413d shown in FIGS. 250 and 251 detects the passage of a game ball that has fallen through the hole P7413c. The sensor portion P7413d is provided below the hole portion P7413c.

The swing transmission section P7413e shown in FIGS. 237, 245, 250, and 251 transmits the rotational motion of the tower service object P7400 to the distribution section P7360. The swing transmission part P7413e is formed to protrude upward on the upper surface of the main body part P7413a. The swing transmission part P7413e is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis directed in the vertical direction. Swing transmission part P7413e is provided ahead of fitting part P7413b. The upper end portion of the swing transmission portion P7413e is received in the guide groove portion P7361d of the distribution portion P7360.

Next, the configuration of the front frame P7420 of the tower accessory P7400 will be explained.

The front frame P7420 shown in FIGS. 239, 240, and 249 constitutes the front part of the tower office object P7400. The front frame P7420 includes a front support section P7421, a first guide section P7422, a second guide section P7423, and a third guide section P7424.

The front support portion P7421 shown in FIGS. 239 and 240 constitutes the support of the front frame P7420. The front struts P7421 are provided (in a pair) in front of the pair of rear struts P7412 of the rear frame P7410. The front pillar part P7421 is formed in a shape corresponding to the rear pillar part P7412 when viewed from the front. The front support section P7421 includes a discharge passage P7421a, a first sensor section P7421b, and a second sensor section P7421c.

The discharge path P7421a shown in FIGS. 240, 249, 259, and 267 is a path that leads the game ball to the specific area unit P7900 (non-specific area P7912) side, which will be described later. The discharge passage P7421a is formed over almost the entire front column part P7421. The discharge passage P7421a has a rearwardly opened portion that is closed by the rear column P7412 of the rear frame P7410, and is generally formed in the shape of a passage extending in the vertical direction. In this way, the discharge passage P7421a is formed in the interior of the front column part P7421 so as to communicate from the upper end to the lower end.

The first sensor part P7421b shown in FIGS. 249 and 258 is provided in the discharge passage P7421a at a position between the first stage part P7500 and the second stage part P7600, and the game ball passes through the position. It is used to detect.

The second sensor section P7421c shown in FIGS. 249 and 266 is provided in the discharge passage P7421a at a position between the second stage section P7600 and the third stage section P7700, and the game ball passes through the position. It is used to detect.

The first guide part P7422 shown in FIGS. 240, 252 to 255 guides the game ball that has rolled on the first stage part P7500 to the second stage part P7600 side or the discharge path P7421a side. It is. The first guide part P7422 is provided to cover the first stage part P7500 from the front to the bottom. The first guide part P7422 includes a second stage part side guide part P7422a and a discharge passage side guide part P7422b.

The second stage part side guide part P7422a shown in FIGS. 240, 252, and 253 is a part of the game ball that has rolled on the first stage part P7500 (the first wall of the first stage main body P7530, which will be described later). It accepts the game ball that has fallen from the part P7532, and guides the game ball so that it rolls toward the second stage part P7600 side (the passage part P7512 of the first stage base part P7510, which will be described later). . The second stage section side guide section P7422a is formed in the shape of a groove extending in the front-rear direction. The bottom portion of the second stage side guide portion P7422a is inclined so that the height of the rear end portion is low. Thereby, the game ball located in the second stage side guide part P7422a rolls toward the rear end side of the second stage side guide part P7422a.

The discharge path side guide part P7422b shown in FIGS. 240 and 252 is a part of the game ball that has rolled on the first stage part P7500 (a part of the game ball that has fallen from the second wall part P7533 of the first stage main body P7530, which will be described later). It receives the game ball) and guides the game ball so that it rolls toward the discharge passage P7421a side. The discharge passage side guide portions P7422b are provided (in a pair) on both the left and right sides of the second stage side guide portion P7422a. As shown in FIG. 240, the pair of discharge passage side guide portions P7422b communicate with the upper end portions of the pair of discharge passages P7421a, respectively.

The second guide part P7423 shown in FIGS. 252, 253, 258, and 259 covers the second stage part P7600 from the front to the bottom, and the game ball rolling on the second stage part P7600. to the discharge passage P7421a side. The second guide portion P7423 includes a cover portion P7423a and a discharge passage side guide portion P7423b.

The cover portion P7423a covers the center portion of the second stage portion P7600 in the left-right direction from the front to the bottom.

The discharge passage side guide part P7423b guides the game ball rolling on the second stage part P7600 to the discharge passage P7421a side. The discharge passage side guide part P7423b is formed in the shape of a groove with an open upper part. The discharge passage side guide portion P7423b is formed in a substantially arc shape convex outward in plan view. A pair of discharge passage side guide parts P7423b are provided so as to be located on both left and right sides of the cover part P7423a. The downstream side (opposite side to the second stage part P7600) of the pair of discharge passage side guide parts P7423b communicates with the vertical midway part of the pair of discharge passages P7421a, respectively.

The third guide part P7424 shown in FIGS. 263, 264, 266, and 267 guides the game ball that has rolled on the third stage part P7700 to the specific area P7911 side or the non-specific area P7912 side, which will be described later. It is something to do. The third guide portion P7424 is provided to cover the third stage portion P7700 from the front. The third guide portion P7424 includes a specific area side guide portion P7424a and a non-specific area side guide portion P7424b.

The specific area side guide part P7424a guides the game ball rolling on the third stage part P7700 to the specific area P7911 side which will be described later. The specific area side guide portion P7424a is formed in a box shape that is open in the vertical direction and at the rear. The specific area side guide portion P7424a is provided at the center of the third guide portion P7424 in the left-right direction. The specific region side guide portion P7424a communicates the left-right center portion of the third stage portion P7700 with a specific region P7911, which will be described later.

The non-specific area side guide part P7424b guides the game ball rolling on the third stage part P7700 to the non-specific area P7912 side. The non-specific area side guide portion P7424b extends generally in the vertical direction, and is formed such that its lower end curves inward in the left-right direction (see FIG. 263). Further, the lower end portion of the discharge passage P7421a is connected to a midway portion in the extending direction of the non-specific area side guide portion P7424b (see FIG. 240). The non-specific area guide portions P7424b are provided (in a pair) on both left and right sides of the specific area guide portion P7424a. The non-specific area side guide part P7424b communicates the right part of the third stage part P7700 with the non-specific area P7912 on the right side. Moreover, the non-specific area side guide part P7424b communicates the left part of the third stage part P7700 with the non-specific area P7912 on the left side (see FIG. 263).

Next, the configuration of the first stage part P7500 of the tower accessory P7400 will be explained.

In the first stage section P7500 shown in FIGS. 252 to 256, the game ball that has passed through the hole P7413c of the rear frame P7410 rolls, and the game ball is transferred to the second stage section P7600 side or the discharge passage P7421a. It is distributed to the sides. The first stage part P7500 is provided in the upper part of the tower accessory P7400. The first stage section P7500 includes a first stage base section P7510, a support section P7520, a first stage main body P7530, and a first drive transmission section P7540.

The first stage base part P7510 shown in FIGS. 252 and 253 is fixed to the frame cover part P7411 of the rear frame P7410, and also includes a support part P7520, a first stage main body P7530, and a first drive transmission part P7540, which will be described later. is provided. The first stage base portion P7510 includes a fixed portion P7511, a passage portion P7512, a swing shaft portion P7513, and a plate portion P7514.

The fixed portion P7511 is a portion fixed to the frame cover portion P7411 of the rear frame P7410. The fixed part P7511 constitutes the rear end part of the first stage base part P7510. By fixing the fixing part P7511 to the frame cover part P7411, the first stage base part P7510 is fixed to the rear frame P7410.

The passage portion P7512 guides the game ball that has rolled on the second stage portion side guide portion P7422a of the first guide portion P7422 so as to roll toward the second stage portion P7600 side. The passage portion P7512 is provided in front of the fixed portion P7511. Moreover, the passage part P7512 is provided so as to be located behind the second stage part side guide part P7422a so as to communicate with the second stage part side guide part P7422a. The passage portion P7512 is formed in a groove shape extending in the front-rear direction. The bottom of the passage P7512 is inclined so that the rear end is lower in height than the front end. Thereby, the game ball located in the passage part P7512 rolls toward the rear end side of the passage part P7512. The passage portion P7512 includes a hole portion P7512a.

The hole P7512a is a hole that penetrates vertically at the rear end of the bottom of the passage P7512. The game ball rolling in the passage P7512 passes through the hole P7512a and falls downward.

The swing shaft portion P7513 is an axis that becomes the center of swing of the swing operation of the support portion P7520 and the first stage main body P7530, which will be described later. The swing shaft portion P7513 is provided above the passage portion P7512 so as to protrude rearward. The swing shaft portion P7513 is arranged with its axial direction facing the front-rear direction. The axis of the swing shaft portion P7513 is provided so as to overlap the swing shaft portion P7411a of the rear frame P7410 in the front-rear direction.

A plate portion P7514 shown in FIGS. 248, 249, 255, and 256 constitutes the left side portion of the first stage base portion P7510, and is a portion where a first drive transmission portion P7540, which will be described later, is provided. The plate portion P7514 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing up and down. As shown in FIG. 248, the plate portion P7514 projects to the outside of the frame cover portion P7411 through an opening formed in the frame cover portion P7411. A hole is formed in the plate portion P7514, into which an upper portion of a first shaft P7541 of a first drive transmission portion P7540, which will be described later, is inserted. The plate portion P7514 includes a rotation sensor P7514a.

A rotation sensor P7514a shown in FIG. 249 is capable of detecting a detected portion P7541a of a first shaft P7541, which will be described later. The rotation sensor P7514a is provided at the lower part of the plate portion P7514.

The support portion P7520 shown in FIGS. 252, 253, 256, and 272 is provided on the first stage base portion P7510 and supports a first stage main body P7530, which will be described later. The support portion P7520 includes a swing bearing portion P7521, a fixed portion P7522, and an engaging portion P7523.

The swing bearing portion P7521 is a portion that is pivotally supported by the swing shaft portion P7411a of the rear frame P7410 and the swing shaft portion P7513 of the first stage base portion P7510. The swing bearing portion P7521 is formed to open in the front-rear direction. A pair of swing bearing parts P7521 are provided at the front and rear. A pair of swing bearings P7521 are inserted with a swing shaft P7411a and a swing shaft P7513, respectively, and are relative to the swing shaft P7411a and P7513 via predetermined bearing members, screws, etc. is rotatably connected to.

The fixing portion P7522 is a portion to which a first stage main body P7530, which will be described later, is fixed. The fixed portion P7522 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing in the up-down direction. The fixed part P7522 is integrally formed on the upper part of the swing bearing part P7521.

The engaging portion P7523 shown in FIGS. 256, 257, and 272 is a portion with which a swing transmitting portion P7543 of a first drive transmitting portion P7540, which will be described later, is relatively movably engaged. The engaging portion P7523 is formed in the shape of a groove that opens toward the rear. The engaging portion P7523 is provided on the lower surface of the fixed portion P7522 to the left of the swing bearing portion P7521 (that is, at a position shifted to the left from the swing center position of the first stage main body P7530). The engaging portion P7523 is integrally formed with the fixing portion P7522.

As shown in FIG. 272, the support part P7520 transmits the operation of the swing transmission part P7543 of the first drive transmission part P7540, which will be described later, through the engagement part P7523, so that the swing shaft part P7411a and It swings around a swing shaft P7513 (not shown in FIG. 272) so as to repeatedly tilt left and right alternately. Note that a detailed explanation of the swinging operation of the support part P7520 via the first drive transmission part P7540 will be described later.

The first stage main body P7530 shown in FIGS. 252 to 255 is supported by the support portion P7520, and is a portion on which the game ball that has passed through the hole P7413c of the rear frame P7410 rolls on the upper surface. The first stage main body P7530 is placed and fixed on the fixing part P7522 of the support part P7520. The first stage main body P7530 swings integrally with the support part P7520 as the support part P7520 swings.

The first stage main body P7530 is formed into a substantially circular shape in plan view. The upper surface of the first stage main body P7530 is sloped so that the height of the center portion in the left-right direction is lower, and the height of the front end portion is lower than the rear end portion. As a result, the game ball located on the first stage main body P7530 rolls toward the center in the left-right direction of the first stage main body P7530, and also rolls toward the front end. Further, the first stage main body P7530 includes a passage portion P7531, a first wall portion P7532, and a second wall portion P7533.

The passage portion P7531 is a portion that allows the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the first stage main body P7530 to pass to the second stage side guide portion P7422a side of the first guide portion P7422. The passage portion P7531 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above. The passage portion P7531 is open upward and downward so that the game ball can pass downward. The passage portion P7531 is provided at the front end portion (center portion in the left-right direction) of the first stage main body P7530 so as to protrude forward. The passage portion P7531 is formed so as to overlap the front end portion of the second stage side guide portion P7422a of the first guide portion P7422 in plan view. The passage section P7531 includes a sensor section P7531a.

The sensor section P7531a shown in FIGS. 252 and 253 detects the game ball passing through the passage section P7531. The sensor section P7531a is provided below the passage section P7531.

The first wall portion P7532 shown in FIGS. 254 and 255 guides the game ball rolling on the first stage main body P7530 to the passage portion P7531 side. The first wall portion P7532 is formed on the upper surface of the first stage main body P7530 so as to extend in the front-rear direction from the front end of the first stage main body P7530 to the middle part in the front-rear direction. A pair of first wall portions P7532 are formed with an interval in the left-right direction. The pair of first wall portions P7532 are located at the center in the left-right direction of the first stage main body P7530. The pair of first wall portions P7532 form a passage communicating with the passage portion P7531 on the upper surface of the first stage main body P7530.

The second wall portion P7533 shown in FIGS. 254 and 255 partitions a part of the upper surface of the first stage main body P7530 into the front and rear. The second wall portion P7533 is provided on the upper surface of the first stage main body P7530 at the rear of the first wall portion P7532. A pair of second wall portions P7533 are provided with an interval left and right. The pair of second wall portions P7533 are provided at positions where outer end portions in the left-right direction correspond to outer portions in the left-right direction of the discharge passage side guide portion P7422b of the first guide portion P7422. The pair of second wall portions P7533 are formed in an arc shape that is convex diagonally rearward in plan view. The pair of second wall parts P7533 forms a passage communicating with the discharge passage side guide part P7422b between the pair of first wall parts P7532 on the upper surface of the first stage main body P7530.

The first drive transmission section P7540 shown in FIGS. 249, 255, and 256 transmits the driving force of a second motor P7741, which will be described later, to the support section P7520 and the first stage main body P7530. The first drive transmission section P7540 is provided on the plate section P7514 of the first stage base section P7510. The first drive transmission section P7540 includes a first shaft P7541, a first stage gear section P7542, and a swing transmission section P7543.

The first shaft P7541 is a part to which the driving force of the second motor P7741 is transmitted via a second drive transmission part P7640, which will be described later. The first shaft P7541 is formed in a vertically elongated cylindrical shape. The upper portion of the first shaft P7541 is inserted into the hole of the plate portion P7514, and is rotatably supported around an axis facing in the vertical direction. The first shaft P7541 includes a detected portion P7541a.

A detected portion P7541a shown in FIG. 249 is a portion detected by a rotation sensor P7514a. The detected portion P7541a is fixed to the first shaft P7541 so as to be located below the plate portion P7514. The detected portion P7541a protrudes in a predetermined direction along the radial direction of the first shaft P7541. The detected portion P7541a is detected by the rotation sensor P7514a when the first shaft P7541 is at a predetermined rotational position.

The first stage gear portion P7542 is fixed to the upper end portion of the first shaft P7541. As the first shaft P7541 rotates, the first stage gear portion P7542 rotates integrally with the first shaft P7541 about an axis directed in the vertical direction.

The swing transmission section P7543 shown in FIGS. 255 to 257 and FIG. 272 transmits the driving force transmitted from the first stage gear section P7542 to the support section P7520. The swing transmission section P7543 is arranged in front of the first stage gear section P7542. The swing transmission part P7543 is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the plate part P7514 about an axis facing in the vertical direction. The swing transmission section P7543 includes a main body section P7543a, a gear section P7543b, and a spiral section P7543c.

The main body portion P7543a is the main structure of the swing transmission portion P7543. The main body portion P7543a is formed in a substantially disk shape with the thickness direction facing up and down.

The gear portion P7543b meshes with the first stage gear portion P7542. The gear part P7543b is fixed to the lower part of the main body part P7543a.

The spiral portion P7543c shown in FIGS. 256, 257, and 272 is a portion that operably engages with the engagement portion P7523 of the support portion P7520. The spiral portion P7543c is integrally formed with the main body portion P7543a, and is provided so as to protrude radially outward from the radial outer peripheral surface of the main body portion P7543a. As shown in FIGS. 256 and 257, the spiral portion P7543c is formed into a shape in which the height of the front end is higher than the height of the rear end, and is a combination of a pair of mutually symmetrical semicircular spirals. be done. As shown in FIG. 256, the spiral portion P7543c is received in a groove formed in the engagement portion P7523 of the support portion P7520, and is slidably engaged with the engagement portion P7523.

Next, the configuration of the second stage part P7600 of the tower accessory P7400 will be explained.

The second stage part P7600 shown in FIGS. 252, 253, 258, and 259 rolls the game ball that has passed through the hole P7512a of the first stage part P7500, and transfers the game ball to the third stage part P7600. It is distributed to the stage part P7700 side or the discharge passage P7421a side. The second stage part P7600 is provided in the middle part of the tower accessory P7400. The second stage section P7600 includes a second stage base section P7610, a second stage main body P7620, a second stage rotation section P7630, a second drive transmission section P7640, and a rotation cover section P7650.

The second stage base part P7610 shown in FIGS. 252 and 253 is fixed to the frame cover part P7411 of the rear frame P7410, and also includes a second stage main body P7620, a second stage rotating part P7630, and a second stage base part P7630, which will be described later. A drive transmission section P7640 is provided. The second stage base part P7610 includes a fixing part P7611, a passage part P7612, and a plate part P7613.

The fixed part P7611 is a part fixed to the frame cover part P7411 of the rear frame P7410. The fixed part P7611 constitutes the rear end part of the second stage base part P7610. By fixing the fixing part P7611 to the frame cover part P7411, the second stage base part P7610 is fixed to the rear frame P7410.

The passage portion P7612 guides the game ball that has passed through the passage portion P7621 of the second stage main body P7620, which will be described later, so as to roll toward the third stage portion P7700. The passage portion P7612 is provided in front of the fixed portion P7611. The passage portion P7612 is formed in a groove shape that extends from the upper end (front end) while curving downward to the rear. The front end of the passage portion P7612 is open upward. The bottom of the passage P7612 is sloped so that the rear end is lower in height than the front end. Thereby, the game ball located in the passage part P7612 rolls toward the rear end side of the passage part P7612. The passage P7612 includes a hole P7612a.

The hole P7612a is a hole that vertically passes through the passage P7612 at the rear end of the bottom of the passage P7612. The game ball rolling in the passage P7612 passes through the hole P7612a and falls downward.

A plate portion P7613 shown in FIG. 259 constitutes the left side portion of the second stage base portion P7610, and is a portion where a second drive transmission portion P7640, which will be described later, is provided. The plate portion P7613 is formed into a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing up and down. As shown in FIG. 248, the plate portion P7613 projects to the outside of the frame cover portion P7411 through an opening formed in the frame cover portion P7411. The plate portion P7613 has a hole through which the lower end of the first shaft P7541 of the first drive transmission section P7540 is inserted, and an upper portion of the second shaft P7641 of the second drive transmission section P7640, which will be described later. A hole is formed.

The second stage main body P7620 shown in FIGS. 252, 253, 258, and 259 is a portion on which the game ball that has passed through the hole P7512a of the first stage portion P7500 rolls. The second stage main body P7620 is fixed to the upper part of the second stage base part P7610. The second stage main body P7620 is formed into a substantially circular shape in plan view. Further, the upper surface of the second stage main body P7620 is formed into a substantially dish shape with the center side inclined downward. The upper surface (more specifically, the rear portion of the upper surface) of the second stage main body P7620 is formed to overlap with the hole P7512a of the first stage portion P7500 in plan view. Further, the second stage main body P7620 communicates with a pair of second guide portions P7423 of the front frame P7420. More specifically, the right front end and the left front end of the upper surface of the second stage main body P7620 communicate with the upstream side of the left and right discharge passage side guide parts P7423b provided on the front frame P7420, respectively. The second stage main body P7620 includes a passage portion P7621.

The passage portion P7621 is a hole that vertically passes through the second stage main body P7620. The passage portion P7621 is formed approximately at the center of the second stage main body P7620 in plan view. The passage portion P7621 constitutes a passage through which the game ball can pass downward. The passage section P7621 includes a sensor section P7621a. The passage portion P7621 communicates with the upper end (front end) of the passage portion P7612 via a sensor portion P7621a, which will be described later.

The sensor section P7621a shown in FIGS. 252 and 253 detects the game ball passing through the passage section P7621. The sensor section P7621a is provided below the passage section P7621.

The second stage rotating portion P7630 shown in FIGS. 258 to 261 rotates about an axis directed in the vertical direction outside the second stage main body P7620 in the radial direction. The second stage rotating portion P7630 is formed into a substantially annular shape when viewed from above. The second stage rotation section P7630 includes an opening section P7631, a gear section P7632, and a rolling inhibition section P7633.

The opening P7631 shown in FIGS. 259 to 261 is an opening that vertically passes through the second stage rotating section P7630. The inner diameter of the opening P7631 is larger than the outer diameter of the second stage main body P7620. The opening P7631 relatively movably receives the second stage main body P7620.

A gear portion P7632 shown in FIGS. 249, 260, and 261 is a portion to which the driving force of a second drive transmission portion P7640, which will be described later, is transmitted. Gear portion P7632 is formed on the radially outer circumferential surface of second stage rotating portion P7630. As shown in FIG. 249, the gear portion P7632 meshes with a second stage gear portion P7642 (third gear P7642c) of a second drive transmission portion P7640, which will be described later.

The rolling inhibiting portion P7633 shown in FIGS. 260 to 262 reduces the rolling speed of the game ball by coming into contact with the game ball rolling on the second stage main body P7620. A plurality of rolling inhibiting parts P7633 (four in this embodiment) are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the second stage rotating part P7630. Note that FIG. 262 shows the one located at the front among the plurality of rolling inhibiting parts P7633. The rolling inhibiting portion P7633 includes a vertical portion P7633a and a protruding portion P7633c.

The vertical portion P7633a is a portion that projects upward from the top of the second stage rotating portion P7630. The vertical portion P7633a is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the radial direction of the second stage rotating portion P7630. Further, the vertical portion P7633a is formed into a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed in the radial direction of the second stage rotating portion P7630. The vertical portion P7633a includes a hole P7633b.

The hole P7633b is a hole that penetrates the vertical portion P7633a in the thickness direction. The hole P7633b is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed in the thickness direction of the vertical portion P7633a. The upper end of the hole P7633b is located above the second stage main body P7620.

The protruding portion P7633c protrudes inward in the radial direction of the second stage rotating portion P7630 from the upper end of the vertical portion P7633a. The protrusion P7633c overlaps with the outer portion of the second stage main body P7620 in plan view. The protrusion P7633c is located slightly above the upper surface of the second stage main body P7620. The protruding portion P7633c is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from above. By the protruding portion P7633c coming into contact with the game ball rolling on the second stage main body P7620, the rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced. The protrusion P7633c includes a cutout P7633d.

The cutout P7633d is obtained by cutting out the upper part of the tip of the protrusion P7633c in the protrusion direction.

The second stage rotating section P7630 as described above is fitted into the second stage main body P7620 so as to receive the second stage main body P7620 through the opening P7631. Further, the second stage rotating section P7630 is provided to be rotatable about the axis facing in the vertical direction with respect to the second stage main body P7620. That is, the four protrusions P7633c can be moved in the circumferential direction immediately above the outer portion of the second stage main body P7620.

Thereby, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the second stage main body P7620 can be caused to collide with the protrusion P7633c that moves in the circumferential direction on the outer part of the second stage main body P7620. In addition, since a hole P7633b is formed in the vertical portion P7633a, even if the game ball is located behind the rolling inhibiting portion P7633, the game ball can be visually recognized by the player through the hole P7633b. can be done. That is, the player can visually see how the rolling inhibiting portion P7633 (protruding portion P7633c) comes into contact with the game ball and reduces the rolling speed of the game ball.

The second drive transmission section P7640 shown in FIGS. 249 and 259 transmits the driving force of a second motor P7741, which will be described later, to the second stage rotation section P7630 and the first drive transmission section P7540. The second drive transmission section P7640 is provided on the plate section P7613 of the second stage base section P7610. The second drive transmission section P7640 includes a second shaft P7641 and a second stage gear section P7642.

The second shaft P7641 is a part to which the driving force of the second motor P7741 is transmitted via a third drive transmission part P7740, which will be described later. The second shaft P7641 is formed in a vertically elongated cylindrical shape. The upper portion of the second shaft P7641 is inserted into the hole of the plate portion P7613, and is rotatably supported around an axis facing in the vertical direction.

The second stage gear portion P7642 transmits the driving force of the second shaft P7641 to the second stage rotating portion P7630. The second stage gear portion P7642 includes a first gear P7642a, a second gear P7642b, and a third gear P7642c.

The first gear P7642a is fixed to the upper end of the second shaft P7641. As the second shaft P7641 rotates, the first gear P7642a rotates integrally with the second shaft P7641 about an axis directed in the vertical direction.

The second gear P7642b is arranged behind the first gear P7642a. The second gear P7642b constitutes a two-stage gear that meshes with the first gear P7642a and a third gear P7642c, which will be described later. The second gear P7642b is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the plate portion P7613 about an axis facing in the vertical direction.

The third gear P7642c is fixed to the lower portion of the first shaft P7541. Third gear P7642c meshes with second gear P7642b. Further, the third gear P7642c meshes with the gear portion P7632 of the second stage rotating portion P7630. The third gear P7642c rotates integrally with the first shaft P7541.

The rotating cover portion P7650 shown in FIGS. 252, 253, and 260 covers the second stage rotating portion P7630 from the front. The rotation cover portion P7650 is formed to cover the front portion (first half) of the second stage rotation portion P7630 except for the rolling inhibition portion P7633. The rotating cover portion P7650 is fixed to the front portion of the second stage main body P7620.

Next, the configuration of the third stage part P7700 of the tower accessory P7400 will be explained.

In the third stage section P7700 shown in FIGS. 263 to 267, the game ball that has passed through the hole P7612a of the second stage section P7600 rolls, and the game ball is identified by a specific area unit P7900, which will be described later. It is distributed to the area P7911 side or the non-specific area P7912 side. The third stage part P7700 is provided in the lower part of the tower accessory P7400. The third stage section P7700 includes a third stage base section P7710, a third stage main body P7720, a third stage rotation section P7730, a third drive transmission section P7740, and a rotation cover section P7750.

The third stage base part P7710 shown in FIGS. 263 to 265 is fixed to the frame cover part P7411 of the rear frame P7410, and also includes a third stage main body P7720, a third stage rotation part P7730, and a third stage base part P7730, which will be described later. A drive transmission section P7740 is provided. The third stage base part P7710 constitutes the bottom part of the tower accessory P7400. The third stage base portion P7710 is formed into a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing up and down. The third stage base portion P7710 includes a fixing portion P7711, a gear holding portion P7712, a connecting portion P7713, and a rotation regulating shaft portion P7714.

The fixed portion P7711 shown in FIGS. 263 and 264 is a portion fixed to the frame cover portion P7411 of the rear frame P7410. The fixed part P7711 constitutes the rear end part of the third stage base part P7710. By fixing the fixing part P7711 to the frame cover part P7411, the third stage base part P7710 is fixed to the rear frame P7410.

A gear holding portion P7712 shown in FIG. 267 constitutes the left side portion of the third stage base portion P7710, and is a portion where a third drive transmission portion P7740, which will be described later, is provided. A hole through which the lower end of the second shaft P7641 is inserted is formed in the gear holding portion P7712.

A connecting portion P7713 shown in FIGS. 263 to 265 is a portion connected to a ball shaft portion P7921 of a support portion P7920 provided in a specific area unit P7900, which will be described later. The connecting portion P7713 vertically penetrates the third stage base portion P7710. The connecting portion P7713 is provided approximately at the center of the third stage portion P7700 of the tower accessory P7400 in plan view.

The rotation regulating shaft part P7714 shown in FIGS. 237 and 268 prevents rotation in the circumferential direction of the tower part P7400 about a ball shaft part P7921 (support part P7920) described later (in other words, a tower part in a plan view). This is to restrict the rotation of the object P7400. The rotation regulating shaft portion P7714 protrudes downward from the lower surface of the third stage base portion P7710. The rotation regulating shaft portion P7714 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis directed in the vertical direction. The rotation regulating shaft portion P7714 has a lower end portion having a larger diameter than the other portion. The rotation regulating shaft portion P7714 is provided so as to be located on the right rear side of the connecting portion P7713.

The third stage main body P7720 shown in FIGS. 263, 264, 266, and 267 is a portion on which the game ball that has passed through the hole P7612a of the second stage portion P7600 rolls on the upper surface. The third stage main body P7720 is fixed to the upper part of the third stage base part P7710. The third stage main body P7720 is formed into a substantially circular shape when viewed from above. The upper surface of the third stage main body P7720 is formed such that the front end thereof is inclined forward and downward. The upper surface (more specifically, the rear portion of the upper surface) of the third stage main body P7720 is formed to overlap the rear end portion (hole P7612a) of the passage portion P7612 of the second stage portion P7600 in plan view. has been done. The third stage main body P7720 communicates with the third guide portion P7424 of the front frame P7420. More specifically, the front end portion of the upper surface of the third stage main body P7720 communicates with the upper end portion of the specific area side guide portion P7424a of the third guide portion P7424. Further, the right front end and the left front end of the upper surface of the third stage main body P7720 communicate with the upper ends of the left and right non-specific area side guide parts P7424b of the third guide part P7424, respectively. The third stage main body P7720 includes a protrusion P7721.

The protrusion P7721 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the third stage main body P7720. A plurality of (10 in the illustrated example) protrusions P7721 are provided. Further, the illustrated example shows an example in which the protrusion P7721 is not provided in the central portion of the third stage main body P7720 when viewed from the front. According to the projection P7721, the rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced by coming into contact with the game ball rolling on the third stage main body P7720.

The third stage rotating portion P7730 shown in FIGS. 260, 261, 266, and 267 rotates about an axis facing in the vertical direction on the radially outer side of the third stage main body P7720. The third stage rotating portion P7730 is formed into a substantially annular shape when viewed from above. The third stage rotation section P7730 includes an opening section P7731, a gear section P7732, and a rolling inhibition section P7733.

The opening P7731 shown in FIGS. 260 and 261 is an opening that vertically passes through the third stage rotating section P7730. The inner diameter of the opening P7731 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the third stage main body P7720. The opening P7731 relatively movably receives the third stage main body P7720.

The gear portion P7732 is a portion to which the driving force of a third drive transmission portion P7740, which will be described later, is transmitted. Gear portion P7732 is formed on the radial outer peripheral surface of third stage rotating portion P7730. The gear portion P7732 meshes with a third stage gear portion P7743 of a third drive transmission portion P7740, which will be described later.

The rolling inhibition portion P7733 reduces the rolling speed of the game ball by coming into contact with the game ball rolling on the third stage main body P7720. A plurality of rolling inhibiting parts P7733 (seven in this embodiment) are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the third stage rotating part P7730. The rolling inhibiting portion P7733 includes a vertical portion P7733a and a protruding portion P7733b.

The vertical portion P7733a is a portion that projects upward from the top of the third stage rotating portion P7730. The vertical portion P7733a is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction facing the radial direction of the third stage rotating portion P7730. Further, the vertical portion P7733a is formed into a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed in the radial direction of the third stage rotating portion P7730.

The protruding portion P7733b protrudes inward in the radial direction of the third stage rotating portion P7730 from the upper end of the vertical portion P7733a. The protrusion P7733b overlaps with the outer portion of the third stage main body P7720 in plan view. The protrusion P7733b is located slightly above the upper surface of the third stage main body P7720. The protrusion P7733b is formed in a substantially triangular shape in plan view. By the protruding portion P7733b coming into contact with the game ball rolling on the third stage main body P7720, the rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced.

The third stage rotating section P7730 as described above is fitted into the third stage main body P7720 so as to receive the third stage main body P7720 through the opening P7731. Further, the third stage rotating section P7730 is provided to be rotatable about the axis facing in the vertical direction with respect to the third stage main body P7720. That is, the plurality of protrusions P7733b can be moved in the circumferential direction immediately above the outer portion of the third stage main body P7720. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the third stage main body P7720 can collide with the protrusion P7733b that moves in the circumferential direction on the outer part of the third stage main body P7720.

The third drive transmission section P7740 shown in FIGS. 249 and 267 transmits the driving force of a second motor P7741, which will be described later, to the third stage rotation section P7730 and the second drive transmission section P7640. The third drive transmission section P7740 is provided in the gear holding section P7712 of the third stage base section P7710. The third drive transmission section P7740 includes a second motor P7741, an output gear P7742, and a third stage gear section P7743.

The second motor P7741 is a drive source for the first stage main body P7530 (supporting part P7520), the second stage rotating part P7630, and the third stage rotating part P7730. The second motor P7741 is provided at the rear of the lower surface of the gear holding portion P7712. The second motor P7741 is provided such that the output shaft vertically passes through the gear holding portion P7712 and projects upward.

The output gear P7742 takes out the driving force of the second motor P7741. Output gear P7742 is fixed to the upper end of the output shaft of second motor P7741.

The third stage gear section P7743 transmits the driving force of the output gear P7742 to the third stage rotating section P7730. The third stage gear portion P7743 meshes with the gear portion P7732 of the third stage rotating portion P7730. The third stage gear part P7743 is fixed to the lower part of the second shaft P7641. Further, as the third stage gear portion P7743 rotates, the second shaft P7641 rotates about the axis facing in the vertical direction.

A rotating cover portion P7750 shown in FIGS. 260, 263, and 264 covers the third stage rotating portion P7730 from the front. The rotation cover part P7750 is formed to cover the front part (first half part) of the third stage rotation part P7730 except for the rolling inhibition part P7733. The rotating cover portion P7750 is fixed to the front portion of the third stage main body P7720.

Next, the configuration of the cover part P7800 of the tower accessory P7400 will be explained.

A cover portion P7800 shown in FIG. 237 is a decoration that covers the rear frame P7410 and the front frame P7420. The cover part P7800 includes a rear cover part P7810, a left cover part P7820, and a right cover part P7830.

The rear cover portion P7810 covers the entire rear frame P7410. The rear cover part P7810 is decorated to resemble the appearance of a tower. A plurality of openings are formed in the rear cover part P7810.

The left cover portion P7820 covers the left side portion of the front frame P7420. The left cover part P7820 is decorated to resemble the appearance of a tower. A plurality of openings are formed in the left cover part P7820.

The right cover portion P7830 covers the right side portion of the front frame P7420. The right cover part P7830 is decorated to resemble the appearance of a tower. A plurality of openings are formed in the right cover part P7830.

Next, the configuration of the specific area unit P7900 of the production device P7000 will be explained.

The specific area unit P7900 shown in FIGS. 263 to 267 has a specific area P7911 and a non-specific area P7912, and supports the tower office object P7400 from below. The specific area unit P7900 includes a base portion P7910 and a support portion P7920.

The base portion P7910 constitutes the lower part of the production device P7000. The base portion P7910 is formed into a substantially box shape that opens upward. Further, the base portion P7910 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above. The base portion P7910 is fixed to the lower portions of the front cover portion P7100 and the rear cover portion P7200 (see FIG. 236). That is, the base portion P7910 (and by extension, the specific area unit P7900) is configured to be inoperable relative to the front cover portion P7100 and the rear cover portion P7200. The base portion P7910 includes a specific area P7911, a non-specific area P7912, and a discharge passage P7913.

The specific area P7911 is for detecting passage of a game ball related to a V winning that can shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player in a jackpot gaming state. The specific area P7911 opens in the vertical direction. The specific area P7911 is located below the specific area side guide part P7424a of the third guide part P7424. Further, the upper portion of the specific region P7911 communicates with the specific region side guide portion P7424a. Further, the lower portion of the specific region P7911 communicates with a discharge passage P7913, which will be described later. The specific area P7911 includes a sensor section P7911a.

The sensor section P7911a detects a game ball passing through the specific area P7911. The sensor section P7911a is provided below the specific area P7911.

The non-specific area P7912 is for detecting the passage of a game ball that does not result in a V winning prize. The non-specific area P7912 opens in the vertical direction. A pair of non-specific areas P7912 are provided on both sides of the specific area P7911 in the left-right direction. The upper part of the non-specific area P7912 communicates with a pair of non-specific area side guide parts P7424b (see FIG. 263). That is, the lower end (downstream end) of the non-specific area side guide portion P7424b is arranged above the non-specific area P7912. Further, a lower portion of the non-specific area P7912 communicates with an external discharge passage P7130 provided in the front cover part P7100 shown in FIG. 234. The non-specific area P7912 includes a sensor section P7912a.

The sensor section P7912a detects a game ball passing through the non-specific area P7912. The sensor portion P7912a is provided below the non-specific area P7912.

The discharge passage P7913 shown in FIGS. 263 and 264 is a passage for discharging the game balls that have passed through the specific area P7911 to the outside of the specific area unit P7900. The discharge passage P7913 is formed in the shape of a passage curved downward from the upper end. The game ball discharged by the discharge passage P7913 is discharged to the outside of the game board P1100 via an appropriate passage.

The support part P7920 shown in FIGS. 264 and 265 supports the tower part P7400. The support part P7920 is provided on the upper part of the base part P7910. The support portion P7920 includes a ball shaft portion P7921, a bearing portion P7922, and a rotation restriction bearing portion P7923.

The ball shaft portion P7921 is connected to the tower accessory P7400 and serves as the axis of the turning motion (swinging motion) of the tower accessory P7400. The ball shaft portion P7921 includes a ball portion P7921a, a lower shaft portion P7921b, and an upper shaft portion P7921c.

The ball portion P7921a is a portion formed in a spherical shape. The ball portion P7921a constitutes a lower portion of the ball shaft portion P7921.

The lower shaft portion P7921b is a portion that projects downward from the ball shaft portion P7921. The lower shaft portion P7921b is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis oriented substantially in the vertical direction.

The upper shaft portion P7921c is a portion that projects upward from the ball shaft portion P7921. The upper shaft portion P7921c is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis oriented substantially in the vertical direction. The upper shaft portion P7921c is fixed to the connecting portion P7713 of the tower accessory P7400 while being inserted into the connecting portion P7713. In this way, by fixing the upper shaft portion P7921c to the connecting portion P7713, the specific area unit P7900 and tower accessory P7400 are connected to each other via the ball shaft portion P7921.

The bearing portion P7922 shown in FIG. 265 is a portion that receives the ball shaft portion P7921 so as to be able to pivot (swing). The bearing portion P7922 includes a lower bearing portion P7922a and an upper bearing portion P7922b.

The lower bearing portion P7922a constitutes the lower portion of the bearing portion P7922. The lower bearing portion P7922a has a recessed portion recessed upward. The recessed portion of the lower bearing portion P7922a is formed in a shape corresponding to the lower portion (lower half of the sphere) of the ball portion P7921a. Further, the lower bearing part P7922a has a hole through which the lower shaft part P7921b is inserted and which allows the rotational movement of the ball shaft part P7921.

The upper bearing part P7922b constitutes the upper part of the bearing part P7922. The upper bearing portion P7922b has a concave portion recessed downward. The recessed portion of the upper bearing portion P7922b is formed in a shape corresponding to the upper portion (the upper half of the sphere) of the ball portion P7921a. Further, the upper bearing part P7922b has a hole through which the upper shaft part P7921c is inserted and which allows the rotational movement of the ball shaft part P7921.

As shown in FIG. 265, when the ball shaft portion P7921 is received in the bearing portion P7922, the ball shaft portion P7921 is held so as to be able to pivot relative to the bearing portion P7922 via the upper shaft portion P7921c. That is, by connecting (fixing) the upper shaft part P7921c of the ball shaft part P7921 to the connecting part P7713 of the tower part P7400, the tower part P7400 is held so as to be able to rotate relative to the specific area unit P7900. .

The rotation regulating bearing portion P7923 shown in FIGS. 237 and 268 receives the rotation regulating shaft portion P7714 of the tower accessory P7400. The rotation regulating bearing portion P7923 is formed in a concave shape in which the upper surface of the specific area unit P7900 (more specifically, the support portion P7920) is depressed downward. The rotation regulating bearing portion P7923 is formed to be located on the right rear side of the ball shaft portion P7921. That is, the rotation regulating bearing portion P7923 is formed at a position away from the center of the pivoting movement of the tower accessory P7400 in plan view.

The rotation regulating bearing portion P7923 is formed to allow the rotating operation of the tower accessory P7400 while receiving the rotation regulating shaft portion P7714 of the tower accessory P7400. In addition, when the rotation regulating shaft part P7714 is received in the rotation regulating bearing part P7923, the rotation regulating shaft part P7714 comes into contact with the inside of the opening of the rotation regulating bearing part P7923. Rotation (rotation) of the accessory P7400 in the circumferential direction is restricted. Thereby, the tower accessory P7400 can be rotated with the front side (front frame P7420 side) of the tower accessory P7400 always facing forward (towards the player).

Below, the operation of the production device P7000 configured as described above will be explained.

In the performance device P7000, various members are configured to be able to perform their respective operations. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 268, the tower accessory P7400 performs a movement (swinging movement) in which the upper end portion turns in a circle. Further, as shown in FIGS. 244, 269 to 271, the distribution section P7360 of the drive unit P7300 swings in the left-right direction about the swing shaft section P7355. In addition, each stage of the tower accessory P7400 (first stage part P7500, second stage part P7600, and third stage part P7700) swings (see FIG. 272) or rotates (see FIG. 259 and FIG. 267)) is performed. Each of the above-mentioned operations will be explained below.

First, the turning motion (oscillating motion) of the tower accessory P7400 will be explained.

When the first motor P7353 shown in FIG. 245 etc. provided in the drive unit P7300 is driven, the output gear P7354 rotates. As a result, drive gear P7370 meshing with output gear P7354 rotates. The first motor P7353 is driven according to a control signal from a predetermined control means.

As shown in FIG. 245 and the like, a disk portion P7380 is provided in an opening P7372 provided at a position eccentric to the center of the drive gear P7370. As the drive gear P7370 rotates, the disc part P7380 provided in the opening P7372 slides on the opening P7372 and rotates around the circle of the drive gear P7370, as shown in FIGS. 244 and 269 to 271. It moves in a circular trajectory around the heart in plan view. The illustrated example shows an example in which the disk portion P7380 is moved clockwise in plan view.

In this way, when the disc part P7380 moves, the upper end part P7413 (see FIG. 238, etc.) of the tower part P7400 (rear frame P7410) fixed to the disc part P7380 moves around the center of the drive gear P7370 together with the disc part P7380. moves in a circular trajectory when viewed from above. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 265 etc., the lower end portion (third stage portion P7700) of the tower accessory P7400 is identified via the ball shaft portion P7921 (that is, centered approximately at the center of the lower end portion). It is rotatably held by the support portion P7920 of the area unit P7900. As a result, when the upper end P7413 of the tower part P7400 moves around the center of the drive gear P7370, the tower part P7400 moves forward, backward, left and right, centering on the support part P7920 of the specific area unit P7900. (with the axis extending in the longitudinal direction of the tower accessory P7400 being inclined with respect to the vertical direction).

In addition, at this time, the rotation regulating shaft portion P7714 of the tower accessory P7400 comes into contact with the inside of the opening of the rotation regulating bearing portion P7923, so that the tower accessory P7400 is rotated in the circumferential direction with the support portion P7920 as the axis. Rotation (rotation) is regulated. Thereby, the tower accessory P7400 turns with the front side (front frame P7420 side) always facing forward (toward the player).

A game in which the tower accessory P7400 rolls on the first stage part P7500, the second stage part P7600, and the third stage part P7700 by executing a turning motion (swinging motion) of the tower accessory P7400. It is possible to change the movement of the ball and improve the interest of the game.

Next, the swinging operation of the distribution section P7360 of the drive unit P7300 will be explained.

As the tower accessory P7400 rotates, the swing transmission part P7413e provided at the upper end P7413 of the tower accessory P7400 swings, so that the distribution part P7360 moves left and right around the rocking shaft part P7355. swing in the direction. Below, using FIG. 244 and FIGS. 269 to 271, the operation of the distribution part P7360 when the tower service object P7400 rotates clockwise in a plan view will be described.

FIG. 244 shows a state in which the tower accessory P7400 is tilted forward (a state in which the upper end portion P7413 is located forward). In this state, the swing transmission section P7413e is located at the front end of the guide groove section P7361d of the distribution section P7360. Further, in this state, the distribution section P7360 is in a state facing forward. Here, the distribution section P7360 is biased to the right by a spring section P7352. Moreover, the rightward movement of the distribution part P7360 due to the biasing force of the spring part P7352 is restricted by the rightward facing surface of the guide groove part P7361d being in contact with the swing transmission part P7413e.

As shown in FIG. 269, when the tower accessory P7400 tilts to the left (the upper end P7413 is located to the left), the swing transmission part P7413e moves inside the guide groove P7361d toward the rear end. While moving (sliding) relatively toward the guide groove P7361d, the guide groove P7361d is pressed to the left against the biasing force of the spring P7352. In the state shown in FIG. 269, the swing transmitting portion P7413e is located in the middle of the guide groove portion P7361d of the distribution portion P7360 in the front-rear direction. Further, the swing transmission section P7413e is located to the left of the position shown in FIG. 244 (the position where the distribution section P7360 faces forward) in the left-right direction. In this way, the distribution part P7360 swings toward the left by being pressed along with the operation of the swing transmission part P7413e.

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, when the tower part P7400 moves backward (the upper end P7413 is located backward), the swing transmission part P7413e moves the inside of the guide groove P7361d to the rear end. Move (slide) relatively toward the side. In the state shown in FIG. 270, the swing transmission section P7413e is located at the rear end of the guide groove section P7361d of the distribution section P7360. Moreover, the swing transmission part P7413e is located at the same position in the left-right direction as the position shown in FIG. 244 (the position where the distribution part P7360 faces forward). In this way, the swing transmission section P7413e moves rearward as shown in FIG. 270 from the position shown in FIG. 269, thereby allowing the distribution section P7360 to move to the right. As a result, the distribution part P7360 swings forward due to the biasing force of the spring part P7352.

Further, as shown in FIG. 271, when the tower accessory P7400 moves to the right (the upper end P7413 is located to the right), the swing transmission part P7413e moves the inside of the guide groove P7361d toward the front end. Move (slide) relatively towards. In the state shown in FIG. 271, the swing transmitting portion P7413e is located in the middle of the guide groove portion P7361d of the distribution portion P7360 in the front-rear direction. Further, the swing transmitting portion P7413e is located to the right of the position shown in FIG. 244 (the position where the distribution portion P7360 faces forward) in the left-right direction. In this way, the swing transmission section P7413e moves forward from the position shown in FIG. 270 as shown in FIG. 271, thereby allowing further movement of the distribution section P7360 to the right. As a result, the distribution section P7360 swings toward the right due to the biasing force of the spring section P7352.

In this embodiment, since the distribution part P7360 is biased to the right by the spring part P7352 shown in FIG. 244, the guide groove part P7361d of the distribution part P7360 is always brought into contact with the swing transmission part P7413e. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent play from occurring in the operation of the distribution part P7360 when, for example, the direction in which the inside of the guide groove part P7361d of the swing transmission part P7413e is pressed is changed, and The driving force can be smoothly transmitted to the distribution part P7360.

Next, the operation of each stage (first stage part P7500, second stage part P7600, and third stage part P7700) of the tower accessory P7400 will be explained.

When the second motor P7741 provided in the third drive transmission section P7740 of the third stage section P7700 shown in FIGS. 249 and 267 is driven, the output gear P7742 rotates. The second motor P7741 is driven in accordance with a control signal from a predetermined control means.

The rotation of output gear P7742 is transmitted to third stage rotating section P7730 via third stage gear section P7743. Thereby, the third stage rotating section P7730 rotates with respect to the third stage main body P7720. That is, the rolling inhibiting portion P7733 (protruding portion P7733b) of the third stage rotating portion P7730 moves (rotates) the outer portion of the third stage main body P7720 in the circumferential direction.

When the rolling inhibiting part P7733 (protruding part P7733b) of the third stage rotating part P7730 that rotates as described above hits the game ball on the third stage main body P7720, there is a change in the movement of the game ball. This can improve the interest of the game.

Further, the rotation of the third stage gear portion P7743 is transmitted to the second drive transmission portion P7640 of the second stage portion P7600 shown in FIGS. 249 and 259 via the second shaft P7641. That is, the first gear P7642a of the second drive transmission section P7640 (second stage gear section P7642) rotates as the second shaft P7641 rotates. The rotation of the first gear P7642a is transmitted to the second stage rotating section P7630 via the second gear P7642b and the third gear P7642c. Thereby, the second stage rotating section P7630 rotates with respect to the second stage main body P7620. That is, the rolling inhibiting portion P7633 (protruding portion P7633c) of the second stage rotating portion P7630 moves (rotates) the outer portion of the second stage main body P7620 in the circumferential direction.

When the rolling inhibiting part P7633 (protruding part P7633c) of the second stage rotating part P7630 that rotates as described above hits the game ball on the second stage main body P7620, there is a change in the movement of the game ball. This can improve the interest of the game.

Further, the rotation of the third gear P7642c is transmitted to the first drive transmission section P7540 of the first stage section P7500 shown in FIGS. 255 and 256 via the first shaft P7541. That is, the first stage gear part P7542 of the first drive transmission part P7540 rotates as the first shaft P7541 rotates. The rotation of the first stage gear part P7542 is transmitted to the swing transmission part P7543. Thereby, the swing transmission part P7543 rotates around the axis facing in the vertical direction.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 256, 257, and 272, the engaging portion P7523 of the support portion P7520 is engaged with the spiral portion P7543c of the swing transmitting portion P7543. As the swing transmission part P7543 rotates, the spiral part P7543c slides with respect to the engaging part P7523 while being engaged with the engaging part P7523. At this time, since the spiral portion P7543c is formed in a helical shape, the height position of the portion where the spiral portion P7543c and the engagement portion P7523 engage (i.e., the engagement portion The height position of the joint P7523 changes. Here, the engaging portion P7523 is provided at a position shifted to the left from the position that is the center of swing of the first stage main body P7530. Therefore, the support part P7520 and the first stage main body P7530 swing about the swing shaft part P7411a and the swing shaft part P7513 shown in FIG. 253 as the height position of the engagement part P7523 changes.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 272(a), when the engaging portion P7523 is at the highest position, the supporting portion P7520 and the first stage main body P7530 tilt to the right (the right side moves downward). ). Further, as shown in FIG. 272(b), when the engaging portion P7523 is at the lowest position, the supporting portion P7520 and the first stage main body P7530 are tilted to the left (the left side moves downward). to sway. In this way, the support part P7520 and the first stage main body P7530 swing to the right or to the left every time the swing transmission part P7543 makes a half rotation. Thereby, it is possible to change the movement of the game ball on the first stage main body P7530, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this way, the performance device P7000 that executes various operations is configured to be able to introduce the game ball rolling in the game area P1120 into the interior as described above, and also allows the game ball to be introduced into the specific area P7911 side or the non-specific area. It can be distributed to the P7912 side, etc. Below, the manner of rolling of the game ball introduced into the presentation device P7000 will be explained.

First, the manner in which the game ball rolls within the drive unit P7300 of the presentation device P7000 will be described.

The game balls rolling in the game area P1120 are introduced into the production device P7000 from the supply section P7121 shown in FIG. 235 and the like. Then, as shown in FIG. 250 etc., the game balls introduced from the supply section P7121 are first guided to the croon section P7320. Specifically, the game ball introduced from the supply part P7121 passes through the supply passage part P7322 of the croon part P7320 and is guided to the croon main body P7321.

Here, the downstream side of the supply passage portion P7322 is opened in the direction along the circumferential direction at the outer portion of the clone body P7321 in plan view. Therefore, the game ball guided from the supply passage part P7322 to the Cloon main body P7321 rolls around the Cloon main body P7321 (around the three holes P7321a) so as to rotate in the circumferential direction. Then, as the rolling momentum of the game ball decreases, the game ball approaches the center side (three holes P7321a side) of the clone main body P7321, and finally falls downward from any of the three holes P7321a. Fall.

The game ball falling from the clone main body P7321 (three holes P7321a) is then guided to the drive base part P7330. Specifically, the game balls falling from the three holes P7321a are received at the bottom of the drive base main body part P7331 of the drive base part P7330, and roll on the bottom.

Here, at the bottom of the drive base main body part P7331, a rolling guide part P7331a is provided in front of the place where the game balls falling from the three holes P7321a are received (in other words, in the direction in which the received game balls roll). Convex portions are also formed (on the left and right sides of the rolling guide portion P7331a). Therefore, the game ball rolling on the drive base main body part P7331 moves forward on the rolling guide part P7331a while colliding with the left and right convex parts, for example.

In this embodiment, among the three holes P7321a of the croon main body P7321, the game ball that falls from the hole P7321a in the center in the left-right direction is relatively unlikely to collide with the convex portion, so the rolling guide portion P7331a is moved forward. Easy to move smoothly (relatively straight). On the other hand, since the game balls that have fallen from the other two holes P7321a are relatively likely to collide with the convex portions, it is difficult to smoothly move the rolling guide portion P7331a forward. In this way, the game ball that has rolled toward the front end of the rolling guide portion P7331a falls from the front end of the rolling guide portion P7331a.

Here, below the front end of the rolling guide part P7331a, the front end of the distribution part P7360 (more specifically, the front end of the passage part P7361b of the distribution part P7360 and the left and right inclined parts P7364) are located below the front end of the rolling guide part P7331a. It is located. Further, a discharge guide portion P7340 is arranged below the front end portion of the distribution portion P7360. Further, the distribution section P7360 swings left and right. Therefore, the destination of the game ball falling from the front end of the rolling guide part P7331a is changed depending on the timing (the position where the game ball falls and the position of the distribution part P7360 when falling).

Specifically, when the game ball falls, if the passage part P7361b of the distribution part P7360 is located at the position where the game ball fell, the fallen game ball will fall into the passage part P7361b (distribution part P7360). can be accepted. On the other hand, when the game ball falls, if the passage part P7361b of the distribution part P7360 is not located at the position where the game ball has fallen (shifted from side to side) (see FIGS. 269 and 271), , the fallen game ball is not received by the passage part P7361b, collides with the edge (side plate) of the passage part P7361b and the left and right inclined parts P7364, and is guided to the discharge guide part P7340. In this way, the destination of the game balls falling from the rolling guide portion P7331a is changed (distributed) depending on the timing.

In addition, among the game balls guided to the discharge guide part P7340, the game balls that roll toward the left end side of the discharge guide part P7340 are again passed through the left discharge part P7122 (not shown) of the front cover part P7100. It is discharged to the game area P1120. Further, the game ball rolling toward the right end of the discharge guide portion P7340 is discharged to the back side (rear surface) of the game board P1100 via the right side discharge portion P7122 of the front cover portion P7100.

Moreover, the game ball received by the passage part P7361b (distributing part P7360) rolls toward the rear end side of the passage part P7361b. When the game ball reaches the rear end of the passage P7361b, it passes through the hole P7361c and falls downward. The game ball falling from the distribution part P7360 (hole P7361c) is then guided to the upper end part P7413 of the tower part P7400 via the opening part P7381 of the disc part P7380. That is, the game ball falling from the distribution part P7360 (hole P7361c) is discharged from the drive unit P7300, and then introduced into the tower accessory P7400.

Next, the manner of rolling of the game ball in the tower accessory P7400 of the performance device P7000 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 250, the game ball guided to the upper end P7413 of the tower accessory P7400 rolls on the upper surface of the main body P7413a of the upper end P7413, and then passes through the hole P7413c and falls downward. .

The game ball falling from the upper end portion P7413 (hole P7413c) is then guided to the first stage portion P7500. Specifically, the game ball falling from the hole P7413c is received by the first stage body P7530 of the first stage part P7500, and rolls on the first stage body P7530.

Here, as shown in FIG. 252, the first stage main body P7530 has a second stage located ahead of the place where the game ball falling from the hole P7413c is received (that is, in the direction in which the received game ball rolls). A first wall portion P7532 and a second wall portion P7533 are formed. Moreover, the tower accessory P7400 and the first stage part P7500 perform mutually different operations (swivel operation and rocking operation). Therefore, the game ball moving forward on the first stage main body P7530 is influenced by the movements of the tower accessory P7400 and the first stage part P7500, and the game ball moves forward on the first wall part P7532 and the second wall part P7533. It moves forward (gradually moving in irregular directions) while colliding with each other.

The game ball that has rolled to the front end of the left and right center of the first stage main body P7530 falls downward from the passage part P7531 of the first stage main body P7530. On the other hand, the game ball that rolled from the left and right center of the first stage main body P7530 to the front end that was shifted left and right falls downward from the position that was shifted left and right of the passage section P7531 (not from the passage section P7531). do.

Here, the second stage section side guide section P7422a of the first guide section P7422 is arranged below the passage section P7531 of the first stage main body P7530. In this way, the game ball that has fallen from the passing portion P7531 is received by the second stage side guide portion P7422a and rolls backward on the second stage side guide portion P7422a. The game ball that has rolled backward on the second stage side guide portion P7422a is guided by the passage portion P7512, passes through the hole portion P7512a, and falls.

On the other hand, the discharge passage side guide part P7422b of the first guide part P7422 is arranged below the passage part P7531 of the first stage main body P7530 at a position shifted to the left and right. In this way, the game ball that has fallen from a position shifted to the left and right of the passage part P7531 is received by the discharge passage side guide part P7422b, and the discharge passage of the front support part P7421 (as shown in FIG. 240 etc.) is received by the discharge passage side guide part P7422b. P7421a. In this way, the destination of the game balls guided to the first stage part P7500 is changed (distributed) depending on where they fall from the first stage main body P7530. In addition, the game ball guided to the discharge path P7421a is guided to the non-specific area P7912 of the specific area unit P7900 via the non-specific area side guide part P7424b of the third stage part P7700.

The game ball falling from the hole P7512a of the first stage part P7500 is then guided to the second stage part P7600. Specifically, the game ball falling from the hole P7512a is received by the second stage body P7620 of the second stage part P7600, and rolls on the second stage body P7620.

Here, the upper surface of the second stage main body P7620 is formed into a substantially dish shape with the center side inclined downward. Furthermore, four protrusions P7633c of the rolling inhibiting portion P7633 are moving in the circumferential direction immediately above the outer portion of the second stage main body P7620. Moreover, the tower accessory P7400 is performing a turning operation. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the second stage body P7620 is a protrusion that rolls or moves toward the center according to the inclination of the second stage body P7620 while being influenced by the operation of the tower accessory P7400. It moves in an irregular direction by colliding with part P7633c. In this way, the game ball rolling on the second stage main body P7620 will finally pass through the passage part P7621 and fall downward, or will be discharged from the right front end and left front end of the second stage main body P7620. It falls to the side guide part P7423b.

In this way, the game ball that has fallen from the passage section P7621 is received by the passage section P7612 of the second stage base section P7610, and rolls backward through the passage section P7612. The game ball that has rolled backward through the passage P7612 passes through the hole P7612a and falls downward. On the other hand, the game ball that has moved to the discharge passage guide part P7423b is guided to the discharge passage P7421a of the front support part P7421 (shown in FIG. 240 etc.) by the discharge passage guide part P7423b. In this way, the destination of the game balls guided to the second stage part P7600 is changed (distributed) according to the place where they fall from the second stage main body P7620.

As shown in FIGS. 252 and 263, the game ball falling from the hole P7612a of the second stage P7600 is then guided to the third stage P7700. Specifically, the game ball falling from the hole P7612a is received by the third stage body P7720 of the third stage part P7700, and rolls on the third stage body P7720.

Here, as shown in FIG. 263, the upper surface of the third stage main body P7720 has a front end portion inclined forward and downward, and a plurality of protrusions P7721 are formed. Furthermore, a plurality of protrusions P7733b of the rolling inhibiting portion P7733 are moving in the circumferential direction immediately above the outer portion of the third stage main body P7720. Moreover, the tower accessory P7400 is performing a turning operation. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the third stage main body P7720 is affected by the operation of the tower accessory P7400 and rolls forward according to the inclination of the third stage main body P7720, and the protrusion P7721 and By colliding with the moving protrusion P7733b, it moves in an irregular direction. In this way, the game ball rolling on the third stage main body P7720 falls from the front end of the third stage main body P7720 to the specific area side guide part P7424a of the third guide part P7424, or the game ball rolls on the third stage main body P7720. It falls from the front end and left front end of the main body P7720 to the non-specific area side guide part P7424b of the third guide part P7424.

In this way, the game ball that has fallen to the specific area guide part P7424a is guided to the specific area P7911 of the specific area unit P7900 by the specific area guide part P7424a. On the other hand, the game ball that has fallen to the non-specific area guide part P7424b is guided to the non-specific area P7912 of the specific area unit P7900 by the non-specific area guide part P7424b. In this way, the destination of the game balls guided to the third stage part P7700 is changed (distributed) according to the place where they fall from the third stage main body P7720.

In this way, in the performance device P7000, the various members are configured to be able to perform their own actions, and the game balls introduced inside can be distributed in multiple stages to the specific area P7911 side and the non-specific area P7912 side. . Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-59498).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine equipped with a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance by rotating.

In such gaming machines, it is desired to further improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
Comprising a first movable body (drive gear P7370), a second movable body (tower accessory P7400), and a third movable body (distribution part P7360),
The first movable body (drive gear P7370) can be operated by a driving force from a first drive source (first motor P7353),
The second movable body (tower accessory P7400) is in contact with the first movable body (drive gear P7370) and can operate in accordance with the operation of the first movable body (drive gear P7370),
The third movable body (distributing part P7360) is in contact with the second movable body (tower part P7400) and can operate in accordance with the movement of the second movable body (tower part P7400). can be,
The second movable body (tower part P7400) and the third movable body (distribution part P7360) operate in different operation modes.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the second movable body (tower object P7400) is movable with a predetermined portion (front portion) always facing the player.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, the first movable body (drive gear P7370) and the second movable body (tower part P7400) are in sliding contact with each other.

With such a configuration, the second movable body (tower part P7400) can be operated using the operation of the first movable body (drive gear P7370).

Moreover, the second movable body (tower part P7400) and the third movable body (distribution part P7360) are in sliding contact with each other.

With such a configuration, the third movable body (distribution unit P7360) can be operated using the operation of the second movable body (tower accessory P7400).

Further, the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) includes a flow path for the game ball supplied to the second movable body (tower accessory P7400),
The third movable body (distributing part P7360) is provided with a guide path (passage part P7361b) that guides the game ball to the second movable body (tower part P7400).

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, the operation mode of the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) is a rotating operation or a swinging operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, the operation mode of the third movable body (distributing section P7360) is a swinging operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, the third movable body (distributing section P7360) moves the game balls that have arrived at a predetermined timing according to the operation of the third movable body (distributing section P7360) to the guide path (path section P7361b). ) to the second movable body (tower accessory P7400).

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, it is equipped with a winning device (specific area unit P7900) that can detect the winning of the game ball that has passed through the flow path of the second movable body (tower accessory P7400),
The second movable body (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with a specific area P7911) and a second flow path different from the first flow path (a non-specific area P7912). a flow path communicating with the
The prize winning device (specific area unit P7900) includes a first detection unit (specific area P7911) that detects winning of a game ball that has passed through the first channel (channel communicating with the specific area P7911); It is provided with a second detection section (non-specific area P7912) that detects winning of the game ball that has passed through the second channel (channel communicating with non-specific area P7912).

Such a configuration allows the game balls to be distributed.

Further, it is equipped with a winning device (specific area unit P7900) that can detect the winning of the game ball that has passed through the flow path of the second movable body (tower accessory P7400),
The second movable body (tower accessory P7400) is in contact with the first movable body (drive gear P7370) at an upper portion, and is movable with respect to the award device (specific area unit P7900) at a lower portion. It is supported.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily win a game ball that has passed through the second movable body (tower object P7400).

Further, the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). is equipped with a different second flow path (a flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912), and can be operated by the driving force from the second drive source (second motor P7741), and the second flow path communicates with the non-specific region P7912. The game balls supplied to the movable body (tower accessory P7400) are transferred to the first channel (channel communicating to the specific area P7911) or the second channel (channel communicating to the non-specific area P7912) It is provided with a distribution section (a first stage section P7500, a second stage section P7600, and a third stage section P7700) that can be distributed to the following stages.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). is equipped with a different second flow path (a flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912), and the game balls supplied to the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) are transferred to the first flow path ( A distribution section (a first stage section P7500, a second stage section P7600, and a first stage section P7500, a second stage section P7600, 3 stage part P7700),
A plurality of the distribution sections (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) are provided in the vertical direction.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). is equipped with a different second flow path (a flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912), and the game balls supplied to the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) are transferred to the first flow path ( A distribution section (a first stage section P7500, a second stage section P7600, and a first stage section P7500, a second stage section P7600, 3 stage part P7700),
A plurality of the distribution sections (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) are provided in the vertical direction,
The plurality of distribution sections (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) operate in a plurality of different operation modes.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). is equipped with a different second flow path (a flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912), and the game balls supplied to the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) are transferred to the first flow path ( A distribution section (a first stage section P7500, a second stage section P7600, and a first stage section P7500, a second stage section P7600, 3 stage part P7700),
A plurality of the distribution sections (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) are provided in the vertical direction,
The plurality of distribution parts (first stage part P7500, second stage part P7600 and third stage part P7700) operate in a plurality of different operation modes,
The plurality of operation modes include at least rotational operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). is equipped with a different second flow path (a flow path communicating with the non-specific area P7912), and the game balls supplied to the second movable body (tower accessory P7400) are transferred to the first flow path ( A distribution section (a first stage section P7500, a second stage section P7600, and a first stage section P7500, a second stage section P7600, 3 stage part P7700),
A plurality of the distribution sections (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) are provided in the vertical direction,
The plurality of distribution parts (first stage part P7500, second stage part P7600 and third stage part P7700) operate in a plurality of different operation modes,
The plurality of operation modes include at least a swinging operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

As stated in parentheses above,
The drive gear P7370 is one form of the first movable body.
Moreover, the tower accessory P7400 is one form of a second movable body.
Furthermore, the distribution section P7360 is one form of a third movable body.
Further, the passage portion P7361b is one form of a guideway.
Furthermore, the first stage section P7500, the second stage section P7600, and the third stage section P7700 are one form of a distribution section.
Further, the specific area unit P7900 is one form of a winning device.
Further, the specific area P7911 is one form of the first detection section.
Further, the non-specific area P7912 is one form of the second detection section.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A gaming machine having a structure including a first part (tower accessory P7400), a second part (distribution part P7360), and a base part (specific area unit P7900),
The first part (tower accessory P7400) includes a flow path for the game ball supplied to the first part (tower accessory P7400),
The second part (distributing part P7360) includes a guide path (passage part P7361b) that guides the game ball to the first part (tower object P7400),
The base part (specific area unit P7900) is equipped with a detection means (sensor part P7911a) capable of detecting winning of a game ball that has passed through the channel of the first part (tower accessory P7400),
At least one of the first part (tower accessory P7400) and the second part (distribution part P7360) is movable with respect to the base part (specific area unit P7900).

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
Both the first part (tower accessory P7400) and the second part (distribution part P7360) are movable with respect to the base part (specific area unit P7900).

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, the second part (distribution part P7360) is movable with respect to the base part (specific area unit P7900),
The game ball that has arrived at the second part (distributing part P7360) at a predetermined timing is guided to the first part (tower accessory P7400) via the guide path (passage part P7361b). .

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the first part (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). It is provided with a different second flow path (a flow path communicating with the non-specific region P7912).

Such a configuration allows the game balls to be distributed.

In addition, the first part (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). A different second flow path (a flow path that communicates with the non-specific area P7912) is provided, and the game balls supplied to the first part (tower accessory P7400) are communicated with the first flow path (the specific area P7911). (the first stage section P7500, the second stage section P7600, and the third stage section P7700) that can be distributed to the second channel (the channel communicating with the non-specific region P7912) ).

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the first part (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). A different second flow path (a flow path that communicates with the non-specific area P7912) is provided, and the game balls supplied to the first part (tower accessory P7400) are communicated with the first flow path (the specific area P7911). or the second flow path (the flow path communicating with the non-specific region P7912);
A plurality of the distribution sections are provided,
The first flow path (communicating to the specific region P7911) of the upstream distribution section among the plurality of distribution sections (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) The game balls that have passed through the flow path can be transferred to the distribution section on the downstream side.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the first part (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). A different second flow path (a flow path that communicates with the non-specific area P7912) is provided, and the game balls supplied to the first part (tower accessory P7400) are communicated with the first flow path (the specific area P7911). (the first stage section P7500, the second stage section P7600, and the third stage section P7700) that can be distributed to the second channel (the channel communicating with the non-specific region P7912) ),
The distribution section (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) has a deceleration section (rolling speed) that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the distribution section. It is equipped with an inhibiting part P7633).

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the first part (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). A different second flow path (a flow path that communicates with the non-specific area P7912) is provided, and the game balls supplied to the first part (tower accessory P7400) are communicated with the first flow path (the specific area P7911). (the first stage section P7500, the second stage section P7600, and the third stage section P7700) that can be distributed to the second channel (the channel communicating with the non-specific region P7912) ),
The distribution section (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) has a deceleration section (rolling speed) that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the distribution section. Inhibition part P7633, projection part P7721, rolling inhibition part P7733),
The speed reduction part (rolling inhibition part P7633, projection part P7721, rolling inhibition part P7733) reduces the rolling speed of the game ball by coming into contact with the game ball rolling on the distribution part. .

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the first part (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). A different second flow path (a flow path that communicates with the non-specific area P7912) is provided, and the game balls supplied to the first part (tower accessory P7400) are communicated with the first flow path (the specific area P7911). a distribution section (a second stage section P7600 and a third stage section P7700) that can be distributed to the second channel (the channel communicating with the non-specific region P7912);
The distribution section (second stage section P7600 and third stage section P7700) includes a deceleration section (rolling inhibition section P7633, protrusion section P7721) that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the distribution section. , a rolling inhibition part P7733),
The speed reducing portion (rolling inhibiting portion P7633, protruding portion P7721, rolling inhibiting portion P7733) is formed in the shape of a protrusion that protrudes in one direction.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the first part (tower accessory P7400) has a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911) and a first flow path (a flow path communicating with the specific area P7911). A different second flow path (a flow path that communicates with the non-specific area P7912) is provided, and the game balls supplied to the first part (tower accessory P7400) are communicated with the first flow path (the specific area P7911). a distribution part (second stage part P7600) that can be distributed to the second flow path (the flow path communicating with the non-specific region P7912);
The distribution section (second stage section P7600) includes a deceleration section (rolling inhibition section P7633) that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the distribution section,
The sorting section (first stage section P7500, second stage section P7600, and third stage section P7700) distributes the game balls whose rolling speed has been reduced by the speed reduction section (rolling inhibition section P7633), It is provided with a viewing part (hole P7633b) that can be seen by the player.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, the first part (tower accessory P7400), the second part (distribution part P7360), and the base part (specific area unit P7900) are separate members.

With such a configuration, the operable member and the inoperable member can be separate members.

As stated in parentheses above,
The tower accessory P7400 is one form of the first part.
Furthermore, the distribution section P7360 is one form of the second section.
Further, the passage portion P7361b is one form of a guideway.
Further, the first stage section P7500, the second stage section P7600, and the third stage section P7700 are one form of a distribution section.
Further, the rolling inhibiting portion P7633, the protruding portion P7721, and the rolling inhibiting portion P7733 are one form of a speed reducer.
Moreover, the hole P7633b is one form of a visual recognition part.
Further, the specific area unit P7900 is one form of a base portion.
Further, the specific area P7911 is one form of the first detection section.
Further, the non-specific area P7912 is one form of the second detection section.

Although the fourth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various changes can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which both the tower accessory P7400 and the distribution section P7360 are operated for the specific area unit P7900, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, one of the tower accessory P7400 and the distribution section P7360 may be configured to operate with respect to the specific area unit P7900.

Further, in this embodiment, the tower accessory P7400 is configured to be capable of turning movement (swinging movement), but it is not limited to such an aspect. As the motion of the tower accessory P7400, various motions that can distribute game balls, such as a swinging motion, a rotating motion, and a reciprocating motion, can be adopted.

Further, in this embodiment, the distribution section P7360 is configured to be able to swing, but is not limited to such a configuration. As the operation of the distribution part P7360, various operations that can distribute the game balls, such as a turning operation, a rotating operation, and a reciprocating operation, can be adopted, for example.

In addition, in this embodiment, a rolling inhibiting part P7633 of the second stage part P7600, a rolling inhibiting part P7733 and a protruding part P7721 of the third stage part P7700 are provided to inhibit the rolling of the game ball. Although an example has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. Examples of things that obstruct the rolling of the game ball include a plate-shaped member (for example, a shutter) that is configured to move forward and backward from the front surface (rolling surface) of the game area P1120 with the plate surface facing up and down. ), it is possible to adopt various configurations that can inhibit the rolling of game balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, by providing the hole P7633b in the rolling inhibition portion P7633 of the second stage portion P7600, the game ball that rolls on the second stage main body P7620 via the hole P7633b. Although an example has been shown in which it is possible to visually recognize the images, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. As a configuration that allows the game balls on the stage (for example, the second stage part P7600) to be visually recognized, for example, the whole or part of the rolling inhibiting part P7633 may be made of a transparent material, or a prize opening may be formed. Various configurations can be adopted, such as forming the front side surfaces of various units arranged in the game area P1120, such as units and attacker units, from a transparent material.

Further, in this embodiment, the movable accessory (tower accessory P7400) is modeled after a tower, but the shape of the movable accessory is not limited to this, and various shapes can be adopted. It is.

Further, in this embodiment, a display device 7 as shown in FIG. 4 may be provided in order to display effect images and decorative patterns. That is, the display device 7 may display decorative symbols variably to display the results of the special symbol hit determination processing, performance images corresponding to the results of the special symbol hit determination processing, performance images during the jackpot game state, and demonstration images. It is possible to display a performance image, a performance image showing the pending status of variable display of special symbols, etc.

In addition, the movable accessory (tower accessory P7400) of this embodiment is not installed in a single type or 1 type and 2 type mixed pachinko game machine, but is installed in a so-called 2 type pachinko game machine. You can also do that.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is illustrated in which the distribution unit P7360 is made into a "movable winning slot" by guiding game balls received at a predetermined timing to the specific area P7911 (where winnings are possible). However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, receiving a game ball at the tip of the passage section P7361b of the distribution section P7360 itself (that is, detection by a predetermined sensor that a game ball has been received at the tip of the passage section P7361b) may be considered as winning. Moreover, in that case, winning to the distribution part P7360 may be winning to the first or second starting port, or may be winning to a specific area.

Further, in this embodiment, a configuration is illustrated in which the unit (specific area unit P7900) at the lower end of the production device P7000 has a specific area where prizes can be won, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the unit at the lower end of the performance device P7000 may be configured to have a first or second starting opening through which prizes can be won.

Below, a pachinko gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that components that are the same or similar to those of the embodiments described above will be given the same names or the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

The pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment differs greatly from the pachinko game machines according to the first to fourth embodiments in that it includes a presentation device C1000. Below, the configuration of the production device C1000 will be explained using FIGS. 273 to 288. Note that in the above drawings, illustrations of members are appropriately omitted for convenience of explanation. For example, in FIGS. 276 to 278, illustration of the logo accessory C1500 is omitted.

The performance device C1000 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. The presentation device C1000 is installed above the game board P1100. The performance device C1000 mainly includes a movable performance accessory C1100, a drive mechanism C1200, a holding mechanism C1300, a shock absorbing means C1400, and a logo accessory C1500.

The logo accessory C1500 shown in FIGS. 273 to 275 is appropriately decorated. Specifically, the logo accessory C1500 is decorated to resemble a logo consisting of appropriate characters (for example, "ABC"). The logo accessory C1500 is arranged in front of the movable performance accessory C1100. Note that the logo accessory C1500 and the movable performance accessory C1100 are configured to be movable relative to each other.

The movable performance accessory C1100 shown in FIGS. 273 to 279 etc. performs performance by moving. Specifically, the movable performance accessory C1100 is provided so as to be movable up and down by a drive mechanism C1200, which will be described later. The movable performance accessory C1100 is provided with its longitudinal direction facing left and right. The operation of the movable performance accessory C1100 is controlled by a performance operation control circuit 89. Although details will be described later, the movable performance accessory C1100 can be placed in a position before performing a performance (standby position shown in FIG. 289), or in a position below the standby position while performing a performance (FIG. 291). (the intermediate position shown in FIG. 295), and a position below the intermediate position (the protruding position shown in FIG. 295) when performing a performance. The movable performance accessory C1100 mainly includes a harpoon accessory C1120 and a support C1130.

The harpoon accessory C1120 shown in FIGS. 276 to 279 and the like is decorated with appropriate decorations, and performs effects by moving. Specifically, the harpoon accessory C1120 is decorated to resemble a harpoon. The harpoon accessory C1120 is provided behind the logo accessory C1500. The harpoon accessory C1120 mainly includes an accessory decoration body C1121, a light guide plate C1122, an accessory illumination board C1123, and a base portion C1124.

The accessory decoration body C1121 shown in FIGS. 276, 278, and 279 is a part that is decorated with appropriate decorations and is movable when performing a performance. The accessory decoration C1121 is formed in a shape imitating a harpoon. The accessory decoration C1121 mainly includes a first decoration C1121a, a second decoration C1121b, and a first decorative lens C1121c.

The first decorative body C1121a is formed in a shape resembling a harpoon. The first decorative body C1121a is provided with its longitudinal direction facing up and down. The first decorative body C1121a is provided at the left and right center of the accessory decorative body C1121. An opening that passes through the first decorative body C1121a in the front and back directions is formed at approximately the center of the first decorative body C1121a when viewed from the front, and a second decorative lens C1121d formed of a transparent material is installed in the opening. It is provided. The second decorative lens C1121d is formed into a substantially diamond shape when viewed from the front.

The second decorative body C1121b is formed in a shape resembling a harpoon. The second decorative body C1121b is provided with its longitudinal direction facing up and down. The second decorative body C1121b is provided on the left and right sides of the first decorative body C1121a, respectively. The second decorative body C1121b is formed to be rotatable clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front about the upper part of the second decorative body C1121b by a drive mechanism (not shown).

The first decorative lens C1121c is formed of a transparent material. The first decorative lens C1121c is provided between the first decorative body C1121a and the left and right second decorative bodies C1121b, respectively.

The light guide plate C1122 shown in FIG. 279 etc. diffuses light. The light guide plate C1122 is provided with its plate surface facing forward and backward, and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. The light guide plate C1122 is provided behind the accessory decoration C1121.

The accessory illumination board C1123 shown in FIG. 279 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape. The accessory illumination board C1123 is provided with its plate surface facing forward and backward, and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. The accessory illumination board C1123 is provided behind the light guide plate C1122. A plurality of light emitting parts C1123a are provided on the front surface of the accessory illumination board C1123 over substantially the entire left and right sides of the accessory illumination board C1123. The light emitting section C1123a is composed of an LED. By causing the light emitting portion C1123a to emit light, light can be emitted to the front of the accessory illumination board C1123.

The base portion C1124 shown in FIG. 279 and the like supports the accessory decoration body C1121, the light guide plate C1122, and the accessory illumination board C1123. The base portion C1124 is formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The base portion C1124 is provided with its longitudinal direction facing left and right. A guided portion C1124a is formed in the base portion C1124.

A guided portion C1124a shown in FIG. 279 (and FIG. 294) is a portion guided by an inclined guide portion C1230, which will be described later. The guided portion C1124a is formed in a cylindrical shape with its axis directed left and right. The guided portion C1124a is provided at the left end of the base portion C1124.

In the harpoon accessory C1120 formed in this way, the first decorative lens C1121c and the second decorative lens C1121d can be illuminated by irradiating light from the light emitting part C1123a of the accessory illumination board C1123.

The support body C1130 shown in FIG. 278 and the like rotatably supports the harpoon tool C1120. The support C1130 is provided behind the harpoon C1120. The support C1130 mainly includes a base member C1131, a rotation shaft C1132, and a slider C1133.

The base member C1131 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape. The base member C1131 is provided with its plate surface facing forward and backward, and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. The base member C1131 is provided behind the upper part of the harpoon tool C1120.

The rotation axis C1132 is the center of rotation of the harpoon tool C1120. The rotation shaft C1132 is inserted into the harpoon C1120 with its axis directed left and right, and is rotatably provided on the base member C1131. A pair of left and right rotation axes C1132 are provided.

The slider C1133 is a portion guided by a shaft C1217 and a shaft C1227, which will be described later. The slider C1133 is provided at the left end and right end of the base member C1131, respectively. A shaft C1217, which will be described later, is inserted into (the through hole of) the left slider C1133. A shaft C1227, which will be described later, is inserted into (the through hole of) the right slider C1133. The left slider C1133 is provided at a higher position than the right slider C1133.

The drive mechanism C1200 shown in FIGS. 275 to 278 and 280 to 286 drives the movable performance accessory C1100. The drive mechanism C1200 includes a left side lifting mechanism C1210, a right side lifting mechanism C1220, and an inclined guide section C1230.

The left side lifting mechanism C1210 shown in FIGS. 276 to 278, 280, 281, etc. constitutes the left part of the lifting mechanism that drives the movable performance accessory C1100 up and down. The left lifting mechanism C1210 mainly includes a base portion C1211, an upper pulley C1212, a lower pulley C1213, a belt C1214, a transmission gear C1215, a lifting drive motor C1216, a shaft C1217, and a carriage C1218.

The base portion C1211 shown in FIGS. 277, 280 to 286, etc. supports various members of the left side elevating mechanism C1210. The base portion C1211 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape. The base portion C1211 is provided with its plate surface facing forward and backward, and its longitudinal direction facing up and down. The base portion C1211 is provided with a pin C1211a.

The pin C1211a shown in FIG. 286 is fixed to the front surface of the base portion C1211 and is provided so as to protrude forward from the base portion C1211. The pins C1211a are provided at three locations corresponding to groove portions C1333a described later, and at two locations corresponding to groove portions C1411 described later.

The upper pulley C1212 shown in FIGS. 281 and 282 is a member formed in a substantially circular plate shape. The upper pulley C1212 is rotatably supported near the upper end of the front surface of the base portion C1211. A gear (not shown) is formed on the upper pulley C1212.

The lower pulley C1213 shown in FIGS. 281, 283, and 284 is a member formed in a substantially circular plate shape. The lower pulley C1213 is rotatably supported near the lower end of the front surface of the base portion C1211 (below the upper pulley C1212).

A belt C1214 shown in FIGS. 278, 280 to 284, etc. is for vertically moving a carriage C1218, which will be described later. Belt C1214 is wound around upper pulley C1212 and lower pulley C1213.

A transmission gear C1215 shown in FIGS. 281 and 282 transmits driving force to the upper pulley C1212. The transmission gear C1215 is arranged to mesh with a gear (not shown) formed on the upper pulley C1212.

The elevating drive motor C1216 shown in FIGS. 278, 281, and 282 is a drive source for elevating the movable performance accessory C1100. The lifting drive motor C1216 is fixed to the upper part of the base part C1211. Driving force from an output shaft (not shown) of the lifting drive motor C1216 is transmitted to the transmission gear C1215. When the transmission gear C1215 rotates due to the driving force of the elevation drive motor C1216, the upper pulley C1212 rotates in accordance with the rotation of the transmission gear C1215. This causes belt C1214 to rotate between upper pulley C1212 and lower pulley C1213.

The shaft C1217 shown in FIGS. 278, 280 to 284, etc. guides the movable performance accessory C1100 up and down. A pair of left and right shafts C1217 are provided behind the base portion C1211. The shaft C1217 is formed to extend in the vertical direction from near the lower end to near the upper end of the base portion C1211. The shaft C1217 guides the slider C1133 and, by extension, the movable performance accessory C1100 up and down by being inserted into (the through hole of) the left slider C1133.

The carriage C1218 shown in FIGS. 280, 281, 283 and 284 is for moving the movable performance accessory C1100 upward. As shown in FIG. 284, the carriage C1218 is formed to sandwich the belt C1214, and is thereby fixed to the belt C1214. A shaft C1217 is inserted inside the carriage C1218. The carriage C1218 formed in this manner can move up and down along the shaft C1217 when the belt C1214 rotates between the upper pulley C1212 and the lower pulley C1213.

The right side elevating mechanism C1220 shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 and 280 constitutes the right part of the elevating mechanism that drives the movable performance accessory C1100 up and down. The right side elevating mechanism C1220 mainly includes a base portion C1221, an upper pulley (not shown), a lower pulley (not shown), a belt C1224, a transmission gear (not shown), an elevating drive motor C1226, a shaft C1227, and a carriage C1228. In addition, since the right-side lifting mechanism C1220 is configured in substantially the same manner as the left-side lifting mechanism C1210 (substantially symmetrical), its configuration will be briefly described below.

A belt C1224 is wound around the upper pulley (not shown) and the lower pulley (not shown), and the belt C1224 is rotated by the driving force of the lift drive motor C1226.

The shaft C1227 is inserted into the inside of the slider C1133 on the right side, thereby guiding the slider C1133 and, by extension, the movable performance accessory C1100 up and down. A shaft C1227 is inserted inside the carriage C1228, and as the belt C1224 rotates between an upper pulley (not shown) and a lower pulley (not shown), the carriage C1228 moves upward along the shaft C1227. .

The inclined guide portion C1230 shown in FIGS. 275 to 278 and 285 is for guiding the harpoon C1120 so that it rotates around the rotation axis C1132 and tilts. The inclined guide portion C1230 is provided on the right side of the lower portion of the left-side lifting mechanism C1210. The inclined guide portion C1230 includes a guide surface C1231 and a folded portion C1232.

The guide surface C1231 shown in FIGS. 278 and 285 is a surface that guides the movable performance accessory C1100. The guide surface C1231 is formed so as to be inclined forwardly and downwardly.

The folded portion C1232 shown in FIGS. 278 and 285 is formed such that the front end of the guide surface C1231 is folded back and upward.

The holding mechanism C1300 shown in FIGS. 275 to 278, 280, 281, and 285 to 287 holds the movable performance accessory C1100 at a predetermined position. Specifically, the holding mechanism C1300 holds the movable performance accessory C1100 at a position before performing the performance (standby position shown in FIG. 289), and a state where the performance is performed below the standby position. (the intermediate position shown in FIG. 291). The holding mechanism C1300 includes an upper left holding part C1310, an upper right holding part C1320, a lower left holding part C1330, and a lower right holding part C1340.

The upper left holding part C1310 and the upper right holding part C1320 shown in FIGS. 277, 280, etc. hold the movable performance accessory C1100 at a standby position. The upper left holding part C1310 is provided on the upper part of the base part C1211 of the left side elevating mechanism C1210. The upper right holding part C1320 is provided on the upper part of the base part C1221 of the right side lifting mechanism C1220. The upper left holding part C1310 is provided above the upper right holding part C1320.

The lower left holding part C1330 and the lower right holding part C1340 shown in FIGS. 277, 280, etc. hold the movable performance accessory C1100 at an intermediate position. The lower left holding part C1330 is provided at the lower part of the base part C1211 of the left lifting mechanism C1210 (below the upper left holding part C1310). The upper right holding part C1320 is provided at the lower part of the base part C1221 of the right side lifting mechanism C1220 (below the upper right holding part C1320). The lower left holding portion C1330 is provided above the lower right holding portion C1340.

The upper left holding part C1310, the upper right holding part C1320, the lower left holding part C1330, and the lower right holding part C1340 have generally the same configuration. Therefore, below, the configuration of the lower left holding part C1330 will be explained, and the description of the configurations of the upper left holding part C1310, the upper right holding part C1320, and the lower right holding part C1340 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 287, the lower left holding portion C1330 includes a claw portion C1331, a solenoid C1332, and a solenoid holder C1333.

The claw portion C1331 shown in FIGS. 277, 285, and 287 is a portion on which the movable performance accessory C1100 is placed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 285, a slider C1133 of a movable performance accessory C1100 is placed on the claw C1331. As shown in FIG. 287, the claw portion C1331 includes a main body portion C1331a, a rotation pin C1331b, and an engaging portion C1331c.

The main body portion C1331a shown in FIG. 287 forms the main structure of the claw portion C1331. The main body portion C1331a is formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side. More specifically, the main body portion C1331a mainly includes a portion extending in the vertical direction and a portion extending rearward from the lower end of the portion. The main body portion C1331a is provided so that a portion thereof (the portion extending forward) projects rearward from the base portion C1211.

The rotation pin C1331b shown in FIG. 287 is a portion that becomes the rotation center of the claw portion C1331. The rotation pin C1331b is inserted into the upper part of the main body portion C1331a with its axis oriented left and right. Moreover, the rotation pin C1331b is inserted into a solenoid holder C1333, which will be described later.

The engaging portion C1331c shown in FIG. 287 is formed to extend toward the right (toward the left-right center of the game board P1100) from an arm-shaped portion provided at the top of the main body portion C1331a. The engaging portion C1331c is provided in front of the rotation pin C1331b.

The claw portion C1331 formed in this manner is rotatable about the axis of the rotation pin C1331b.

A solenoid C1332 shown in FIG. 287 is a driving source for the claw portion C1331. The solenoid C1332 is provided on the front side of the base portion C1211. Solenoid C1332 attracts plunger holder C1332a by being excited. This causes the plunger holder C1332a to move upward. Furthermore, when the solenoid C1332 is de-energized, the plunger holder C1332a returns to its original position by the urging force of the urging means C1332b. A recess C1332c is formed in the plunger holder C1332a.

The recess C1332c is formed such that the left surface of the plunger holder C1332a is recessed to the right. The recessed portion C1332c is formed such that the engaging portion C1331c enters therein.

The solenoid holder C1333 shown in FIGS. 278 and 285 to 287 supports the solenoid C1332 and covers the solenoid C1332. The solenoid holder C1333 is provided in front of the base portion C1211. The solenoid holder C1333 is formed into a box shape with an open rear surface. A groove C1333a is formed in the solenoid holder C1333.

The groove portion C1333a shown in FIG. 286 is formed into a substantially elongated hole shape when viewed from the front with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. The groove portion C1333a is formed to penetrate the solenoid holder C1333 in the front-rear direction. One groove portion C1333a is provided on the right side of the solenoid holder C1333, and two groove portions are provided on the left side of the solenoid holder C1333 so as to be vertically aligned. These three groove portions C1333a are provided at positions corresponding to a portion of the pin C1211a, and the pin C1211a is inserted therethrough. Thereby, the moving direction of the lower left holding portion C1330 can be restricted in the vertical direction, and the movable range can also be restricted.

In the lower left holding portion C1330 configured in this way, as shown in FIG. 290, the solenoid C1332 is excited and the plunger holder C1332a moves upward, so that the engaging portion C1331c of the claw portion C1331 engages with the lower surface of the recessed portion C1332c. engage (contact) with. Then, the recess C1332c of the plunger holder C1332a pushes up the engaging portion C1331c of the claw C1331, so that the claw C1331 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view about the axis of the rotation pin C1331b. As a result, the claw portion C1331 (the portion thereof that protrudes rearward from the base portion C1211) is retracted forward from the rear surface of the base portion C1211.

The shock absorbing means C1400 shown in FIGS. 275 to 278, 285 and 286 absorbs the shock that the holding mechanism C1300 receives from the movable performance accessory C1100.

The shock absorbing means C1400 is provided immediately below the lower left holding part C1330 and the lower right holding part C1340, respectively. The shock absorbing means C1400 is provided at the base portion C1211 of the left side lifting mechanism C1210 and the base portion C1221 of the right side lifting mechanism C1220, respectively. The shock absorbing means C1400 includes a receiving part C1410, a supporting part C1420, and a biasing means C1430. The following description will focus on the shock absorbing means C1400 immediately below the lower left holding portion C1330.

The receiving portion C1410 shown in FIGS. 285, 286, and 288 supports the holding mechanism C1300 from below. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 285 and 286, the solenoid holder C1333 of the lower left holding portion C1330 is placed on the receiving portion C1410. The receiving portion C1410 is formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side. More specifically, the receiving portion C1410 is mainly composed of a generally rectangular plate-shaped portion when viewed from the front, and a portion extending forward from the upper end of the portion. The receiving portion C1410 includes a groove portion C1411 and a pin C1412.

The groove portion C1411 shown in FIGS. 286 and 288 is formed in a substantially elongated hole shape when viewed from the front with the longitudinal direction facing up and down. The groove portion C1411 is formed to penetrate the receiving portion C1410 in the front-rear direction. The groove portions C1411 are formed at two locations, spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The two groove portions C1411 are provided at positions corresponding to a portion of the pin C1211a, and the pin C1211a is inserted therethrough. Thereby, the moving direction of the receiving portion C1410 can be restricted in the vertical direction, and the movable range can also be restricted.

The pin C1412 shown in FIG. 288 is formed in a cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction facing up and down. The pin C1412 is fixed approximately at the left and right center of the receiving portion C1410, and is provided so as to extend downward from the receiving portion C1410.

The support portion C1420 shown in FIGS. 285, 286, and 288 is provided below the receiving portion C1410. The support portion C1420 is fixed to the base portion C1211. A through hole C1421 is formed in the support portion C1420.

A through hole C1421 shown in FIG. 288 is formed to vertically penetrate the center of the support portion C1420. A pin C1412 is inserted into the through hole C1421. The through hole C1421 is formed to have a size (diameter) that allows the pin C1412 to slide therein.

A biasing means C1430 shown in FIGS. 285, 286, and 288 biases the receiving portion C1410 upward. The biasing means C1430 is, for example, a compression coil spring. The biasing means C1430 is provided between the receiving part C1410 and the supporting part C1420. The biasing means C1430 is provided so that the pin C1412 is inserted through its center. The biasing means C1430 formed in this manner biases the receiving portion C1410 upward.

In the shock absorbing means C1400 configured in this way, the urging force of the urging means C1430 pushes the shock absorbing means C1400 to the uppermost position within the movable range. As a result, the lower left holding portion C1330 is also pushed up to the highest position within the movable range.

The operation of the movable performance accessory C1100 when performing a performance will be described below using W017 to W025.

As shown in FIG. 289, the movable performance accessory C1100 is located at a standby position before performing the performance. Note that when the movable performance accessory C1100 is located at the standby position, it is located behind the logo accessory C1500 and cannot be visually recognized by the player (see Figures W01 and W02). At this time, in the movable performance accessory C1100, a slider C1133 is placed on the claw part C1331 (the part protruding backward from the base part C1211 and the base part C1221) of the upper left holding part C1310 and the upper right holding part C1320 (Fig. 285, etc.), and is thereby held at the standby position (see FIG. 277, etc.). At this time, the harpoon accessory C1120 is held in a posture (hereinafter referred to as a "vertical posture") with its performance surface (the front surface of the harpoon accessory C1120) facing forward.

When moving the movable performance accessory C1100 from the standby position to the intermediate position, first, the solenoids C1332 of the upper left holding part C1310 and the upper right holding part C1320 are temporarily excited. As a result, as shown in FIG. 290, the claw portions C1331 of the upper left holding portion C1310 and the upper right holding portion C1320 rotate and retract forward from the rear surfaces of the base portion C1211 and the base portion C1221, respectively. Then, the claw portions C1331 of the upper left holding portion C1310 and the upper right holding portion C1320 become unable to support the slider C1133 of the movable performance accessory C1100.

Then, the movable performance accessory C1100 falls freely and moves to an intermediate position (see FIGS. 291 and 292). The movable performance accessory C1100 is received by the claw portions C1331 of the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340 (see FIG. 293, etc.).

At this time, the lower left holding part C1330 and the lower right holding part C1340 receive downward force from the movable performance accessory C1100 (see FIGS. 285 and 286). Then, the lower left holding part C1330 and the lower right holding part C1340 press the receiving part C1410 downward. The receiving portion C1410 is guided by the groove portion C1411 and the pin C1211a against the urging force of the urging means C1430, and moves downward along the base portion C1211 together with the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340. The elastic force of the biasing means C1430 can absorb the impact that the holding mechanism C1300 receives when the movable performance accessory C1100 moves to the intermediate position. The movable performance accessory C1100 is held at an intermediate position by a lower left holding part C1330 and a lower right holding part C1340 (see FIGS. 291 to 293).

When moving the movable performance accessory C1100 from the intermediate position to the protruding position, the solenoids C1332 of the lower left holding part C1330 and the lower right holding part C1340 are temporarily excited. As a result, the claw portions C1331 of the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340 rotate and retract forward from the rear surfaces of the base portion C1211 and the base portion C1221, respectively. Then, the claw portions C1331 of the lower left holding portion C1330 and the lower right holding portion C1340 become unable to support the slider C1133 of the movable performance accessory C1100.

Then, the movable performance accessory C1100 falls freely, and the guided portion C1124a of the base portion C1124 of the movable performance accessory C1100 comes into contact with the guide surface C1231 of the inclined guide portion C1230 from above (two points in FIG. 294). (See dashed line). Then, by guiding the guided portion C1124a to the guide surface C1231, the harpoon C1120 rotates forward and upward (counterclockwise in left side view) about the axis of the rotation axis C1132 with respect to the support C1130. move.

Furthermore, by moving the guided portion C1124a forward and downward along the guide surface C1231, the movable performance accessory C1100 is tilted so that its lower part protrudes forward. Then, when the guided part C1124a comes into contact with the folded part C1232, the movement of the lower part of the movable performance accessory C1100 in the forward and downward direction is regulated. In this way, the movable performance accessory C1100 moves to the protruding position (see FIGS. 294 to 297). At this time, the harpoon accessory C1120 is held in a posture (hereinafter referred to as "tilted posture") with the presentation surface (front surface of the harpoon accessory C1120) facing forward and upward.

Note that the excitation of the solenoid C1332 is temporary, and after the movable performance accessory C1100 falls from the claw portion C1331, the excitation of the solenoid C1332 is released. Then, the plunger holder C1332a moves downward by the urging force of the urging means C1332b, and presses the front surface of the claw portion C1331 downward. As a result, the claw portion C1331 rotates clockwise in the left side view about the axis of the rotation pin C1331b, and returns to its original position (the position shown in FIG. 287(a)).

In addition, when the movable performance accessory C1100 moves from the protruding position (see Fig. 295) to the intermediate position (see Fig. 291) or the standby position (see Fig. 289), the movable performance accessory C1100 drives the elevating drive motor C1216 of the left elevating mechanism C1210. to rotate the belt C1214 and raise the carriage C1218 (see FIG. 281). At the same time, the lift drive motor C1226 of the right side lift mechanism C1220 is driven to rotate the belt C1224 and raise the carriage C1228.

By doing so, the carriage C1218 and the carriage C1228 push up the slider C1133 of the movable performance accessory C1100 (see FIG. 281). Thereby, the movable performance accessory C1100 moves upward along the shaft C1217 and the shaft C1227. In this way, the movable performance accessory C1100 can be moved from the protruding position to the intermediate position or the standby position. The same applies when the movable performance accessory C1100 moves from the intermediate position to the standby position.

In addition, when the movable performance accessory C1100 moves upward and reaches the intermediate position or the standby position, it is brought into contact with the claw part C1331 from below. Then, when the movable performance accessory C1100 moves further upward, the claw portion C1331 rotates and retracts forward from the rear surface of the base portion C1211 and the base portion C1221, respectively. That is, when the slider C1133 of the movable performance accessory C1100 moves upward, the movement is not restricted by the claw portion C1331.

In the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment configured as above, the shock absorbing means C1400 holds the movable performance accessory C1100 (harpoon accessory C1120) when it moves from the standby position to the intermediate position (free fall). It is formed to absorb the impact received by the mechanism C1300. Therefore, failure of the movable performance accessory C1100 and the holding mechanism C1300 can be suppressed. Also, at this time, the movable performance accessory C1100 is moved up and down by the gravity (downward force) of the movable performance accessory C1100 and the urging force (upward force) of the urging means C1430 of the shock absorption means C1400. It bounces several times. Such interesting movements of the movable performance accessory C1100 can improve the player's interest. Moreover, the receiving portion C1410 can be returned to its original position by the urging force of the urging means C1430.

Further, the holding mechanism C1300 can move the movable performance accessory C1100 (harpoon accessory C1120) downward by free fall by retracting the claw portion C1331 by energizing the solenoid C1332.

Further, the harpoon C1120 moves downward from the standby position (see FIG. 289) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 291), and moves forward and downward from the intermediate position to the protruding position (see FIG. 295). The harpoon C1120 is in a vertical position at the standby position and the intermediate position, and changes its position to an inclined position by rotating during movement to the protruding position. In this way, by changing the operating direction and posture of the harpoon accessory C1120, the movement of the harpoon accessory C1120 can be varied, and in turn, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, by providing the inclined guide portion C1230, the harpoon C1120 can be reliably moved from the intermediate position to the protruding position.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the holding mechanism C1300 is provided on the back side of the drive mechanism C1200, while the shock absorbing means C1400 is provided on the front side of the drive mechanism C1200. By arranging the holding mechanism C1300 and the shock absorbing means C1400 on opposite sides in this way, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members. Further, the holding mechanism C1300 holds the movable performance accessory C1100 (harpoon accessory C1120) at different heights on the left and right in the standby position and the intermediate position. By doing so, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members.

Next, the arrangement of the second decorative lens C1121d and the light emitting part C1123a will be described using FIGS. 279 and 298 to 301. In the following, attention will be paid to the light emitting part C1123a1, which is one of the plurality of light emitting parts C1123a.

FIG. 298 is a left side view showing the positional relationship between the accessory illumination board C1123 and the second decorative lens C1121d when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in a vertical posture. As shown in FIGS. 279 and 298, the accessory illumination board C1123 is arranged behind the second decorative lens C1121d. As shown in FIG. 298, the second decorative lens C1121d is disposed at a position shifted downward with respect to the accessory illumination board C1123. More specifically, the second decorative lens C1121d is entirely located below the light emitting part C1123a1 mounted on the accessory illumination board C1123. Therefore, between the light emitting part C1123a1 and the viewpoint of the player Z who has the same height as the light emitting part C1123a1, there is not a second decorative lens C1121d having transparency, but a distance between the second decorative lens C1121d and the second decorative lens C1121d. A first decorative body C1121a with low transparency is interposed. As a result, the player Z cannot visually recognize the light emitting section C1123a1 through the second decorative lens C1121d.

FIG. 299 is a left side view showing the positional relationship between the accessory illumination board C1123 and the second decorative lens C1121d when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in an inclined posture. As shown in FIG. 299, by tilting the harpoon C1120 so that the lower part of the harpoon C1120 protrudes forward, the distance between the vertical center of the light emitting part C1123a1 and the vertical center of the second decorative lens C1121d is The distance in the height direction becomes closer. A second decorative lens C1121d having transparency is interposed between the light emitting portion C1123a1 and the player Z's viewpoint. This allows the player Z to visually recognize the light emitting section C1123a1 through the second decorative lens C1121d.

In this way, by changing the attitude of the harpoon accessory C1120 from the vertical attitude to the inclined attitude, the player Z can change the way the light from the light emitting part C1123a1, which is easily visible, can be seen through the second decorative lens C1121d. can. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when the harpoon C1120 changes its posture from the vertical posture (see FIG. 298) to the inclined posture (see FIG. 299), the number of light emitting parts C1123a located at the same height as the second decorative lens C1121d increases. Thereby, it is possible to increase the light from the easily visible light emitting part C1123a via the second decorative lens C1121d, and it is possible to make the second decorative lens C1121d shine even more.

In the example shown in FIGS. 300 and 301, the front-to-back distance between the accessory illumination board C1123 and the second decorative lens C1121d is set longer than in the example shown in FIGS. 298 and 299. In addition, in FIG. 279 etc., the first decorative lens C1121c is arranged on the left and right sides of the second decorative lens C1121d, but in the modified example shown in FIGS. 300 and 301, the left and right positions of the first decorative lens C1121c are , are arranged so as to be substantially the same as the left and right positions of the second decorative lens C1121d.

As shown in FIG. 300, when the harpoon C1120 is in the vertical position, the light emitting part C1123a1 is located at approximately the same height as the vertical center of the first decorative lens C1121c. Thereby, the player Z can visually recognize the light emitting section C1123a1 through the first decorative lens C1121c.

As shown in FIG. 301, when the harpoon C1120 is in the inclined position, the light emitting part C1123a1 is located at approximately the same height as the vertical center of the second decorative lens C1121d. Thereby, the player Z can visually recognize the light emitting section C1123a1 through the second decorative lens C1121d.

In this way, in the examples shown in FIGS. 300 and 301, different transparent members (the first decorative lens C1121c or the second decorative lens C1121d ), the light from the light emitting portion C1123a1 can be easily recognized.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-59498).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine equipped with a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance by rotating.

In such gaming machines, it is desired to further improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A harpoon accessory C1120 has an accessory decoration C1121 (movable part) having a second decorative lens C1121d (transparent member), and a light emitting part C1123a (light emitting means) provided on the back side of the accessory decoration C1121. (mobile device),
a support C1130 that supports the harpoon C1120;
A tilt drive unit (tilt guide unit C1230 and rotation axis C1132) that can tilt the harpoon C1120 from a vertical position (first position) to a tilted position (second position) with respect to the support body C1130. )and,
Equipped with
The light emitting part C1123a includes a light emitting part C1123a1 (first light emitting means),
The harpoon accessory C1120 is
When tilted from the vertical attitude to the inclined attitude, the distance in the height direction between the light emitting portion C1123a1 and the second decorative lens C1121d becomes closer.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Specifically, the player can change how the light from the easily visible light emitting part C1123a1 appears via the second decorative lens C1121d.

Further, when the harpoon object C1120 is in the vertical position, the light from the light emitting part C1123a1 is difficult for the player to see through the second decorative lens C1121d,
When the harpoon object C1120 is in the inclined position, the light from the light emitting part C1123a1 is easily visible to the player via the second decorative lens C1121d.

With such a configuration, it is possible to change whether or not the light from the light emitting part C1123a1 can be visually recognized via the second decorative lens C1121d without blinking the light emitting part C1123a1.

Further, when the harpoon object C1120 is in the vertical position, the second decorative lens C1121d is located below the light emitting part C1123a1,
By protruding the lower part of the harpoon C1120 forward and tilting it in the inclined posture, the distance in the height direction between the light emitting part C1123a1 and the second decorative lens C1121d becomes closer.

With such a configuration, when the lower part of the harpoon object C1120 protrudes forward, the player can easily see the light from the light emitting part C1123a1 via the second decorative lens C1121d.

In addition, the transparent member is
A first decorative lens C1121c (first transparent member), and a second decorative lens C1121d (second transparent member) provided below the first decorative lens C1121c,
The light emitting part C1123a includes a light emitting part C1123a1 (second light emitting means),
The light emitting part C1123a1 is
When the harpoon object C1120 is in the vertical position, it is located at approximately the same height as the first decorative lens C1121c when viewed from the front;
When the harpoon C1120 is in the inclined posture, it is located at approximately the same height as the second decorative lens C1121d when viewed from the front.

With such a configuration, the light from the light emitting part C1123a can be easily recognized through different transparent members in the vertical position and the inclined position.

Further, the second decorative lens C1121d is
It is provided between the pair of left and right first decorative lenses C1121c.

With such a configuration, when the harpoon object C1120 is in an inclined position, the light from the light emitting part C1123a can be easily recognized through the transparent member on the center side, which is easily visible to the player.

Further, it includes an accessory illumination board C1123 (substrate) on which the light emitting part C1123a is mounted,
When the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the inclined position, the area where the accessory illumination board C1123 and the second decorative lens C1121d overlap increases in front view compared to when the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the vertical orientation. be.

With this configuration, when the harpoon object C1120 is in an inclined position, it is easier to increase the light from the light emitting part C1123a, which is easily visible via the second decorative lens C1121d, compared to when the harpoon object C1120 is in a vertical position. I can do it.

Further, a plurality of the light emitting parts C1123a are provided,
When the harpoon C1120 is in the inclined position, the number of the light emitting parts C1123a located at the same height as the second decorative lens C1121d increases compared to when the harpoon C1120 is in the vertical position.

With this configuration, when the harpoon object C1120 is in an inclined position, it is easier to increase the light from the light emitting part C1123a, which is easily visible via the second decorative lens C1121d, compared to when the harpoon object C1120 is in a vertical position. I can do it.

In addition, it includes a left side lifting mechanism C1210 and a right side lifting mechanism C1220 (lifting mechanism) that can lift and lower the harpoon tool C1120,
The tilt drive section is
By rotating the harpoon C1120 with respect to the left lifting mechanism C1210, the harpoon C1120 is tilted from the vertical position to the inclined position.

With such a configuration, the movements of the harpoon C1120 can be diversified.

In addition, the left side lifting mechanism C1210 and the right side lifting mechanism C1220,
The harpoon accessory C1120 can be raised and lowered between a standby position that is difficult to see from the player and a performance position (intermediate position and protruding position) that is easy to see from the player;
The tilt drive section is
When the harpoon accessory C1120 is in the presentation position, the harpoon accessory C1120 can be tilted to the tilted attitude.

With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the appearance of the light from the light emitting part C1123a that is visually recognized through the second decorative lens C1121d and the movement of the harpoon object C1120.

In addition, the left side lifting mechanism C1210 and the right side lifting mechanism C1220,
The harpoon accessory C1120 can be raised and lowered between an intermediate position (first position) that is the production position and a protruding position (second position) that is the production position and is different from the intermediate position. ,
The tilt drive section is
When the harpoon C1120 is in the intermediate position, it is in the vertical attitude, and when in the protruding position, it is inclined in the inclined attitude.

With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the appearance of the light from the light emitting part C1123a that is visually recognized through the second decorative lens C1121d and the movement of the harpoon object C1120.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-59498).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine equipped with a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance by rotating.

In such gaming machines, it is desired to further improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
a harpoon C1120 that can operate between a standby position (first position) and an intermediate position (second position);
a holding mechanism C1300 (holding section) that holds the harpoon tool C1120 at the standby position and the intermediate position;
a shock absorbing means C1400 that absorbs a shock received by the holding mechanism C1300 when the harpoon C1120 moves to the intermediate position;
It is equipped with the following.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Specifically, the movement of the harpoon C1120 can be changed by absorbing the impact.

Further, the holding mechanism C1300 includes:
a claw portion C1331 that is movable between a support position that supports the harpoon object C1120 and a non-support position that does not support the harpoon object C1120;
a solenoid C1332 (driving means) for moving the claw portion C1331;
It is equipped with the following.

With such a configuration, by moving the claw portion C1331 to the non-supporting position, the harpoon object C1120 held by the claw portion C1331 can be put into a state where it is easy to operate.

Further, the shock absorbing means C1400 includes:
a receiving part C1410 formed to receive the holding mechanism C1300 (claw part C1331) and movable in the vertical direction;
a biasing means C1430 that biases the receiving portion C1410 upward;
It is equipped with the following.

With such a configuration, the receiving portion C1410 can be returned to its original position while absorbing impact.

Further, a base portion C1211 (supporting portion) having a protruding pin C1211a (protruding portion) and movably supporting the receiving portion C1410 is provided,
The receiving portion C1410 is
It has a groove C1411 extending in the vertical direction,
The direction of movement is regulated by inserting the pin C1211a into the groove C1411.

With such a configuration, movement of the receiving portion C1410 can be guided.

Furthermore, the holding mechanism C1300 is movable in the same direction as the harpoon tool C1120.

With such a configuration, impact can be effectively absorbed.

In addition, the harpoon accessory C1120 is
movable to a protruding position (third position) different from the standby position and the intermediate position;
The movement from the intermediate position to the protruding position is different from the movement direction from the standby position to the intermediate position.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. Specifically, by changing the direction of movement of the harpoon object C1120, the movement of the harpoon object C1120 can be varied.

Further, it includes a drive mechanism C1200 (operating mechanism) that operates the harpoon accessory C1120,
The harpoon accessory C1120 is
movable to a protruding position different from the standby position and the intermediate position;
It is formed to be rotatable relative to the drive mechanism C1200, and changes its posture by rotating during the movement from the intermediate position to the protruding position.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. Specifically, by changing the attitude of the harpoon object C1120, the movement of the harpoon object C1120 can be varied.

Moreover, it is provided with an inclined guide part C1230 (guide part) that guides the movement of the harpoon tool C1120 from the intermediate position to the protruding position.

With such a configuration, the harpoon C1120 can be reliably moved from the intermediate position to the protruding position.

Further, it includes a drive mechanism C1200 (operating mechanism) that operates the harpoon accessory C1120,
The holding mechanism C1300 is provided on the back side of the drive mechanism C1200.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. Specifically, the harpoon accessory C1120 can be held in a state where the holding mechanism C1300 is difficult to visually recognize by the player.

Further, the shock absorbing means C1400 is provided on the front side of the drive mechanism C1200.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily secure a space on the back side of the drive mechanism C1200.

Further, the intermediate position is located at a different height from the standby position,
The shock absorbing means C1400 includes:
a left shock absorbing means C1400 (first absorption part) that absorbs shock on one side of the harpoon C1120;
a right shock absorbing means C1400 (second absorption part) that absorbs shock on the other side of the harpoon tool C1120 and is provided at a different height from the left shock absorbing means C1400;
It is equipped with the following.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other members.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in this embodiment, the accessory decoration C1121 is decorated in the shape of a harpoon, but the decoration can be any decoration.

Further, in this embodiment, the movable performance accessory C1100 is assumed to move downward by free fall, but it may be operated using the elevation drive motor C1216 and the elevation drive motor C1226 as drive sources.

In addition, in this embodiment, the shock absorbing means C1400 is provided immediately below the lower left holding part C1330 and the lower right holding part C1340, but it is assumed that the shock absorbing means C1400 is provided immediately below the lower left holding part C1330 or the lower right holding part C1340. It may also be provided directly below. Further, it may also be provided immediately below the upper left holding portion C1310 and the upper right holding portion C1320.

Further, in this embodiment, the movable performance accessory C1100 is assumed to move in the vertical direction, but the direction of movement is not limited to this, and may be in any direction (for example, the left-right direction). The moving direction of the harpoon C1120 can also be any direction (for example, the left-right direction).

Below, a pachinko gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that components that are the same or similar to those of the embodiments described above will be given the same names or the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

The pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment differs greatly from the pachinko game machines according to the first to fifth embodiments in that it has an upper accessory C2000. Below, the upper accessory C2000 will be explained using FIGS. 302 to 320.

The upper accessory C2000 shown in FIGS. 302 to 304 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. The upper accessory C2000 is installed on the upper part of the game board P1100. More specifically, the upper accessory C2000 is installed behind the predetermined accessory C2100 installed at the top of the game board P1100. As shown in FIGS. 303 to 305, the upper accessory C2000 includes a base member C2010, a first accessory C2020, a second accessory C2030, and a drive mechanism C2040.

The base member C2010 is provided with a first accessory C2020, which will be described later. The base member C2010 is formed into a frame shape. The base member C2010 is provided on the game board P1100 so as to be invisible to the player (see FIG. 302). The base member C2010 includes a frame C2011, a support member C2012, a guide portion C2013, a stopper C2014, and a spring C2015.

A pair of left and right frames C2011 are provided. The frame C2011 is formed in an elongated shape with its longitudinal direction facing up and down.

The support member C2012 is a member that supports a motor C2041 of a drive mechanism C2040, etc., which will be described later. The support member C2012 is formed into a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The support member C2012 is formed to span the left and right frames C2011. The left end and right end of the support member C2012 are fixed to the upper ends of the pair of left and right frames C2011.

The guide portion C2013 is a member that guides a first accessory C2020, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 303 and 304, the guide portions C2013 are provided on the left and right pairs of frames C2011, respectively. The guide portion C2013 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis directed in the up-down direction. The upper end of the guide portion C2013 is attached to the upper end of the frame C2011. The lower end of the guide portion C2013 is attached to the lower end of the frame C2011.

The stopper C2014 is for regulating the downward movement of the first accessory C2020 within a predetermined range. The stoppers C2014 are provided on the left and right pairs of frames C2011, respectively. The stopper C2014 is formed into a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front with its longitudinal direction facing in the up-down direction. Stopper C2014 is fixed to the lower part of frame C2011. The stopper C2014 includes a lower insertion portion C2014a, an upper insertion portion C2014b, and an abutment portion C2014c.

The lower insertion portion C2014a is a portion at the lower end of the stopper C2014 through which the guide portion C2013 is inserted.

The upper insertion portion C2014b is a portion through which the guide portion C2013 is inserted in the upper and lower middle portions of the stopper C2014.

The contact portion C2014c is a portion that can come into contact with a first accessory C2020, which will be described later. The contact portion C2014c is made of a plate-shaped elastic member (such as rubber). The contact portion C2014c is placed on the upper insertion portion C2014b.

The spring C2015 is for urging the first accessory C2020 upward. The springs C2015 are provided on the left and right guide portions C2013, respectively. The spring C2015 is fitted onto the guide portion C2013. The lower end of the spring C2015 is brought into contact with the lower insertion portion C2014a of the stopper C2014. The upper end of the spring C2015 is brought into contact with the first accessory C2020.

The first accessory C2020 gives a visual impression to the player when it moves. The first accessory C2020 is arranged in front of the support member C2012 of the base member C2010. As shown in FIGS. 306 to 308, the first accessory C2020 includes a first decorative member C2021, a first illumination board C2022, a first closing member C2023, and a second closing member C2024. . Although the details will be described later, the first accessory C2020 is provided so as to be slidable in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism C2040, which will be described later. FIGS. 302 to 314 show a state in which the first accessory C2020 is slid most upwardly. Below, the first accessory C2020, the second accessory C2030, and the drive mechanism C2040 will be explained based on this state.

The first decorative member C2021 is a member that can transmit light. The first decorative member C2021 is made of a light-transmitting material (lens). As shown in FIGS. 309 and 310, the first decorative member C2021 is formed into a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front with the longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction. Further, the first decorative member C2021 is formed in the shape of a thin case with an open rear portion (a shape in which the outer edge portion extends slightly rearward). The first decorative member C2021 is formed to extend from the left end to the right end of the base member C2010. The first decorative member C2021 includes a decorative portion C2021a, a vertical hole C2021b, an upper notch C2021c, and a lower notch C2021d (see FIG. 312).

The decorative portion C2021a is a portion of the first decorative member C2021 on which decoration (for example, decoration imitating a predetermined character) is applied. The decorative portion C2021a is formed in the middle of the left and right sides of the front side surface of the first decorative member C2021. The decorative portion C2021a is formed, for example, by printing a pattern and fixing a sheet to the first decorative member C2021 through which light can pass through the printed area (design).

The vertical hole C2021b is a long hole whose longitudinal direction is oriented in the vertical direction. The vertical hole C2021b is formed to penetrate the first decorative member C2021 in the front and back directions. The vertical holes C2021b are formed on the left and right sides of the decorative portion C2021a, respectively.

The upper notch C2021c is obtained by cutting out the upper end of the first decorative member C2021, as shown in FIGS. 310 to 312. A plurality of upper notches C2021c are formed in the first decorative member C2021. Note that in FIG. 312, the first accessory C2020 is schematically shown.

The lower notch C2021d is obtained by cutting out the lower end of the first decorative member C2021. A plurality of lower notches C2021d are formed in the first decorative member C2021.

The first illumination board C2022 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape, as shown in FIGS. 309 and 311. The first illumination board C2022 is provided with its plate surface facing forward and backward, and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are provided on the front surface of the first illumination board C2022. By causing the LED to emit light, light can be irradiated forward of the first illumination board C2022. The first illumination board C2022 is accommodated in the first decorative member C2021 and is fixed to the first decorative member C2021.

The first closing member C2023 is a member that closes the left and right parts of the first decorative member C2021 from the rear, as shown in FIGS. 308 and 309. A pair of left and right first closing members C2023 are provided. The first closing member C2023 is formed into a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing forward and backward. The first closing member C2023 is fixed to the first decorative member C2021. The first closing member C2023 includes a vertical hole C2023a and an insertion portion C2023b.

The vertical hole C2023a is a long hole whose longitudinal direction is oriented in the vertical direction. The vertical hole C2023a is formed to penetrate the first closing member C2023 back and forth. The vertical hole C2023a is formed on one side of the first closing member C2023 in the left-right direction (the side closer to the left-right center of the first decorative member C2021).

The insertion portion C2023b is a member inserted into the guide portion C2013 (see FIG. 303) of the base member C2010. The insertion portion C2023b is formed on the other side of the first closing member C2023 in the left-right direction (the side closer to the left-right outer portions of the first decorative member C2021).

The second closing member C2024 is a member that closes the left and right midway portions of the first decorative member C2021 from the rear. The second closing member C2024 is arranged between the left and right first closing members C2023. The second closing member C2024 is formed into a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing forward and backward. The second closing member C2024 is fixed to the first decorative member C2021. The second closing member C2024 includes a slit C2024a.

The slit C2024a is a long hole whose longitudinal direction is oriented in the up-down direction. The slit C2024a is formed to penetrate the second closing member C2024 back and forth. A plurality of slits C2024a are formed at intervals.

The second accessory C2030 gives a visual impression to the player when it moves. As shown in FIGS. 306 and 308, the second accessory C2030 is provided so as to sandwich the first accessory C2020 from the front and back. The second accessory C2030 includes a second decorative member C2031, a decorative support member C2032, and a second illuminated board C2033.

The second decorative member C2031 is a member that can transmit light. Moreover, the second decorative member C2031 is a member that constitutes the front side of the second accessory C2030. The second decorative member C2031 is made of a light-transmissive material (lens) and is configured to be able to transmit light. The second decorative member C2031 is formed into a substantially plate shape. The second decorative member C2031 has its plate surface facing forward and backward, and is formed to span the left and right vertical holes C2021b of the first decorative member C2021. A predetermined decoration (for example, a decoration imitating a predetermined character, etc.) is applied to the second decorative member C2031. The second decorative member C2031 is arranged in front of the first accessory C2020. More specifically, the second decorative member C2031 is arranged so as to overlap (stack with each other) the first accessory C2020 in a front view in the state shown in FIGS. 306 and 308. The second decorative member C2031 includes a protruding portion C2031a and a vertical hole insertion portion C2031b.

The protruding portion C2031a is a portion that protrudes rearward. A plurality of protrusions C2031a are formed at intervals laterally. The protruding portion C2031a is formed in the middle of the left and right portions of the lower end portion of the second decorative member C2031. The protruding portion C2031a is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction.

The vertical hole insertion portion C2031b is a portion inserted into the left and right vertical holes C2021b of the first accessory C2020. The vertical hole insertion portion C2031b is formed at the left end and right end of the second decorative member C2031, respectively. Two left and right vertical hole insertion portions C2031b are formed vertically at intervals. The vertical hole insertion portion C2031b is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with its axis directed in the front-rear direction. The vertical hole insertion portion C2031b is formed to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the second decorative member C2031.

The decoration support member C2032 is a member that supports the second decoration member C2031. Moreover, the decoration support member C2032 is a member that constitutes the rear side of the second accessory C2030. The decoration support member C2032 is formed into a substantially plate shape. The decorative support member C2032 has its plate surface facing forward and backward, and is formed to extend from the first closing member C2023 on the left side to the first closing member C2023 on the right side. The decoration support member C2032 is arranged behind the first accessory C2020. More specifically, the decorative support member C2032 is arranged so as to overlap the first accessory C2020 in a front view in the state shown in FIGS. 306 and 308. The decoration support member C2032 includes a fixing part C2032a, a vertical hole insertion part C2032b, and a horizontal hole C2032c.

The fixed part C2032a is a part to which the protruding part C2031a of the second decorative member C2031 is fixed. A plurality of fixing parts C2032a are formed at intervals on the left and right. The fixing portion C2032a is formed halfway between the left and right sides of the lower end portion of the second decorative member C2031. The fixing portion C2032a is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The fixing portion C2032a is formed to protrude forward from the front surface of the decorative support member C2032. The protruding portion C2031a is inserted through and fixed to the fixing portion C2032a. Thereby, the decoration support member C2032 supports the second decoration member C2031.

The vertical hole insertion portion C2032b is a portion inserted into the vertical hole C2023a of the left and right first closing members C2023. The vertical hole insertion part C2032b is formed on the left and right parts of the decorative support member C2032, respectively. Two left and right vertical hole insertion portions C2032b are formed vertically spaced apart from each other. As shown in FIGS. 306 and 314, the vertical hole insertion portion C2032b is formed to protrude forward from the front surface of the decorative support member C2032.

The horizontal hole C2032c is a long hole whose longitudinal direction is oriented in the left-right direction. The horizontal hole C2032c is formed above the left and right vertical hole insertion portions C2032b, respectively. The horizontal hole C2032c is formed so as to penetrate the decorative support member C2032 from front to back.

The second illumination board C2033 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate shape. The second illumination board C2033 is provided with its plate surface facing forward and backward, and its longitudinal direction facing left and right. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are provided on the front surface of the second illumination board C2033. By causing the LED to emit light, light can be irradiated to the front of the second illumination board C2033. The second illumination board C2033 is fixed to the left and right midway portions (above the fixing portion C2032a) of the front surface of the decorative support member C2032. In this way, the second illumination board C2033 is fixed not to the second decorative member C2031 but to the decorative support member C2032. As a result, the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 are mutually connected so that the second decorative board C2033 is not interposed between the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031. They are arranged adjacent to each other in the front and back.

In the second accessory C2030 configured as described above, the vertical hole insertion parts C2031b and C2032b are inserted into the vertical holes C2021b and C2023a of the first accessory C2020, and the vertical hole insertion part C2032b is inserted into the vertical hole C2023a. It comes into contact with the object from below. In this way, the vertical hole insertion part C2032b of the second accessory C2030 is caught in the vertical hole C2023a, and the first accessory C2020 can be supported by the vertical hole insertion part C2032b. In addition, the second accessory C2030 moves in the vertical direction with respect to the first accessory C2020 by vertical hole insertion parts C2031b and C2032b moving along the vertical holes C2021b and C2023a of the first accessory C2020. Constructed to be relatively slidable.

The drive mechanism C2040 is for operating (sliding) the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030. As shown in FIGS. 305 and 313, the drive mechanism C2040 includes a motor C2041 and an arm C2042.

The motor C2041 is something that generates power (drive source). The motor C2041 is fixed to the rear surface of the support member C2012 of the base member C2010. The motor C2041 is provided at the left end and right end of the support member C2012, respectively. The motor C2041 can rotate a drive shaft (not shown) whose axial direction is oriented in the front-rear direction.

Arm C2042 is for transmitting the power of motor C2041 to second accessory C2030. The arm C2042 is provided on the front surface of the support member C2012 of the base member C2010. The arms C2042 are provided on the left and right sides of the support member C2012, respectively. The left and right arms C2042 are arranged near the left and right motors C2041 when viewed from the rear. As shown in FIGS. 313 and 314, the arm C2042 includes a gear portion C2042a and an extension portion C2042b.

The gear portion C2042a is formed into a substantially disk shape, and teeth are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the gear portion C2042a. The gear portion C2042a is rotatably supported by the support member C2012 via the rotation shaft C2042c (see FIG. 305). The gear portion C2042a is provided so as to mesh with a motor gear (not shown) fixed to the drive shaft of the motor C2041.

The extending portion C2042b is a portion extending radially outward from the gear portion C2042a. The extending portion C2042b is formed to extend upward from the gear portion C2042a. In this embodiment, the direction in which the extension portion C2042b extends from the gear portion C2042a may be referred to as the “direction of the arm C2042”. A pin C2042d is provided at the tip (upper end) of the extending portion C2042b. The pin C2042d is inserted into the horizontal hole C2032c of the decoration support member C2032 of the second accessory C2030. The pin C2042d is provided so as to be slidable in the horizontal hole C2032c. Arm C2042 supports second accessory C2030 by pin C2042d. Further, the arm C2042 supports the first accessory C2020 via the second accessory C2030.

In the upper accessory C2000 configured as described above, the second decorative member C2031 is placed furthest forward (see FIG. 307). Further in front of the second decorative member C2031, predetermined accessories C2100 are arranged so as to overlap when viewed from the front (see FIG. 302). In this way, the first decorative member C2021, the second decorative member C2031, etc. are hidden by the predetermined accessory C2100 and are not visible to the player. Note that in this embodiment, "invisible" refers to a state in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Conditions in which it is difficult to visually recognize include, for example, a state in which all parts are invisible (completely invisible state) and a state in which only a small number of parts are visible (mostly invisible state). and are included. Hereinafter, such a state in which the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 are not visible will be referred to as a "standby state".

As shown in FIG. 313, in the standby state, arm C2042 faces upward. With such a configuration, torque (rotational force) is no longer applied to the arm C2042 due to the weight of the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030, so the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030 are in a standby state. The accessory C2030 can be supported in a stable state.

Below, the operation of the upper accessory C2000 configured as described above will be explained.

In the upper accessory C2000, the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030 slide up and down by the power of the motor C2041 of the drive mechanism C2040, as shown in FIGS. 304, 316, and 319. executed. Below, the operation of the upper accessory object C2000 will be explained, taking as an example the case where the first accessory object C2020 and the second accessory object C2030 are slid downward from the standby state shown in FIG. 304.

The first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 are brought into the first sliding state (FIGS. 315 and 316) by sliding the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030 downward from the standby state. ). In addition, the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 are in the second sliding state (FIGS. 318 and 319) by only the second accessory C2030 sliding downward from the first sliding state. You can transition to .

First, the operation from the standby state to the first slide state will be described.

When the motor C2041 is driven in the standby state shown in FIG. 313, the gear portion C2042a of the arm C2042 that meshes with the motor gear of the motor C2041 rotates. At this time, the left gear portion C2042a rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 313. Further, the right gear portion C2042a rotates clockwise in FIG. 313. The drive of the motor C2041 is controlled by the production operation control circuit 89.

As shown in FIGS. 313 and 317, as the left and right gear parts C2042a rotate, the left and right extension parts C2042b rotate while their tips (pins C2042d) slide through the horizontal holes C2032c of the decorative support member C2032. Rotates around axis C2042c. In this way, the arm C2042 transmits the power of the motor C2041 to the decorative support member C2032 in which the horizontal hole C2032c is formed, and slides the second accessory C2030 downward. When the second accessory C2030 slides downward, the first accessory C2020 slides downward against the biasing force of the spring C2015 due to its own weight. At this time, the insertion portion C2023b of the first accessory C2020 moves downward along the guide portion C2013. In this way, the first accessory C2020 slides downward integrally with the second accessory C2030 while being guided by the guide portion C2013.

The motor C2041 is stopped when the insertion portion C2023b of the first accessory C2020 contacts the contact portion C2014c of the stopper C2014 (at a position where the arm C2042 faces substantially in the left-right direction). The first accessory object C2020 and the second accessory object C2030 are arranged at a position lower than the predetermined accessory object C2100 (see FIG. 315), overlapping each other in the front and back. In this way, as shown in FIG. 315, the second decorative member C2031 placed furthest forward among the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030 is in the first sliding state that is visible to the player. becomes.

In the first sliding state, the light emitted from the first illumination board C2022 in the first decorative member C2021 passes through the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 in order, and the game It is emitted to the front of the board P1100. In this manner, in the first sliding state, the second decorative member C2031 can be caused to emit light so as to be visible to the player by the light from the first illumination board C2022 via the first decorative member C2021. Further, by overlapping the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 back and forth, the second decorative member C2031 can be made to emit light while the first decorative member C2021 is hidden.

Next, the operation from the first sliding state to the second sliding state will be described.

The motor C2041 is driven from the first sliding state to rotate the gear portion C2042a. As shown in FIGS. 319 and 320, the motor C2041 stops when the arm C2042 rotates until it points downward. The second accessory C2030 slides downward as the arm C2042 rotates.

As described above, in the first sliding state, the insertion portion C2023b of the first accessory C2020 comes into contact with the contact portion C2014c of the stopper C2014, making it impossible to slide downward. Therefore, the vertical hole insertion portion C2032b (see FIG. 314) of the decorative support member C2032 slides downward along the vertical hole C2023a of the first closing member C2023 as the arm C2042 is driven. In addition, the vertical hole insertion portion C2031b (see FIG. 308) of the second decorative member C2031 moves downward along the vertical hole C2021b of the first decorative member C2021 of the first accessory C2020 as the arm C2042 is driven. Slide to. In this way, the second accessory C2030 slides downward relative to the first accessory C2020, and the second accessory C2030 is placed at a lower position than in the first sliding state. In this way, the first sliding state transitions to the second sliding state.

As shown in FIGS. 318 and 319, in the second sliding state, the second decorative member C2031 is arranged at a position that hardly overlaps with the first decorative member C2021. In this way, the first decorative member C2021, which was hidden in the first sliding state, becomes exposed (visible to the player) in the second sliding state.

In the second sliding state, the light from the first illumination board C2022 passes through the first decorative member C2021 and is emitted to the front of the game board P1100. According to this, in the second sliding state, the first decorative member C2021 can be caused to emit light so as to be visible to the player by the light from the first illumination board C2022.

Further, as described above, in the first sliding state, the second decorative member C2031 was caused to emit light by the light from the first illumination board C2022. On the other hand, in the second sliding state, the first decorative member C2021, not the second decorative member C2031, can be caused to emit light by the light from the first illumination board C2022. In this configuration, by switching between the first sliding state and the second sliding state, it is possible to change the member emitted by the light from the first illumination board C2022 (see FIGS. 315 and 318). . In this way, the light emission mode by the first illumination board C2022 can be made different, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the second sliding state, the second decorative member C2031 is arranged at a position (center of the game board P1100) where the player can view it, as shown in FIG. 318. Further, the second decorative member C2031 is arranged in front of the second illumination board C2033. In this manner, in the second sliding state, not only the first decorative member C2021 but also the second decorative member C2031 is in a state where it can emit light so that it can be visually recognized by the player. According to this configuration, the two members (first decorative member C2021 and second decorative member C2031) can be emitted simultaneously in the second sliding state, and the interest of the game can be effectively improved. .

Note that the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 change from the second sliding state to the first sliding state by the upward sliding movement of the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030. , transition to the standby state in order. The spring C2015 can assist the upward sliding movement of the second accessory C2030 by urging the first accessory C2020 upward.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 311 and 312, the first illumination board C2022 is accommodated in the first decorative member C2021. The first accessory C2020 can discharge heat generated when the first illumination board C2022 emits light through the slit C2024a of the second closing member C2024. However, the slit C2024a may be blocked by another member depending on the states of the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031. For example, in this embodiment, in the standby state shown in FIG. 305, there is a possibility that the slit C2024a is closed by the support member C2012 of the base member C2010. Therefore, in this embodiment, an upper notch C2021c and a lower notch C2021d are formed in the first decorative member C2021 to discharge the heat generated in the first illumination board C2022 even when the slit C2024a is closed. It has an easy-to-use configuration.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 311 and 312, the upper notch C2021c allows air to flow in and out of the first decorative member C2021 in the upper part of the first decorative member C2021. There is. Further, the lower notch C2021d allows air to flow into and out of the first decorative member C2021 at the lower part of the first decorative member C2021. According to this configuration, when the temperature of the first decorative member C2021 rises, the heat inside the first decorative member C2021 is discharged from the upper notch C2021c, and air is discharged from the outside via the lower notch C2021d. (creating a chimney effect). Thereby, even when the slit C2024a is closed, the heat within the first decorative member C2021 can be efficiently discharged, and a rise in temperature within the first decorative member C2021 can be suppressed. Thereby, the load on the first illumination board C2022 can be reduced.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been known (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-59498).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine equipped with a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance by rotating.

In such gaming machines, it is desired to further improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A first movable body having translucency (first decorative member C2021),
a second movable body (second decorative member C2031) having translucency and provided in front of the first movable body (first decorative member C2021);
a first light emitting means (first illumination board C2022) provided behind the first movable body (first decorative member C2021);
Equipped with
The first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) are connected to the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) through the first movable body (first decorative member C2021). a first state (first sliding state) in which the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) emits light so as to be visible from the front by light from the first light emitting means (first illumination board C2022); and a second state (second state) in which the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) emits light so as to be visible from the front due to the light from the first light emitting means (first illumination board C2022). (sliding state).

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) in the first state (first sliding state) are moved forward and backward relative to each other. They are located so that they overlap.

With such a configuration, the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) can be made to emit light while the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) is hidden behind.

Further, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) in the second state (second sliding state) move forward and backward relative to each other. They are located so that they do not overlap.

With such a configuration, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) that emits light can be easily seen in the second state (second sliding state).

Further, the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) is slidably attached to the first movable body (first decorative member C2021).

With such a configuration, the first state (first sliding state) and the second state (second sliding state) can be easily changed.

Further, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) are in the second state (first sliding state). The movable body (second decorative member C2031) moves relative to the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) to enter the second state (second sliding state). It is something.

With such a configuration, the second state (second sliding state) can be easily changed by operating the first movable body (first decorative member C2021).

Further, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) are The second movable body (second decorative member C2031) is operable in a third state (standby state) in which it is invisible from the front.

With this configuration, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) or the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) can be made visible as necessary, and the interest of the gaming machine can be effectively enhanced. can be improved.

Further, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) in the third state (standby state) operate integrally with each other. This results in the second state (second sliding state).

With such a configuration, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) can be integrally moved to the second state (second sliding state). ) and the third state (standby state) can be easily changed.

Further, the first light emitting means (first illumination board C2022) operates integrally with the first movable body (first decorative member C2021).

With this configuration, the first light emitting means (first illumination board C2022) is operated integrally with the first movable body (first decorative member C2021), thereby creating a mechanism for operating these members. The configuration can be simplified by consolidating the following information.

In addition, a drive source (motor C2041) that generates power,
a transmission means (arm C2042) that transmits power from the drive source (motor C2041) to the second movable body (second decorative member C2031);
Equipped with
The first movable body (first decorative member C2021) receives power from the drive source (motor C2041) via the second movable body (second decorative member C2031). .

With this configuration, the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) can also be operated using the power from the drive source (motor C2041) to the second movable body (second decorative member C2031). can. Thereby, the configuration can be simplified.

Further, the device includes a second light emitting means (second illumination board C2033) that causes the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) in the second state (second sliding state) to emit light. It is.

With such a configuration, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the gaming machine.

Further, the second light emitting means (second illumination board C2033) is provided rearward than the first light emitting means (first illumination board C2022), and the second movable body (second illumination board C2033) It operates integrally with the decorative member C2031) of No. 2.

With such a configuration, the distance between the first movable body (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) in the front-rear direction can be brought closer, and the first movable body It is possible to improve the sense of unity of the (first decorative member C2021) and the second movable body (second decorative member C2031) as a whole.

As stated in parentheses above,
The first decorative member C2021 is one form of the first movable part.
Further, the second decorative member C2031 is one form of a second movable body.
Further, the first illumination board C2022 is one form of first light emitting means.
Further, the motor C2041 is one form of a drive source.
Further, arm C2042 is one form of transmission means.
Further, the second illumination board C2033 is one form of second light emitting means.

Although the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various changes can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the first sliding state, the configuration in which the second decorative member C2031 is made to emit light with the light from the first illumination board C2022 is not limited to the configuration in this embodiment. That is, in this embodiment, the second decorative member C2031 is made to emit light with the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 overlapped in the front and back, but the structure is not limited to this, and various modifications may be made. It is possible to emit light depending on the configuration. For example, light may be irradiated toward a second decorative member C2031 placed at a position shifted vertically or horizontally with respect to the first decorative member C2021, so that the second decorative member C2031 does not overlap with the first decorative member C2021. The second decorative member C2031 may be made to emit light.

Further, in the second sliding state, the configuration in which the first decorative member C2021 is made to emit light with the light from the first illumination board C2022 is not limited to the configuration in this embodiment. That is, in the present embodiment, the first decorative member C2021 is caused to emit light while the second decorative member C2031 is shifted below the first decorative member C2021, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and various configurations may be used. It is possible to emit light. For example, the second decorative member C2031 may be shifted upward or horizontally relative to the first decorative member C2021, or the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 may be moved back and forth from the first sliding state. The first decorative member C2021 may be made to emit light while its position is changed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second accessory object C2030 was able to slide with respect to the first accessory object C2020, but it is not limited to such a configuration. One accessory C2020 may be configured to be rotatable.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the transition to the second sliding state is made by moving the second accessory C2030 from the first sliding state, but the configuration for transitioning to the second sliding state is as follows. It is not limited to the configuration. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the first accessory C2020 is moved to transition to the second sliding state. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the first accessory object C2020 and the second accessory object C2030 are respectively moved to transition to the second sliding state.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first decorative member C2021 and the second decorative member C2031 can be changed to a standby state where the player cannot see them; however, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, It may also be configured to be unchangeable (always visible to the player).

In addition, in this embodiment, the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030 are moved integrally to transition from the standby state to the first slide state, but the transition from the standby state to the first slide state The configuration for transitioning to is not limited to this type of configuration. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the first accessory object C2020 and the second accessory object C2030 are moved separately to transition from the standby state to the first sliding state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first decorative member C2021 and the first illumination board C2022 move integrally, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, the first decorative member C2021 moves as a unit. On the other hand, the first illumination board C2022 may be configured to be relatively movable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the power of the motor C2041 is transmitted to the first accessory C2020 via the second accessory C2030, but the first accessory C2020 and the second accessory C2030 are The configuration for operation is not limited to this type of configuration. For example, the second accessory C2030 and the first accessory C2020 may be operated by power from different drive sources.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second illumination board C2033 is arranged at the rear of the first illumination board C2022, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, the second illumination board C2033 It may be arranged in front of the substrate C2022.

Further, in this embodiment, the first accessory C2020 is urged upward by the spring C2015, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, the first accessory C2020 can be urged downward. Good too. With this configuration, it is possible to assist the downward sliding movement of the first accessory C2020.

C1100 Movable performance accessory C1120 Harpoon accessory C1121 Accessory decoration C1121c First decorative lens C1121d Second decorative lens C1123 Accessory illumination board C1123a Light emitting part C1130 Support body C1200 Drive mechanism C1210 Left side lifting mechanism C1220 Right side lifting mechanism C1230 slope guide Part C1300 Holding mechanism C1331 Claw part C1332 Solenoid C1400 Shock absorption means C1410 Receiving part C1430 Urging means

Claims (1)

a movable body movable between a first position and a second position;
a holding part that restricts movement of the movable body at the second position;
Absorbs the impact received by the holding part when the movable body moves from the first position to the second position, and protects the movable body when it moves from the second position to the first position. biasing means capable of biasing in the direction of the first position;
an operating section that allows the movable body to move between the first position and the second position;
Equipped with
The movable body is
It has a surface section provided facing the player,
capable of performing the first action and the second action,
The distance between the holding portion and the surface portion is greater than the distance between the surface portion and the operating portion,
The second operation is a movement in which the posture of the movable body is continuously changed;
A gaming machine characterized in that the biasing means is capable of imparting an influence to the first action.

Images